Operators Manual
5522A
Multi-Product Calibrator
Operators Manual
January 2011
© 2011 Fluke Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
All product names are trademarks of their respective companies.
LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under
normal use and service. The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment.
Parts, product repairs, and services are warranted for 90 days. This warranty extends only to the
original buyer or end-user customer of a Fluke authorized reseller, and does not apply to fuses,
disposable batteries, or to any product which, in Fluke's opinion, has been misused, altered,
neglected, contaminated, or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or
handling. Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional
specifications for 90 days and that it has been properly recorded on non-defective media. Fluke
does not warrant that software will be error free or operate without interruption.
Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end-user
customers only but have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke.
Warranty support is available only if product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet
or Buyer has paid the applicable international price. Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buyer for
importation costs of repair/replacement parts when product purchased in one country is submitted
for repair in another country.
Fluke's warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke's option, to refund of the purchase price, free of
charge repair, or replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized
service center within the warranty period.
To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center to obtain return
authorization information, then send the product to that service center, with a description of the
difficulty, postage and insurance prepaid (FOB Destination). Fluke assumes no risk for damage in
transit. Following warranty repair, the product will be returned to Buyer, transportation prepaid
(FOB Destination). If Fluke determines that failure was caused by neglect, misuse, contamination,
alteration, accident, or abnormal condition of operation or handling, including overvoltage failures
caused by use outside the product’s specified rating, or normal wear and tear of mechanical
components, Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before
commencing the work. Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation
prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the repair and return transportation charges (FOB
Shipping Point).
THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, ARISING FROM
ANY CAUSE OR THEORY.
Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the limitations and exclusions of
this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or
unenforceable by a court or other decision-maker of competent jurisdiction, such holding will not
affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.
Fluke Corporation
P.O. Box 9090
Everett, WA 98206-9090
U.S.A.
11/99
Fluke Europe B.V.
P.O. Box 1186
5602 BD Eindhoven
The Netherlands
OPERATOR SAFETY
SUMMARY
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
is used in the operation of this equipment
LETHAL VOLTAGE
may be present on the terminals, observe all safety precautions!
To avoid electrical shock hazard, the operator should not electrically contact
the output HI or sense HI terminals or circuits connected to these terminals.
During operation, lethal voltages of up to 1020 V ac or dc may be present on
these terminals.
Whenever the nature of the operation permits, keep one hand away from
equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through vital organs of
the body.
Table of Contents
Chapter
1
Title
Page
Introduction and Specifications......................................................... 1-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
Safety Information .............................................................................................
Overload Protection ...........................................................................................
Operation Overview...........................................................................................
Local Operation .............................................................................................
Remote Operation (RS-232)..........................................................................
Remote Operation (IEEE-488) ......................................................................
Where to Go from Here .....................................................................................
Instruction Manuals ...........................................................................................
5522A Getting Started Manual......................................................................
5522A Operators Manual ..............................................................................
General Specifications .......................................................................................
Detailed Specifications ......................................................................................
DC Voltage....................................................................................................
DC Current ....................................................................................................
Resistance ......................................................................................................
AC Voltage (Sine Wave)...............................................................................
AC Current (Sine Wave) ...............................................................................
Capacitance....................................................................................................
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple).....................................................
Temperature Calibration (RTD) ....................................................................
DC Power Specification Summary................................................................
AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1 .........................
Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications................................................
Phase..............................................................................................................
Additional Specifications...................................................................................
Frequency ......................................................................................................
Harmonics (2nd to 50th) ..................................................................................
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth ............................................
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave).......................................................................
AC Voltage, DC Offset .................................................................................
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics....................................................
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics .................................................
i
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-11
1-12
1-14
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-24
1-24
1-24
5522A
Operators Manual
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave) ....................................................................... 1-24
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics .................................................... 1-25
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics.................................................. 1-25
2
Preparing for Operations .................................................................... 2-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
Unpack and Inspect............................................................................................
How to Replace the Mains Power Fuse .............................................................
How to Select Line Voltage...............................................................................
How to Connect to Line Power..........................................................................
How to Select Line Frequency...........................................................................
How to Contact Fluke ........................................................................................
Placement...........................................................................................................
Cooling Considerations......................................................................................
3
Features ............................................................................................... 3-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
Front-Panel Features ..........................................................................................
Rear-Panel Features ...........................................................................................
Softkey Menu Trees...........................................................................................
4
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-7
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
Front Panel Operation......................................................................... 4-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
How to Turn on the Calibrator...........................................................................
Warming up the Calibrator ................................................................................
How to Use the Softkeys ...................................................................................
How to Use the Setup Menu ..............................................................................
How to Use the Instrument Setup Menu .......................................................
Utility Functions Menu..................................................................................
How to Use the NV Memory Menu ..............................................................
How to Reset the Calibrator...............................................................................
How to Zero the Calibrator ................................................................................
Operate and Standby Modes ..............................................................................
How to Connect the Calibrator to a UUT ..........................................................
Recommended Cable and Connector Types..................................................
When to Use EARTH and EXGRD ..............................................................
Earth ..........................................................................................................
External Guard ..........................................................................................
Four-Wire versus Two-Wire Connections ....................................................
Four-Wire Connection ..............................................................................
Two-Wire Compensation ..........................................................................
Compensation Off .....................................................................................
Cable Connections Instructions .....................................................................
RMS Versus p-p Amplitude...............................................................................
Auto Range Versus Locked Range ....................................................................
How to Set Output .............................................................................................
How to Set DC Voltage Output.....................................................................
How to Set AC Voltage Output.....................................................................
How to Set DC Current Output .....................................................................
How to Set AC Current Output .....................................................................
How to Set DC Power Output .......................................................................
How to Set AC Power Output .......................................................................
How to Set a Dual DC Voltage Output .........................................................
How to Set a Dual AC Voltage Output .........................................................
ii
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-26
4-29
4-30
Contents (continued)
How to Set Resistance Output .......................................................................
How to Set Capacitance Output.....................................................................
How to Set Temperature Simulation (Thermocouple) ..................................
How to Set Temperature Simulation (RTD)..................................................
How to Measure Thermocouple Temperatures .............................................
Waveform Types................................................................................................
Sine Wave......................................................................................................
Triangle Waves..............................................................................................
Square Wave..................................................................................................
Truncated Sine Wave ....................................................................................
How to Set Harmonics .......................................................................................
How to Adjust the Phase....................................................................................
How to Enter a Phase Angle..........................................................................
How to Enter a Power Factor ........................................................................
How to Enter a DC Offset..................................................................................
Editing and Error Output Settings......................................................................
How to Edit the Output Setting .....................................................................
How to Display the UUT Error .....................................................................
How to Use Multiply and Divide ..................................................................
How to Set Output Limits ..................................................................................
How to Set Voltage and Current Limits ........................................................
How to Measure Pressure ..................................................................................
How to Synchronize the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN/OUT .............................
How to Use an External 10 MHz Clock ........................................................
How to Source AC Current and Parallel-Connected 5522As........................
Three-Phase Power Calibration .....................................................................
Sample Applications ..........................................................................................
How Calibrate an 80 Series Digital Multimeter ............................................
Cables........................................................................................................
EARTH Connection ..................................................................................
How to Test the Meter...............................................................................
How to Calibrate the Meter.......................................................................
How to Test a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer...................................
How to Test Watts, VA, VAR Performance .............................................
How to Test Harmonics Volts Performance .............................................
How to Test Harmonics Amps Performance.............................................
How to Calibrate a Fluke 51 Thermometer ...................................................
How to Test the Thermometer ..................................................................
How to Calibrate the Thermometer...........................................................
5
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-38
4-39
4-41
4-41
4-42
4-42
4-43
4-43
4-44
4-46
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-48
4-48
4-50
4-50
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-52
4-53
4-54
4-55
4-55
4-56
4-56
4-56
4-60
4-60
4-60
4-62
4-63
4-64
4-64
4-65
Remote Operations ............................................................................. 5-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
How to Set up the IEEE-488 Port for Remote Control......................................
IEEE-488 Port Setup Procedure ....................................................................
How to Test the IEEE-488 Port.....................................................................
How to Set up the RS-232 Host Port for Remote Control .................................
RS-232 Host Port Setup Procedure ...............................................................
How to Test the RS-232 Host Port ................................................................
How to Test RS-232 Host Port Operation with a Terminal ......................
How to Test RS-232 Host Port Operation with Visual Basic ...................
How to Set up the RS-232 UUT Port for Remote Control ................................
RS-232 UUT Port Setup Procedure...............................................................
How to Test the RS-232 UUT Port via RS-232 Host Port ............................
How to Test RS-232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal........................
How to Test RS-232 UUT Port Operation with Visual Basic...................
iii
5-3
5-5
5-7
5-7
5-9
5-9
5-11
5-12
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Test the RS-232 UUT Port via IEEE-488 Port .................................
How to Change between Remote and Local Operation .....................................
Local State .....................................................................................................
Local with Lockout State...............................................................................
Remote State..................................................................................................
Remote with Lockout State ...........................................................................
RS-232 Interface Overview ...............................................................................
IEEE-488 Interface Overview............................................................................
How to Use Commands .....................................................................................
Types of Commands......................................................................................
Device-Dependent Commands..................................................................
Common Commands.................................................................................
Query Commands......................................................................................
Interface Messages (IEEE-488) ................................................................
Compound Commands ..................................................................................
Coupled Commands ..................................................................................
Overlapped Commands .............................................................................
Sequential Commands...............................................................................
Commands that Require the Calibration Switch .......................................
Commands for RS-232 Only.....................................................................
Commands for IEEE-488 Only .................................................................
Command Syntax ..........................................................................................
Parameter Syntax Rules ............................................................................
Extra Space or Tab Characters ..................................................................
Terminators ...............................................................................................
Incoming Character Processing.................................................................
Response Message Syntax ........................................................................
Checking 5522A Status .....................................................................................
Serial Poll Status Byte (STB) ........................................................................
Service Request (SRQ) Line .....................................................................
Service Request Enable Register (SRE)....................................................
Programming the STB and SRE................................................................
Event Status Register (ESR)..........................................................................
Event Status Enable (ESE) Register..........................................................
Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE......................................................
Programming the ESR and ESE................................................................
Instrument Status Register (ISR)...................................................................
Instrument Status Change Registers..........................................................
Instrument Status Change Enable Registers..............................................
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE .........................................
Programming the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE ...................................................
Output Queue.................................................................................................
Error Queue ...................................................................................................
Remote Program Examples................................................................................
Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator ..................................................
Writing an SRQ and Error Handler ...............................................................
Verifying a Meter in the IEEE-488 Bus ........................................................
Verifying a Meter on the RS-232 UUT Serial Port .......................................
Using *OPC?, *OPC, and *WAI...................................................................
Taking a Thermocouple Measurement ..........................................................
Taking a Pressure Measurement....................................................................
Using the RS-232 UUT Port to Control an Instrument .................................
Input Buffer Operation ..................................................................................
6
5-18
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-32
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-37
5-37
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-42
5-42
5-42
5-43
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-46
Remote Commands............................................................................. 6-1
iv
Contents (continued)
Introduction........................................................................................................ 6-3
Command Summary by Function ...................................................................... 6-3
Commands ......................................................................................................... 6-10
7
Maintenance......................................................................................... 7-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
How to Replace the Line Fuse ...........................................................................
How to Replace the Current Fuses.....................................................................
How to Clean the Air Filter ...............................................................................
General Cleaning ...............................................................................................
Performance Tests..............................................................................................
8
Accessories ......................................................................................... 8-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
Rack Mount Kit .................................................................................................
IEEE-488 Interface Cable ..................................................................................
RS-232 Null-Modem Cables..............................................................................
5520A-525A/LEADS ........................................................................................
9
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-4
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option............................................ 9-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications ....................................
General Specifications .......................................................................................
Voltage Function Specifications....................................................................
Edge Specifications .......................................................................................
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications ................................................................
Time Marker Specifications ..........................................................................
Wave Generator Specifications .....................................................................
Pulse Generator Specifications......................................................................
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function).............................................
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function) ................................
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function) .............................................
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)...................
Trigger Signal Specifications ........................................................................
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications.........................
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ......................
Overload Measurement Specifications ..........................................................
Oscilloscope Connections..................................................................................
How to Start the SC600 Option .........................................................................
The Output Signal..........................................................................................
How to Adjust the Output Signal ..................................................................
How to Key in a Value..............................................................................
How to Adjust Values with the Rotary Knob ...........................................
How to Use X and D .......................................................................
How to Reset the Oscilloscope Option..........................................................
How to Calibrat the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope.............................
The Volt Function..........................................................................................
The V/DIV Menu ..........................................................................................
Shortcuts to Set the Voltage Amplitude ........................................................
Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscillosope....................................
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope ........
The Edge Function ........................................................................................
Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope ..........................
Pulse Response Calibration with a Tunnel Diode Pulser ..............................
v
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-4
9-5
9-5
9-5
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-11
9-11
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-13
9-14
5522A
Operators Manual
The Leveled Sine Wave Function .................................................................
Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage ..........................................
The MORE OPTIONS Menu ........................................................................
How to Sweep Through a Frequency Range .................................................
Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope..................
How to Calibrate the Time Base of an Oscilloscope .........................................
The Time Marker Function ...........................................................................
Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope .....................
How to Test the Trigger SC600 Option .............................................................
How to Test Video Triggers ..............................................................................
How to Verify Pulse Capture.............................................................................
How to Measure Input Resistance and Capacitance ..........................................
Input Impedance Measurement .....................................................................
Input Capacitance Measurement ...................................................................
How to Test Overload Protection ......................................................................
Remote Commands and Queries........................................................................
General Commands .......................................................................................
Edge Function Commands ............................................................................
Marker Function Commands .........................................................................
Video Function Commands ...........................................................................
Overload Function Commands......................................................................
Impedance/Capacitance Function Commands...............................................
Verification Tables ............................................................................................
DC Voltage Verification................................................................................
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification..............................................................
AC Voltage Frequency Verification..............................................................
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 1 MΩ Output Impedance ............
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 50 Ω Output Impedance..............
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Amplitude ................................................
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Frequency.................................................
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Harmonics ................................................
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness ....................................................
Edge Verification: Amplitude .......................................................................
Edge Verification: Frequency........................................................................
Edge Verification: Duty Cycle ......................................................................
Edge Verification: Rise Time ........................................................................
Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification..................................................................
Marker Generator Verification ......................................................................
Pulse Generator Verification: Period.............................................................
Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width ...................................................
Input Impedance Verification: Resistance.....................................................
Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance ..................................................
10
9-15
9-16
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-24
9-24
9-25
9-26
9-26
9-30
9-30
9-31
9-31
9-32
9-33
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-35
9-37
9-38
9-39
9-39
9-40
9-48
9-48
9-49
9-49
9-49
9-50
9-50
9-50
9-51
9-51
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option.......................................... 10-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
SC1100 Option Specifications...........................................................................
General Specifications .......................................................................................
Volt Specifications ........................................................................................
Edge Specifications .......................................................................................
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications ................................................................
Time Marker Specifications ..........................................................................
Wave Generator Specifications .....................................................................
Pulse Generator Specifications......................................................................
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function).............................................
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function) ................................
vi
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-7
10-7
10-7
Contents (continued)
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function) .............................................
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)...................
TV Trigger Signal Specifications ..................................................................
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications.........................
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications ......................
Overload Measurement Specifications ..........................................................
Oscilloscope Connections..................................................................................
How to Start the SC1100 Option .......................................................................
The Output Signal..........................................................................................
How to Adjust the Output Signal ..................................................................
How to Key in a Value..............................................................................
How to Adjust Values with the Rotary Knob ...........................................
How to Use X and D .......................................................................
How to Reset the SC1100 Option..................................................................
How to Calibrate the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope ...........................
The VOLT Function ......................................................................................
The V/DIV Menu ..........................................................................................
Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration Procedure ............................................
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope ........
The Edge Function ........................................................................................
Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure ....................................
Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser ............................
The Leveled Sine Wave Function .................................................................
Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage ..........................................
The MORE OPTIONS Menu ........................................................................
How to Sweep Through a Frequency Range .................................................
Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure ............................
How to Calibrate the Time Base of an Oscilloscope .........................................
The Time Marker Function ...........................................................................
Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope .....................
How to Test the Trigger functions of an oscilloscope .......................................
How to Test Video Triggers ..............................................................................
How to Verify Pulse Capture.............................................................................
How to Measure Input Resistance and Capacitance ..........................................
Input Impedance Measurement .....................................................................
Input Capacitance Measurement ...................................................................
How to Test Overload Protection ......................................................................
Remote Commands and Queries........................................................................
General Commands .......................................................................................
Edge Function Commands ............................................................................
Marker Function Commands .........................................................................
Video Function Commands ...........................................................................
Overload Function Commands......................................................................
Impedance/Capacitance Function Commands...............................................
Verification Tables ............................................................................................
DC Voltage Verification................................................................................
AC Voltage Verification................................................................................
AC Voltage Frequency Verification..............................................................
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 1 MΩ Output Impedance ............
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 50 Ω Output Impedance..............
Edge Verification: Amplitude .......................................................................
Edge Verification: Frequency........................................................................
Edge Verification: Duty Cycle ......................................................................
Edge Verification: Rise Time ........................................................................
Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification..................................................................
vii
10-7
10-7
10-7
10-7
10-8
10-8
10-8
10-8
10-9
10-9
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-11
10-11
10-11
10-12
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-22
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-26
10-27
10-27
10-28
10-28
10-32
10-32
10-33
10-33
10-34
10-35
10-35
10-37
10-38
10-39
10-40
10-41
10-42
10-42
10-42
10-43
5522A
Operators Manual
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Amplitude ..................................................
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Frequency ..................................................
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Harmonics..................................................
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness ......................................................
Marker Generator Verification ......................................................................
Pulse Generator Verification: Period.............................................................
Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width ...................................................
Input Impedance Verification: Resistance.....................................................
Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance ..................................................
11
10-43
10-44
10-44
10-46
10-53
10-54
10-54
10-55
10-55
PQ Option............................................................................................. 11-1
Introduction........................................................................................................
5522A PQ Specifications...................................................................................
5522A PQ Option Specifications.......................................................................
Composite Harmonic Function Specifications ..............................................
AC Voltage Specifications ............................................................................
AC Voltage Auxiliary Specifications (Dual Output Mode Only) .................
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP OFF.....................................................
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP OFF (continued) .................................
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP ON* ....................................................
Flicker Simulation Mode...............................................................................
Sags & Swells Simulation Mode ...................................................................
Phase Specifications, Sinewave Outputs .......................................................
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts) ............................................................
How to Enter the PQ Modes..........................................................................
How to Create Composite Harmonic Waveforms .........................................
The Wave Selection Menus...........................................................................
RECALL WAVE...........................................................................................
SAVE WAVE................................................................................................
NEW WAVE .................................................................................................
EDIT WAVE .................................................................................................
How to Create New Waves ...........................................................................
Harmonic Number .........................................................................................
Harmonic Amplitude .....................................................................................
Phase..............................................................................................................
How to Edit Waves........................................................................................
How to Save Waves.......................................................................................
How to Recall Saved Waves .........................................................................
Preinstalled Waves.............................................................................................
IEC Waves.....................................................................................................
NRC Waves ...................................................................................................
How to Recall Preinstalled IEC Waves .........................................................
How to Recall Preinstalled NRC Waves .......................................................
Composite Harmonics Function (Amps) ...........................................................
How to Set LCOMP ......................................................................................
Output AUX ..................................................................................................
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts and Amps)...........................................
How to Set LCOMP ......................................................................................
Output AUX ..................................................................................................
Φ & REF Menus...........................................................................................
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts and Volts)............................................
Φ & REF Menus............................................................................................
Delta (Δ)Amplitude, Flicker Function (Volts)...................................................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Volts)...............................................................
How to Select the Flicker Function ...............................................................
viii
11-3
11-3
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-5
11-6
11-6
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-10
11-10
11-10
11-11
11-11
11-12
11-12
11-12
11-13
11-13
11-13
11-13
11-14
11-14
11-15
11-15
11-15
11-16
11-16
11-17
11-17
11-17
11-17
Contents (continued)
How to Set the Repeat Frequency .................................................................
How to Set the Modulation Pattern ...............................................................
How to Set the Flicker Amplitude.................................................................
PST Values......................................................................................................
How to Set Phase and Reference in the Δ AMPL Function ..........................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Flicker Function (Current) ..............................................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Amps)...............................................................
More Information ..........................................................................................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Volts) ........................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Volts)................................................................
How to Set the Ramp-up Period ....................................................................
How to Set the Sag & Swell Width ...............................................................
How to Set the Sag/Swell Amplitude ............................................................
How to Set Triggers.......................................................................................
Example.........................................................................................................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Current).....................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (AMPS) .............................................................
How to Set Triggers.......................................................................................
How to Set the Ramp-up Period ....................................................................
How to Set the Sag/Swell Width ...................................................................
How to Set the Sag/Swell Amplitude ............................................................
Delta (Δ)Amplitude Mode (Volts and Amps) ...............................................
Example.........................................................................................................
Remote Commands .......................................................................................
Commands.....................................................................................................
Example Strings.............................................................................................
Performance Tests..............................................................................................
Verification Table ..............................................................................................
11-17
11-17
11-17
11-18
11-18
11-18
11-18
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-22
11-22
11-27
11-28
11-28
Appendices
A
B
C
D
Glossary.......................................................................................................
ASCII and IEEE-488 Bus Codes.................................................................
RS-232/IEEE-488 Cables and Connectors..................................................
Error Messages ............................................................................................
ix
A-1
B-1
C-1
D-1
5522A
Operators Manual
x
List of Tables
Table
1-1.
2-1.
2-2.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
7-1.
Title
Symbols..................................................................................................................
Standard Equipment ...............................................................................................
Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke ......................................................
Front-Panel Features ..............................................................................................
Rear-Panel Features ...............................................................................................
Factory Defaults for SETUP Menus Power-Up Defaults ......................................
UUT Connections...................................................................................................
Keys That Exit Error Mode....................................................................................
Watts Performance, Text Screen ............................................................................
Harmonics Performance for Volts, Harmonics Screen ..........................................
Harmonics Performance for Amps, Harmonics Screen .........................................
Thermocouple Performance ...................................................................................
Operating State Transitions....................................................................................
RS-232 Interface Wiring ........................................................................................
RS-232 Emulation of IEEE-488 Messages ............................................................
IEEE-488 Interface Messages (Received)..............................................................
IEEE-488 Interface Messages (Sent) .....................................................................
Commands for RS-232 Only..................................................................................
Commands for IEEE-488 Only ..............................................................................
Units Accepted in Parameters and Used in Responses ..........................................
Terminator Characters............................................................................................
Response Data Types .............................................................................................
Status Register Summary .......................................................................................
Common Commands..............................................................................................
Error Mode Commands..........................................................................................
External Connection Commands............................................................................
Oscilloscope Commands ........................................................................................
Output Commands .................................................................................................
Pressure Measurement Commands ........................................................................
RS-232 Host Port Commands ................................................................................
RS-232 UUT Port Commands................................................................................
Setup and Utility Commands .................................................................................
Status Commands...................................................................................................
Thermocouple (TC) Measurement Commands......................................................
Replacement Line Fuses.........................................................................................
xi
Page
1-4
2-3
2-5
3-4
3-10
3-22
4-11
4-48
4-61
4-63
4-63
4-65
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-26
5-27
5-29
5-30
5-30
5-32
5-33
5-34
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-10
7-4
5522A
Operators Manual
7-2. Replacement Current Fuses....................................................................................
7-3. Verification Tests for DC Voltage (Normal) .........................................................
7-4. Verification Tests for DC Voltage (AUX) .............................................................
7-5. Verification Tests for DC Current (AUX) .............................................................
7-6. Verification Tests for Resistance ...........................................................................
7-7. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (Normal) .........................................................
7-8. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (AUX) .............................................................
7-9. Verification Tests for AC Current..........................................................................
7-10. Verification Tests for Capacitance .........................................................................
7-11. Verification Tests for Thermocouple Simulation...................................................
7-12. Verification Tests for Thermocouple Measurement ..............................................
7-13. Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy, V and V ...................................................
7-14. Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy, V and I.....................................................
7-15. Verification Tests for Frequency............................................................................
8-1. Options and Accessories ........................................................................................
9-1. SCOPE Command Parameters ...............................................................................
9-2. SC600 Option DC Voltage Verification ................................................................
9-3. SC600 Option AC Voltage Amplitude Verification ..............................................
9-4. SC600 Option AC Voltage Frequency Verification...............................................
9-5. SC600 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification
(1 M output impedance) .......................................................................................
9-6. SC600 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification
(50  output impedance)..........................................................................................
9-7. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Amplitude .................................
9-8. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Frequency .................................
9-9. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Harmonics.................................
9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness .....................................
9-11. SC600 Option Edge Verification: Amplitude ........................................................
9-12. SC600 Option Edge Verification: Frequency ........................................................
9-13. SC600 Option Edge Verification: Duty Cycle .......................................................
9-14. SC600 Option Edge Verification: Rise Time.........................................................
9-15. SC600 Option Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification...................................................
9-16. SC600 Option Marker Generator Verification.......................................................
9-17. SC600 Option Pulse Generator Verification: Period .............................................
9-18. SC600 Option Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width ....................................
9-19. SC600 Option Input Impedance Verification: Resistance .....................................
9-20. SC600 Option Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance ...................................
10-1. SCOPE Command Parameters ...............................................................................
10-2. SC1100 Option DC Voltage Verification ..............................................................
10-3. SC1100 Option DC Voltage Verification at 50 Ω .................................................
10-4. SC1100 Option AC Voltage Verification ..............................................................
10-5. SC1100 Option AC Voltage Verification at 50 ..................................................
10-6. SC1100 Option AC Voltage Frequency Verification.............................................
10-7. SC1100 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification
(1 M output impedance) ........................................................................................
10-8. SC1100 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification
(50  output impedance)..........................................................................................
10-9. SC1100 Option Edge Verification: Amplitude ......................................................
10-10. SC1100 Option Edge Verification: Frequency ......................................................
10-11. SC1100 Option Edge Verification: Duty Cycle .....................................................
10-12. SC1100 Option Edge Verification: Rise Time.......................................................
10-13. SC1100 Option Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification.................................................
10-14. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Amplitude .................................
10-15. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Frequency .................................
10-16. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Harmonics.................................
xii
7-6
7-8
7-9
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-13
7-14
7-16
7-18
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
8-3
9-26
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-35
9-37
9-38
9-39
9-39
9-40
9-48
9-48
9-49
9-49
9-49
9-50
9-50
9-50
9-51
9-51
10-28
10-35
10-36
10-37
10-38
10-38
10-39
10-40
10-41
10-42
10-42
10-42
10-43
10-43
10-44
10-44
Contents (continued)
10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness .....................................
10-18. SC1100 Option Marker Generator Verification.....................................................
10-19. SC1100 Option Pulse Generator Verification: Period ...........................................
10-21. SC1100 Option Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width ..................................
10-21. SC1100 Option Input Impedance Verification: Resistance ...................................
10-22. SC1100 Option Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance .................................
11-1. PQ Option Verification Table ................................................................................
xiii
10-46
10-53
10-54
10-54
10-55
10-55
11-28
5522A
Operators Manual
xiv
List of Figures
Figure
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
2-1.
2-2.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4-10.
4-11.
4-12.
4-13.
4-14.
4-15.
4-16.
4-17.
4-18.
4-19.
4-20.
4-21.
4-22.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
Title
5522A Multi-Product Calibrator ............................................................................
RS-232 Remote Connection...................................................................................
Allowable Duration of Current >11 A ...................................................................
How to Access the Fuse and Select Line Voltage..................................................
Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke ......................................................
Front-Panel Features ..............................................................................................
Rear-Panel Features ...............................................................................................
Setup Softkey Menu Tree.......................................................................................
SETUP Softkey Menu Displays.............................................................................
EARTH and EXGRD Internal Connections...........................................................
UUT Connection: Resistance (Four-Wire Compensation) ....................................
UUT Connection: Resistance (Two-Wire Compensation).....................................
UUT Connection: Resistance (Compensation Off)................................................
UUT Connection: Capacitance (Two-Wire Compensation) ..................................
UUT Connection: Capacitance (Compensation Off) .............................................
UUT Connection: DC Voltage/AC Voltage...........................................................
UUT Connection: DC Current/AC Current ...........................................................
UUT Connection: Temperature (RTD) ..................................................................
UUT Connection: Temperature (Thermocouple)...................................................
Sine Wave ..............................................................................................................
Triangle Wave........................................................................................................
Square Wave and Duty Cycle ................................................................................
Truncated Sine Wav ...............................................................................................
Measuring Pressure ................................................................................................
Two Calibrators Sourcing Current in Parallel........................................................
Three-Phase Power Calibration..............................................................................
Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series General Functions ............................
Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series Current Function ..............................
Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series High Amps Function........................
Cable Connections for Testing a 40 Series Watts Function ...................................
Cable Connections for Testing a 50 Series Thermometer......................................
Typical IEEE-488 Remote Control Connections ...................................................
Typical RS-232 Remote Control Connections.......................................................
Testing the IEEE-488 Port .....................................................................................
Testing the RS-232 Host Port.................................................................................
xv
Page
1-3
1-6
1-10
2-5
2-6
3-4
3-10
3-12
3-13
4-9
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-16
4-42
4-42
4-43
4-43
4-52
4-54
4-55
4-56
4-58
4-59
4-61
4-64
5-4
5-6
5-8
5-12
5522A
Operators Manual
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
9-1.
9-2.
10-1.
10-2.
Testing the RS-232 UUT Port via RS-232 Host Port.............................................
Testing the RS-232 UUT Port via IEEE-488 Port .................................................
IEEE-488 Remote Message Coding.......................................................................
Status Register Overview .......................................................................................
Serial Poll Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable (SRE) ........................
Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable (ESE)................................
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCEs and ISCR......................................................
Accessing the Fuse .................................................................................................
Current Fuse Replacement .....................................................................................
Accessing the Air Filter..........................................................................................
Oscilloscope Connection: Channel and External Trigger ......................................
Tunnel Diode Pulser Connections..........................................................................
Oscilloscope Connection: Channel and External Trigger ......................................
Tunnel Diode Pulser Connections..........................................................................
xvi
5-17
5-19
5-24
5-36
5-37
5-39
5-41
7-5
7-6
7-7
9-7
9-15
10-8
10-16
Chapter 1
Introduction and Specifications
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
Safety Information ...............................................................................................
Overload Protection .............................................................................................
Operation Overview.............................................................................................
Local Operation ...............................................................................................
Remote Operation (RS-232)............................................................................
Remote Operation (IEEE-488) ........................................................................
Where to Go from Here .......................................................................................
Instruction Manuals .............................................................................................
5522A Getting Started Manual........................................................................
5522A Operators Manual ................................................................................
General Specifications .........................................................................................
Detailed Specifications ........................................................................................
DC Voltage......................................................................................................
DC Current ......................................................................................................
Resistance ........................................................................................................
AC Voltage (Sine Wave).................................................................................
AC Current (Sine Wave) .................................................................................
Capacitance......................................................................................................
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple).......................................................
Temperature Calibration (RTD) ......................................................................
DC Power Specification Summary..................................................................
AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1 ...........................
Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications..................................................
Phase................................................................................................................
Additional Specifications.....................................................................................
Frequency ........................................................................................................
Harmonics (2nd to 50th) ....................................................................................
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth ..............................................
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave).........................................................................
AC Voltage, DC Offset ...................................................................................
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics......................................................
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics ...................................................
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave) .........................................................................
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics ......................................................
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics....................................................
Page
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-11
1-12
1-14
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-24
1-24
1-24
1-24
1-25
1-25
1-1
5522A
Operators Manual
1-2
Introduction
Warning
If the 5522A Calibrator is operated in any way not specified by
this manual or other documentation provided by Fluke, the
protection provided by the Calibrator may be impaired.
The 5522A Calibrator (hereafter “the Product”, or “the Calibrator”), shown in Figure 1-1
is a fully programmable precision source of the following:
•
DC voltage from 0 V to ±1020 V.
•
AC voltage from 1 mV to 1020 V, with output from 10 Hz to 500 kHz.
•
AC current from 29 μA to 20.5 A, with variable frequency limits.
•
DC current from 0 to ±20.5 A.
•
Resistance values from a short circuit to 1100 MΩ.
•
Capacitance values from 220 pF to 110 mF.
•
Simulated output for eight types of Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).
•
Simulated output for eleven types of thermocouples.
5522A CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
HI
STBY
OPR
EARTH
LO
7
8
9
4
5
6
EXGRD
PREV
MENU
SCOPE
m
dBm
sec
V
Hz
SETUP
RESET
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
MORE
MODES
MULT
DIV
TRIG
GUARD
20A
1
+/
20V PK MAX
TC
20V PK MAX
2
3
0
•
n
k
W
A
¡F
¡C
EDIT
FIELD
p
M
SHIFT
F
ENTER
x
POWER
Figure 1-1. 5522A Multi-Product Calibrator
gjh001.eps
Features of the Calibrator include the following:
•
Automatic meter error calculation, with user selectable reference values.
•
X and D keys that change the output value to pre-determined cardinal values
for various functions.
•
Programmable entry limits that prevent the operator from entering values that exceed
preset output limits.
•
Simultaneous output of voltage and current, up to an equivalent of 20.9 kW.
•
Pressure measurement when used with Fluke 700 Series pressure modules.
1-3
5522A
Operators Manual
•
10 MHz reference input and output. Use this to input a high-accuracy 10 MHz
reference to transfer the frequency accuracy to the 5522A, or to synchronize one or
more additional Calibrators to a master 5522A.
•
Simultaneous output of two voltages.
•
Extended bandwidth mode outputs multiple waveforms down to 0.01 Hz, and sine
waves to 2 MHz.
•
Variable phase signal output.
•
Standard IEEE-488 (GPIB) interface, complying with ANSI/IEEE Standards
488.1-1987 and 488.2-1987.
•
EIA Standard RS-232 serial data interface for printing, displaying, or transferring
internally stored calibration constants, and for remote control of the 5522A.
•
Pass-through RS-232 serial data interface for communicating with the Unit Under
Test (UUT).
Safety Information
This Calibrator complies with:
•
•
•
•
ANSI/ISA-61010-1 (82.02.01)
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1-04
ANSI/UL 61010-1:2004
EN 61010-1:2001
In this manual, a Warning identifies conditions and actions that pose hazards to the user.
A Caution identifies conditions and actions that may damage the Calibrator or the
equipment under test.
Symbols used in this manual and on the Product are explained in Table 1.
Table 1-1. Symbols
Symbol
Description
Symbol
CAT I
IEC Measurement Category I – CAT I
is for measurements not directly
connected to mains. Maximum
transient Overvoltage is as specified
by terminal markings.
Conforms to European Union
directives

Earth ground

Conforms to relevant North American
Safety Standards.


Risk of Danger. Important information.
See manual.

Description


Do not dispose of this product as unsorted
municipal waste. Go to Fluke’s website for
recycling information.
Hazardous voltage
Conforms to relevant Australian EMC
requirements
 Warning
To prevent personal injury:
•
Use the Product only as specified, or the protection
supplied by the Product can be compromised.
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury:
1-4
Introduction and Specifications
Overload Protection
•
Read all safety Information before you use the Product.
•
Do not use the Product if it operates incorrectly.
•
Replace the mains power cord if the insulation is damaged
or if the insulation shows signs of wear.
•
Do not touch voltages > 30 V ac rms, 42 V ac peak, or 60 V
dc.
•
Do not use the Product around explosive gas, vapor, or in
damp or wet environments.
•
Make sure the ground conductor in the mains power cord is
connected to a protective earth ground. Disruption of the
protective earth could put voltage on the chassis that could
cause death.
•
Use only the mains power cord and connector approved for
the voltage and plug configuration in your country and rated
for the Product.
•
Use only cables with correct voltage ratings.
1
Overload Protection
The Calibrator supplies reverse-power protection, fast output disconnection, and/or fuse
protection on the output terminals for all functions.
Reverse-power protection prevents damage to the calibrator from occasional, accidental,
normal-mode, and common-mode overloads to a maximum of ±300 V peak. It is not
intended as protection against frequent (systematic and repeated) abuse. Such abuse will
cause the Calibrator to fail.
For volts, ohms, capacitance, and thermocouple functions, there is fast output
disconnection protection. This protection senses applied voltages higher than 20 volts on
the output terminals. It quickly disconnects the internal circuits from the output terminals
and resets the calibrator when such overloads occur.
For current and aux voltage functions, user replaceable fuses supply protection from
overloads applied to the Current/Aux Voltage output terminals. The fuses are accessed by
an access door on the bottom of the calibrator. You must use replacement fuses of the
same capacity and type specified in this manual, or the protection supplied by the
Calibrator will be compromised.
Operation Overview
The Calibrator may be operated at the front panel in the local mode, or remotely using
RS-232 or IEEE-488 ports. For remote operations, several software options are available
to integrate 5522A operation into a wide variety of calibration requirements.
Local Operation
Typical local operations include front panel connections to the Unit Under Test (UUT),
and then manual keystroke entries at the front panel to place the Calibrator in the desired
output mode. The front panel layout facilitates hand movements from left to right, and
multiply and divide keys make it easy to step up or down at the press of a single key. You
can also review Calibrator specifications at the push of two buttons. The backlit liquid
crystal display is easy to read from many different viewing angles and lighting
conditions, and the large, easy-to-read keys are color-coded and provide tactile feedback.
1-5
5522A
Operators Manual
Remote Operation (RS-232)
There are two rear-panel serial data RS-232 ports: SERIAL 1 FROM HOST, and
SERIAL 2 TO UUT (see Figure 1-2). Each port is dedicated to serial data
communications for operating and controlling the 5522A during calibration procedures.
For complete information on remote operations, see Chapter 5.
The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial data port connects a host terminal or personal
computer to the Calibrator. You have several choices for sending commands to the
Calibrator: you can enter commands from a terminal (or a PC running a terminal
program), you can write your own programs using BASIC, or you can run optional
Windows-based software such as 5500/CAL or MET/CAL. The 5500/CAL Software
includes more than 200 example procedures covering a wide range of test tools the
5522A can calibrate. (See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the RS-232 commands.)
The SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial data port connects a UUT to a PC or terminal via the
5522A (see Figure 1-2). This “pass-through” configuration eliminates the requirement for
two COM ports at the PC or terminal. A set of four commands control the operation of
the SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port. See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the UUT_*
commands. The SERIAL 2 TO UUT port is also used to connect to the Fluke 700 Series
Pressure Modules.
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
COM port
5522A CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
STBY
HI
OPR
7
LO
EARTH
8
EXGRD
9
PREV
MENU
SCOPE
m
dBm
sec
V
Hz
SETUP
RESET
EDIT
FIELD
TRIG
GUARD
20A
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
•
+/
20V PK MAX
TC
n
k
W
A
¡F
¡C
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
MORE
MODES
MULT
DIV
p
M
SHIFT
20V PK MAX
F
ENTER
x
POWER
5522A
RS-232 Remote Operation using the
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
PC or Terminal
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port
SERIAL 2
TO UUT port
COM port
5522A CALIBRATOR
5522A
CALIBRATOR
NORMAL
V, , ,RTD
AUX
A, -SENSE, AUX V
SCOPE
OUT
STBY
HI
OPR
7
LO
EARTH
8
EXGRD
9
PREV
MENU
SCOPE
m
dBm
sec
V
Hz
SETUP
RESET
TRIG
GUARD
20A
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
•
+/
20V PK MAX
TC
20V PK MAX
n
k
W
A
¡F
¡C
NEW
REF
CE
MEAS
TC
MORE
MODES
MULT
DIV
EDIT
FIELD
p
M
SHIFT
F
ENTER
x
POWER
PC or Terminal
5522A
RS-232 Remote Operation using the
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and
SERIAL 2 TO UUT ports
Figure 1-2. RS-232 Remote Connection
Unit Under Test
gjh002.eps
Remote Operation (IEEE-488)
The rear panel IEEE-488 port is a fully programmable parallel interface bus meeting
standard IEEE-488.1 and supplemental standard IEEE-488.2. Under the remote control of
an instrument controller, the Calibrator operates exclusively as a “talker/listener.” You
1-6
Introduction and Specifications
Where to Go from Here
1
can write your own programs using the IEEE-488 command set or run the optional
Windows-based MET/CAL software. (See Chapter 6 for a discussion of the commands
available for IEEE-488 operation.)
Where to Go from Here
To locate specific information concerning the installation and operation of the 5522A
calibrator, refer to the following list:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unpacking and setup: Chapter 2, “Preparing for Operation”
Installation and rack mounting: Chapter 2, “Preparing for Operation,” and the rack
mount kit instruction sheet
AC line power and interface cabling: Chapter 2, “Preparing for Operation”
Controls, indicators, and displays: Chapter 3, “Features”
Front panel operation: Chapter 4, “Front Panel Operation”
Cabling to a UUT (Unit Under Test): Chapter 4, “Front Panel Operation”
Remote operation (IEEE-488 or serial): Chapter 5, “Remote Operation”
Calibrating an Oscilloscope: Chapter 8, “Oscilloscope Calibration Options”
Accessories to the 5522A Calibrator: Chapter 9, “Accessories”
Performance Specifications: Chapter 1, “Introduction and Specifications”
Instruction Manuals
The 5522A Manual Set provides complete information for operators. The set includes:
•
5522A Operators Manual on included CD-ROM (PN 3795084)
•
5522A Getting Started Manual (PN 3795091)
One of each manual listed above is shipped with the instrument. Order additional copies
of the manuals separately using the part number provided. For ordering instructions, refer
to the Fluke Catalog, or ask a Fluke sales representative (see “Service Information” in
Chapter 2).
5522A Getting Started Manual
This 5522A Getting Started Manual contains a brief introduction to the 5522A Manual
Set, instructions on how to get your calibrator prepared for operation and a complete set
of specifications.
5522A Operators Manual
This 5522A Operators Manual provides complete information for installing the 5522A
Calibrator and operating it from the front panel keys and in remote configurations. This
manual also provides a glossary of calibration, specifications, and error code information.
The Operators Manual includes the following topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installation
Operating controls and features, including front panel operation
Remote operation (IEEE-488 bus or serial port remote control)
Serial port operation (printing, displaying, or transferring data, and setting up for
serial port remote control)
Operator maintenance, including verification procedures and calibration approach for
the 5522A
Oscilloscope calibration options
Accessories
1-7
5522A
Operators Manual
General Specifications
The following tables list the 5522A specifications. All specifications are valid after allowing a warm-up period of 30
minutes, or twice the time the 5522A has been turned off. (For example, if the 5522A has been turned off for 5 minutes,
the warm-up period is 10 minutes.)
All specifications apply for the temperature and time period indicated. For temperatures outside of tcal ±5 °C (tcal is the
ambient temperature when the 5522A was calibrated), the temperature coefficient as stated in the General Specifications
must be applied.
The specifications also assume the Calibrator is zeroed every seven days or whenever the ambient temperature changes
more than 5 °C. The tightest ohms specifications are maintained with a zero cal every 12 hours within ±1 °C of use.
Also see additional specifications later in this chapter for information on extended specifications for ac voltage and
current.
Warmup Time ........................................................ Twice the time since last warmed up, to a maximum of 30 minutes.
Settling Time ......................................................... Less than 5 seconds for all functions and ranges except as noted.
Standard Interfaces .............................................. IEEE-488 (GPIB), RS-232
Temperature
Operating ............................................................ 0 °C to 50 °C
Calibration (tcal).................................................. 15 °C to 35 °C
Storage ............................................................... -20 ° to +50 °C; The DC current ranges 0 to 1.09999 A and 1.1 A to
2.99999 A are sensitive to storage temperatures above 50 °C. If the
5522A is stored above 50 °C for greater than 30 minutes, these ranges
must be re-calibrated. Otherwise, the 90 day and 1 year uncertainties
of these ranges double.
Temperature Coefficient....................................... Temperature coefficient for temperatures outside tcal +5 °C is 0.1/X/°C
of the 90-day specification (or 1-year, as applicable) per °C
Relative Humidity
Operating ............................................................ <80 % to 30 °C, <70 % to 40 °C, <40 % to 50 °C
Storage ............................................................... <95 %, non-condensing. After long periods of storage at high humidity,
a drying-out period (with power on) of at least one week may be
required.
Altitude
Operating ............................................................ 3,050 m (10,000 ft) maximum
Non-operating ..................................................... 12,200 m (40,000 ft) maximum
Safety ..................................................................... Complies with EN/IEC 61010-1:2001, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.
61010-1-04, ANSI/UL 61010-1:2004;
Output Terminal Electrical Overload Protection Provides reverse-power protection, immediate output disconnection,
and/or fuse protection on the output terminals for all functions. This
protection is for applied external voltages up to ±300 V peak.
Analog Low Isolation............................................ 20 V normal operation, 400 V peak transient
EMC ........................................................................ Complies with EN/IEC 61326-1:2006. If used in areas with
Electromagnetic fields of 1 to 3 V/m, resistance outputs have a floor
adder of 0.508 Ω. Performance not specified above 3 V/m. This
instrument may be susceptible to electro-static discharge (ESD) from
direct contact to the binding posts. Good static aware practices should
be followed when handling this and other pieces of electronic
equipment.
Line Power............................................................. Line Voltage (selectable): 100 V, 120 V, 220 V, 240 V
Line Frequency: 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Line Voltage Variation: ±10 % about line voltage setting
For optimal performance at full dual outputs (e.g. 1000 V, 20 A) choose
a ling voltage setting that is ±7.5 % from nominal.
Power Consumption ............................................. 600 VA
Dimensions (HxWxL) .............................................. 17.8 cm x 43.2 cm x 47.3 cm (7 in x 17 in x 18,6 in) Standard rack
width and rack increment, plus 1.5 cm (0.6 in) for feet on bottom of
unit.
Weight (without options) ......................................... 22 kg (49 lb)
Absolute Uncertainty Definition .......................... The 5522A specifications include stability, temperature coefficient,
linearity, line and load regulation, and the traceability of the external
standards used for calibration. You do not need to add anything to
determine the total specification of the 5522A for the temperature
range indicated.
Specification Confidence Interval ....................... 99 %
1-8
Introduction and Specifications
Detailed Specifications
1
Detailed Specifications
DC Voltage
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C
±(ppm of output +μV)
90 days
1 year
Range
0 to 329.9999 mV
Stability
24 hours, ±1 °C
±(ppm, output +μV)
15 + 1
20 + 1
3+1
0 to 3.299999 V
0 to 32.99999 V
30 V to 329.9999 V
100 V to 1020.000 V
9+2
10 + 20
15 + 150
15 + 1500
11 + 2
12 + 20
18 + 150
18 + 1500
2 + 1.5
2 + 15
2.5 + 100
3 + 300
0 to 329.9999 mV
0.33 to 3.299999 V
3.3 to 7 V
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only)
300 + 350
400 + 350
30 + 100
300 + 350
400 + 350
30 + 100
300 + 350
400 + 350
30 + 100
0 to 329.9999 mV
[1]
[2]
[3]
Resolution μV
Max Burden
0.1
1
10
100
1000
65 Ω
10 mA
10 mA
5 mA
5 mA
1
10
100
5 mA
5 mA
5 mA
[1]
[2]
TC Simulate and Measure in Linear 10 μV/°C and 1 mV/°C modes
40 + 3
50 + 3
5+2
0.1
[3]
10 Ω
Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is <5 mΩ for outputs ≥0.33 V. The AUX output has an output resistance of
<1 Ω. TC simulation has an output impedance of 10 Ω ±1 Ω.
Two channels of dc voltage output are provided.
TC simulating and measuring are not specified for operation in electromagnetic fields above 0.4 v/m.
Noise
Range
Bandwidth 0.1 Hz to 10 Hz p-p ±(ppm
output + floor)
Bandwidth 10 Hz to 10 kHz rms
0 to 329.9999 mV
0 + 1 μV
6 μV
0 to 3.299999 V
0 + 10 μV
60 μV
0 to 32.99999 V
0 + 100 μV
10 + 1 mV
10 + 5 mV
600 μV
20 mV
20 mV
30 V to 329.9999 V
100 V to 1020.000 V
Auxiliary Output (dual output mode only)
[1]
0 to 329.9999 mV
0 + 5 μV
20 μV
0.33 to 3.299999 V
0 + 20 μV
200 μV
3.3 to 7 V
0 + 100 μV
1000 μV
[1]
Two channels of dc voltage output are provided.
DC Current
Range
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C
±(ppm of output +μA)
90 days
1 year
Resolution
Max Compliance
Voltage V
0 to 329.999 μA
0 to 3.29999 mA
120 + 0.02
150 + 0.02
1 nA
10
80 + 0.05
100 + 0.05
0.01 μA
10
0 to 32.9999 mA
80 + 0.25
100 + 0.25
0.1 μA
7
0 to 329.999 mA
80 + 2.5
100 + 2.5
1 μA
7
0 to 1.09999 A
160 + 40
200 + 40
10 μA
6
1.1 A to 2.99999 A
300 + 40
380 + 40
10 μA
6
0 to 10.9999 A
(20 A Range)
380 + 500
500 + 500
100 μA
4
100 μA
4
11 to 20.5 A
[1]
[2]
[1]
800 + 750
[2]
1000 + 750
[2]
Max Inductive
Load mH
400
Duty Cycle: Currents <11 A may be provided continuously. For currents >11 A, see Figure 1-4. The current may be provided 60T-I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in °C (room temperature is about 23 °C) and I is the output current
in amperes. For example, 17 A, at 23 °C could be provided for 60-17-23 = 20 minutes each hour. When the 5520A is outputting
currents between 5 and 11 amps for long periods, the internal self-heating reduces the duty cycle. Under those conditions, the
allowable "on" time indicated by the formula and Figure B is achieved only after the 5520A is outputting currents <5 A for the "off"
period first.
Floor specification is 1500 μA within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times >30 seconds, the floor specification is
750 μA.
1-9
5522A
Operators Manual
Noise
Range
Bandwidth 0.1 Hz to 10 Hz p-p
Bandwidth 10 Hz to 10 kHz rms
0 to 329.999 μA
0 to 3.29999 mA
0 to 32.9999 mA
2 nA
20 nV
20 nA
200 nA
200 nV
0 to 329.999 mA
2000 nA
2.0 μA
0 to 2.99999 A
20 μA
20 μA
1 mA
0 to 20.5 A
200 μA
10 mA
50
80%
45
Ambient
0C
70%
40
60%
10 C
50%
30
25
40%
20 C
20
Duty Cycle (%)
Minutes per Hour
35
30%
30 C
15
20%
10
40 C
10%
5
0
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0%
Current (Amps)
nn326f.eps
Figure 1-3. Allowable Duration of Current >11 A A
1-10
Introduction and Specifications
Detailed Specifications
1
Resistance
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C ±(ppm of output +floor)
Range
[1]
0 to
10.9999 Ω
11 to
32.9999 Ω
33 to
109.9999 Ω
110 Ω to
329.9999 Ω
330 Ω to
1.099999 kΩ
1.1 to
3.299999 kΩ
3.3 to
10.99999 kΩ
11 to
32.99999 kΩ
33 to
109.9999 kΩ
110 to
329.99999 kΩ
330 kΩ to
1.099999 MΩ
1.1 to
3.299999 MΩ
3.3 to
10.99999 MΩ
11 to
32.99999 MΩ
33 to
109.9999 MΩ
110 to
329.9999 MΩ
330 to
1100 MΩ
[2]
Resolution
[3]
Floor (Ω)
Allowable Current
Ω
Temp and temp since ohms zero cal
ppm of output
90 days
1 year
12 hrs ±1 °C
7 days ±5 °C
35
40
0.001
0. 01
0.0001
1 mA to 125 mA
25
30
0.0015
0.015
0.0001
1 mA to 125 mA
22
28
0.0014
0.015
0.0001
1 mA to 70 mA
22
28
0.002
0.02
0.0001
1 mA to 40 mA
22
28
0.002
0.02
0.001
1 mA to 18 mA
22
28
0.02
0.2
0.001
100 μA to 5 mA
22
28
0.02
0.1
0.01
100 μA to 1.8 mA
22
28
0.2
1
0.01
10 μA to 0.5 mA
22
28
0.2
1
0. 1
10 μA to 0.18 mA
25
32
2
10
0.1
1 μA to 0.05 mA
25
32
2
10
1
1 μA to 0.018 mA
40
60
30
150
1
250 nA to 5 μA
110
130
50
250
10
250 nA to 1.8 μA
200
250
2500
2500
10
25 nA to 500 nA
400
500
3000
3000
100
25 nA to 180 nA
2500
3000
100000
100000
1000
2.5 nA to 50 nA
12000
15000
500000
500000
10000
1 nA to 13 nA
[1]
[2]
Continuously variable from 0 Ω to 1.1 G Ω.
Applies for 4-WIRE compensation only. For 2-WIRE and 2-WIRE COMP, add 5 μV per Amp of stimulus current to the floor
specification. For example, in 2-WIRE mode, at 1 kΩ the floor specification within 12 hours of an ohms zero cal for a measurement
current of 1 mA is:
0.002 Ω  5 μV / 1 mA = (0.022 + 0.005) Ω = 0.007 Ω.
[3]
For currents lower than shown, the floor adder increases by Floor(new) = Floor(old) x Imin/Iactual. For example, a 50 μA stimulus
measuring 100 Ω has a floor specification of: 0.0014 Ω x 1 mA/50 μA = 0.028 Ω assuming an ohms zero calibration within
12 hours.
1-11
5522A
Operators Manual
AC Voltage (Sine Wave)
Range
1.0 mV to
32.999 mV
33 mV to
329.999 mV
0.33 V to
3.29999 V
3.3 V to
32.9999 V
33 V to
329.999 V
330 V to
1020 V
Frequency
Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C
±(ppm of output + μV)
90 days
1 year
Resolution
Max
Burden
Normal Output
800 + 6
Max Distortion and
Noise
10 Hz to 5 MHz
Bandwidth
±(% output + floor)
0.15 + 90 μV
10 Hz to 45 Hz
600 + 6
45 Hz to 10 kHz
120 + 6
150 + 6
10 kHz to 20 kHz
160 + 6
200 + 6
20 kHz to 50 kHz
800 + 6
1000 + 6
50 kHz to 100 kHz
3000 + 12
3500 + 12
0.25 + 90 μV
100 kHz to 500 kHz
6000 + 50
8000 + 50
0.3 + 90 μV
0.035 + 90 μV
1 μV
65 Ω
0.06 + 90 μV
0.15 + 90 μV
[1]
10 Hz to 45 Hz
250 + 8
300 + 8
0.15 + 90 μV
45 Hz to 10 kHz
140 + 8
145 + 8
0.035 + 90 μV
10 kHz to 20 kHz
150 + 8
160 + 8
20 kHz to 50 kHz
300 + 8
350 + 8
50 kHz to 100 kHz
600 + 32
800 + 32
0.20 + 90 μV
100 kHz to 500 kHz
1600 + 70
2000 + 70
0.20 + 90 μV
10 Hz to 45 Hz
250 + 50
300 + 50
0.15 + 200 μV
45 Hz to 10 kHz
140 + 60
150 + 60
0.035 + 200 μV
10 kHz to 20 kHz
160 + 60
190 + 60
20 kHz to 50 kHz
250 + 50
300 + 50
50 kHz to 100 kHz
550 + 125
700 + 125
0.20 + 200 μV
100 kHz to 500 kHz
2000 + 600
2400 + 600
10 Hz to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 50 kHz
50 kHz to 100 kHz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 10 kHz
10 kHz to 20 kHz
20 kHz to 50 kHz
50 kHz to 100 kHz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 kHz to 5 kHz
5 kHz to 10 kHz
250 + 650
125 + 600
220 + 600
300 + 600
750 + 1600
150 + 2000
160 + 6000
220 + 6000
240 + 6000
1600 + 50000
250 + 10000
200 + 10000
250 + 10000
300 + 650
150 + 600
240 + 600
350 + 600
900 + 1600
190 + 2000
200 + 6000
250 + 6000
300 + 6000
2000 + 50000
300 + 10000
250 + 10000
300 + 10000
0.20 + 200 μV
0.15 + 2 mV
0.035 + 2 mV
0.08 + 2 mV
0.2 + 2 mV
0.5 + 2 mV
0.15 + 10 mV
0.05 +10 mV
0.6 + 10 mV
0.8 + 10 mV
1.0 + 10 mV
0.15 + 30 mV
0.07 + 30 mV
0.07 + 30 mV
1 μV
10 μV
65 Ω
10 mA
100 μV
10 mA
1 mV
5 mA,
except
20 mA for
45 Hz to
65 Hz
10 mV
2 mA,
except 6 mA
for 45 Hz to
65 Hz
0.06 + 90 μV
0.15 + 90 μV
[1]
0.06 + 200 μV
0.15 + 200 μV
[1] Max Distortion for 100 kHz to 200 kHz. For 200 kHz to 500 kHz, the maximum distortion is 0.9 % of output + floor as shown.
Note
Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is <5 mΩ for outputs ≥0.33 V. The AUX output resistance is <1 Ω. The maximum
load capacitance is 500 pF, subject to the maximum burden current limits
1-12
[1]
Introduction and Specifications
Detailed Specifications
1
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) (cont.)
[1]
Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C
±(% of output + μV)
90 days
1 year
Resolution
Max
Burden
Max Distortion and
Noise
10 Hz to 5 MHz
Bandwidth
±(% output + floor)
Range
Frequency
10 mV to
329.999 mV
10 Hz to 20 Hz
0.15 + 370
AUX Output
0.2 + 370
20 Hz to 45 Hz
0.08 + 370
0.1 + 370
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.08 + 370
0.1 + 370
1 kHz to 5 kHz
0.15 + 450
0.2 + 450
5 kHz to 10 kHz
0.3 + 450
0.4 + 450
10 kHz to 30 kHz
4.0 + 900
5.0 + 900
1 + 200 μV
10 Hz to 20 Hz
0.15 + 450
0.2 + 450
0.2 + 200 μV
0.06 + 200 μV
0.33 V to
3.29999 V
3.3 v to 5 v
0.2 + 200 μV
0.06 + 200 μV
1 μv
5 mA
0.08 + 200 μV
0.3 + 200 μV
0.6 + 200 μV
20 Hz to 45 Hz
0.08 + 450
0.1 + 450
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.07 + 450
0.09 + 450
1 kHz to 5 kHz
0.15 + 1400
0.2 + 1400
5 kHz to 10 kHz
0.3 + 1400
0.4 + 1400
0.6 + 200 μV
10 kHz to 30 kHz
4.0 + 2800
5.0 + 2800
1 + 200 μV
10 Hz to 20 Hz
0.15 + 450
0.2 + 450
0.2 + 200 μV
20 Hz to 45 Hz
0.08 + 450
0.1 + 450
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.07 + 450
0.09 + 450
1 kHz to 5 kHz
0.15 + 1400
0.2 + 1400
0.3 + +200 μV
5 kHz to 10 kHz
0.3 + 1400
0.4 + 1400
0.6 + 200 μV
10 μv
5 mA
0.08 + 200 μV
0.3 + 200 μV
0.06 + 200 μV
100 μv
5 mA
0.08 + 200 μV
[1] There are two channels of voltage output. The maximum frequency of the dual output is 30 kHz.
Note
Remote sensing is not provided. Output resistance is <5 mΩ for outputs ≥0.33 V. The AUX output resistance is <1 Ω. The maximum
load capacitance is 500 pF, subject to the maximum burden current limits
1-13
5522A
Operators Manual
AC Current (Sine Wave)
Range
Frequency
Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C
±(% of output + μA)
90 days
1 year
Max Distortion &
Max
Noise 10 Hz to
Compliance
100 kHz BW
Inductive
adder ±(μA/V)
±(% of output +
Load μH
floor)
LCOMP Off
29.00 to
329.99 μA
0.33 to
3.29999 mA
3.3 to
32.9999 mA
33 to
329.999 mA
0.33 to
1.09999 A
1.1 to
2.99999 A
3 to
10.9999 A
11 to
[1]
20.5 A
1-14
0.15 + 0.5 μA
10 to 20 Hz
0.16 + 0.1
0.2 + 0.1
0.05
20 to 45 Hz
0.12 + 0.1
0.15 + 0.1
0.05
0.1 + 0.5 μA
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.1 + 0.1
0.125 + 0.1
0.05
0.05 + 0.5 μA
1 to 5 kHz
0.25 + 0.15
0.3 + 0.15
1.5
0.5 + 0.5 μA
5 to 10 kHz
0.6 + 0.2
0.8 + 0.2
1.5
1.0 + 0.5 μA
10 to 30 kHz
1.2 + 0.4
1.6 + 0.4
10
1.2 + 0.5 μA
10 to 20 Hz
0.16 + 0.15
0.2 + 0.15
0.05
0.15 + 1.5 μA
20 to 45 Hz
0.1 + 0.15
0.125 + 0.15
0.05
0.06 + 1.5 μA
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.08 + 0.15
0.1 + 0.15
0.05
0.02 + 1.5 μA
1 to 5 kHz
0.16 + 0.2
0.2 + 0.2
1.5
0.5 + 1.5 μA
5 to 10 kHz
0.4 + 0.3
0.5 + 0.3
1.5
1.0 + 1.5 μA
10 to 30 kHz
0.8 + 0.6
1.0 + 0.6
10
1.2 + 0.5 μA
10 to 20 Hz
0.15 + 2
0.18 + 2
0.05
0.15 + 5 μA
20 to 45 Hz
0.075 + 2
0.09 + 2
0.05
0.05 + 5 μA
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.035 + 2
0.04 + 2
0.05
0.07 + 5 μA
1 to 5 kHz
0.065 + 2
0.08 + 2
1.5
0.3 + 5 μA
5 to 10 kHz
0.16 + 3
0.2 + 3
1.5
0.7 + 5 μA
10 to 30 kHz
0.32 + 4
0.4 + 4
10
1.0 + 0.5 μA
10 to 20 Hz
0.15 + 20
0.18 + 20
0.05
0.15 + 50 μA
20 to 45 Hz
0.075 + 20
0.09 + 20
0.05
0.05 + 50 μA
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.035 + 20
0.04 + 20
0.05
0.02 + 50 μA
1 to 5 kHz
0.08 + 50
0.10 + 50
1.5
0.03 + 50 μA
0.1 + 50 μA
5 to 10 kHz
0.16 + 100
0.2 + 100
1.5
10 to 30 kHz
0.32 + 200
0.4 + 200
10
10 to 45 Hz
0.15 + 100
0.18 + 100
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.036 + 100
0.05 + 100
1 to 5 kHz
0.5 + 1000
0.6 + 1000
[2]
1 + 500 μA
5 to 10 kHz
2.0 + 5000
2.5 + 5000
[3]
2 + 500 μA
10 to 45 Hz
0.15 + 100
0.18 + 100
0.2 + 500 μA
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.05 + 100
0.06 + 100
0.07 + 500 μA
1 to 5 kHz
0.5 + 1000
0.6 + 1000
[2]
1 + 500 μA
5 to 10 kHz
2.0 + 5000
2.5 + 5000
[3]
2 + 500 μA
45 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
0.05 + 2000
0.08 + 2000
0.06 + 2000
0.10 + 2000
0.2 + 3 mA
0.1 + 3 mA
1 to 5 kHz
45 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
2.5 + 2000
0.1 + 5000
0.13 + 5000
2.5 + 5000
3.0 + 2000
0.12 + 5000
0.15 + 5000
3.0 + 5000
0.8 + 3 mA
0.2 + 3 mA
0.1 + 3 mA
0.8 + 3 mA
200
200
50
50
0.6 + 50 μA
0.2 + 500 μA
0.07 + 500 μA
2.5
2.5
1
1
Introduction and Specifications
Detailed Specifications
1
AC Current (Sine Wave) (cont.)
Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C
±(% of output + μA)
90 days
1 year
Max Distortion &
Noise 10 Hz to
100 kHz BW
±(% of output + floor)
Range
Frequency
29.00 to
329.99 μA
10 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
0.33 to
3.29999 mA
10 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
10 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
10 to 100 Hz
100 Hz to 1 kHz
0.2 + 0.3
0.5 + 0.8
0.07 + 4
0.18 + 10
0.07 + 40
0.18 + 100
0.25 + 0.3
0.6 + 0.8
0.08 + 4
0.2 + 10
0.08 + 40
0.2 + 100
0.15 + 1.5
0.06 + 1.5
0.15 + 5
0.05 + 5
0.15 + 50
0.05 + 50
10 to 100 Hz
100 to 440 Hz
10 to 100 Hz
0.1 + 200
0.25 + 1000
0.12 + 200
0.3 + 1000
0.2 + 500
0.25 + 500
0.1 + 0
3.3 to
32.9999 mA
33 to
329.999 mA
0.33 to
2.99999 A
3 to 20.5 A
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[1]
100 Hz to 1 kHz
LCOMP On
0.2 + 0.2
0.25 + 0.2
0.5 + 0.5
0.6 + 0.5
0.1 + 2000
[2]
0.8 + 5000
[3]
0.12 + 2000
1.0 + 5000
Max
Inductive
Load μH
0.1 + 1.0
0.05 + 1.0
[2]
[3]
0.5 + 0
400
400
[4]
Duty Cycle: Currents <11 A may be provided continuously. For currents >11 A, see Figure B. The current may be provided 60T-I minutes any 60 minute period where T is the temperature in °C (room temperature is about 23 °C) and I is the output
current in Amps. For example, 17 A, at 23 °C could be provided for 60-17-23 = 20 minutes each hour. When the 5522A is
outputting currents between 5 and 11 amps for long periods, the internal self-heating reduces the duty cycle. Under those
conditions, the allowable "on" time indicated by the formula and Figure B is achieved only after the 5522A is outputting currents
<5 A for the "off" period first.
For currents >11 A, Floor specification is 4000 μA within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times >30 seconds,
the floor specification is 2000 μA.
For currents >11 A, Floor specification is 1000 μA within 30 seconds of selecting operate. For operating times >30 seconds,
the floor specification is 5000 μA.
Subject to compliance voltages limits.
Range
Resolution μA
Max Compliance Voltage V rms [1]
0.029 to 0.32999 mA
0.01
7
0.33 to 3.29999 mA
0.01
7
3.3 to 32.9999 mA
0.1
5
33 to 329.999 mA
1
5
0.33 to 2.99999 A
10
4
3 to 20.5 A
100
3
Subject to specification adder for compliance voltages greater than 1 V rms.
1-15
5522A
Operators Manual
Capacitance
Range
220 to
399.9 pF
0.4 to
1.0999 nF
1.1 to
3.2999 nF
3.3 to
10.9999 nF
11 to
32.9999 nF
33 to
109.999 nF
110 to
329.999 nF
0.33 to
1.09999 μF
1.1 to
3.29999 μF
3.3 to
10.9999 μF
11 to
32.9999 μF
33 to
109.999 μF
110 to
329.999 μF
0.33 mF to
1.09999 mF
1.1 to
3.29999 mF
3.3 to
10.9999 mF
11 to
32.9999 mF
33 to
110 mF
1-16
Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C
[1] [2] [3]
±(% of output + floor)
Allowed Frequency or
Charge-Discharge Rate
Resolution
Min and Max to Typical Max for Typical Max for
<0.5 % Error
<1 % Error
Meet
Specification
90 days
1 year
0.38 + 10 pF
0.5 + 10 pF
0.1 pF
10 Hz to 10 kHz
20 kHz
40 kHz
0.38 + 0.01 nF
0.5 + 0.01 nF
0.1 pF
10 Hz to 10 kHz
30 kHz
50 kHz
0.38 + 0.01 nF
0.5 + 0.01 nF
0.1 pF
10 Hz to 3 kHz
30 kHz
50 kHz
0.19 + 0.01 nF
0.25 + 0.01 nF
0.1 pF
10 Hz to 1 kHz
20 kHz
25 kHz
0.19 + 0.01 nF
0.25 + 0.01 nF
0.1 pF
10 Hz to 1 kHz
8 kHz
10 kHz
0.19 + 0.01 nF
0.25 + 0.01 nF
1 pF
10 Hz to 1 kHz
4 kHz
6 kHz
0.19 + 0.3 nF
0.25 + 0.03 nF
1 pF
10 Hz to 1 kHz
2.5 kHz
3.5 kHz
0.19 + 1 nF
0.25 + 1 nF
10 pF
10 to 600 Hz
1.5 kHz
2 kHz
0.19 + 3 nF
0.25 + 3 nF
10 pF
10 to 300 Hz
800 Hz
1 kHz
0.19 + 10 nF
0.25 + 10 nF
100 pF
10 to 150 Hz
450 Hz
650 Hz
0.30 + 30 nF
0.40 + 30 nF
100 pF
10 to 120 Hz
250 Hz
350 Hz
0.34 + 100 nF
0.45 + 100 nF
1 nF
10 to 80 Hz
150 Hz
200 Hz
0.34 + 300 nF
0.45 + 300 nF
1 nF
0 to 50 Hz
80 Hz
120 Hz
0.34 + 1 μF
0.45 + 1 μF
10 nF
0 to 20 Hz
45 Hz
65 Hz
0.34 + 3 μF
0.45 + 3 μF
10 nF
0 to 6 Hz
30 Hz
40 Hz
0.34 + 10 μF
0.45 + 10 μF
100 nF
0 to 2 Hz
15 Hz
20 Hz
0.7 + 30 μF
0.75 + 30 μF
100 nF
0 to 0.6 Hz
7.5 Hz
10 Hz
1.0 + 100 μF
1.1 + 100 μF
10 μF
0 to 0.2 Hz
3 Hz
5 Hz
[1]
[2]
The output is continuously variable from 220 pF to 110 mF.
Specifications apply to both dc charge/discharge capacitance meters and ac RCL meters. The maximum allowable peak voltage is
3 V. The maximum allowable peak current is 150 mA, with an rms limitation of 30 mA below 1.1 μF and 100 mA for 1.1 μF and
above.
[3]
The maximum lead resistance for no additional error in 2-wire COMP mode is 10 Ω.
Introduction and Specifications
Detailed Specifications
1
Temperature Calibration (Thermocouple)
TC
[1]
Type
B
C
E
J
K
Range
[2]
°C
Absolute Uncertainty
Source/Measure
tcal ±5 °C
[3]
± °C
90 days
1 year
600 to 800
0.42
0.44
800 to 1000
1000 to 1550
0.34
0.30
0.34
0.30
1550 to 1820
0.26
0 to 150
0.23
150 to 650
650 to 1000
1000 to 1800
0.19
0.23
0.38
0.26
0.31
0.50
1800 to 2316
0.63
-250 to -100
-100 to -25
0.38
0.12
TC
[1]
Type
Range
[2]
°C
Absolute Uncertainty
Source/Measure
tcal ±5 °C
[3]
± °C
90 days
1 year
-200 to -100
0.37
0.37
-100 to 800
800 to 900
0.26
0.17
0.26
0.17
0.33
-200 to -100
0.30
0.40
0.30
-100 to -25
0.17
0.22
-25 to 120
120 to 410
410 to 1300
0.15
0.14
0.21
0.19
0.18
0.27
0.84
0 to 250
0.48
0.57
0.50
0.16
250 to 400
400 to 1000
0.28
0.26
0.35
0.33
L
N
R
-25 to 350
0.10
0.14
1000 to 1767
0.30
0.40
350 to 650
650 to 1000
0.12
0.16
0.16
0.21
0 to 250
250 to 1000
0.47
0.30
0.47
0.36
-210 to -100
-100 to -30
0.20
0.12
0.27
0.16
1000 to 1400
1400 to 1767
0.28
0.34
0.37
0.46
S
-30 to 150
0.10
0.14
-250 to -150
0.48
0.63
150 to 760
760 to 1200
0.13
0.18
0.17
0.23
-150 to 0
0 to 120
0.18
0.12
0.24
0.16
-200 to -100
0.25
0.33
120 to 400
0.10
0.14
-100 to -25
0.14
0.18
-200 to 0
0.56
0.56
-25 to 120
0.12
0.16
0 to 600
0.27
0.27
120 to 1000
1000 to 1372
0.19
0.30
0.26
0.40
T
U
[1]
Temperature standard ITS-90 or IPTS-68 is selectable.
TC simulating and measuring are not specified for operation in electromagnetic fields above 0.4 V/m.
[2]
[3]
Resolution is 0.01 °C
Does not include thermocouple error
1-17
5522A
Operators Manual
Temperature Calibration (RTD)
RTD Type
Pt 385,
100 Ω
Pt 3926,
100 Ω
Pt 3916,
100 Ω
Pt 385,
200 Ω
[1]
[2]
[3]
Range
[1]
°C
Absolute Uncertainty
tcal ±5 °C
[2]
± °C
Range
[1]
°C
RTD Type
Absolute Uncertainty
tcal ±5 °C
[2]
± °C
90 days
1 year
90 days
1 year
-200 to -80
0.04
0.05
-200 to -80
0.03
0.04
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 630
0.05
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.05
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.12
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.07
0.05
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.08
Pt 385,
500 Ω
630 to 800
0.21
0.23
400 to 600
0.08
0.09
-200 to -80
0.04
0.05
600 to 630
0.09
0.11
-80 to 0
0.05
0.05
-200 to -80
0.03
0.03
0 to 100
100 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 630
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.07
0.09
0.10
0.12
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
-200 to -190
-190 to -80
-80 to 0
0.25
0.04
0.05
0.25
0.04
0.05
300 to 400
400 to 600
600 to 630
0.05
0.06
0.22
0.07
0.07
0.23
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
0.06
0.06
0.07
0.06
0.07
0.08
PtNi 385,
120 Ω
(Ni120)
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
0.06
0.07
0.13
0.08
0.08
0.14
300 to 400
400 to 600
0.08
0.08
0.09
0.10
Cu 427,
[3]
10 Ω
-100 to 260
0.3
0.3
600 to 630
0.21
0.23
-200 to -80
0.03
0.04
-80 to 0
0 to 100
100 to 260
260 to 300
300 to 400
400 to 600
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.12
0.13
0.14
600 to 630
0.14
0.16
Pt 385,
1000 Ω
Resolution is 0.003 °C
Applies for COMP OFF (to the 5522A Calibrator front panel NORMAL terminals) and 2-wire and 4-wire compensation.
Based on MINCO Application Aid No. 18
DC Power Specification Summary
Voltage Range
0.33 to
329.99 mA
Current Range
0.33 to
2.9999 A
3 to
20.5 A
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C, ±(% of watts output)
90 days
33 mV to 1020 V
0.021
0.019
[2]
1 year
33 mV to 1020 V
0.023
0.022
[2]
[1]
[2]
1-18
[1]
0.06
[2]
0.07
[2]
To determine dc power uncertainty with more precision, see the individual “AC Voltage Specifications,” “AC Current
Specifications,” and “Calculating Power Uncertainty.”
Add 0.02 % unless a settling time of 30 seconds is allowed for output currents >10 A or for currents on the highest two current
ranges within 30 seconds of an output current >10 A.
Introduction and Specifications
Detailed Specifications
1
AC Power (45 Hz to 65 Hz) Specification Summary, PF=1
Voltage Range
3.3 to
8.999 mA
Current Range
9 to
33 to
32.999 mA
89.99 mA
90 to 329.99 mA
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C, ±(% of watts output)
90 days
1 year
[1]
33 to 329.999 mV
0.13
0.09
0.13
0.09
330 mV to 1020 V
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
0.11
0.14
0.12
0.07
0.10
0.08
0.11
0.14
0.12
0.07
0.10
0.08
Current Range
Voltage Range
0.33 to
0.8999 A
0.9 to
2.1999 A
[2]
2.2 to
4.4999 A
4.5 to
20.5 A
Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C, ±(% of watts output)
[1]
90 days
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
0.12
0.10
0.10
0.08
0.12
0.11
0.10
0.09
1 year
33 to 329.999 mV
330 mV to 1020 V
0.13
0.11
0.11
0.09
0.13
0.12
0.11
0.10
[1]
[2]
To determine ac power uncertainty with more precision, see the individual “DC Voltage Specifications” and “DC Current
Specifications” and “Calculating Power Uncertainty.”
Add 0.02 % unless a settling time of 30 seconds is allowed for output currents >10 A or for currents on the highest two current
ranges within 30 seconds of an output current >10 A.
Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications
Frequency
Voltages
(NORMAL)
Currents
Voltages
(AUX)
Power Factor
(PF)
dc
0 to ±1020 V
0 to ±20.5 A
0 to ±7 V
10 to 45 Hz
45 to 65 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 5 kHz
5 to 10 kHz
33 mV to 32.9999 V
33 mV to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
3.3 to 500 V
3.3 to 250 V
3.3 mA to 2.99999 A
3.3 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 2.99999 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 2.99999 A
33 to 329.99 mA
10 mV to 5 V
10 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
1 to 5 V
⎯
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
10 to 30 kHz
3.3 V to 250 V
33 mA to 329.99 mA
1 V to 3.29999 V
0 to 1
Notes
The range of voltages and currents shown in “DC Voltage Specifications,” “DC Current Specifications,” “AC Voltage (Sine Wave)
Specifications,” and “AC Current (Sine Wave) Specifications” are available in the power and dual output modes (except minimum
current for ac power is 0.33 mA). However, only those limits shown in this table are specified. See “Calculating Power Uncertainty” to
determine the uncertainty at these points.
The phase adjustment range for dual ac outputs is 0 ° to ±179.99 °. The phase resolution for dual ac outputs is 0.01 degree.
1-19
5522A
Operators Manual
Phase
10 to
65 Hz
65 to
500 Hz
0.10 °
0.25 °
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C, (Δ Φ °)
500 Hz to
1 to
5 to
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
0.5 °
2.5 °
10 to
30 kHz
5°
10 °
Note
See Power and Dual Output Limit Specifications for applicable outputs.
Phase (Φ) Phase (Φ)
Watts
VARs
PF
10 to
65 Hz
Power Uncertainty Adder due to Phase Error
65 to
500 Hz to
1 to
5 to
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
10 to
30 kHz
0°
90 °
1.000
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.00 %
0.10 %
0.38 %
1.52 %
10 °
80 °
0.985
0.03 %
0.08 %
0.16 %
0.86 %
1.92 %
4.58 %
20 °
70 °
0.940
0.06 %
0.16 %
0.32 %
1.68 %
3.55 %
7.84 %
30 °
60 °
0.866
0.10 %
0.25 %
0.51 %
2.61 %
5.41 %
11.54 %
40 °
50 °
0.766
0.15 %
0.37 %
0.74 %
3.76 %
7.69 %
16.09 %
50 °
40 °
0.643
0.21 %
0.52 %
1.04 %
5.29 %
10.77 %
22.21 %
60 °
30 °
0.500
0.30 %
0.76 %
1.52 %
7.65 %
15.48 %
31.60 %
70 °
20 °
0.342
0.48 %
1.20 %
2.40 %
12.08 %
24.33 %
49.23 %
80 °
0.174
0.99 %
2.48 %
4.95 %
24.83 %
49.81 %
100.00 %
10 °
0.000
––
––
––
––
––
––
90 °
0°
To calculate exact ac Watts power adders due to phase uncertainty for values not shown, use the following formula:
Adder ( %) = 100(1 −
Cos(Φ + ΔΦ)
)
Cos( Φ)
For example: for a PF of .9205 (Φ = 23) and a phase uncertainty of ΔΦ = 0.15, the ac Watts power adder is:
Adder ( %) = 100(1 −
Cos(23+.15)
) = 0.11%
Cos( 23)
Calculating Power Uncertainty
Overall uncertainty for power output in Watts (or VARs) is based on the root sum square (rss) of the individual
uncertainties in percent for the selected voltage, current, and power factor parameters:
Watts uncertainty
Upower = U2 voltage + U2current + U2PFadder
VARs uncertainty
UVARs = U2voltage + U2current + U2 VARsadder
Because there are an infinite number of combinations, you should calculate the actual ac power uncertainty for your
selected parameters. The method of calculation is best shown in the following examples (using 1 year specifications):
Example 1 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 60 Hz, Power Factor = 1.0 (Φ=0).
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 60 Hz is 150 ppm + 2 mV, totaling:
-6
100 V x 190 x 10 = 15 mV added to 2 mV = 17 mV. Expressed in percent:
17 mV/100 V x 100 = 0.017 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.05 %  100 μA, totaling:
1 A x 0.0005 = 500 μA added to 100 μA = 0.6 mA. Expressed in percent:
0. 6 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.06 % (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
PF Adder Watts Adder for PF = 1 (Φ=0) at 60 Hz is 0 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total Watts Output Uncertainty = Upower =
0.017 2 + 0.06 2 + 0 2 = 0.062 %
Example 2 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 400 Hz, Power Factor = 0.5 (Φ=60)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is, 150 ppm + 2 mV, totaling:
-6
100 V x 190 x 10 = 15 mV added to 2 mV = 17 mV. Expressed in percent:
17 mV/100V x 100 = 0.017 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.05 %  100 μA, totaling:
1 A x 0.0005 = 500 μA added to 100 μA = 0.6 mA. Expressed in percent:
0.6 mA/1A x 100 = 0.06 % (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
PF Adder Watts Adder for PF = 0.5 (Φ=60) at 400 Hz is 0.76 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total Watts Output Uncertainty = Upower = 0.017 2 + 0.06 2 + 0.76 2 = 0.76%
1-20
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1
VARs When the Power Factor approaches 0.0, the Watts output uncertainty becomes unrealistic because the dominant
characteristic is the VARs (volts-amps-reactive) output. In these cases, calculate the Total VARs Output Uncertainty, as
shown in example 3:
Example 3 Output: 100 V, 1 A, 60 Hz, Power Factor = 0.174 (Φ=80)
Voltage Uncertainty Uncertainty for 100 V at 400 Hz is, 150 ppm + 2 mV, totaling:
-6
100 V x 190 x 10 = 15 mV added to 2 mV = 17 mV. Expressed in percent:
17 mV/100V x 100 = 0.017 % (see “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications”).
Current Uncertainty Uncertainty for 1 A is 0.05 %  100 μA, totaling:
1 A x 0.0005 = 500 μA added to 100 μA = 0.6 mA. Expressed in percent:
0.6 mA/1 A x 100 = 0.06 % (see “AC Current (Sine Waves) Specifications”).
VARs Adder VARs Adder for Φ=80 at 60 Hz is 0.03 % (see “Phase Specifications”).
Total VARS Output Uncertainty = UVARs = 0.0172 + 0.062 + 0.032 = 0.069%
Additional Specifications
The following paragraphs provide additional specifications for the 5522A Calibrator ac voltage and ac current functions.
These specifications are valid after allowing a warm-up period of 30 minutes, or twice the time the 5522A has been turned
off. All extended range specifications are based on performing the internal zero-cal function at weekly intervals, or when
the ambient temperature changes by more than 5 °C.
Frequency
[1]
Frequency Range
Resolution
0.01 to 119.99 Hz
0.01 Hz
120.0 to 1199.9 Hz
1.200 to 11.999 kHz
12.00 to 119.99 kHz
120.0 to 1199.9 kHz
1.200 to 2.000 MHz
0.1 Hz
1.0 Hz
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C
2.5 ppm +5 μHz
[1]
Jitter
100 nS
With REF CLK set to ext, the frequency uncertainty of the 5522A is the uncertainty of the external 10 MHz clock ±5 μHz. The
amplitude of the 10 MHz external reference clock signal should be between 1 V and 5 V p-p.
Harmonics (2nd to 50th)
Fundamental
[1]
Frequency
Voltages
NORMAL Terminals
Currents
Voltages
AUX Terminals
10 to 45 Hz
33 mV to 32.9999 V
3.3 mA to 2.99999 A
10 mV to 5 V
45 to 65 Hz
65 to 500 Hz
500 Hz to 5 kHz
33 mV to 1020 V
33 mV to 1020 V
330 mV to 1020 V
10 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
100 mV to 5 V
5 to 10 kHz
3.3 to 1020 V
10 to 30 kHz
3.3 to 1020 V
3.3 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 mA to 20.5 A
33 to
329.9999 mA
33 to
329.9999 mA
[1]
100 mV to 5 V
Amplitude
Uncertainty
Same % of
output as the
equivalent single
output, but twice
the floor adder.
100 mV to
3.29999 V
The maximum frequency of the harmonic output is 30 kHz (10 kHz for 3 to 5 V on the Aux terminals). For example, if the
fundamental output is 5 kHz, the maximum selection is the 6th harmonic (30 kHz). All harmonic frequencies (2nd to 50th) are
available for fundamental outputs between 10 Hz and 600 Hz (200 Hz for 3 to 5 V on the Aux terminals).
Phase Uncertainty................................................. Phase uncertainty for harmonic outputs is 1 degree or the phase
uncertainty shown in “Phase Specifications” for the particular output,
whichever is greater. For example, the phase uncertainty of a 400 Hz
fundamental output and 10 kHz harmonic output is 10 ° (from “Phase
Specifications”). Another example, the phase uncertainty of a 60 Hz
fundamental output and a 400 Hz harmonic output is 1 degree.
Example of determining Amplitude Uncertainty in a Dual Output Harmonic Mode
What are the amplitude uncertainties for the following dual outputs?
NORMAL (Fundamental) Output:
100V, 100 Hz .................................................. From “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications” the single output
specification for 100V, 100 Hz, is 0.015 % + 2 mV. For the dual output
1-21
5522A
Operators Manual
in this example, the specification is 0.015 % +4 mV as the 0.015 % is
the same, and the floor is twice the value (2 x 2 mV).
AUX (50th Harmonic) Output:
100 mV, 5 kHz ................................................ From “AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Specifications” the auxiliary output
specification for 100 mV, 5 kHz, is 0.15 % + 450 mV. For the dual
output in this example, the specification is 0.15 % 900 mV as the 0.15
% is the same, and the floor is twice the value (2 x 450 mV).
AC Voltage (Sine Wave) Extended Bandwidth
Range
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty
tcal ±5 °C
Max Voltage
Resolution
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
1.0 to 33 mV
34 to 330 mV
0.4 to 33 V
0.3 to 3.3 V
10 to 330 mV
0.4 to 5 V
0.01 to 9.99 Hz
±(5.0 % of output
+0.5 % of range)
500.1 kHz to 1 MHz
-10 dB at 1 MHz, typical
1.001 to 2 MHz
-31 dB at 2 MHz, typical
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
0.01 to 9.99 Hz
±(5.0 % of output
+0.5 % of range)
Two digits, e.g., 25 mV
Three digits
Two digits
Two digits
Three digits
Two digits
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave)
Triangle Wave &
Truncated Sine
[1]
Range, p-p
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C,
[2]
±(% of output + % of range)
Max Voltage
Resolution
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
2.9 to 92.999 mV
0.01 to 10 Hz
5.0 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Six digits on each range
20 to 100 kHz
93 to 929.999 mV
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
Two digits on each range
1 to 20 kHz
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
20 to 100 kHz
0.93 to 9.29999 V
20 to 100 kHz
9.3 to 93 V
[3]
[3]
[3]
Six digits on each range
Six digits on each range
0.01 to 10 Hz
5.0 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Six digits on each range
20 to 100 kHz
[3]
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
29 to 929.999 mV
0.93 to 9.29999 V
1-22
0.01 to 10 Hz
5.0 + 0.5
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1
AC Voltage (Non-Sine Wave) (cont.)
Triangle Wave &
Truncated Sine
[1]
Range, p-p
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C,
[2]
±(% of output + % of range)
Max Voltage
Resolution
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
9.3 to 14.0000 V
[1]
[2]
[3]
0.01 to 10 Hz
5.0 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 10 kHz
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Six digits on each range
To convert p-p to rms for triangle wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.2886751. To convert p-p to rms for truncated sine wave,
multiply the p-p value by 0.2165063.
Uncertainty is stated in p-p. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
Uncertainty for Truncated Sine outputs is typical over this frequency band.
Square Wave
Range
[1]
(p-p)
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C,
[2]
±(% of output + % of range)
Max Voltage
Resolution
Normal Channel (Single Output Mode)
2.9 to 65.999 mV
66 to 659.999 mV
0.66 to 6.59999 V
6.6 to 66.0000 V
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
20 to 100 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
45 Hz to 1 kHz
1 to 20 kHz
20 to 100 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
0.5 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Two digits on each range
Six digits on each range
Auxiliary Output (Dual Output Mode)
29 to 659.999 mV
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Six digits on each range
0.01 to 10 Hz
10 to 45 Hz
5.0 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Six digits on each range
0.01 to 10 Hz
5.0 + 0.5
Two digits on each range
10 to 45 Hz
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.5
0.25 + 0.25
5.0 + 0.5
Six digits on each range
1 to 10 kHz
0.66 to 6.59999 V
1 to 10 kHz
6.6 to 14.0000 V
1 to 10 kHz
[3]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
To convert p-p to rms for square wave, multiply the p-p value by 0.5.
Uncertainty is stated in p-p. Amplitude is verified using an rms-responding DMM.
[3]
Limited to 1 kHz for Auxiliary outputs ≥6.6 V p-p.
1-23
5522A
Operators Manual
AC Voltage, DC Offset
Range
[1]
(Normal Channel)
[2]
Offset Range
Max Peak
Signal
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
[3]
tcal ±5 °C
±(% dc output + floor)
3.3 to 32.999 mV
Sine Waves (rms)
0 to 50 mV
80 mV
0.1 + 33 μV
33 to 329.999 mV
0 to 500 mV
800 mV
0.1 + 330 μV
0.33 to 3.29999 V
0 to 5 V
8V
0.1 + 3300 μV
3.3 to 32.9999 V
0 to 50 V
55 V
0.1 + 33 mV
Triangle Waves and Truncated Sine Waves (p-p)
9.3 to 92.999 mV
0 to 50 mV
80 mV
0.1 + 93 μV
93 to 929.999 mV
0 to 500 mV
800 mV
0.1 + 930 μV
0.93 to 9.29999 V
0 to 5 V
8V
0.1 + 9300 μV
9.3 to 93.0000 V
0 to 50 V
55 V
0.1 + 93 mV
Square Waves (p-p)
0.1 + 66 μV
6.6 to 65.999 mV
0 to 50 mV
80 mV
66 to 659.999 mV
0 to 500 mV
800 mV
0.1 + 660 μV
0.66 to 6.59999 V
0 to 5 V
8V
6.6 to 66.0000 V
0 to 50 V
55 V
0.1 + 6600 μV
0.1 + 66 mV
[1]
[2]
Offsets are not allowed on ranges above the highest range shown above.
The maximum offset value is determined by the difference between the peak value of the selected voltage output and the
allowable maximum peak signal. For example, a 10 V p-p square wave output has a peak value of 5 V, allowing a maximum
offset up to ± 50 V to not exceed the 55 V maximum peak signal. The maximum offset values shown above are for the
minimum outputs in each range.
[3]
For frequencies 0.01 to 10 Hz, and 500 kHz to 2 MHz, the offset uncertainty is 5 % of output, ±1 % of the offset range.
AC Voltage, Square Wave Characteristics
Risetime @
Settling Time @
1 kHz
1 kHz Typical
Typical
<1 μs
<10 μS to 1 % of
final value
Overshoot
@ 1 kHz
Typical
Duty Cycle Range
Duty Cycle Uncertainty
<2 %
1 % to 99 % <3.3 V p-p.
0,01 Hz to 100 kHz
±(0.02 % of period + 100 ns), 50 % duty cycle
±(0.05 % of period + 100 ns), other duty cycles
from 10 % to 90 %
±(0.8 % of period +100 ns)
AC Voltage, Triangle Wave Characteristics
Linearity to 1 kHz
0.3 % of p-p value, from 10 % to 90 % point
Aberrations
<1 % of p-p value, with amplitude >50 % of range
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave)
Triangle Wave &
Truncated Sine Wave
Range
p-p
Frequency
10 to 45 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
0.047 to
[1]
0.92999 mA
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
10 to 45 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
10 to 45 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
0.93 to
[1]
9.29999 mA
9.3 to
[1]
92.9999 mA
1-24
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal ±5 °C
±(% of output + % of range)
Max Current
Resolution
Six digits
Six digits
Six digits
Introduction and Specifications
Additional Specifications
1
AC Current (Non-Sine Wave) (cont.)
Triangle Wave &
Truncated Sine Wave
Range
p-p
Frequency
10 to 45 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
93 to
[1]
929.999 mA
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.5
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
10 to 45 Hz
0.5 + 1.0
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.5 + 0.5
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
45 to 500 Hz
0.5 + 0.5
500 Hz to 1 kHz
1.0 + 1.0
0.93 to
8.49999 A
8.5 to 57 A
[1]
[2]
[2]
Max Current
Resolution
Six digits
Six digits
Frequency limited to 1 kHz with LCOMP on.
Frequency limited to 440 Hz with LCOMP on.
Square Wave
Range p-p
0.047 to
[1]
0.65999 mA
0.66 to
[1]
6.59999 mA
6.6 to
[1]
65.9999 mA
66 to
[1]
659.999 mA
0.66 to
[2]
5.99999 A
6 to 41 A
[1]
[2]
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal ±5 °C
±(% of output + % of range)
[2]
Frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty tcal ±5 °C
±(% of output + % of range)
10 to 45 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
10 to 45 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
10 to 45 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.25
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
10 to 45 Hz
0.25 + 0.5
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.25 + 0.5
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
10 to 45 Hz
0.5 + 1.0
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.5 + 0.5
1 to 10 kHz
10 + 2
45 to 500 Hz
0.5 + 0.5
500 Hz to 1 kHz
1.0 + 1.0
Max Current
Resolution
Six digits
Six digits
Six digits
Six digits
Frequency limited to 1 kHz with LCOMP on.
Frequency limited to 440 Hz with LCOMP on.
AC Current, Square Wave Characteristics (Typical)
Range
LCOMP
Risetime
Settling Time
Overshoot
I <6 A @ 400 Hz
off
25 μs
40 μs to 1 % of final value
<10 % for <1 V Compliance
3 A & 20 A Ranges
on
100 μs
200 μs to 1 % of final value
<10 % for <1 V Compliance
AC Current, Triangle Wave Characteristics (Typical)
Linearity to 400 Hz
0.3 % of p-p value, from 10 % to 90 % point
Aberrations
<1 % of p-p value, with amplitude >50 % of range
1-25
5522A
Operators Manual
1-26
Chapter 2
Preparing for Operations
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
Unpack and Inspect..............................................................................................
How to Replace the Mains Power Fuse ...............................................................
How to Select Line Voltage.................................................................................
How to Connect to Line Power............................................................................
How to Select Line Frequency.............................................................................
How to Contact Fluke ..........................................................................................
Placement.............................................................................................................
Cooling Considerations........................................................................................
Page
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-1
5522A
Operators Manual
2-2
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for unpacking and installing the Calibrator, selecting
the line voltage, replacing the fuse, and connecting to line power. Instructions for cable
connections other than line power can be found in the following chapters:
•
UUT (Unit Under Test) connections: Chapter 4, “Front Panel Operation”
•
IEEE-488 parallel interface connection: Chapter 5, “Remote Operation”
•
RS-232C serial interface connection: Chapter 5, “Remote Operation”
Unpack and Inspect
The calibrator is shipped in a container designed to prevent damage during shipping.
Inspect the calibrator carefully for damage and immediately report any damage to the
shipper. Instructions for inspection and claims are included in the shipping container.
When you unpack the calibrator, check for all the standard equipment listed in Table 2-1
and check the shipping order for any additional items ordered. Refer to Chapter 9,
“Accessories” for more information. Report any shortage to the place of purchase or to
the nearest Fluke Service Center (see “Service Information” in this section). A
performance test is provided in Chapter 7, “Maintenance.”
If reshipping the calibrator, use the original container. If it is not available, you can order
a new container from Fluke by indicating the Calibrator's model and serial number.
Table 2-1. Standard Equipment
Item
Model or Part Number
Calibrator
5522A
Line Power Cord
See Table 2-2 and Figure 2-2
5522A Getting Started Manual
3795091
5522A Operators Manual on CD-ROM
3795084
How to Replace the Mains Power Fuse
 Caution
To prevent possible damage to the product, verify the correct
fuse is installed for the selected line voltage setting. 100 V and
120 V, use 5.0 A/250 V time delay (slow blow); 200 V and 240 V,
use 2.5 A/250 V time delay (slow blow).
The line power fuse is accessible on the rear panel. The fuse rating is 5 A/250 V slow
blow fuse for the 100 V/120 V line voltage setting; 2.5 A/250 V slow blow fuse for the
220 V/240 V line voltage setting. Fuses that are not user replaceable are discussed in
Chapter 7, “Maintenance.”
To check or replace the fuse, refer to Figure 2-1 and proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect line power.
2. Open the fuse compartment by inserting a screwdriver blade in the tab located at the
left side of the compartment and gently pry until it can be removed with the fingers.
3. Remove the fuse from the compartment for replacement or verification. Be sure the
correct fuse is installed.
4. Reinstall the fuse compartment by pushing it back into place until the tab locks.
2-3
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Select Line Voltage
The calibrator arrives from the factory configured for the line voltage normally
appropriate for the country of purchase, or as specified at the time of your purchase order.
You can operate the Calibrator from one of four line voltage settings: 100 V, 120 V, 200
V, and 240 V (47 Hz to 63 Hz). To check the line voltage setting, note the voltage setting
visible through the window in the power line fuse compartment cover (Figure 2-1). The
allowed line voltage variation is 10% above or below the line voltage setting.
To change the line voltage setting, complete the following procedure:
1. Disconnect line power.
2. Open the fuse compartment by inserting a screwdriver blade in the tab located at the
left side of the compartment and gently pry until it can be removed with the fingers.
3. Remove the line voltage selector assembly by gripping the line voltage indicator tab
with pliers and pulling it straight out of its connector.
4. Rotate the line voltage selector assembly to the desired voltage and reinsert.
5. Verify the appropriate fuse for the selected line voltage (100 V/120 V, use 5 A/250 V
slow blow; 220 V/240 V, use 2.5 A/250 V slow blow) and reinstall the fuse
compartment by pushing it back into place until the tab locks.
How to Connect to Line Power
 Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury:
•
Connect an approved three-conductor mains power cord to
a grounded power outlet.
•
Make sure that the Product is grounded before use.
•
Do not use an extension cord or adapter plug.
The calibrator is shipped with the appropriate line power plug for the country of
purchase. If you need a different type, refer to Table 2-2 and Figure 2-2 for a list and
illustration of the line power plug types available from Fluke.
After you verify that the line voltage selection is set correctly and that the correct fuse for
that line voltage is installed, connect the calibrator to a properly grounded three-prong
outlet.
How to Select Line Frequency
The calibrator is shipped from the factory for nominal operation at 60 Hz line frequency.
If you are using 50 Hz line voltage, you should re-configure the Calibrator for optimal
performance at 50 Hz. To do so, from the front panel, go into SETUP, INSTMT SETUP,
OTHER SETUP, and then push the softkey under MAINS to change the selection to
50 Hz. Store the change. After the instrument is properly warmed up (on for 30 minutes
or longer), you must re-zero the complete instrument. For details, see the section on
“Zeroing the Calibrator” in Chapter 4.
2-4
Preparing for Operations
How to Select Line Frequency
2
MAINS
SUPPLY
FUSE
100V/12
0V
220V/24
T5.0A
250V (SB
0V
)
T2.5A
250V
CAUTIO
N FOR
WITH A
(SB)
250V FU FIRE PROT
EC
47Hz /63 SE OF INDICA TION REPLAC
TED RA
EO
600VA Hz
TING
MAX
CHASSI
GROUNS
D
WARNI
IS PROP NG: TO AV
OID
ERLY IN
STALLE PHYSICAL IN
JU
D BEFO
RE EN RY, INSURE
WARNI
ERGIZIN
TH
NG
G INST A
:
CONN
RU
ECTOR TO AVOID EL
EC
IN POW
ER CO TRIC SHOCK
RD MU
ST BE GROUNDING
CONN
ECTED
Line Voltage
Indicator
0V
(S
B)
Changing Line Fuse
Changing Line
Voltage
12
0
0
4
2
12
0
gjh004.eps
Figure 2-1. How to Access the Fuse and Select Line Voltage
Table 2-2. Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke
Type
Voltage/Current
Fluke Option Number
North America
120 V/15 A
LC-1
North America
240 V/15 A
LC-2
Universal Euro
220 V/15 A
LC-3
United Kingdom
240 V/13 A
LC-4
Switzerland
220 V/10 A
LC-5
Australia
240 V/10 A
LC-6
South Africa
240 V/5 A
LC-7
2-5
5522A
Operators Manual
LC-1
LC-2
LC-5
LC-3
LC-6
LC-4
LC-7
Figure 2-2. Line Power Cord Types Available from Fluke
nn008f.eps
How to Contact Fluke
To order accessories, receive operating assistance, or get the location of the nearest Fluke
distributor or Service Center, call:
USA:
1-888-99-FLUKE (1-888-993-5853)
Canada:
1-800-36-FLUKE (1-800-363-5853)
Europe:
+31 402-675-200
Japan:
+81-3-3434-0181
Singapore:
+65-738-5655
Anywhere in the world:
+1-425-446-5500
Or visit Fluke's Web site at www.fluke.com.
To register this product, visit http://register.fluke.com.
2-6
Preparing for Operations
Placement
2
Placement
 Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury,
make sure that the Product is grounded before use.
You may place the calibrator on a bench top or mount it in a standard-width, 24-inch
(61-cm) deep equipment rack. For bench-top use, the calibrator is equipped with nonslipping, non-marring feet. To mount the calibrator in an equipment rack, use the 5522A
Rack Mount Kit, Model Y5537. Instructions for rack mounting the calibrator are packed
with the rack mount kit.
Cooling Considerations
 Caution
To prevent damage to the Product, make sure the space around
the product meets minimum requirements.
Baffles direct cooling air from the fan throughout the chassis to internally dissipate heat
during operation. The accuracy and dependability of all internal parts of the calibrator are
enhanced by maintaining the coolest possible internal temperature. You can lengthen the
life of the calibrator and enhance its performance by observing the following rules:
•
The area around the air filter must be at least 3 inches from nearby walls or rack
enclosures.
•
The exhaust perforations on the sides of the calibrator must be clear of obstructions.
•
The air entering the instrument must be at room temperature: make sure the exhaust
air from another instrument is not directed into the fan inlet.
•
Clean the air filter every 30 days or more frequently if the calibrator is operated in a
dusty environment. (See Chapter 7, “Maintenance” for instructions on cleaning the
air filter.)
2-7
5522A
Operators Manual
2-8
Chapter 3
Features
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
Front-Panel Features ............................................................................................
Rear-Panel Features .............................................................................................
Softkey Menu Trees.............................................................................................
Page
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-1
5522A
Operators Manual
3-2
Introduction
This chapter is a reference for the functions and locations of the 5522A Calibrator's front
and rear-panel features. Please read this information before operating the calibrator. Front
panel operating instructions for the calibrator are provided in Chapter 4, “Front Panel
Operation”; remote operating instructions are provided in Chapter 5, “Remote
Operation”.
Front-Panel Features
Front-panel features (including all controls, displays, indicators, and terminals) are shown
in Figure 3-1. Each front-panel feature is described in Table 3-1.
Rear-Panel Features
Rear-panel features (including all terminals, sockets, and connectors) are shown in
Figure 3-2. Each rear-panel feature is described in Table 3-2.
Softkey Menu Trees
The Setup softkeys are identified in Figures 3-3 and 3-4. The Setup softkeys are
associated with the 5522A Calibrator front panel S key. The functions of the five
softkeys are identified by label information displayed directly above each key. The
softkey labels change during operation so that many different functions are quickly
accessible.
A group of softkey labels is called a menu. A group of interconnected menus is called a
menu tree. Figure 3-3 shows the SETUP menu tree structure; Figure 3-4 describes each
SETUP menu tree display. Table 3-3 shows the factory default settings for the SETUP
menu tree. To return the SETUP menus to their default values, use the softkey SETUP in
the Format NV Memory menu (see Figure 3-4, menu F).
3-3
5522A
Operators Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hz
SETUP
RESET
C
NEW
REF
CE
F
MEAS
TC
MORE
MODES
MULT
DIV
8
9
5522A CALIBRATOR
STBY
OPR
EARTH
EXGRD
7
8
9
PREV
MENU
SCOPE
p
dBm
m
n
4
5
6
1
2
3
M
+/
0
•
SHIFT
k
sec
V
W
F
A
p
ENTER
x
EDIT
FIELD
Figure 3-1. Front-Panel Features
POWER
gjh005.eps
Table 3-1. Front-Panel Features



3-4
Output Display
The Output Display is a two-line backlit LCD that shows output amplitudes, frequency and calibrator
status. Output values (or potential output values if in standby) are displayed using up to seven digits
plus a polarity sign. Output frequencies (or potential output frequencies if the 5522A is in standby)
are displayed using four digits. Calibrator status is indicated by displaying the following
abbreviations:
OPR
Displayed when an output is active at the front panel terminals.
STBY
Displayed when the 5522A is in standby.
u
When you change the output, a “u” (unsettled) is displayed until the output settles to
within the specified accuracy.
m
Displayed when the calibrator is making a measurement. (Thermocouple, pressure, and
impedance measurement features only.)
?
Displayed when the amplitude is specified as typical only, and/or reduced resolution. This
occurs when operating the 5522A in the extended bandwidth mode.
C
Displayed when the amplitude is specified as typical only, and/or reduced resolution. This
occurs when operating the 5522A in the extended bandwidth mode.
Control Display
The Control Display is a multipurpose backlit LCD used for displaying data entries, UUT error
adjustments, softkey labels, phase angles, watts, power factors, and other prompts and messages.
When there isn’t enough room on the Output Display, output frequency is displayed on the Control
Display. Softkey labels identify the function of the softkey directly below them. Several softkey labels
together are called a menu. The changing menus provide access to many different functions through
the five softkeys plus the PREV MENU key. (See Figure3-3, Softkey Menu Tree.)
Y
The STBY (Standby) key places the 5522A in standby mode. Standby mode is indicated by “STBY”
Features
Softkey Menu Trees
3
in the lower left corner of the Output Display. In standby mode, the NORMAL, AUX and 20A output
terminals are internally disconnected from the 5522A. The 5522A starts up in standby mode. The
5522A automatically switches to standby if one of the following occurs:
The RESET key is pressed.
A voltage ≥ 33 V is selected when the previous output voltage was less than 33 V.
Output function is changed, except when going between ac or dc voltage <33 V.
A current output above 3 A is selected. This is when the output location changes to the 20A
terminal.
An overload condition is detected.

O

Z
The OPR (Operate) key places the 5522A in operate mode. Operate mode is indicated by “OPR” in
the lower left corner of the Output Display and the lit indicator on the OPR key.
The EARTH (Earth Ground) key opens and closes an internal connection between the NORMAL LO
terminal and earth ground. An indicator on the key indicates when this connection is made. The
power-up default condition is earth disabled (indicator off).

a

B

P

Softkeys
The SCOPE (Oscilloscope) key activates or deactivates an oscilloscope calibration option if it is
installed. An indicator on the key indicates when the option is activated. If an oscilloscope calibration
option is not installed in the calibrator and the SCOPE key is pressed, the calibrator displays an
error message.
The EXGRD (External Guard) key opens and closes an internal connection between the internal
NORMAL LO signal ground and the internal guard shield. An indicator on the key indicates when
this connection is made. The power-up default condition is external guard disabled (indicator off)
The PREV MENU (Previous Menu) key recalls the previous set of menu choices. Each press of this
key backs up one level of the menu tree until the display indicates the top level menu selection of
the function selected.
The functions of the five unlabeled blue softkeys are identified by labels on the Control Display
directly above each key. The functions change during operation so that many different functions are
accessible through these keys. A group of softkey labels is called a menu. A group of interconnected
menus is called a menu tree.
3-5
5522A
Operators Manual
10
11
12
13
14
5522A CALIBRATOR
STBY
OPR
EARTH
7
8
9
EXGRD
p
dBm
m
n
4
5
6
PREV
MENU
SCOPE
k
sec
V
W
Hz
F
A
1
2
3
M
0
•
SHIFT
NEW
REF
CE
F
MEAS
TC
MORE
MODES
MULT
DIV
21
ENTER
20 19
x
EDIT
FIELD
RESET
C
p
+/
SETUP
18 17
Figure 3-1. Front-Panel Features (cont.)
POWER
16
15
gjh009.eps
Table 3-1. Front-Panel Features (cont.)

N

S

R
The NEW REF (New Reference) key is active during error mode operation, and establishes the
present output value as a new reference for meter error computation.
The SETUP (Setup Menu) key puts the 5522A in the setup mode, displaying the setup menu in the
Control Display. Setup options can be selected using the softkeys under the Control Display.
The RESET (Reset Calibrator) key aborts the current operating state of the 5522A and returns it to
the power-up default state, except when operating under remote control.

G

LeW
The CE (Clear Entry) key clears a partially completed keypad entry from the Control Display. If there
is a partially completed entry when CE is pressed, the output is unaffected.
The EDIT FIELD (Edit Output Display Field) key and associated left/right arrow keys provide step
adjustment of the output signals. If any of these keys are pressed or the knob is rotated, a digit on
the Output Display becomes highlighted and the output increments or decrements as the knob is
rotated. If a digit rolls past 0 or 9, the digit to its left or right is carried. An error display appears on
the Control Display, showing the difference between the original (reference) output and the new
output.
The L and W keys adjust the magnitude of changes by moving the highlighted digit. The
ekey allows you to move from voltage or current to frequency and back. In practice, for voltage
and current outputs, the knob and arrow keys are used to adjust output until the UUT reads
correctly. The error display then displays UUT deviation from the reference.
3-6
Features
Softkey Menu Trees

The power switch turns the power on and off. The switch is a latching push-push type. When the
switch is latched in, power is on.

m

D

X

U

Output Units Keys

3
The MORE MODES key provides access to the measure pressure function. You need a Fluke 700
Series pressure module to measure pressure
The DIV (Divide) key immediately changes the output to 1/10th reference value (not necessarily the
present output value) if the value is within performance limits. In the SCOPE mode, the DIV key
changes the output to the next lower range.
The MULT (Multiply) key immediately changes the output to 10X the reference value (not
necessarily the present output value) if the value is within performance limits. This key sets the
5522A to standby if this change is from below 33 V. In the SCOPE mode, the MULT key changes
the output to the next higher range.
The MEAS TC (Measure Thermocouple) key enables the TC (Thermocouple) input connection and
causes the 5522A to compute a temperature based on the voltage present at the input.
The output units keys determine the function of the 5522A. Some keys have a second unit if the
SHIFT key is pressed just before the units key. The output units are as follows:
V
Voltage or Decibels relative to 1 mW into 600 ohms
(impedance changeable).
A
Watts or Current
Q
Resistance
H
Frequency or Seconds (Seconds is applicable to the SCOPE
functions only)
F
Capcitance
C
Temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius
Multiplier Keys
Select output value multipliers. Some keys have a second function if the SHIFT key is pressed just
before the multiplier key. For example, if you enter 33, then SHIFT, then c, then F, then
ENTER, the 5522A output value is 33 pF. The multiplier keys are as follows:
c
milli (10-3 or 0.001) or micro (10-6 or 0.000001)
K
3
-9
kilo (10 or 1,000) or nano (10 or 0.000000001)
M
6
-12
mega (10 or 1,000,000) or pico (10 or 0.000000000001)
3-7
5522A
Operators Manual
5522A CALIBRATOR
STBY
OPR
EARTH
7
8
9
EXGRD
PREV
MENU
SCOPE
p
dBm
m
n
4
5
6
1
2
3
M
+/
0
•
SHIFT
k
sec
V
W
F
A
Hz
SETUP
C
NEW
REF
CE
F
MEAS
TC
MORE
MODES
MULT
DIV
p
32
31
30
29
ENTER
x
RESET
EDIT
FIELD
POWER
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
Figure 3-1. Front-Panel Features (cont.)
gjh010.eps
Table 3-1. Front-Panel Features (cont.)

E

b

Numeric Keypad

3-8
The ENTER key loads a newly entered output value shown on the Control Display into the 5522A,
which appears on the Output Display. The new value can come from the numeric keypad. If you
press ENTER without identifying the units for the entry, in most cases the 5522A keeps the units
that were last used. This allows you, for example, to enter 1 mV, and then later enter 10 to obtain 10
V. (The "V" units were saved from the last entry, but not the multiplier, "m".) In the Error (edit) mode,
ENTER with no value restores the output to the value of the reference
The SHIFT key selects alternate functions of the units keys and alternate multipliers of the multiplier
keys. These alternate selections are labeled with small letters in the upper left hand corner of the
keys
Used to enter the digits of the output amplitude and frequency. The proper sequence to enter a
value is to press the digits of the output value, a multiplier key (if necessary), an output units key,
then ENTER. For example, to obtain an output of 20 mV, you would press the following sequence of
keys: 20cV. Press O to enable the output. Pressing a digit key once the entry field is
full, and pressing the decimal point key more than once in a single number will sound the beeper.
I
The I (Polarity) key changes the polarity of the output for dc voltage or dc current functions.
Press the I key then E to toggle the output polarity.

The SCOPE TRIG (Scope Trigger) BNC connector is used to trigger the oscilloscope during
oscilloscope calibration. This is active only when an oscilloscope option is installed.

The SCOPE OUT (Oscilloscope) Type N connector is used for outputs during oscilloscope
calibration. This is active only when an oscilloscope calibration option is installed.
Features
Softkey Menu Trees
3
Table 3-1. Front-Panel Features (cont.)

The TC (Thermocouple) minijack is used for thermocouple simulation during thermometer
calibration, and thermocouple measurements. You must use the correct thermocouple wire and plug
when using this connector. For example, if simulating a type K thermocouple, use type K
thermocouple wire and type K plug for making connections


The 20A terminal is the source of current output when the 20 A range is selected (3 A - 20 A)

The GUARD terminal is always connected internally to the internal guard shield. This shield is tied to
the NORMAL LO signal ground inside the Calibrator unless the B key is pressed so that its
indicator is lit

The NORMAL (Normal Output) terminals are used for ac and dc voltage, ohms and capacitance
sourcing, and Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) simulation.
The AUX (Auxiliary Output) terminals are used for ac and dc current outputs, the second voltage
output in dual voltage modes, and ohms sense for 2-wire and 4-wire compensated resistance and
capacitance measurements, and RTD simulation
3-9
5522A
Operators Manual
1
2
3
4
NORMAL
ENABLE
INSTALLED
OPTIONS
- SC600
CALIBRATION
- SC1100
- PQ
SERIAL 2
TO UUT
FLUKE CORPORATION
EVERETT WA, USA
SERIAL 1
FROM HOST
IEEE-488
NO INTERNAL USER SERVICEABLE
PARTS. REFER SERVICE TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL
LR65268C
(LEM CERTIFIED)
MAINS SUPPLY
100V/120V
220V/240V
FUSE
T5.0A 250V (SB)
T2.5A 250V (SB)
CAUTION FOR FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE ONLY
WITH A 250V FUSE OF INDICATED RATING
47Hz /63Hz
600VA MAX
IN
CHASSIS
GROUND
WARNING: TO AVOID PHYSICAL INJURY, INSURE THAT THE FILTER
IS PROPERLY INSTALLED BEFORE ENERGIZING INSTRUMENT
10MHZ
OUT
TO CLEAN THE FILTER:
-UNPLUG INSTRUMENT
-REMOVE FILTER
-FLUSH WITH SOAPY WATER
-DRY BEFORE REINSTALLATION
5V PK - PK
MAX
WARNING:
TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK GROUNDING
CONNECTOR IN POWER CORD MUST BE CONNECTED
8
7
Figure 3-2. Rear-Panel Features
6
5
gjh011.eps
Table 3-2. Rear-Panel Features

The Fan Filter covers the air intake to keep dust and debris out of the chassis air baffles. The
5522A fan provides a constant cooling air flow throughout the chassis. Instructions for fan filter
maintenance are in Chapter 7, Maintenance.

The CALIBRATION NORMAL/ENABLE slide switch is used to write enable and disable the
nonvolatile memory that stores calibration constants. Switching to ENABLE allows changes to be
written into memory, and switching to NORMAL protects data in memory from being overwritten. The
switch is recessed to allow it to be covered with a calibration sticker to guarantee calibration
integrity.

The SERIAL 2 TO UUT connector is used for transmitting and receiving RS-232 serial data between
the 5522A and a Unit Under Test (UUT) or a Fluke 700 Series pressure module. Chapter 6, “Remote
Commands” describes how to use the RS-232 serial interface for UUT communications. Chapter 4
described how to measure pressure.

The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST connector is used for remote control of the 5522A and for transmitting
internal-constant RS-232 serial data to a printer, monitor, or host computer. Chapter 5, “Remote
Operation” describes how to use the RS-232 serial interface for remote control.

The 10 MHz IN BNC connector is for applying an optional external clock signal to the 5522A. This
replaces the normal internal 10 MHz clock signal in the 5522A. Frequency accuracy of the 5522A is
governed by the frequency accuracy of the clock signal internal or external.
The 10 MHz OUT BNC connector passes the internal or external 10 MHz clock signal to another
5522A to synchronize one or more slave 5522As to a master 5522A.

3-10
The IEEE-488 connector is a standard parallel interface for operating the 5522A in remote control as
a Talker/Listener on the IEEE-488 bus. Refer to Chapter 5, “Remote Operation” for bus connection
and remote programming instructions.
Features
Softkey Menu Trees
3
Table 3-2. Rear-Panel Features (cont.)

 Warning
To avoid shock hazard, connect the factory supplied threeconductor line power cord to a properly grounded power
outlet. Do not use a two-conductor adapter or extension
cord; this will break the protective ground connection.
Use the rear-panel CHASSIS GROUND terminal for a
protective grounding wire if there is any question about
the effectiveness of instrument earth grounding through
the line power cord ground wire.
The CHASSIS GROUND terminal is internally grounded to the chassis. If the 5522A is the location
of the ground reference point in a system, this binding post can be used for connecting other
instruments to earth ground. Refer to “Connecting the Calibrator to a UUT” in Chapter 4, “Front
Panel Operation” for details

The AC Power Input Module provides a grounded three-prong connector that accepts the line
power cord, a switch mechanism to select the operating line voltage, and a line power fuse. See
Chapter 2, “Preparing for Operation” for information on selecting the operating line voltage, and fuse
rating and replacement information.
3-11
5522A
Operators Manual
SETUP
Front Panel Key
A
B
W
X
F
Y
C
AA
Z
E
AC
AB
D
AD
G
AE
AG
AF
GI
G2
AJ
AK AL
AH
P
AF
R
Q
Next
Section
S
H
AH
O
S2
I
K
AF
S3
L
S1
T
M
U
N
V
Figure 3-3. Setup Softkey Menu Tree
3-12
gjh006.eps
Features
Softkey Menu Trees
3
A
to X
W
to G
to B
SHOW SPECS is an online summary of the programmed output specifications.
B
to AG
to F
to C
If self test does not pass, error codes are displayed. (See chapter 7, "Maintenance")
C
to E
to D
SERIAL # displays the serial number of the instrument. When corresponding with the factory,
always include the serial number of the instrument.
D
USER REPORT STRING CONTENTS refer to a string of characters entered by the user for
reporting purposes.
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays
gjh007.eps
3-13
5522A
Operators Manual
E
Actual revision numbers replace the numbers in each of the above.
F
Format NV (non-volatile) Memory should be used with caution. Changes are non-reversible. The
softkeys function only when the rear-panel CALIBRATION switch is set to ENABLE, except for the
softkey SETUP, which is not dependent on the CALIBRATION switch position.
All sets all calibration and setup constants to factory setting. CAL set only calibration constants
to factory settings. SETUP resets instrument setup to factory default settings (see Table 3-3).
G
to G1
to S
to P
to H
G1
G2
TMP STD (temperature degree standard) refers to its-90 (1990 International Temperature
Standard) (factory default) and ipts-68 (1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard).
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays (cont.)
3-14
gjh008.eps
Features
Softkey Menu Trees
3
H
to O
to K
to I
HOST selects the IEEE-488 (gpib) (factory default) parallel port or RS-232 (serial) port. You cannot
operate both IEEE-488 and RS-232 simultaneously.
I
STALL refers to the method of controlling data flow: software control (xon/off), hardware control
(rts/cts) or none.
K
to L
STALL refers to the method of controlling data flow: software control (xon/off), hardware control
(rts/cts) or none.
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays (cont.)
gjh030.eps
3-15
5522A
Operators Manual
L
to M
REMOTE I/F (Interface) has selections term (terminal) (factory default) and comp (computer). EOL
(End of Line character) is either Carriage Return/Line Feed (CRLF), CR (Carriage Return) or LF
(Line Feed).
M
to N
to K
EOF (End of File) indicates the action taken at the end of a file by entering one or two ASCII
characters.
N
EOF (End of File) ASCII characters are entered with a range of 000 to 255 (first character) and 000
to 255 (second character). The factory defaults are 012,000, where the FF (form feed) character
signals an advance to the next page, and the NULL (ignore) character holds position. When the
NULL character is 000 (^@), then effectively the EOF is only the FF character, or ^L for the factory.
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays (cont.)
3-16
gjh003.eps
Features
Softkey Menu Trees
3
O
GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus) selects the port address when using the IEEE-488 bus. The
factory default is 4.
P
to R
to Q
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS and DISPLAY CONTRAST apply to both the Output Display and Control
Display.
Q
levels 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
levels 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
There are eight levels of contrast, 0 to 7, for the Output Display and Control Display. Each may
have its own level of contrast. The factory defaults are 7 and 7.
R
levels 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
levels 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7
There are eight levels of brightness, 0 to 7, for the Output Display and Control Display. Each may
have its own level of contrast. The factory defaults are 1 and 0.
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays (cont.)
gjh031.eps
3-17
5522A
Operators Manual
S
to S1
to S2
to T
S1
S2
to S3
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays (cont.)
3-18
gjh032.eps
Features
Softkey Menu Trees
3
S3
T
to V
to U
The values set here become the new limits and can be changed only with new entries or
returned to factory defaults using Format NV Memory SETUP (see menu F).
U
V
W
SHOW SPECS is an online summary of the programmed output specifications.
X
to Y
to AC
to AA
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays (cont.)
gjh012.eps
3-19
5522A
Operators Manual
Select the desired CAL (Calibration) feature: CAL to calibrate the 5522A (see the Service
Manual); CAL DATES to review when the 5522A Calibrator was last calibrated;
CAL REPORTS to printout the calibration data.
Y
to Z
Z
to X
AA
to AB
AB
AC
(Only if scope
option installed)
to AE
to AD
5522A CAL opens the calibration menu. Refer to the Service Manual for instructions.
ZERO zeros the 5522A Calibrator. OHMS ZERO zeros the ohms portion of the 5522A
Calibrator; ERR ACT (Error Action) set backup, abort, or cont (continue).
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays (cont.)
3-20
gjh013eps
Features
Softkey Menu Trees
3
AD
to AF
GO ON and ABORT softkeys are used in the 5522A Calibrator calibration procedure. See the
Service Manual for more information.
(Only if scope
option installed)
AE
to AF
AF
to AG
AG
to AH
to AJ
AH
Figure 3-4. SETUP Softkey Menu Displays (cont.)
gjh033.eps
3-21
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 3-3. Factory Defaults for SETUP Menus Power-Up Defaults
Parameter
User report string (*PUD
string)
Cleared.
D
Error units
> 0.1%
G1
SC-600 option overload test
safety timeout
10 s
G1
Temperature standard
its-90
G1
Host interface
gpib (IEEE-488)
G1
UUT serial interface
8 bits, 1 stop bit, xon/xoff, parity none,
9600 baud
I
Host serial interface
term, 8 bits, 1 stop bit, xon/xoff, parity
none, 9600 baud, CRLF, 012,000
K, L, M, N
GPIB Port Address
4
O
Display brightness (Note)
level 1,0
P
Display contrast (Note)
level 7,7
P
dBm impedance
600 Ω
S
Pressure units
psi
S
RTD type
pt385
S1
Thermocouple type
K
S1
Phase reference
0.00°
S3
10 MHz reference clock
internal
S2
Current limits
±20.5 A
U
Voltage limits
±1020 V
V
Note:
Output Display and Control Display, respectively. There are 8 levels: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, and 7
3-22
SETUP Menu
(Figure 3-4.)
Setting
Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
How to Turn on the Calibrator.............................................................................
Warming up the Calibrator ..................................................................................
How to Use the Softkeys .....................................................................................
How to Use the Setup Menu ................................................................................
How to Use the Instrument Setup Menu .........................................................
Utility Functions Menu....................................................................................
How to Use the NV Memory Menu ................................................................
How to Reset the Calibrator.................................................................................
How to Zero the Calibrator ..................................................................................
Operate and Standby Modes ................................................................................
How to Connect the Calibrator to a UUT ............................................................
Recommended Cable and Connector Types....................................................
When to Use EARTH and EXGRD ................................................................
Earth ............................................................................................................
External Guard ............................................................................................
Four-Wire versus Two-Wire Connections ......................................................
Four-Wire Connection ................................................................................
Two-Wire Compensation ............................................................................
Compensation Off .......................................................................................
Cable Connections Instructions .......................................................................
RMS Versus p-p Amplitude.................................................................................
Auto Range Versus Locked Range ......................................................................
How to Set Output ...............................................................................................
How to Set DC Voltage Output.......................................................................
How to Set AC Voltage Output.......................................................................
How to Set DC Current Output .......................................................................
How to Set AC Current Output .......................................................................
How to Set DC Power Output .........................................................................
How to Set AC Power Output .........................................................................
How to Set a Dual DC Voltage Output ...........................................................
How to Set a Dual AC Voltage Output ...........................................................
How to Set Resistance Output .........................................................................
How to Set Capacitance Output.......................................................................
How to Set Temperature Simulation (Thermocouple) ....................................
How to Set Temperature Simulation (RTD)....................................................
How to Measure Thermocouple Temperatures ...............................................
Waveform Types..................................................................................................
Page
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-26
4-29
4-30
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-38
4-39
4-41
4-1
5522A
Operators Manual
Sine Wave........................................................................................................
Triangle Waves................................................................................................
Square Wave....................................................................................................
Truncated Sine Wave ......................................................................................
How to Set Harmonics .........................................................................................
How to Adjust the Phase......................................................................................
How to Enter a Phase Angle............................................................................
How to Enter a Power Factor ..........................................................................
How to Enter a DC Offset....................................................................................
Editing and Error Output Settings........................................................................
How to Edit the Output Setting .......................................................................
How to Display the UUT Error .......................................................................
How to Use Multiply and Divide ....................................................................
How to Set Output Limits ....................................................................................
How to Set Voltage and Current Limits ..........................................................
How to Measure Pressure ....................................................................................
How to Synchronize the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN/OUT ...............................
How to Use an External 10 MHz Clock ..........................................................
How to Source AC Current and Parallel-Connected 5522As..........................
Three-Phase Power Calibration .......................................................................
Sample Applications ............................................................................................
How Calibrate an 80 Series Digital Multimeter ..............................................
Cables..........................................................................................................
EARTH Connection ....................................................................................
How to Test the Meter.................................................................................
How to Calibrate the Meter.........................................................................
How to Test a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer.....................................
How to Test Watts, VA, VAR Performance ...............................................
How to Test Harmonics Volts Performance ...............................................
How to Test Harmonics Amps Performance...............................................
How to Calibrate a Fluke 51 Thermometer .....................................................
How to Test the Thermometer ....................................................................
How to Calibrate the Thermometer.............................................................
4-2
4-41
4-42
4-42
4-43
4-43
4-44
4-46
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-48
4-49
4-50
4-50
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-52
4-53
4-54
4-55
4-55
4-56
4-56
4-56
4-60
4-60
4-60
4-62
4-63
4-64
4-64
4-65
Introduction
 Warning
The Calibrator is capable of supplying lethal voltages. To avoid
shock hazard, do not make connections to the output terminals
when any voltage is present. Placing the instrument in standby
may not be enough to avoid shock hazard, since the O key
could be pressed accidentally. Press the R key and verify
that the Calibrator is in standby before making connections to
the output terminals.
This chapter presents instructions for operating the Calibrator from the front panel. For a
description of front panel controls, displays, and terminals, see Chapter 3, “Features.”
How to Turn on the Calibrator
 Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury,
make sure that the product is grounded before use.
Caution
Before turning the Calibrator on, make sure that the line voltage
selection is set properly. Refer to “Selecting Line Voltage” in
Chapter 2 to check the line voltage setting.
When the Calibrator is powered, the initial display is “Starting Up...” (see below) and it
completes a self-test routine. If a self-test fails, the Control Display identifies an error
code. For a description of error codes, see Chapter 7, “Maintenance.”
4-3
5522A
Operators Manual
nn062f.eps
After self-test, the control display shows the reset condition (below).
nn063f.eps
For a discussion of the softkey selection shown above (auto/locked), see “Auto Range
Versus Locked Range” later in this chapter.
Warming up the Calibrator
When you turn on the Calibrator, allow a warm-up period of at least 30 minutes for the
internal components to stabilize. This ensures that the calibrator meets or exceeds the
specifications listed in Chapter 1.
If you turn the Calibrator off after warm-up and then on again, allow a warm-up period of
at least twice the length of time it was turned off (maximum of 30 minutes). For example,
if the calibrator is turned off for 10 minutes and then on again, allow a warm-up period of
at least 20 minutes.
How to Use the Softkeys
The five keys just to the right of the P (Previous Menu) key are called softkeys.
Softkey key functions are based on the label that appears directly above the key in the
Control Display. Pressing a softkey either changes a value or causes a submenu with new
selections to appear on the Control Display. Softkey menus are arranged in varying
levels, as described in “Softkey Menu Tree” in Chapter 3. You can move backwards to
previous menu selections by repeatedly pressing P. Although pressing R will also
return you to the top level menu, it will also reset all volatile settings and return the
Calibrator to 0 V dc in the standby mode. Use the P key as your main navigating tool
for moving around the menu levels.
How to Use the Setup Menu
Press the front panel S key for access to various operations and changeable
parameters. Most parameters are nonvolatile, meaning they will be saved during reset or
when power is turned off. Chapter 3 shows a map of the menu tree, lists the parameters,
and has a table of factory default settings.
When you press S from the power-up state, the display changes as follows:
4-4
Front Panel Operation
How to Use the Setup Menu
4
nn064f.eps
This is the primary instrument setup menu. The list below describes submenus available
through each softkey and tells you where you can find further information in the manuals.
•
CAL (Calibration) Opens the calibration menu. You use softkeys in this menu to
view the calibration dates, print a calibration report, and perform calibration, and to
run the Zero calibration routine. Zero calibration is described later in this chapter.
•
SHOW SPECS (Show Specifications) Displays published Calibrator specifications
for the output value that is currently selected.
•
INSTMT SETUP (Instrument Setup) Lets you change the power-up or reset default
setting for various instrument parameters. Many of the same parameters in this menu
can be changed during operation, but the changes you make during operation are
volatile. Changing them here makes them nonvolatile. To restore factory defaults,
use the Format NV Memory menu under the UTILITY FUNCTNS menu.
•
UTILITY FUNCTNS (Utility Functions) Allows you to initiate self-tests, format
the nonvolatile memory (restore factory default settings), and review the instrument
configuration software versions and user report string. These features are explained
under “Utilities Function Menu” later in this chapter.
How to Use the Instrument Setup Menu
The softkeys in the instrument setup menu (accessed by pressing INSTMT SETUP
softkey in the Setup Menu) are shown below.
nn065f.eps
The list below describes submenus accessed by each softkey.
• OTHER SETUP Opens a menu that lets you toggle the degree reference between
the 1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard (ipts-68) and the 1990
International Temperature Standard (its-90) (factory default). This is also where you
set the clock, and set the power-up and reset defaults for the SC-600 Oscilloscope
Calibration Options’s Overload test safety timeout function (OVLD T), and
displayed error units. You may also configure the instrument for best operation with
a 50 Hz line frequency.
• OUTPUT SETUP Opens a menu to change the power-up and reset defaults for
current and voltage output limits, default thermocouple and RTD types, set the phase
reference, internal or external phase reference source, impedance for dBm display,
and pressure units.
• DISPLAY SETUP Opens submenus to set the brightness and contrast of both the
Control Display and Output Display.
• REMOTE SETUP Allows you to change the configuration of the two RS-232
ports, SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT, and IEEE-488 General
Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). (See Chapter 5, “Remote Operation” for more
information.)
4-5
5522A
Operators Manual
Utility Functions Menu
The Setup Menu softkey labeled UTILITY FUNCTNS (Utility Functions) provides
access to Self Test, Format Nonvolatile Memory, and Instrument Configuration.
nn066f.eps
•
SELF TEST This softkey opens a menu with calibrator self-test choices.
•
FORMAT NV MEM (Format Nonvolatile Memory) Opens a menu to restore all or
part of the data in the nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) to factory defaults.
•
INSTMT CONFIG (Instrument Configuration) Allows you to view the versions of
software installed in the calibrator as well as the user-entered report string.
How to Use the NV Memory Menu
 Caution
Use with extreme care. The format nonvolatile memory menu
softkeys permanently erase calibration constants. Pressing
ALL or CAL invalidates the state of calibration of the 5522A.
Pressing FORMAT NV MEM in the utility functions menu opens the following:
nn067f.eps
The ALL and CAL softkeys in this menu require the rear-panel CALIBRATION switch
to be in the ENABLE position. The nonvolatile memory contains calibration constants
and dates, setup parameters, and the user report string. In the case of calibration
constants, factory defaults are the same for all Calibrators. They are not the calibration
constants obtained when the Calibrator was calibrated by the factory before shipment.
The softkeys are:
4-6
•
ALL replaces the entire contents of the EEPROM with factory defaults. This would
be used by service personnel after replacing the EEPROM, for example. It is not
required in normal use.
•
CAL replaces all calibration constants with factory defaults but leaves all the setup
parameters unchanged. This is also not required in normal use.
•
SETUP replaces the setup parameters with factory defaults (Table 3-3) but leaves
the state of calibration unchanged. You do not have to break the calibration sticker
for this operation. Remote commands can also change the setup parameters. (See
these commands in Chapter 6: SRQSTR, SPLSTR, *PUD, SP_SET, UUT_SET,
TEMP_STD, DATEFMT, PRES_UNIT_D, RTD_TYPE_D, TC_TYPE_D, LIMIT.)
Front Panel Operation
How to Reset the Calibrator
4
How to Reset the Calibrator
At any time during front panel operation (not remote operation), you can return the
Calibrator to the power-up state by pressing R, except after an error message, which is
cleared by pressing a blue softkey. Pressing the R key does the following:
•
Returns the calibrator to the power-up state: 0 V dc, standby, 330 mV range and all
OUTPUT SETUP menus set to their most recent default values.
Clears the stored values for limits and error mode reference.
How to Zero the Calibrator
Zeroing recalibrates internal circuitry, most notably dc offsets in all ranges of operation.
To meet the specifications in Chapter 1, zeroing is required every seven days, or when
the Calibrator ambient temperature changes by more than 5 °C. The tightest ohms
specifications are maintained with a zero cal every 12 hours within ±1 °C of use. The
Calibrator displays a message when it is time to zero the calibrator. Zeroing is
particularly important when your calibration workload has 1 mΩ or 1 μV resolution, and
when there has been a significant temperature change in the Calibrator work
environment. There are two zeroing functions: total instrument zero (ZERO) and ohmsonly zero (OHMS ZERO).
Complete the following procedure to zero the calibrator. (Note: The Calibrator rear-panel
CALIBRATION switch does not have to be enabled for this procedure.)
1. Turn on the Calibrator and allow a warm-up period of at least 30 minutes.
2. Press the R key.
3. Press the S key, opening the setup menu (below).
nn068f.eps
4. Press the CAL softkey, opening the calibration information menu (below).
nn069f.eps
5. Press the CAL softkey, opening the calibration activity menu (below). SCOPE CAL
appears as an option if it is installed.
gjh034.eps
6. Press the ZERO softkey to totally zero the Calibrator; press the OHMS ZERO
softkey to zero only the ohms function. After the zeroing routine is complete (several
minutes), press the R key to reset the calibrator. For a total zero calibration, a
short circuit capable of passing 20 A needs to be applied between the 20A and AUX
LO terminals.
4-7
5522A
Operators Manual
Operate and Standby Modes
When the OPERATE annunciator is lit and OPR is displayed, the output value and
function shown on the Output Display is active at the selected terminals. When STBY is
displayed in the Output Display, all calibrator outputs are open-circuited except for the
front panel thermocouple (TC) terminals. To enable the operate mode, press O. To
place the calibrator in standby, press S.
If the calibrator is operating and any of the following events occur, the calibrator
automatically goes into the standby mode:
•
The R key is pressed.
•
A voltage ≥33 V is selected when the previous output voltage was less than 33 V.
•
Output function is changed between ac or dc voltage when the output voltage is
≥33 V; ac or dc current; temperature and any other function; resistance and any other
function; capacitance and any other function.
•
A p-p voltage output (square wave, triangle wave, or truncated sine wave) changes to
rms voltage output ≥33 V (sine wave). For example, if a p-p output of 40 V is
changed to rms output of 40 V by changing the wave form using the WAVE softkey,
the calibrator goes into the standby mode.
•
The output location for current is changed from AUX to 20 A, or vice versa.
•
An overload condition is detected.
How to Connect the Calibrator to a UUT
 Warning
The Calibrator is capable of supplying lethal voltages. Do not
make connections to the output terminals when a voltage is
present. Placing the instrument in standby may not be enough
to avoid shock hazard, since the O key could be pressed
accidentally. Press reset and verify that the STBY annunciator
appears on the Control Display before making connections to
the output terminals.
The outputs labeled NORMAL (HI and LO) are used to source voltages, resistances,
capacitance and simulate resistance temperature detector (RTD) outputs. The LO
terminal connects to the analog signal ground inside the guard shield. This signal line
may or may not be tied to the guard shield and/or to chassis ground, depending on the
settings of the Z and B keys. See “When to Use EARTH and EXGRD” on the next
page for an explanation of these internal connections.
The outputs labeled AUX (HI and LO) source current and low voltages in the dual
voltage function. These outputs are also used for four-wire or remote sensing in the
resistance, capacitance and RTD functions.
When an oscilloscope calibration option is installed, the BNC connectors labeled SCOPE
OUT and TRIG deliver signals for oscilloscope calibration.
The socket labeled TC is used to measure thermocouples and to generate simulated
thermocouple outputs.
4-8
Front Panel Operation
How to Connect the Calibrator to a UUT
4
Recommended Cable and Connector Types
 Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury, do
not touch exposed metal on banana plugs, they can have
voltages that could cause death.
Cables to the calibrator are connected to the NORMAL and AUX terminals. To avoid
errors induced by thermal voltages (thermal emfs), use connectors and conductors made
of copper or materials that generate small thermal emfs when joined to copper. Avoid
using nickel-plated connectors. Optimum results can be obtained by using Fluke Model
5440A-7002 Low Thermal EMF Test Leads, which are constructed of well-insulated
copper wire and tellurium copper connectors. (See Chapter 9, “Accessories.”)
When to Use EARTH and EXGRD
Figure 4-1 shows the internal connections made by the Z and B keys.
Chassis ground
Internal guard shield
NORMAL LO
signal ground
EXGRD
Lit = open
Safety ground
through
ac line cord
EARTH
Not lit = open
GUARD
binding
post
NORMAL LO
binding
post
Figure 4-1. EARTH and EXGRD Internal Connections
nn003f.eps
Earth
The Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal is normally isolated from earth
(chassis) ground. When it is desired to make a connection between the NORMAL LO
terminal and earth ground, press the Z key, lighting the key annunciator. When the
earth key is pressed, the NORMAL LO terminal is connected to earth ground through
approximately 30 Ω.
To avoid ground loops and noise you must have only one earth ground-to-LO terminal
connection in the system. Usually you make all signal ground connections at the UUT
and verify the Z annunciator is off. Generally, Z is on only for ac and dc volts
where the UUT is isolated from earth ground. There must, however, be a safety ground
for the Calibrator. See “Connecting to Line Power” in Chapter 2. When enabled by the
4-9
5522A
Operators Manual
sourced output, a softkey LOs appears, which allows you to tie or open an internal
connection between the NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal. When tied and
Z is on, then both LO terminals are tied to chassis ground.
External Guard
The guard is an electrical shield, isolated from the chassis, that protects the analog
circuitry. The guard provides a low-impedance path for common-mode noise and ground
loop currents. The internal guard is connected to NORMAL LO through approximately
30 Ω. There is normally an internal connection between the guard and the NORMAL LO
terminal. By pressing the B key, you break this internal connection, which allows you
to connect a lead from the GUARD terminal to earth ground on another instrument in an
interconnected system. Use this external guard connection whenever you are testing a
UUT that has a grounded LO terminal. Remember to always maintain only one earth
ground tie point in a system.
Four-Wire versus Two-Wire Connections
Four-wire and two-wire connections refer to methods of connecting the Calibrator to the
UUT to cancel out test lead resistance to assure the highest precision of the calibration
output. Figures 4-2 through 4-4 illustrate the connection configurations for resistance;
Figures 4-5 and 4-6 illustrate connection configurations for capacitance. The external
sensing capability of the four- and two-wire compensated connections provides increased
precision for resistance values below 110 kΩ and capacitance values 110 nF and above.
Part of the setting up the calibrator output for resistance and capacitance includes
selections for four-wire compensation (COMP 4-wire), two-wire compensation (COMP
2-wire) and two-wire no compensation (COMP off). (See “Setting Resistance Output”
and “Setting Capacitance Output” later in this chapter.) Note that compensated
connections for capacitance are to compensate for lead and internal resistances, not for
lead and internal capacitances.
Four-Wire Connection
The four-wire connection is typical for calibrating laboratory measurement equipment.
Increased precision is provided for resistance values below 110 kΩ. For other values, the
lead resistances do not degrade the calibration and the Calibrator changes the
compensation to off (COMP off).
Two-Wire Compensation
The two-wire connection is typical for calibrating precision handheld Digital Multimeters
(DMMs) with a two-wire input. Increased precision is provided for resistance values
below 110 kΩ and capacitance values 110 nF and above. For other values, the Calibrator
changes the compensation to off (COMP off).
Compensation Off
Compensation off is a typical connection for calibrating handheld analog meters or
DMMs with a two-wire input. This connection is used for all values of resistance and
capacitance and is usually selected when the analog meter or DMM level of accuracy
does not require the additional precision. This is the default condition whenever an ohms
or capacitance output is made, following an output that was not ohms or capacitance.
Cable Connections Instructions
Table 4-1 indicates a figure reference for each type of connection between a UUT and the
Calibrator, referencing Figures 4-2 through 4-10.
When calibrating Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs) using the three-terminal
connection shown in Figure 4-9, be sure the test leads have identical resistances to cancel
any errors due to lead resistance. This can be accomplished, for example, by using three
identical test lead lengths and identical connector styles.
4-10
Front Panel Operation
How to Connect the Calibrator to a UUT
4
When calibrating thermocouples, it is especially important to use the correct hookup wire
and miniconnector between the Calibrator front panel TC terminal and the UUT. You
must use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of thermocouple.
For example, if simulating a temperature output for a type K thermocouple, use type K
thermocouple wire and type K miniplugs for the hookup.
To connect the calibrator to a UUT, proceed as follows:
1. If the calibrator is turned on, press R to remove the output from the calibrator
terminals.
2. Make the connections to the UUT by selecting the appropriate figure from Table 4-1.
For capacitance outputs, null out stray capacitance by connecting the test leads to the
UUT, routing them (but not connecting) to the Calibrator on a non-conductive surface.
Null out the reading on the UUT using “rel,” “offset,” or “null,” whichever method
applies, and then connect the test leads to the Calibrator.
Table 4-1. UUT Connections
5522A Output
Resistance
Capacitance
DC Voltage
AC Voltage
DC Current
AC Current
RTD Simulation
Thermocouple Simulation
Figure Reference
4-2 Resistance - four-wire compensated
4-3 Resistance - two-wire compensated
4-4 Resistance - compensation off
4-5 Capacitance - two-wire compensated
4-6 Capacitance - compensation off
4-7 DC Voltage/AC Voltage
4-7 DC Voltage/AC Voltage
4-8 DC Current/AC Current
4-8 DC Current/AC Current
4-9 Temperature (RTD)
4-10 Temperature (Thermocouple)
Note:
See the discussion under “Four-Wire versus Two-Wire Connections” above.
4-11
5522A
Operators Manual
5522A CALIBRATOR
UUT
SENSE
W 4-WIRE
INPUT
HI
HI
LO
LO
A
SENSE
SOURCE
UUT
5522A
SOURCE
SENSE
Figure 4-2. UUT Connection: Resistance (Four-Wire Compensation)
87
MIN MAX
5522A CALIBRATOR
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
RANGE
gjh014.eps
HOLD H
REL
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
A
mA A
COM
V
UUT
5522A
Figure 4-3. UUT Connection: Resistance (Two-Wire Compensation)
4-12
gjh015.eps
Front Panel Operation
How to Connect the Calibrator to a UUT
87
4
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
MIN MAX
5522A CALIBRATOR
RANGE
REL
HOLD H
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
COM
mA A
A
V
UUT
5522A
Figure 4-4. UUT Connection: Resistance (Compensation Off)
87
MIN MAX
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
RANGE
REL
gjh016.eps
5522A CALIBRATOR
HOLD H
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
A
mA A
COM
V
Figure 4-5. UUT Connection: Capacitance (Two-Wire Compensation)
gjh017.eps
4-13
5522A
Operators Manual
87
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
MIN MAX
RANGE
REL
5522A CALIBRATOR
HOLD H
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
mA A
A
COM
V
gjh018.eps
Figure 4-6. UUT Connection: Capacitance (Compensation Off)
87
MIN MAX
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
RANGE
REL
5522A CALIBRATOR
HOLD H
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
A
mA A
COM
V
Figure 4-7. UUT Connection: DC Voltage/AC Voltage
4-14
gjh019.eps
Front Panel Operation
How to Connect the Calibrator to a UUT
87
MIN MAX
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
RANGE
REL
4
5522A CALIBRATOR
HOLD H
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
A
mA A
COM
V
gjh020.eps
Figure 4-8. UUT Connection: DC Current/AC Current
CHART RECORDER INPUT
5522A CALIBRATOR
Figure 4-9. UUT Connection: Temperature (RTD)
gjh021.eps
4-15
5522A
Operators Manual
5522A CALIBRATOR
51 K/J THERMOMETER
ON/OFF
F/C
HOLD
OFFSET
!
60V
24V
MAX
Connection wiring must match thermocouple type, e.g., K, J, etc.
Figure 4-10. UUT Connection: Temperature (Thermocouple)
gjh022.eps
RMS Versus p-p Amplitude
The Calibrator ranges for sinusoidal ac functions are specified in rms (root-mean-square;
the effective value of the wave form). For example, 1.0 to 32.999 mV, 33 to 329.999 mV,
0.33 to 3.29999 V and so forth. The sine wave outputs are in rms, while the triangle
wave, square wave, and truncated sine wave outputs are in p-p. The relationship between
p-p and rms for the non-sine wave types are as follows:
• Square wave
p-p x 0.5000000 = rms
• Triangle wave
p-p x 0.2886751 = rms
• Truncated Sine wave
p-p x 0.2165063 = rms
While the ac function ranges are directly compatible for sine waves, the rms content of
the other waveforms is less apparent. This characteristic leads to subtle calibrator range
changes. For example, if you enter a sine wave voltage of 6 V (rms assumed), the
selected range is 3.3 to 32.9999 V. If you then use the softkeys to change from a sine
wave to a triangle wave, for example, the display changes from 6 V rms to 6 V p-p. This
translates to 6 V p-p x 0.2886751 = 1.73205 V rms, and the range switches to 0.33 to
3.29999 V. The Output Display shows the range change because the sine wave voltage is
displayed as 6.0000, the resolution for the 3.3 to 32.9999 V range, while the triangle
wave is displayed as 6.00000, the resolution for the 0.33 to 3.29999 V range.
You need to know the active range to enter the correct values for voltage offset because
the maximum offsets are range specific. For example, the maximum peak signal for the
3.3 to 32.9999 V range is 55 V while the maximum peak signal for the 0.33 to 3.29999 V
range is 8 V. This means in the example above, the 6 V rms sine wave could have offsets
applied up to the maximum peak signal of 55 V because the active range is 3.3 to
32.9999 V, while the 6 V p-p triangle wave could have offsets applied up to the
maximum peak signal of 8 V because the active range is 0.93 to 9.29999 V. See
“Specifications” in Chapter 1 and “Entering a DC Offset” later in this chapter for more
information about dc offset voltages.
4-16
Front Panel Operation
Auto Range Versus Locked Range
4
Auto Range Versus Locked Range
A softkey is provided to toggle between the ranging method auto or locked. This feature
is available only for single-output dc volts and dc current outputs.
nn063f.eps
When auto is selected (the default setting), the calibrator automatically selects the range
that provides the best output resolution. When locked is selected, the calibrator locks the
selected range and will not change ranges when you are editing the output, or entering
new outputs. Values lower or higher than the locked range are not allowed. The locked
selection is usually made when you do not want range changes that may cause a small
perturbation in the output, e.g., when checking the linearity of a given multimeter range.
How to Set Output
Setting the calibrator output is similar to entering values into a calculator: press the keys
that represent the value you desire and then press a units key to identify which of the
volts, amps, hertz, etc. you want the value to represent. The control display indicates the
value and units you select as you type them into the calibrator. Once you are satisfied
with the value and units, press E. If the output display indicates STBY, press O
to output the selection. The display of a small “u” (unsettled) in the Output Display
indicates the calibrator is allowing for its internal circuitry to settle.
For example, to set the output to 10 V dc, press:
1→0→V→E→O
To set the output to 20 V ac at 60 Hz press:
2→0→V→6→0→H→E→O
To change the output to dc, press:
0→H→E or I→E
Step-by-step procedures are provided for each output function as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DC voltage
AC voltage
DC current
AC current
DC power
AC power
Dual DC voltage
Dual AC voltage
Capacitance
Temperature - RTD
Temperature - Thermocouple
Resistance
4-17
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Set DC Voltage Output
Complete the following procedure to set a dc voltage output at the front panel NORMAL
terminals. If you make an entry error, press Gto clear the display, then reenter the
value.
 Caution
To prevent damage to the UUT, Verify the applied voltage to the
UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the
interconnecting wiring.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “Connecting the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure dc voltage on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output
(maximum seven numeric keys). For example, 123.4567.
Note
At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above (nominal), you may notice a
slight high-pitched sound. This is normal.
5. Press I to select the polarity of the voltage (default is +)
6. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
7. Press V.
8. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. For example,
123.4567 mV (below).
nn071f.eps
9. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn072f.eps
10. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
A softkey label for range appears on the Control Display in the dc voltage function:
4-18
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
nn063f.eps
•
Range (Operating Range) selects autorange (auto) or lock (locked) for the present
range. When auto (the default setting) is selected, the calibrator automatically selects
the range that provides the best output resolution. When locked is selected, the
calibrator will not change ranges when you are editing the output. The locked
selection is usually made when you do not want range changes that may cause a
small perturbation in the output, e.g., when checking the linearity of a given
multimeter range.
How to Set AC Voltage Output
You may select an ac voltage output in volts or as a power output in dBm, where dBm is
10 log(Pout/.001) , where Pout is expressed in watts. The output range is 1 mV to
1000 V. When selecting dBm outputs, the Calibrator calculates dBm at a selected
impedance level. Based on this, the formula is:
20 log(V) - 10 log(Impedance * .001) = dBm.
Complete the following procedure to set an ac voltage output at the front panel
NORMAL terminals. If you make an entry error, press G to clear the display, then
reenter the value.
 Caution
To prevent damage to the UUT, verify the applied voltage to the
UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the
interconnection wiring.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “Connecting the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure ac voltage on the desired range.
Output in volts Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage
output (maximum six numeric keys). For example, 2.44949.
Output in dBm Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired power
output (maximum six numeric keys). For example, 10.0000. For a power output less than
1 mW (negative dBm values), press I to append the numeric entry with the negative
(−) symbol.
When you press the dBm key, the right most softkey becomes active. This allows the
dBm value and output impedance to be entered as a unit.
When output is entered in dBm, the Control Display appears as follows:
4-19
5522A
Operators Manual
nn227f.eps
Note
At voltage outputs of 100 V and above (nominal), you may notice a slight
high-pitched sound. This is normal.
1. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
2. Output in volts. Press V.
Output in dBm. Press b V. Select an impedance for dBm from a list on the
Control Display using the rightmost softkey.
3. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. For example,
2.44949 V (below).
nn073f.eps
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output
(maximum five numeric keys). Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example,
press the kilo multiplier key K. The press the H key. For example, 1.1234 kHz
(below).
nn074f.eps
5. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
4-20
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
nn075f.eps
6. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
Several softkey labels appear on the Control Display in the ac voltage function,
depending on which waveform is selected: DUTY, OFFSET and WAVE.
nn076f.eps
•
•
•
•
DUTY (Duty Cycle) When the square wave is selected, DUTY appears, allowing
you to modify the duty cycle of the square wave. The range is 1.00 to 99.00 %. The
default is 50.00 %. The duty cycle must be 50.00 % if you want to enter an OFFSET
(see below).
OFFSET (Voltage Offset) appears when the desired output is less than 33 V (sine
waves), 65 V (square waves) or 93 V (triangle waves and truncated sine waves). This
softkey allows you to add a positive or negative dc offset voltage to the ac output
signal. See “Entering a DC Offset” later in this chapter for more information. When a
voltage output is expressed in dBm, voltage offset is not available. You can enter an
offset for a square wave output only when the duty cycle is 50.00 % (see DUTY
above).
Φ & REF MENUS (Phase Difference and 10 MHz reference source.) Selects the
phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs, selects internal or
external 10 MHz reference, and sets the phase difference between an external master
Calibrator (using 10 MHz IN/OUT) and the NORMAL output. See “Adjusting the
Phase” and “Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN/OUT” later in this
chapter.
WAVE (Waveform) allows you to select one of four different types of waveforms:
sine wave, triangle wave, square wave, and truncated sine wave. (See “Waveform
Types” later in this chapter for more information). Whenever a non-sinusoidal
waveform is selected, the Output Display shows Pp (p-p). Only sine wave is allowed
for output in dBm.
4-21
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Set DC Current Output
Complete the following procedure to set a dc current output between AUX HI and LO or
AUX 20A and LO, depending on the current level selected. Current greater than ±3 A is
sourced between the AUX 20A and LO terminals. If you make an entry error, press G
to clear the display, then reenter the value.
Note
See Figure 1-4 in Chapter 1 for a chart that shows duration or duty cycle
limitations for current greater than 11 A. If the duration or duty cycle is
exceeded, the Calibrator will shut down abruptly. After a cool-off period,
the Calibrator will work normally.
1. Press R to clear any output from the calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “How to Connect the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure dc current on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output
(maximum six numeric keys). For example, 234.567.
5. Press I to select the polarity of the current (default is +).
6. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
7. Press A.
8. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. For example,
234.567 mA.
nn077f.eps
9. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn078f.eps
10. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
A range softkey appears on the Control Display in the dc current function (operating
range). This selects autorange (auto) or lock (locked) for the present range. When auto
(the default setting) is selected, the calibrator automatically selects the range that
provides the best output resolution. When locked is selected, the calibrator will not
change ranges when you are editing the output. The locked selection is usually made
when you do not want range changes that may cause a small perturbation in the output,
e.g., when checking the linearity of a given multimeter range.
Another softkey appears: OUTPUT. When you select 20 A for this parameter, or you
select a current above 3 A, the calibrator switches to standby, and you must change the
test lead to the 20A terminal and press O to activate the output.
4-22
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
How to Set AC Current Output
Complete the following procedure to set an ac current output at the AUX or 20A
terminals. If you make an entry error, press G to clear the display, then reenter the
value.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator,
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “Connecting the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure ac current on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output
(maximum six numeric keys). For example, 123.456.
5. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
6. Press A.
7. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. For example,
123.456 mA (below).
nn079f.eps
8. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output
(maximum five numeric keys). Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example,
press the kilo multiplier key K. Then press the H key. For example,
1.1234 kHz (below).
nn080f.eps
9. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn081f.eps
10. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
4-23
5522A
Operators Manual
nn321f.eps
•
Φ & REF MENUS (Phase Difference and 10 MHz reference source.) Selects the
phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs, selects internal or
external 10 MHz reference, and sets the phase difference between an external master
5522A (using 10 MHz IN/OUT) and the NORMAL output. See “Adjusting the
Phase” and “Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN/OUT” later in this
chapter.
•
LCOMP turns inductive compensation on and off. Inductive compensation is
available for frequencies up to 1 kHz at outputs up to 239.999 mA, and for
frequencies up to 440 Hz above 239.999 mA.
•
OUTPUT shows whether the output is on the AUX or 20A terminals. Outputs 3A or
above are always on the 20A terminals.
•
WAVE (waveform) selects one of four different types of waveforms: sine wave,
triangle wave, square wave, and truncated sine wave. (See “Waveform Types” later
in this chapter for more information). Whenever a non-sinusoidal waveform is
selected, the Output Display will convert the RMS reading to p-p (PP).
How to Set DC Power Output
Note
Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the
Calibrator, via the “LO”s softkey selection “tied.”
The calibrator produces a dc power output by sourcing a dc voltage on the NORMAL
outputs and a dc current on the AUX outputs. Complete the following procedure to set a
dc power output. If you make an entry error, press Gone or more times to clear the
display, then reenter the value.
 Caution
To prevent damage to the UUT, verify the applied voltage to the
UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the
interconnecting wiring.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “Connecting the
4-24
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
Calibrator to a UUT” by adapting the voltage and current connections.
3. Set the UUT to measure dc power on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output
(maximum seven numeric keys). For example, 123.4567.
Note
At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above (nominal), you may notice a
slight high-pitched sound. This is normal.
5. Press I to select the polarity of the voltage (default is +).
6. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
7. Press V.
8. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry. For example,
123.4567 mV (below).
nn071f.eps
9. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output
(maximum six numeric keys). For example, 234.567.
10. Press I to select the polarity of the current (default is +).
11. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
12. Press A.
13. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries. For example,
123.4567 mV and 234.567 mA (below).
nn082f.eps
14. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn083f.eps
15. Press O to activate the calibrator output. When changing power output levels, you
must reenter both voltage and current (in either order).
(Enter voltage or current and then a watts entry value using bA. The remaining
volts or current value is calculated and displayed.)
4-25
5522A
Operators Manual
nn322f.eps
•
•
I OUT selects AUX or 20A terminals. Current outputs 3 A or above are always on
the 20A terminals.
“LO”s ties or opens a connection between front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO
terminals. The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals must be tied
together either at the UUT or at the Calibrator. The default is tied.
How to Set AC Power Output
Note
Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT, or at the
Calibrator via the “LO”s softkey selection “tied.” For optimum phase
performance, tie the LO terminals at the UUT. At current levels >2.2 A, tie
the terminals at the UUT using heavy gauge wire >10 mΩ resistance.
The calibrator produces an ac power output by sourcing an ac voltage on the NORMAL
outputs and an ac current on the AUX outputs.
See “Setting AC Voltage Output” above for information on selecting an ac voltage output
in dBm; this procedure assumes an ac voltage output in volts.
Complete the following procedure to set an ac power output. If you make an entry error,
press G one or more times to clear the display, then reenter the value.
 Caution
To prevent damage to the UUT, verify the applied voltage to the
UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the
interconnecting wiring.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “Connecting the
Calibrator to a UUT.” (Adapt the voltage and current connections to suit your
application.)
3. Set the UUT to measure ac power on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output
(maximum six numeric keys). For example, 123.456.
Note
At voltage outputs of 100 volts and above (nominal), you may notice a
slight high-pitched sound. This is normal.
5. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
6. Press V.
7. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage entry. For example,
123.456 mV (below).
4-26
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
nn084f.eps
8. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired current output
(maximum six numeric keys). For example, 234.567.
9. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
10. Press A.
11. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage and current entries.
For example, 123.456 mV and 234.567 mA (below).
nn085f.eps
12. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output
(maximum five numeric keys). Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example,
press the kilo multiplier key K. Then press the H key. For example,
1.1234 kHz.
13. The Control Display now shows your entries. For example, 123.456 mV and
234.567 mA at 1.1234 kHz (below).
nn086f.eps
14. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn087f.eps
15. Press O to activate the calibrator output. When changing power output levels, you
must reenter both voltage and current (in either order).
(Enter voltage or current and then a watts entry value using EA. The remaining
volts or current value is calculated and displayed.)
Three softkey labels appear on the Control Display: WAVE MENUS, I OUT (AUX or
20A terminals), and LCOMP (off or on). The Control Display also shows the real power
output for sine waves. Power out is computed as Power = Cosine Φ (Volts x Current)
where Φ is the phase difference between the volts and current waveforms. Cosine Φ is
also known as the Power Factor (PF).
4-27
5522A
Operators Manual
nn088f.eps
4-28
•
WAVE MENUS (Waveform Menus) Opens submenus for selecting the type of
harmonic, waveform, front panel LO terminal condition, and phase.
•
HARMONIC MENUS (Harmonic Frequency Menus) Opens submenus for
selecting harmonic outputs. See “Setting Harmonics” later in this chapter.
•
V WAVE (Voltage Waveform) Selects the waveform for the voltage output at the
NORMAL terminals. See “Waveform Types” later in this chapter.
•
I WAVE (Current Waveform) Selects the waveform for the current output at the
front panel AUX terminals. See “Waveform Types” later in this chapter.
•
“LO”s (Low Potential Output Terminals) The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX
LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the Calibrator. When tied
at the UUT, select “open.” The default is tied.
•
Φ & REF MENUS (Phase Difference and 10 MHz reference source.) Selects the
phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs, selects internal or
external 10 MHz reference, and sets the phase difference between an external master
5522A (using 10 MHz (IN/OUT) and the NORMAL output. See “Adjusting the
Phase” and “Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz ON/OUT” later in this
chapter.
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
How to Set a Dual DC Voltage Output
Note
Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the
Calibrator, via the “LO”s softkey selection “tied.”
The calibrator produces a dual dc voltage output by sourcing one dc voltage on the
NORMAL outputs and a second on the AUX terminals. Complete the following
procedure to set a dual dc voltage output. If you make an entry error, press G one or
more times to clear the display, then reenter the value.
 Caution
To prevent damage to the UUT, verify the applied voltage to the
UUT does not exceed the rating of the UUT insulation and the
interconnecting wiring.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “How to Connect the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure dual dc voltage on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at
the NORMAL terminals (maximum seven numeric keys). For example, 123.4567.
5. Press I to select the polarity of the voltage (default is +).
6. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
7. Press V.
8. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entry for the NORMAL
terminals. For example, 123.4567 mV (below).
nn071f.eps
Note
Voltage on the AUX output is limited to 3.3 V maximum.
9. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at
the AUX terminals (maximum six numeric keys). For example, 234.567.
10. Press I to select the polarity of the voltage (default is +).
11. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
12. Press V.
13. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries for the NORMAL
terminals (upper reading) and AUX terminals (lower reading) (see below).
nn089f.eps
4-29
5522A
Operators Manual
14. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn090f.eps
15. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
A softkey labeled “LO”s appears on the Control Display.
nn091f.eps
•
“LO”s (Low Potential Output Terminals) The front panel NORMAL LO and AUX
LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the Calibrator. When the
front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are tied at the UUT, select “open”
with the “LO”s softkey. If the NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are not tied at
the UUT, select “tied” with the “LO”s softkey. The default is tied.
How to Set a Dual AC Voltage Output
Note
Tie the terminals NORMAL LO and AUX LO together at the UUT or at the
Calibrator, via the “LO”s softkey selection “tied.”
The calibrator produces a dual ac voltage output by sourcing one ac voltage on the
NORMAL outputs and a second on the AUX terminals.
Complete the following procedure to set a dual ac voltage output. If you make an entry
error, press G one or more times to clear the display, then reenter the value.
 Caution
Verify the applied voltage to the UUT does not exceed the rating
of the UUT insulation and the interconnecting wiring.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “Connecting the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
3. Set the UUT to measure dual ac voltage on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at
the NORMAL terminals (maximum six numeric keys). For example, 123.456.
5. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
6. Press V.
7. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your voltage entry. For example,
4-30
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
123.456 mV (below).
nn084f.eps
Note
The AUX output is limited to 3.3 V rms for sine waves, 6.6 V p-p for square
waves, 9.3 V p-p for triangle and truncated sine waves.
8. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired voltage output at
the AUX terminals (maximum six numeric keys). For example, 234.567.
9. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press c.
10. Press V.
11. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your entries for the NORMAL
terminals (upper reading) and AUX terminals (lower reading) (below is typical).
nn092f.eps
12. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired frequency output
(maximum five numeric keys). Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example,
press the kilo multiplier key K. Then press the H key. For example,
1.1234 kHz.
13. The Control Display now shows your voltage and frequency entries. For example,
123.456 mV and 234.567 mV at 1.1234 kHz (below).
nn093f.eps
14. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn094f.eps
15. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
Two softkey labels appear on the Control Display: V@NOR/V@AUX and WAVE
MENUS.
4-31
5522A
Operators Manual
nn095f.eps
•
V @ NOR (Voltage at NORMAL Terminals) V @ AUX (Voltage at AUX
Terminals) This is an information-only softkey position and does not have an
associated function. It shows the output function is dual ac voltage.
•
WAVE MENUS (Waveform Menus) Opens submenus for selecting the type of
harmonic, waveform, front panel LO terminal condition, and phase.
•
•
•
•
•
4-32
HARMONIC MENUS (Harmonic Frequency Menus) Opens submenus for
selecting harmonic outputs. See “Setting Harmonics” later in this chapter for
more information.
WAVE (Normal Waveform) Selects the waveform for the voltage at the front
panel NORMAL terminals. See “Waveform Types” later in this chapter for more
information.
AUXWAVE (Auxiliary Waveform) Selects the waveform for the voltage at the
front panel AUX terminals. See “Waveform Types” later in this chapter for more
information.
“LO”s (Low Potential Output Terminals) The front panel NORMAL LO and
AUX LO terminals must be tied together either at the UUT or at the Calibrator.
When the front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are tied at the UUT,
select “open” with the “LO”s softkey. If the NORMAL LO and AUX LO
terminals are not tied at the UUT, select “tied” with the “LO”s softkey. The
default is tied.
Φ & REF MENUS (Phase Difference and 10 MHz reference source.) Selects
the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX outputs, selects internal
or external 10 MHz reference, and sets the phase difference between an external
master 5522A (using 10 MHz IN/OUT) and the NORMAL output. See
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
“Adjusting the Phase” and “Synchronizing the Calibrator using 10 MHz
IN/OUT” later in this chapter.
How to Set Resistance Output
Complete the following procedure to set a synthesized resistance output at the Calibrator
front panel NORMAL terminals. If you make an entry error, press G to clear the
display, then reenter the value.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “Connecting the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
Note
Since this is a synthesized output, be sure the terminal connections from the
Calibrator to the UUT are LO to LO and HI to HI.
3. Set the UUT to measure resistance on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired resistance output
(maximum six numeric keys). For example, 12.3456.
5. Press a multiplier key, if necessary. For example, press K.
6. Press Q.
7. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your resistance entry. For example,
12.3456 kΩ (below).
nn096f.eps
8. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn097f.eps
9. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
The softkeys allow selection of three lead-compensation settings and ohms zero.
nn098f.eps
4-33
5522A
Operators Manual
•
OHMS ZERO Press to recalibrate internal circuitry for the ohms function (allow
several minutes).
•
COMP (Compensation) Applies 4-wire compensation, 2-wire compensation or turns
compensation off. Compensation is available for resistances up to (but not including)
110 kΩ. See “Four-Wire versus Two-Wire Connections” earlier in this chapter for
more information.
How to Set Capacitance Output
Complete the following procedure to set a synthesized capacitance output at the front
panel NORMAL terminals. If you make an entry error, press Gto clear the display,
then reenter the value.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “How to Connect the
Calibrator to a UUT.” Also refer to “Cable Connection Instructions” for a procedure
to null out stray capacitances due to the test cable connections.
Note
Since this is a synthesized output, be sure the terminal connections from the
Calibrator to the UUT are LO to LO and HI to HI.
3. Set the UUT to measure capacitance on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired capacitance output
(maximum five numeric keys). For example, 123.45.
5. Press a multiplier key (preceded with the b key) for the desired output. For
example, press b then c for μF. The other multiplier keys include M for pF
and K for nF.
6. Press F.
7. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your capacitance entry. For
example, 123.45 μF (below).
nn099f.eps
8. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn100f.eps
9. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
The softkey in the Control Display labeled COMP allows you to select one of three leadcompensation settings.
4-34
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
nn101f.eps
•
COMP (Compensation) Applies 2-wire compensation or turns compensation off.
Compensation refers to methods of connecting the Calibrator to the UUT to cancel
out test lead resistance (NOT capacitance). Compensation is available for
capacitances of 110 nF and above. This softkey will not function below 110 nF. See
“Four-Wire versus Two-Wire Connections” earlier in this chapter for more
information.
How to Set Temperature Simulation (Thermocouple)
Note
Thermocouples have no electrical isolation.Make sure the thermocouple
wire and plug are not affected by extraneous temperature sources. For
example, do not place your fingers on the thermocouple plug or wire when
simulating a temperature.
Thermocouples generate a small dc voltage at specific temperatures. The simulated
output, therefore, is a small dc voltage based on the selected temperature and type of
thermocouple being simulated. To toggle the temperature reference between the 1968
International Provisional Temperature Standard (ipts-68) and the 1990 International
Temperature Standard (its-90), see “How to Use the Instrument Setup Menu.”
Complete the following procedure to set a simulated thermocouple temperature output at
the Calibrator front panel TC connector. If you make an entry error, press Gto clear
the display, then reenter the value.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “Connecting the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
Note
You must use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of
thermocouple. For example, if simulating a temperature output for a type K
thermocouple, use type K thermocouple wire and type K miniconnectors.
3. Set the UUT to measure temperature on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired temperature output
(maximum 6 numeric keys). For example, 123.456.
5. For an output in °C, press the C key. For an output in °F, press and then the C
key.
6. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your temperature output. For
example, 123.456 °C (below).
4-35
5522A
Operators Manual
nn102f.eps
7. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
nn103f.eps
8. Press O to activate the calibrator output. Four softkey labels appear on the Control
Display.
Note
The entered temperature will be cleared to 0 °C (32 °F) if you change
between tc and rtd, or change the type of thermocouple (except for a type B
thermocouple, which clears to 600 °C C). If this should occur, select
OUTPUT tc, the desired thermocouple TYPE, and then reenter the
temperature.
4-36
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
nn104f.eps
•
Out@TC terminal (Output at the front panel TC terminals) Displays the actual dc
voltage at the front panel TC terminals. This is a display only, not a softkey function.
•
TC MENUS (Thermocouple Menu) Shows submenus for thermocouple outputs.
•
•
•
UNITS (Temperature Units) Selects °C or °F as the temperature unit.
REF SRC (Reference Source) Selects intrnl (Internal) or extrnl (External)
temperature reference source. Select intrnl when the selected thermocouple has
alloy wires and you are using the isothermal block internal to the Calibrator.
Select extrnl when using an external isothermal block, and when the selected
thermocouple has copper wires. Press the REF softkey to enter the value of the
external temperature reference. The best accuracy is obtained when you use
extrnl and the external isothermal block is maintained at 0 °C.
REF (Temperature Reference) Displays the value of the temperature reference.
When the Reference Source is Internal, the display shows the internal reference,
4-37
5522A
Operators Manual
•
•
or NONE if the Calibrator is in Standby. When the Reference Source is External,
the display shows the value you entered for external reference.
OUTPUT (Temperature Output Device) Selects the temperature device:
thermocouple (tc) or resistance temperature detector (rtd). Select tc.
TYPE (Thermocouple Type) Selects the thermocouple type simulated by the
Calibrator. The default is type K. (The 10 μV/°C and 1 mV/°C settings are used
as an accurate output voltage source for user-supplied linearizations.)
Note
The “u” indicator that occasionally appears in the Output Display
indicates an internal adjustment to the measured isothermal block
temperature and is normal. If it appears for more than 10 seconds
(nominal), or if it appears to flash continuously, check to see that you are
not externally heating the thermocouple miniconnector or wires.
How to Set Temperature Simulation (RTD)
RTDs have a characteristic resistance at specific temperatures. The simulated output,
then, is a resistance value based on the selected temperature and type of RTD being
simulated. To toggle the degree reference between the 1968 International Provisional
Temperature Standard (ipts-68) and the 1990 International Temperature Standard (its-90),
see “How to Use the Instrument Setup Menu” earlier in this chapter.
Complete the following procedure to set a simulated RTD temperature output at the front
panel NORMAL terminals. If you make an entry error, press G to clear the display,
then reenter the value.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the UUT as described earlier in this chapter under “How to Connect the
Calibrator to a UUT.”
Note
When calibrating Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs) using the
three-terminal connection shown in Figure 4-9, be sure the test leads have
identical resistances to cancel any errors due to lead resistance. This can
be accomplished, for example, by using three identical test lead lengths and
identical connector styles.
3. Set the UUT to measure temperature on the desired range.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired temperature output
(maximum 6 numeric keys). For example, 123.456.
5. For an output in °C, press the C key. For °F, press b and then the C key.
6. The Control Display now shows the amplitude of your temperature output. For
example, 123.456 °C (below).
nn102f.eps
7. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the Control Display and copies it
into the Output Display (below is typical).
4-38
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Output
4
nn103f.eps
8. Press O to activate the calibrator output.
Four softkey labels appear on the Control Display. Press the OUTPUT softkey to toggle
the rtd selection, displaying the rtd setup menu and four softkey positions.
Note
The temperature you entered above will be cleared to 0 °C (32 °F) if you
change between tc (thermocouple) and rtd (resistance temperature
detector), or change the type of rtd. If this occurs, select OUTPUT rtd, the
desired rtd TYPE, and then reenter the temperature following steps 4 to 8.
nn105f.eps
•
Out @ NORMAL displays the location of the output terminals (always NORMAL)
for rtd connections.
•
TYPE (RTD Type) selects the rtd curve from a list.
•
OUTPUT (Temperature Output Device) Selects the temperature device:
thermocouple (tc) or resistance temperature detector (rtd). Select rtd.
•
COMP (Compensation) Applies 4-wire compensation, 2-wire compensation or turns
compensation off. Compensation refers to methods of connecting the Calibrator to
the UUT to cancel out test lead resistance. See “Four-Wire versus Two-wire
Connections” earlier in this chapter for more information. For the 3-lead connection
(Figure 4-9) select COMP off.
How to Measure Thermocouple Temperatures
Complete the following procedure to measure the output of a thermocouple connected to
the TC input. If you make an entry error, press G to clear the display, then reenter.
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Connect the thermocouple to the front panel TC connector.
Note
Use thermocouple wire and miniconnectors that match the type of
thermocouple. For example, type K wire and type K miniconnectors.
4-39
5522A
Operators Manual
3. Press U to display the TC menus (below).
nn106f.eps
4. The measured temperature appears in the Output Display (below is typical). (The
lower-case m blinks on when a measurement is being taken.)
nn107f.eps
4-40
•
Meas@TC terminal (Measurement at the front panel TC terminals) Displays the
actual dc voltage at the front panel TC terminals. This is a display only, not a softkey
function.
•
TC MENUS (Thermocouple Menus) Opens the submenus supporting thermocouple
Front Panel Operation
Waveform Types
4
outputs.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open TCD (Open Thermocouple Detect) Selects on or off for the Open TCD
feature. When Open TCD is on, a small electrical pulse checks for thermocouple
continuity that, in most cases, will have no effect on the measurement. If you are
measuring the thermocouple with the Calibrator in parallel with another
temperature measuring device, select off for Open TCD. When an open
thermocouple is detected, “Open TC” is displayed in the TC menu, providing
positive identification of the fault.
UNITS (Temperature Units) Selects °C or °F as the temperature unit.
REF SRC (Reference Source) Selects intrnl (Internal) or extrnl (External)
temperature reference source. The reference source indicates the ambient
temperature contribution to the thermocouple output, which is taken into account
when simulating an accurate temperature output. Select intrnl when the selected
thermocouple has alloy wires and you are using the isothermal block internal to
the Calibrator. Select extrnl when using an external isothermal block, and when
the selected thermocouple has copper wires. Press the REF softkey to enter the
value of the external temperature reference.
REF (Temperature Reference) Displays the value of the temperature reference.
When the Reference Source is Internal, the display shows the internal reference.
When the Reference Source is External, the display shows the value you entered
for external reference.
OFFSET (Measurement Display Offset) Selects an offset value to be added or
subtracted from the actual measurement. This is useful for differential
measurements (temperatures above and below a desired temperature).
TYPE (Thermocouple Type) Selects the thermocouple type used for
measurement. The default is K. (The 10μV/°C setting is used for customersupplied linearizations. 1 mV/%RH and 1 mV/°C settings are used for the
Vaisala humidity/temperature probes.)
Waveform Types
AC voltage, ac current, dual ac voltage, and ac power functions provide a softkey to
select between four different waveform types: sine wave (sine), triangle wave (tri), square
wave (square), and truncated sine wave (truncs). When the calibrator output is sine wave
ac power or dual ac voltage, the Control Display shows additional softkeys for harmonics
and fundamental frequencies.
Sine Wave
When the wave selection is sine, a sine wave current or voltage signal is present on the
calibrator outputs (Figure 4-11). The variables for the sine wave are amplitude,
frequency, and dc offset voltage.
4-41
5522A
Operators Manual
Peak
RMS (70% Peak)
Period
Figure 4-11. Sine Wave
nn026f.eps
Triangle Waves
When the wave selection is tri, the triangle wave is present on the calibrator outputs
(Figure 4-12). The variables for the triangle wave are amplitude, frequency, and dc offset
voltage. Whenever a triangle wave is selected, the Output Display indicates amplitudes in
p-p units.
Peak to Peak
Figure 4-12. Triangle Wave
nn027f.eps
Square Wave
When the wave selection is square, a square wave current or voltage signal is present on
the calibrator outputs (Figure 4-13). The variables for the square wave are duty cycle,
amplitude, frequency, and dc offset voltage. Whenever a square wave is selected, the
Output Display indicates amplitude in p-p units. If the calibrator is set for a single voltage
or current output, the duty cycle of the signal can be set through the keypad. To enter a
new duty cycle, press the DUTY CYCLE softkey and up to five numeric keys followed
by E. The negative-going edge of the square wave will move based on the duty
cycle setting.
4-42
Front Panel Operation
How to Set Harmonics
4
Period
Peak to Peak
Decrease Duty Cycle
Increase Duty Cycle
Figure 4-13. Square Wave and Duty Cycle
nn028f.eps
Truncated Sine Wave
When the wave selection is truncs, a truncated sine wave current or voltage signal is
present on the calibrator outputs (Figure 4-14). The variables for the truncated sine wave
are amplitude and frequency. Whenever a truncated sine wave is selected, the Output
Display indicates amplitudes in p-p units.
1/2 Period
Peak to Peak
67.5°
112.5°
Figure 4-14. Truncated Sine Wav
nn029f.eps
How to Set Harmonics
When the calibrator is outputting dual ac voltages or ac power (sine waves only), the
calibrator sources two signals with adjustable harmonic difference, with a maximum
harmonic frequency output of 10 kHz. For example, a 120 V, 60 Hz signal can be set on
the front panel NORMAL terminals, and a 1 V, 300 Hz (5th harmonic) output on the
AUX terminals. The fundamental can be configured on either the NORMAL or the AUX
terminals, with the harmonic output on the opposite terminals. Note that the maximum
AUX output is 3.3 V, while the maximum NORMAL output is 1000 V. Unless both the
fundamental and harmonic frequencies are allowed for the given amplitude, the output is
not allowed.
Complete the following procedure to enter a harmonic output. This procedure assumes
you have already sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output.
1. Press the softkey WAVE MENUS, opening the waveform menu.
2. Press the softkey HARMONIC MENUS, opening the harmonic submenu (below is
typical).
4-43
5522A
Operators Manual
nn108f.eps
3. Press the softkey FUNDMTL to select the Calibrator front panel terminals for the
fundamental output, either NORMAL or AUX. The harmonic appears on the AUX
terminals.
4. Press the softkey HARMNIC to enter the desired harmonic (1 to 50), with a
maximum frequency output of 10 kHz. For example, entering the 7th harmonic
(below). When the control display shows the desired value, press E.
nn109f.eps
5. Press P one or more times to return to previous menus.
How to Adjust the Phase
When in the dual ac voltage and ac power output modes, you can set the calibrator to
source two signals with adjustable phase difference. All phase adjustments shift the AUX
waveform in relation to the NORMAL waveform. Phase shift adjustments are entered
either as degrees (0 to ±180.00) or as a power factor (PF). A leading or positive phase
shift causes the AUX waveform to lead the NORMAL waveform; a lagging or negative
phase shift causes the AUX waveform to lag the NORMAL waveform.
The softkey PHASE is available after pressing the WAVE MENUS softkey that appears
when outputting dual ac voltages or ac power (shown below for ac power output)
4-44
Front Panel Operation
How to Adjust the Phase
4
gjh070.eps
When one output is a harmonic of the other, the phase shift is based on the phase angle or
power factor (cosine) of the harmonic signal. For example, when the AUX output is
4-45
5522A
Operators Manual
generating a 60-Hz signal, and the NORMAL output is generating a 120 Hz (2nd
Harmonic) signal, a phase shift of 60° (PF of .5) would move the AUX signal 60° of
120 Hz (30° of 60 Hz).
How to Enter a Phase Angle
Complete the following procedure to enter a phase shift in degrees. This procedure
assumes you have already sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output.
1. Press the softkey WAVE MENUS, opening the harmonic menu.
2. Press the softkey Φ & REF MENUS, opening the phase and reference entry menu.
3. Press the softkey AUXΦNRM, opening the phase entry menu.
4. Press the numeric keys and decimal point key to enter the desired phase angle
(maximum five numeric keys). For example, 123.45.
5. Press I to select leading (+) or lagging (−) phase shift (default is +).
6. The Control Display now shows the value of your entry. For example, a leading
phase angle of 123.45 degrees (below). (SHOW PF appears only for sine waves.)
nn111f.eps
7. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the “New phase =” line and
copies it to the “Phase =” line of the Control Display.
8. Press G one or more times to return to previous menus.
How to Enter a Power Factor
Complete the following procedure to enter a phase shift as a power factor (PF).
PF = Cosine Φ, where Φ is the phase shift. This procedure assumes you have already
sourced a dual ac voltage or ac power output using sine waves as the waveform.
1. Press the softkey WAVE MENUS, opening the waveform menu.
2. Press the softkey PHASE, opening the phase entry menu.
3. Press the softkey SHOW PF, opening the power factor entry menu.
4. Press the decimal point key and numeric keys to enter the desired power factor
(maximum three numeric keys). For example, .678.
5. Press the softkey PF to toggle between a leading (lead) or lagging (lag) power factor
(default is lead).
6. The Control Display now shows the value of your entry. For example, a leading
power factor of .678 (below).
4-46
Front Panel Operation
How to Enter a DC Offset
4
nn112f.eps
7. Press E. The calibrator clears your entry from the “New pf=” line and copies it
to the “Power Factor =” line of the Control Display.
8. Press P one or more times to return to previous menus.
How to Enter a DC Offset
When the calibrator single output is an ac voltage of sine waves, triangle waves, square
waves or truncated sine waves, you can apply a +dc offset. When applying an offset to
square wave outputs, the duty cycle must be 50.00 % (default). The offset selection is
entered using the softkey OFFSET, which appears when the ac voltage output is less than
33 V (sine waves), 66 V p-p (square waves) or 93 V p-p (triangle waves and truncated
sine waves). The softkey OFFSET will not appear and offsets may not be entered when
the output is a voltage sine wave measured in dBm.
The maximum offset value allowed depends on the maximum offset and maximum peak
signal for each range. For example, a square wave output of 10 V p-p is within the range
6.6 to 65.9999 V p-p, a range that allows a maximum peak signal of 55 V. For this
example, the square wave peak value is 5 V, thus allowing a maximum ±offset of 50 V
for a maximum peak signal of 55 V.
Check the specifications in Chapter 1 for offset limits. If you are using an offset voltage
and you cause the output to move into a range where offset is not allowed (for example,
above 33 V for a sine wave output), the calibrator will go into the standby mode and the
offset function will be disabled.
Complete the following procedure to enter a dc voltage offset. If you make an entry error,
press G to clear the display, then reenter the value. This procedure assumes you have
already sourced a single ac voltage output not exceeding 33 V (sine waves), 65 V p-p
(square waves) or 93 V p-p (triangle waves and truncated sine waves), thus displaying the
softkey OFFSET (below).
nn113f.eps
1. Press the softkey WAVE to select the desired waveform: sine waves (sine), triangle
waves (tri), square waves (square) or truncated sine wave (truncs).
2. Press the softkey OFFSET, opening the offset entry display. Enter the desired offset
using the numeric keys and decimal point key. For example, 0.123 V (below).
4-47
5522A
Operators Manual
nn114f.eps
3. Press the E key to enter the offset and then P.
Editing and Error Output Settings
All Calibrator outputs can be edited using the front panel Edit Field knob and associated
L, W, and e keys. In addition, multiply X and divide D keys edit the
output by decades. The difference between the original output (reference) and edited
output is displayed as an “error” between the two settings. This allows you to edit a value
to achieve a correct reading at the UUT and thereby calculate an error in ±% or ppm
(parts per million) if it is less than ±1000 ppm. Table 4-2 lists the actions that cause the
calibrator to exit the error mode and return to the original reference output, or to output a
new reference, as selected.
Table 4-2. Keys That Exit Error Mode
Keys
Action
E
Returns to the previous reference value.
I or E
Establishes a new reference.
A new keypad entry + E
Establishes a new reference.
N
Establishes the present output as a new reference.
X
Sets the calibrator to ten times the reference value and establishes a new
reference.
D
Sets the calibrator to one-tenth the reference value and establishes a new
reference.
R
Returns to the power-up state.
How to Edit the Output Setting
When you initially source an output from the Calibrator, you enter a specific value. For
example, 10.00000 V dc. To edit the output value to suit your application, turn the front
panel Edit Field knob clockwise to increase the value or counter-clockwise to decrease
the value. (The Edit Field controls will not operate if you are in any setup function. Press
the P key one or more times to exit a setup function.)
To select a higher order digit, use an Edit Field cursor key L or W. The output digit
in edit is always underlined (see below).
nn115f.eps
The momentary display of the letter u in the Output Display when editing during OPR
(Operate) indicates “unsettled,” that is, the Calibrator output is settling with a new value.
4-48
Front Panel Operation
Editing and Error Output Settings
4
How to Display the UUT Error
When you edit the output value, the Control Display shows the difference between the
reference value (the value you originally entered) and the edit value (the value shown in
the Output Display), displaying error difference in parts per million (ppm) or percent (%).
For example, if ERR UNI is set to > 100 ppm, the error will be displayed in ppm up to 99
and then the error will change to 0.0100 % at 100 ppm. This allows you to edit the output
such that the UUT displays the expected value and thus give an indication of the UUT
accuracy.
nn116f.eps
For example, an edited difference of .00030 volts for an output of 10.00000 V represents
0.00030/10.00000=0.000030, or 30 parts per million. The sign is negative (-30.0 ppm)
because the output necessary to display 10.00000 at the UUT shows the UUT is reading
below the output value. When the reference is negative, the error sign is relative to the
magnitude. For example, if the reference is -10.00000 V and the output display
is -10.00030, the error is -30 ppm.
The Calibrator has two methods of displaying the UUT error. The first method, called the
“nominal” method is used in the Fluke 5700A, 5720A, 5500A, and 5520A calibrators.
The second method is called “true value”. Both methods are used in this Calibrator.
The nominal method of error calculation uses the formula:
reference value – edit value
reference value
The nominal method is useful for checking the error of the Calibrator itself, when you are
verifying its performance against a more accurate measuring device.
The true value method of error calculation uses the formula:
Reference value – edit value
edit value
With either the nominal or true value method, small changes in output value result in a
calculated error that is the same. In the example above, the Control display will show the
error as -30.0 ppm.
The true value method is useful for large changes in output value. For example, if you
apply 10.0000 V to an analog meter, and then adjust the calibrator output to 11.0000 V
such that the analog meter now reads exactly 10 V, the true value method will display
nominal= +10.0000 V
rel err= -9.0909 %
The -9.0909 % represents the relative error of the analog meter when compared to the
true value (11.0000 V in this case).
To select the UUT error calculation method:
1. Press the S key.
2. Press the softkey INSTMT SETUP.
3. Press the softkey OTHER SETUP.
4-49
5522A
Operators Manual
4. Press the softkey ERROR SETUP
5. Press the softkey ERR REF to toggle between “nominal” and “tru val”.
How to Use Multiply and Divide
The Calibrator output value (or reference value if you have edited the output) can be
multiplied by a factor of 10 by pressing the X key. Similarly, the output value (or
reference value if you have edited the output) can be divided a factor of 10 by pressing
the D key. The output will be placed in STBY (Standby) if the multiplied value
exceeds 33 V. Press the O key if you wish to continue. This feature is useful for UUTs
with ranges organized in decades.
How to Set Output Limits
An output limit feature is available to help prevent accidental damage to a UUT from
overcurrent or overvoltage conditions. This feature allows you to preset the maximum
positive and negative allowable voltage or current output. Entry limits you set prevent
any output greater than the limit from being activated by entry through the front panel
keys or the output adjustment controls. Positive limits for voltage and current set the
limits for ac voltage and current. Your limit selections are saved in the nonvolatile
memory. Voltage limits are expressed as rms values, and any voltage offsets are ignored.
How to Set Voltage and Current Limits
To set voltage and current entry limits, proceed as follows:
1. Press R to clear any output from the Calibrator.
2. Press S. Press the softkey INSTMT SETUP to open the setup submenus.
3. Press the softkey OUTPUT SETUP to open the output setup submenus.
4. Press the softkey SET LIMITS to open the set limits menu (below).
nn117f.eps
5. To Limit Voltage (applies to both dc and ac voltages). Press a softkey under
VOLTAGE to open the voltage limits menu (below).
nn118f.eps
a. Press the “Upper Limit” or the “Lower Limit” softkey, as desired, and enter the
new limit.
b. Press E then P one or more times to return to a previous menu.
6. To Limit Current (applies to both dc and ac currents). Press a softkey under
CURRENT to open the current limits menu (below).
4-50
Front Panel Operation
How to Measure Pressure
4
nn119f.eps
a. Press the “Upper Limit” or the “Lower Limit” softkey, as desired, and enter the
new limit.
b. Press E then P one or more times to return to a previous menu.
How to Measure Pressure
The Calibrator can be used as a pressure calibrator when you use it with the following
accessories:
To measure pressure:
•
Fluke 700-Series Pressure Module
•
Model 700PCK Pressure Calibration Kit (necessary because it provides the interface
module)
To source pressure:
•
A stable, hand-operated or automated pressure source
•
Fluke 700-Series Pressure Module
•
Model 700PCK Pressure Calibration Kit (necessary because it provides the interface
module)
See Figure 4-15 for how to connect a 700 Series Pressure Module to the Calibrator.
To connect a pressure module to the Calibrator and display a pressure measurement,
proceed as follows:
1. Connect the 700 Series Pressure Module to the 700PCK input jack, and connect the
700PCK power supply to line power.
2. Using the adapter supplied by the 700PCK, connect the serial data cable from the
700PCK to the SERIAL 2 TO UUT connector on the rear panel.
3. Press the m key on the Calibrator. This activates pressure mode.
4. The Output Display shows the pressure value measured by the 700 Series Pressure
Module. The Control Display contains three softkeys: DAMPEN (on, off), SET
OFFSET (zeros the pressure module), and UNITS (pressure units).
5. If you are using any 700 Series Pressure Module except an absolute-pressure type
(Model Number starts with “700PA”), vent the pressure module to atmosphere and
press OFFSET to zero the pressure module.
6. If you are using an absolute-pressure type module (Model Number starts with
“700PA”) zero the pressure module as follows:
7. Vent the module to atmosphere.
8. Press SET OFFSET.
9. Enter the ambient atmospheric pressure in the units currently displayed.
4-51
5522A
Operators Manual
Note
Do not rely on airport pressure reports. Use a barometric pressure
standard in the same area as the calibrator.
Pressure
Pressure Module
Interface Unit
Null Modem and
Gender Changer
Adapters
Line Power
Serial 2 Port
NORMAL
ENABLE
INSTALLED
OPTIONS
CALIBRATION
- SC600
- SC1100
- PQ
SERIAL 2
TO UUT
FLUKE CORPORATION
EVERETT WA, USA
SERIAL 1
FROM HOST
NO INTERNAL USER SERVICEABLE
PARTS. REFER SERVICE TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL
IEEE-488
LR65268C
(LEM CERTIFIED)
MAINS SUPPLY
100V/120V
220V/240V
FUSE
T5.0A 250V (SB)
T2.5A 250V (SB)
CAUTION FOR FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE ONLY
WITH A 250V FUSE OF INDICATED RATING
47Hz /63Hz
600VA MAX
IN
CHASSIS
GROUND
WARNING: TO AVOID PHYSICAL INJURY, INSURE THAT THE FILTER
IS PROPERLY INSTALLED BEFORE ENERGIZING INSTRUMENT
10MHZ
OUT
TO CLEAN THE FILTER:
-UNPLUG INSTRUMENT
-REMOVE FILTER
-FLUSH WITH SOAPY WATER
-DRY BEFORE REINSTALLATION
5V PK - PK
MAX
WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK GROUNDING
CONNECTOR IN POWER CORD MUST BE CONNECTED
5522A Rear Panel
Figure 4-15. Measuring Pressure
gjh040.eps
How to Synchronize the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN/OUT
You can synchronize one or more Calibrators using the 10 MHz IN and OUT
input/output on the rear panel. Example applications of this capability are connecting
two or more calibrators in parallel in the current output function to sum their outputs, or
using three calibrators to calibrate a three-phase power meter.
Another use for the 10 MHz IN reference input is to improve the frequency performance
of the Calibrator by injecting a reference 10 MHz clock signal. That application is
described next.
How to Use an External 10 MHz Clock
The calibrator uses an internal 10 MHz clock signal as a reference for all ac functions.
Although this internal clock is very accurate and stable, you may have a lab standard that
you want to have govern the frequency performance of the calibrator. To apply an
external clock to the calibrator, you have two choices. You can make external reference
the power-up and reset default condition, or you can select external reference as a volatile
setting for the operating session only.
To make external reference the power-up and reset default setting, proceed as follows:
1. Connect a 10 MHz square wave signal of 5 V p-p (maximum) to the rear panel
10 MHz IN BNC connector.
2. Press the S key.
3. Press the following sequence of softkeys: INSTMT SETUP, OUTPUT SETUP,
4-52
Front Panel Operation
How to Synchronize the Calibrator using 10 MHz IN/OUT
4
Φ & REF SETUP.
4. Press the REF CLK softkey to select “ext.”
5. Press the P key.
To use an external 10 MHz reference on a temporary (volatile) basis, proceed as follows:
1. Connect a 10 MHz square wave signal of 1 to 5 V p-p to the rear panel 10 MHz IN
BNC connector.
2. Press the S key.
3. Set the calibrator output to an ac voltage or current function.
4. Press the following sequence of softkeys: INSTMT SETUP, OUTPUT SETUP,
φ & REF SETUP.
5. Press the REF CLK softkey to select “ext.”
6. Press the P key.
How to Source AC Current and Parallel-Connected 5522As
You can connect two or more 5522As to source current in parallel. This technique allows
you to source current greater than ±20 A. If you are sourcing ac current, you must
synchronize the calibrators in order to have their output currents in phase. Proceed as
follows to accomplish this:
1. With both Calibrators in standby mode, make the connections as shown in Figure 416.
2. On Calibrator #2 (the slave), make the following settings:
• Press the S key.
•
Press the following sequence of softkeys: INSTMT SETUP, OUTPUT SETUP,
Φ & REF SETUP.
•
Press the REF CLK softkey to select “ext.”
•
Press the Pkey.
3. On both Calibrators, make the following settings:
• Remaining in standby mode, set the outputs to the desired ac current level and
frequency.
•
Set NRM Φ REF in the Φ REF SETUP menus to 0.00.
4. On Calibrator #2 (the slave), press O for operate mode.
5. On Calibrator #1 (the master), press O for operate mode. Now the two Calibrators
are synchronized. There are two ways to synchronize: pressing O on the master,
or pressing the SYNC softkey on the master.
4-53
5522A
Operators Manual
5522A #1
Aux
LO
10 MHz
OUT
20A
Load/Meter
5522A #2
Aux
LO
10 MHz
IN
20A
Figure 4-16. Two Calibrators Sourcing Current in Parallel
gjh023.eps
Three-Phase Power Calibration
You can configure three Calibrators to calibrate a three-phase power meter. This example
uses the assumption that you want to apply a perfectly balanced calibration output with a
unity power factor. By changing the phase relationships, you can apply other test
stimulus. The figure shows the phase relationship of each Calibrator. By changing the
phase relationships, you can apply other test stimulus.
4-54
Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications
5522A
A
5522A
B
4
10 MHz
OUT
CURRENT
10 MHz
IN
VOLTAGE
Phase A
A
Phase B
B
Phase C
C
NEUTRAL
5522A
C
10 MHz
IN
Figure 4-17. Three-Phase Power Calibration
gjh024.eps
Sample Applications
Three-Phase Power Calibration:
•
Calibrating a Fluke 80 Series Digital Multimeter (DMM)
•
Calibrating a Fluke Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer for Power and Harmonics
•
Calibrating a Fluke Model 51 Digital Thermometer
How Calibrate an 80 Series Digital Multimeter
This example goes through the steps necessary to calibrate a Fluke 80 Series DMM.
Note
These procedures are included here as an example. The 80 Series Service
Manual contains the authoritative testing and calibration procedures for 80
Series DMMs.
Two procedures are provided. The first tests each function and range for compliance to
4-55
5522A
Operators Manual
specifications. The second is the calibration procedure for the 80 Series meters. The
80 Series Service Manual gives instructions for disassembly and access to the pca
(printed circuit assembly). You will need to access the pca for the calibration procedure.
Before connecting the calibrator to the 80 Series DMM, you need to determine what type
of cables to use and whether to use Z or not. This decision-making process is covered
next.
Cables
Fluke 5440A-7002 Low-Thermal Cables are recommended for many calibrations
connections, but they are not specifically required for 80 Series calibration. Thermal emf
errors that the Low-Thermal cables are designed to reduce are not significant when
calibrating a 3-1/2 digit meter. The cables support the following measurements:
•
AC and dc voltages
•
All resistances
•
AC and dc currents up to 20 A
EARTH Connection
Because the 80 Series DMMs are battery operated, their inputs have no connection to
earth ground. Therefore, enabling the calibrator’s earth (chassis) ground to guard and LO
is appropriate. connection is appropriate. (Press the Z key so that the indicator is lit,
and make sure the B indicator is off.)
How to Test the Meter
You can use the error mode feature of the calibrator to test the meter. To verify that all
ranges of all functions are within specifications, proceed as follows:
1. Turn on the calibrator and allow it to warm up.
 Warning
To prevent electric shock, fire, or personal injury, ensure the
product is in standby mode before making any connection
between the product and tester.
2. Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in
Figure 4-18.
87
MIN MAX
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
RANGE
REL
5522A CALIBRATOR
HOLD H
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
A
mA A
COM
V
Figure 4-18. Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series General Functions
4-56
gjh025.eps
Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications
4
3. Test the dc voltage function as follows:
a. Turn on the DMM and set its function switch to .
b. Set the warmed up calibrator to 3.5 V dc. Press O.
c. Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator output for a reading of
+3.5000 on the DMM display.
d. Verify that the error shown on the control display is less than the specification for
the DMM in its Users Manual.
e. Check the DMM error at 35.0 V, -35.0 V, 350.0 V. Hint: use the X. Verify the
errors are within specification. When X causes the output to go over 33 V, the
calibrator goes into standby. When this happens, press O to operate.
f. Check the DMM error at 1000 V to verify it is within specification.
g. Set the output of the calibrator to 350 mV and press O. Verify the errors are
within specifications.
4. Test the ac voltage function:
a. Press R on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to .
b. Set the output of the calibrator to 350 mV at 60 Hz. and press O. Verify the
errors are within specifications.
c. Check the error against specifications at the following voltages and frequencies:
Voltage
Frequency
350 mV
60 Hz, 5 kHz, and 20 kHz
3.500 V
60 Hz, 5 kHz, and 20 kHz
35.00 V
60 Hz, 5 kHz, and 20 kHz
329.0 V
60 Hz, 5 kHz, and 20 kHz
100.0 V
20 kHz
200.0 V
20 kHz
300.0 V
20 kHz
1000 V
60 Hz and 5 kHz
5. Test the Frequency function:
a. Press R on the calibrator, set the DMM function switch to p, and press Hz on
the DMM.
b. Set the calibrator to 150 mV at 19.0 kHz and press O. Verify the error is
within specification.
c. Set the calibrator to 150 mV at 190 kHz. Hint: press e twice to move the
cursor to the frequency reading in the output display and press X. Verify the
error is within specification.
6. Test Frequency Sensitivity and Trigger Levels:
a. Press R on the calibrator, set the DMM function switch to  and press Hz on
the DMM to choose the frequency mode.
b. Set the calibrator to 300 mV at 1 kHz and press O. Verify the frequency error
is within specification.
c. Change the calibrator output to 1.7 V. Verify the frequency error is within
specification.
d. Change the calibrator output to 1.0 V. Verify that the DMM displays 000.0
frequency.
e. Change the DMM range to 40 V by pressing RANGE. Change the calibrator
output to 6.0 V. Verify the frequency error is within specification.
f. Change the calibrator output to 2.0 V. Verify that the DMM displays 000.0
frequency.
4-57
5522A
Operators Manual
7. Test the Ohms function as follows:
a. Press R on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to   .
b. Set the calibrator to 190.0 Ω with 2-wire compensation (see Figure 4-3). Press
O. Verify the error is within specifications.
c. Repeat the previous step for 19.00 kΩ, 1.900 MΩ, and 19.00 MΩ. Verify the
errors are within specifications.
d. Press RANGE on the DMM to enter the 40 nS range, used for conductance tests
of high resistances.
e. Set the calibrator output to 100 MΩ. Verify the error is within specification.
8. Test the capacitance function as follows (use the REL feature of the 80 Series to
subtract cable capacitance):
a. Press R on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to   .
b. Set the calibrator output to 1.0 μF with compensation off. Press O. Verify the
error is within specification.
c. Repeat the previous step using 0.470 μF, 0.047 μF, and 4.70 nF. Verify the errors
are within specifications.
9. Test the Diode Test function as follows:
a. Press R on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to .
b. Set the calibrator to 3.0 V dc and press O. Verify the error is within
specification.
10. Test the ac and dc current function:
a. Press R on the calibrator and set the DMM function switch to .
b. Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in
Figure 4-19
87
MIN MAX
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
RANGE
REL
5522A CALIBRATOR
HOLD H
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
A
mA A
COM
V
Figure 4-19. Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series Current Function
gjh026.eps
c. Set the calibrator to 35.0 mA and press O.
d. Use the output adjustment controls to adjust the calibrator output for a reading of
+35.00 mA on the DMM. Verify that the error shown on the control display is
within specification.
e. Repeat using 350.0 mA. Verify the error is within specification.
f. Press the blue key on the DMM to switch to ac current measurement.
g. Set the calibrator output to 35.0 mA at 60 Hz. Verify the error is within
specification.
h. Repeat the previous step with the following calibrator settings:
4-58
Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications
AC Current
4
Frequency
35.0 mA
1.0 kHz
350.0 mA
60 Hz
350.0 mA
1.0 kHz
Press Y on the calibrator and switch the DMM function switch to w.
Set the calibrator output to 350 μA at 0 Hz. and press O. Verify the error is
within specification.
k. Repeat the previous step using 3500 μA at 0 Hz.
l. Press Y on the calibrator and press the blue key on the DMM to switch to ac
measurements.
m. Set the calibrator output to 350.0 μA at 60 Hz and press O. Verify the error is
within specification.
n. Repeat the previous step with the following calibrator settings:
i.
j.
AC Current
Frequency
350.0 μA
1.0 kHz
3500.0 μA
60 Hz
3500.0 μA
1.0 kHz
11. Test the High current function.
a. Press R on the calibrator.
b. Verify that the calibrator is in standby and connect the DMM as shown in
Figure 4-20.
87
TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
5522A CALIBRATOR
MIN MAX
RANGE
REL
HOLD H
Hz
PEAK MIN MAX
mV
mA
A
V
mA
V
OFF
A
mA mA
COM
V
Figure 4-20. Cable Connections for Testing an 80 Series High Amps Function
gjh027.eps
c. Set the calibrator output to 3.5 A at 0 Hz and press O. Verify the error is
within specification.
d. Repeat the previous step using 10.0 A at 0 Hz. Verify the error is within
specification.
e. Press Y on the calibrator and press the blue key on the DMM to switch to ac
measurements.
4-59
5522A
Operators Manual
Set the calibrator output to 3.5 A at 60 Hz and press O. Verify the error is
within specification.
g. Repeat the previous step with the following calibrator settings:
f.
AC Current
Frequency
3.5 A
1.0 kHz
10.0 mA
60 Hz
10.0 mA
1.0 kHz
How to Calibrate the Meter
Continue with calibration if any range was out of tolerance in the previous procedure.
Note
The adjustment for calibrating the meter requires disassembling the meter.
Refer to the diagrams and access procedures in the 80 Series Service
Manual.
1. Verify that the calibrator is set to 0 V dc in standby. Press R if it is not.
2. Turn on the 80 Series DMM, and set its function switch to.
3. Connect a set of test leads to the DMM as shown in Figure 4-19.
4. Set the calibrator to 3.5 V dc and press O.
5. The DMM should now display 3.500 ±0.001. If necessary, adjust R21 to obtain the
proper display.
6. Set the DMM function switch to  and set the calibrator output to 3.500 V at 100 Hz.
7. The DMM should display 3.500 ±0.002. If necessary, adjust R34 to obtain the proper
display.
8. Change the calibrator output to 10 kHz.
9. The DMM should display 3.500 ±0.004. If necessary, adjust C2 to obtain the proper
display.
10. Change the calibrator output to 35.00 V at 10 kHz.
11. The DMM should display 35.00 ±0.04. If necessary, adjust C3 to obtain the proper
display.
How to Test a Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer
The Model 41 Power Harmonics Analyzer, hereafter referred to as the Tester, requires
two voltages at varying phase relationships to test the functionality of the Power and
Harmonics features. The procedure for testing these two functions of the Tester are
included here to demonstrate the operation of the dual voltage function of the Calibrator.
Note
These procedures are included here as an example. The Model 41 Service
Manual contains the complete authoritative testing and calibration
procedures
How to Test Watts, VA, VAR Performance
Perform the following procedure to test the Watts, VA, and VAR functions of the Tester.
Refer to Table 4-3.
4-60
Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications
4
 Warning
Ensure that the calibrator is in standby mode before making
any connection between the calibrator and Tester. Dangerous
voltages may be present on the leads and connectors.
Table 4-3. Watts Performance, Text Screen
Calibrator Outputs
Normal
V ac @
Phase
in
AUX
mV ac
60 Hz
DEG.
@ 60
Hz
Performance Limits
W/KW
MIN
MAX
VA/KVA
MIN
MAX
VAR/KVAR
Model 41
Only
Phase
Harmonics
Screen
MIN
MIN
MAX
MAX
5.0 V
0.0
30.0 mV
145
156
145
156
0
4
-2
2
8.0 V
0.0
30.0 mV
234
246
234
246
0
4
-2
2
100.0 V
157.0
150.0 mV
-14.3k
-13.3k
14.5k
15.6k
5.4k
6.3k
155
159
100.0 V
157.0
360.0 mV
-37k
-29k
32k
40k
10k
18k
155
159
10.0 V
46.0
1.40 V
9.2
10.2
13.5
14.5
9.6
10.6
44
48
100.0 V
46.0
1.40 V
92
102
135
145
96
106
44
48
1. Connect the calibrator to the Model 41 as shown in Figure 4-21.
Note
Voltage is connected to the Model 41 amps channel to simulate current
clamp operation (1 mV = 1 A).
5522A CALIBRATOR
®
41
POWER HARMONICS
ANALYZER
Figure 4-21. Cable Connections for Testing a 40 Series Watts Function
gjh028.eps
4-61
5522A
Operators Manual
2. Verify that the EARTH indicator is lit; if not, press Z.
3. Set the calibrator output to 5.0 V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 30 mV at
60 Hz on the AUX output.
4. Press the WAVE MENUS ,then the φ & REF MENUS softkey on the calibrator.
Ensure the AUX φ NRM angle is 0.00 degrees. Press O.
5. Select W from VAW on the Tester.
6. Press the mode button on the Tester for the text screen mode. Verify that the W/KW,
VA/KVA, and VAR/KVAR readings are within the minimum and maximum limits
specified in Table 4-3.
7. Press the mode button on the Tester for the harmonics screen mode. Verify that the
fundamental frequency phase angle readings are between the minimum and
maximum readings listed in Table 4-3.
8. Repeat the previous three steps using the calibrator outputs and performance limits
listed in Table 4-3.
9. Press Y on the calibrator to remove the voltage from the Tester.
How to Test Harmonics Volts Performance
1. Press the mode button on the Tester for the harmonics screen.
2. Press the VAW button on the Tester until V is displayed above the upper right corner
of the harmonics screen.
3. Press the VAφ REF button on the Tester until AΦ is displayed in the top status line.
4. Press the SMOOTH button on the Tester until ~20s is displayed in the top status
line.
5. Connect the calibrator NORMAL output to the V and COM connectors on the Tester.
6. Connect the calibrator AUX output to the Current Probe connector on the Tester.
7. Set the calibrator output to 7.0 V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 700 mV at
60 Hz on the AUX output. Press the WAVE MENUS, then the Φ & REF MENUS
softkey and ensure the phase angle is -10.0 degrees. Press the HARMONIC MENU
softkey and ensure the HARMONIC selection is set to “1” and the FUNDMTL
selection is set to “aux.” Press O.
8. Move the Tester cursor to the corresponding harmonic number.
9. Verify that the harmonic amplitude and phase angle readings displayed by the Tester
are within the minimum and maximum limits listed in Table 4-4. (Note: The Tester
will read a positive phase when the Calibrator output is a negative phase because, on
the Calibrator, the polarity of the phase is always relative to the NORMAL channel
output.)
10. Repeat the previous three steps using the settings and limits in Table 4-4.
4-62
Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications
4
Table 4-4. Harmonics Performance for Volts, Harmonics Screen
5522A
Normal Output
Fluke
Tester
Performance Limits
Amplitude
Harmonic
Phase
Harmonic
cursor
(V)
No.
(deg.)
No.
MIN
MAX
7.00
1
-10
1
6.7
7.00
3
-20
3
6.7
7.00
9
-30
9
7.00
13
-40
7.00
21
-50
7.00
31
-60
Amplitude
Phase
MIN
MAX
7.3
8
12
7.3
14
26
6.7
7.3
21
39
13
6.7
7.3
29
51
21
6.5
7.5
35
65
31
6.2
7.8
40
80
11. Press Y to remove the voltage from the Tester.
How to Test Harmonics Amps Performance
1. Press the VAW button on the Tester until A is displayed above the upper right corner
of the harmonics display.
2. Press the VAφ REF button on the Tester until Vφ is displayed in the top status line.
3. Press the SMOOTH button on the Tester until ~20s is displayed in the top status line
of the Tester.
4. Connect the calibrator NORMAL output to the V and COM connectors on the Tester.
5. Connect the calibrator AUX output to the Current Probe connector on the Tester.
6. Set the calibrator output to 7.0 V at 60 Hz on the NORMAL output and 20 mV at
60 Hz on the AUX output. Press the WAVE MENUS, then the φ & REF MENUS
softkey and ensure the phase angle is 10.00 degrees. Press the HARMONIC MENU
softkey and ensure the HARMONIC selection is set to “1” and the FUNDMTL
selection is set to “normal.” Press O.
7. Verify that the harmonic amplitude and phase angle readings displayed by the Tester
are within the minimum and maximum limits listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5. Harmonics Performance for Amps, Harmonics Screen
5522A
AUX Output
Fluke
Tester
Performance Limits
Amplitude
Harmonic
Phase
Harmonic
cursor
(mV)
No.
(deg.)
No.
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
20.0
1
10
1
19.1
20.9
8
12
20.0
3
20
3
19.1
20.9
14
26
20.0
9
30
9
19.1
20.9
21
39
20.0
13
40
13
19.1
20.9
29
51
20.0
21
50
21
18.7
21.3
35
65
20.0
31
60
31
18.1
21.9
40
80
Amplitude
Phase
4-63
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Calibrate a Fluke 51 Thermometer
The Fluke 51 Thermometer measures temperature using a type J or K thermocouple. The
calibrator simulates both thermocouples, simplifying testing and calibration. The
following demonstrates how the calibrator is used to calibrate this thermometer.
Note
These procedures are included here as an example. The Model 51 Service
Manual contains the authoritative testing and calibration procedures.
How to Test the Thermometer
The following test should be conducted only after the thermometer has had time to
stabilize to an ambient temperature of 23 °C ±5 °C (73 °F ±9 °F).
1. Connect the Fluke 51 Thermometer to the calibrator using the appropriate connection
cable (Figure 4-22). The connection cable and miniconnector material must match
the thermocouple type. For example, if testing a K thermocouple, the cable and
miniconnector are for a type K thermocouple.
51 K/J THERMOMETER
5522A CALIBRATOR
ON/OFF
F/C
HOLD
OFFSET
!
60V
24V
MAX
Connection wiring must match thermocouple type, e.g., K, J, etc.
Figure 4-22. Cable Connections for Testing a 50 Series Thermometer
gjh029.eps
2. Verify that the EARTH indicator is lit; if not, press Z.
3. Set up the calibrator by pressing0CE. Ensure the softkey labeled
OUTPUT indicates “tc”. If not, press the OUTPUT softkey until it does.
4. Select the thermocouple type and reference source by pressing the TC MENUS
softkey. Ensure the REF SRC softkey selection indicates “intrnl.” If not, press the
REF SRC softkey. Ensure the TYPE softkey indicates either J or K, depending on
which one the 51 is set to. Continue to press the TYPE softkey until the selected
thermocouple type is displayed.
5. Enter the calibrator settings listed in Table 4-6 and verify performance is within
specifications (see Chapter 1).
4-64
Front Panel Operation
Sample Applications
4
Table 4-6. Thermocouple Performance
Thermocouple Type [1]
5522A Setting
Display Readings
Degrees C
Degrees F
K
-182.0 °C
-182.0 ±(0.9)
-295.6 ±(1.6)
K
-80.0 °C
-80.0±(0.8)
-112.0 ±(1.4)
K
530.0 °C
530.0 ±(1.2)
986.0 ±(2.3)
K
1355.0 °C
1355.0 ±(2.1)
2471.0 ±(3.8)
J
-197.0 °C
-197.0 ±(1.0)
-322.6 ±(1.7)
J
258.0 °C
258.0 ±(1.1)
496.4 ±(1.9)
J
705.0 °C
705.0 ±(1.5)
1301.0 ±(2.7)
[1]
When changing thermocouple types, be use to change the corresponding hiookup wire. For example, K-type thermocouple wire
changes to J-type thermocouple wire.
How to Calibrate the Thermometer
The following procedure refers to the Fluke 51 as the Unit Under Test (UUT). Use
copper hookup wire for all connections, except for steps 17 to 20.
 Caution
To prevent damage to the Fluke 51 Thermometer, use only the
elastomeric switch pad supplied when directed to short the
switch grid on the circuit board.
1. Turn the UUT off and remove the top case, leaving the pca in the bottom case.
2. Ensure the calibrator is in standby and connect the UUT to the calibrator as shown in
Figure 4-22. When making this connection with the UUT case top removed, make
sure that the wide blade is oriented the same as the case top would normally allow.
3. Simultaneously short the TP1 grid and turn on the UUT by shorting the ON/OFF
switch grid. Hold the elastomeric switch pad on TP1 for at least 3 seconds after turn
on. This puts the UUT into the Thermocouple Calibration mode.
4. Select °C mode and T1 on the UUT.
Note
The next few steps require specific voltages to be present on the inputs of
the Thermometer. By using the 10 μV/ °C type thermocouple selection of
the calibrator, you can specify the output voltage on the TC terminals.
5. Press 0, C, and E. Ensure the softkey labeled OUTPUT indicates “tc”.
If not, press the OUTPUT softkey until it does.
6. Press the TYPE softkey until 10μV/°C is displayed. This selection allows you to
specify the voltage on the TC terminal.
7. Press the TC MENU softkey.
8. Press REF SRC softkey until “external” is displayed.
9. Press the REF softkey to enter an external reference value.
10. Press 0 and E to set the external reference to 0 °C.
11. Press P to go back one menu level.
12. Press O.
4-65
5522A
Operators Manual
13. Allow the UUT reading to settle and then adjust the T1 offset adjustment (R7) for a
display reading of 25.2 °C ±0.1 °C.
14. Change the calibrator output to 5380.7 °C. This places 53.807 mV on the tc
terminals.
15. Allow the UUT reading to settle and adjust R21 for a display reading of +1370.0 °C
±0.4 °C.
16. Press Y on the calibrator to remove voltage from the UUT. Disconnect the UUT
form the Calibrator. Power down the UUT by shorting the ON/OFF switch grid.
17. With an elastomeric switch pad in both hands, use the left one to short out the TP2
grid, and use the right one to first turn on the instrument and then quickly short out
the VIEW switch grid. Hold this position until the display is held in self-test. This
puts the UUT into the Reference Junction Sensor calibration mode, and the VIEW
maneuver turns off a filter so that the reading settled immediately.
18. Using a type K thermocouple bead (supplied with the 5520A-525/LEADS test lead
kit) and the Calibrator MEAS TC mode (press U), measure the reference junction
transistor temperature by placing the K-bead into the middle hole of the isothermal
block. The bead tip should be placed into the well, against the body of Q1. Hint:
Covering the well and positioning the bead with a piece of tissue may help the bead
stay in place. Do not hold the bead in place with your hands as this may introduce a
measurement error. Wait for the temperature reading to stabilize.
19. Adjust R16 for a temperature reading on the UUT that is the same as displayed on the
Calibrator.
Power down the UUT and reassemble.
4-66
Chapter 5
Remote Operations
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
How to Set up the IEEE-488 Port for Remote Control........................................
IEEE-488 Port Setup Procedure ......................................................................
How to Test the IEEE-488 Port.......................................................................
How to Set up the RS-232 Host Port for Remote Control ...................................
RS-232 Host Port Setup Procedure .................................................................
How to Test the RS-232 Host Port ..................................................................
How to Test RS-232 Host Port Operation with a Terminal ........................
How to Test RS-232 Host Port Operation with Visual Basic .....................
How to Set up the RS-232 UUT Port for Remote Control ..................................
RS-232 UUT Port Setup Procedure.................................................................
How to Test the RS-232 UUT Port via RS-232 Host Port ..............................
How to Test RS-232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal..........................
How to Test RS-232 UUT Port Operation with Visual Basic.....................
How to Test the RS-232 UUT Port via IEEE-488 Port ...................................
How to Change between Remote and Local Operation .......................................
Local State .......................................................................................................
Local with Lockout State.................................................................................
Remote State....................................................................................................
Remote with Lockout State .............................................................................
RS-232 Interface Overview .................................................................................
IEEE-488 Interface Overview..............................................................................
How to Use Commands .......................................................................................
Types of Commands........................................................................................
Device-Dependent Commands....................................................................
Common Commands...................................................................................
Query Commands........................................................................................
Interface Messages (IEEE-488) ..................................................................
Compound Commands ....................................................................................
Coupled Commands ....................................................................................
Overlapped Commands ...............................................................................
Sequential Commands.................................................................................
Commands that Require the Calibration Switch .........................................
Commands for RS-232 Only.......................................................................
Commands for IEEE-488 Only ...................................................................
Command Syntax ............................................................................................
Parameter Syntax Rules ..............................................................................
Extra Space or Tab Characters ....................................................................
Page
5-3
5-5
5-7
5-7
5-9
5-9
5-11
5-12
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-30
5-30
5-30
5-32
5-1
5522A
Operators Manual
Terminators .................................................................................................
Incoming Character Processing...................................................................
Response Message Syntax ..........................................................................
Checking 5522A Status .......................................................................................
Serial Poll Status Byte (STB) ..........................................................................
Service Request (SRQ) Line .......................................................................
Service Request Enable Register (SRE)......................................................
Programming the STB and SRE..................................................................
Event Status Register (ESR)............................................................................
Event Status Enable (ESE) Register............................................................
Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE........................................................
Programming the ESR and ESE..................................................................
Instrument Status Register (ISR).....................................................................
Instrument Status Change Registers............................................................
Instrument Status Change Enable Registers................................................
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE ...........................................
Programming the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE .....................................................
Output Queue...................................................................................................
Error Queue .....................................................................................................
Remote Program Examples..................................................................................
Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator ....................................................
Writing an SRQ and Error Handler .................................................................
Verifying a Meter in the IEEE-488 Bus ..........................................................
Verifying a Meter on the RS-232 UUT Serial Port .........................................
Using *OPC?, *OPC, and *WAI.....................................................................
Taking a Thermocouple Measurement ............................................................
Taking a Pressure Measurement......................................................................
Using the RS-232 UUT Port to Control an Instrument ...................................
Input Buffer Operation ....................................................................................
5-2
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-37
5-37
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-42
5-42
5-42
5-43
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-46
Introduction
This chapter describes methods for operating the Calibrator by remote control.
 Warning
The 5522A Calibrator can produce voltages up to 1020 V rms
and must be programmed with caution to prevent hazardous
voltages from being produced without sufficient warning to the
operator.
Write programs carefully and test them extensively to ensure
safe operation of the Calibrator. Fluke suggests that you
include error-catching routines in your programs. These errorcatching routines will help you identify programming errors that
may cause the Calibrator to behave other than intended. You
can program the Calibrator to cause an SRQ when an error is
detected by setting the Service Request Enable (SRQ) register.
The following skeleton program includes error-catching code:
10
20
30
100
PRINT @4, “*CLS”
PRINT @4, “*SRE 8”
ON SRQ GOTO 1000
!
!
!
!
900
STOP
! End of program
1000
1010
1020
1030
1040
1050
1060
1070
REM Start of SRQ Handler
PRINT @4, “FAULT?”
INPUT @4, A%
PRINT @4, “EXPLAIN? “;A%
INPUT @4, A$
PRINT “Fault “;A$” detected”
PRINT @4, “STBY”
STOP
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Clear status
Set SRE Error Available
Enable SRQ Function
Place body of program here
Start routine
Request fault code
Input fault code
Request fault text
Input fault text
Print message
Place 5522A in standby
Remote control can be interactive, with the user controlling each step from a terminal, or
under the control of a computer program running the Calibrator in an automated system.
The Calibrator rear panel has three ports for remote operations: IEEE-488 parallel port
(also known as a General Purpose Interface Bus, or GPIB port), and two RS-232 serial
ports, SERIAL 1 FROM HOST and SERIAL 2 TO UUT.
IEEE-488 The IEEE-488 parallel port is usually used in larger control and calibration
systems. An IEEE-488 system is more costly to set up, but has the ability to serve
multiple Calibrators and multiple UUTs. Also, parallel system throughput is faster than
serial system throughput. The controller in an IEEE-488 system is typically a MS-DOS
compatible personal computer (PC) equipped with one or more IEEE-488 ports. You can
write your own computer programs for system operation using the command set, or you
can purchase optional Fluke calibration software MET/CAL or 5500/CAL, and property
management software MET/TRACK. Typical IEEE-488 configurations are shown in
Figure 5-1. The configuration showing the PC with two IEEE-488 ports is used with
MET/CAL, which prefers UUTs on a separate IEEE-488 port. You can also “piggy-back”
the connectors on a single IEEE-488 port.
5-3
5522A
Operators Manual
IEEE-488 Port
IEEE-488 Port
5522A Calibrator
UUT
Controller
System for a UUT without a remote port.
UUT
5522A Calibrator
Controller
System for a UUT with an IEEE-488 remote port.
or to 5522A
RS-232
Port
SERIAL 2
TO UUT
Port
COM Port
UUT
5522A Calibrator
Controller
System for a UUT with an RS-232 remote port.
Figure 5-1. Typical IEEE-488 Remote Control Connections
5-4
gjh041.eps
Remote Operations
How to Set up the IEEE-488 Port for Remote Control
5
RS-232 The SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port connects the PC and Calibrator, while
the SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port acts as a pass-through port, passing commands from
the PC to UUT via the Calibrator. You can write your own computer programs using the
command set, or operate the PC as a terminal and enter individual commands, or you can
purchase optional Fluke MET/CAL or 5500/CAL software for RS-232 system operations.
Typical RS-232 remote configurations are shown in Figure 5-2.
After configuring the IEEE-488 or RS-232 port for remote operation, you are ready to
begin using the command set. The operation of the command set is described under
“Using Commands” in this chapter. A summary of remote commands is in Chapter 6,
“Remote Commands.”
How to Set up the IEEE-488 Port for Remote Control
The Calibrator is fully programmable for use on the IEEE Standard 488.1 interface bus.
The IEEE-488 interface is also designed in compliance with supplemental standard
IEEE-488.2, which describes additional IEEE-488 features. Devices connected to the
IEEE-488 bus are designated as talkers, listeners, talker/listeners, or controllers. Under
remote control of an instrument, the Calibrator operates as a talker/listener.
A PC equipped with an IEEE-488 interface, controls the the Calibrator. Compatible
software for IEEE-488 operation may be purchased from Fluke, including METCAL and
METRACK. Another software package, 5500/CAL, is also available but operates only on
the RS-232 serial interface.
When using the IEEE-488 remote control interface, there are two restrictions:
1. Number of Devices A maximum of 15 devices can be connected in a single
IEEE-488 bus system. For example, one instrument controller, one Calibrator, and
thirteen units under test (UUTs).
2. Cable Length The total length of IEEE-488 cables used in one IEEE-488 system is
2 meters times the number of devices in the system, or 20 meters, whichever is less.
For example, if 8 devices are connected, the maximum cable length is 2 x 8 = 16
meters. If 15 devices are connected, the maximum cable length is 20 meters.
5-5
5522A
Operators Manual
SERIAL 1
FROM HOST
Port
COM Port
5522A Calibrator
UUT
Controller
System for a UUT without a remote port.
RS-232
Port
COM Port
SERIAL 1
FROM HOST
Port
COM Port
UUT
5522A Calibrator
Controller
System for a UUT with an RS-232 port (via PC).
RS-232
Port
SERIAL 2
TO UUT
Port
COM Port
UUT
5522A Calibrator
Controller
System for a UUT with an RS-232 remote port (via 5522A).
Figure 5-2. Typical RS-232 Remote Control Connections
5-6
gjh042.eps
Remote Operations
How to Set up the IEEE-488 Port for Remote Control
5
IEEE-488 Port Setup Procedure
Complete the following procedure to set up the Calibrator for remote operations using the
IEEE-488 remote control port. The purpose is to select GPIB as the interface and to select
the GPIB address for the interface.
1. Turn the Calibrator power on. You may operate the Calibrator during warmup, but
specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete.
2. Press S on the Calibrator front panel.
3. Negotiate the softkey selections shown below. Verify the HOST port selection is
gpib. Select the desired GPIB port address (0 to 30) using the UP/DOWN softkeys.
The factory default is 4.
Select
nn120f.eps
4. Press P (not E) several times until the message STORE
CHANGES/DISCARD CHANGES appears or, if there were no changes, the reset
display. If you select STORE CHANGES, the gpib and host port setting are saved in
the instrument non-volatile memory.
How to Test the IEEE-488 Port
The procedure below tests IEEE-488 communications between the PC and the Calibrator
using the Win32 Interactive Control utility. This utility is supplied with National
Instruments interface cards for the PC, which are the recommended interfaces. (See
5-7
5522A
Operators Manual
Chapter 9, “Accessories.”) A typical connection is shown in Figure 5-3.
IEEE-488 Cable
IEEE-488
Port
IEEE-488 Port
5522A Calibrator
UUT
Controller
Figure 5-3. Testing the IEEE-488 Port
gjh043.eps
Complete the following procedure to test IEEE-488 operation using Win32 Interactive
Control.
1. Complete the “IEEE-488 Port Setup Procedure” earlier in this chapter to set up the
Calibrator for GPIB operation. Note the GPIB Address Port (default is 4).
2. Connect the PC and Calibrator IEEE-488 ports using a standard IEEE-488 cable.
(See Chapter 9, “Accessories,” for IEEE-488 cables available from Fluke.)
3. From the programs menu, select "NI-488.2M software for...(your operating system)".
4. From the NI488.2M software menu, select "Win32 interactive control".
5. A DOS window opens with a prompt as shown here:
[
6. At the prompt type the following line to activate the IEEE interface card:
<ibdev 0 4 0 10 1 0>
The second number in this line is the primary address of the calibrator. If the address
has been changed from the factory default, change this line accordingly.
7. The prompt reads <ud0:>. From this prompt type <ibwrt "remote"> then press the
ENTER (or RETURN) key.
5-8
Remote Operations
How to Set up the RS-232 Host Port for Remote Control
5
8. Verify that the calibrator is now in remote control.
9. Select the Local command from the Control menu, then click OK in the Parameter
Input Window. Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes back to the reset
condition (below).
nn323f.eps
10. From the ud0: prompt, type <q> and then press the ENTER (or RETURN) key.
How to Set up the RS-232 Host Port for Remote Control
The Calibrator is fully programmable over an RS-232 link with a PC the rear panel
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port (Figure 5-2). You can enter individual commands from a
terminal, write your own programs using, for example, a Windows-based language such
as Visual Basic, or run optional Windows-based Fluke software such as 5500/CAL or
MET/CAL.
The RS-232 cable length for the port should not exceed 15 meters (50 feet), although
longer cable lengths are permitted if the load capacitance measured at a connection point
(including signal terminator) does not exceed 2500 pF.
RS-232 Host Port Setup Procedure
Complete the following procedure to set up the SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port. The
RS-232 parameters you select here must match the parameters set for the PC COM port.
The factory defaults (shown on the display below) are 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
and no parity. Other parameters include flow control, EOL (end-of-line) character, and
EOF (end-of-file) characters.
1. Turn the Calibrator power on. You may operate the Calibrator during warmup, but
specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete.
2. Press S on the Calibrator front panel.
3. Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to select the serial port for remote
operation, then continue to Step 4.
5-9
5522A
Operators Manual
Select
To Step 4
nn121f.eps
4. Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to select the HOST serial port
parameters to match the PC COM parameters. (Individual softkey functions are
discussed in Chapter 3, “Features.”) If operating the port with a computer program
instead of individual commands from a terminal, select Remote I/F comp.
5-10
Remote Operations
How to Set up the RS-232 Host Port for Remote Control
5
nn122f.eps
5. Press P (not E) several times until the message STORE
CHANGES/DISCARD CHANGES appears or, if there were no changes, the reset
display. If you select STORE CHANGES, the serial and host port setting are saved in
the instrument non-volatile memory.
How to Test the RS-232 Host Port
Choose or adapt one of the following test procedures to test the Calibrator RS-232 Host
port connected to a PC COM port. A typical connection is shown in Figure 5-4. Note the
use of a null modem cable for connection. (See Appendix C for information about
RS-232 cables and connectors.)
5-11
5522A
Operators Manual
Null Modem Cable
SERIAL 1
FROM HOST
Port
COM Port
5522A Calibrator
UUT
Controller
Figure 5-4. Testing the RS-232 Host Port
gjh044.eps
Terminal This procedure uses the Terminal accessory supplied with Windows (or equal)
to test RS-232 Host port operation. To use this method, you must select term as the
Remote I/F in Step 4 in the procedure “RS-232 Host Port Setup Procedure.”
Visual Basic This procedure uses Visual Basic (see Appendix D) to test RS-232 Host
port and RS-232 UUT port operation.
How to Test RS-232 Host Port Operation with a Terminal
Complete the following procedure to test RS-232 Host port operation using the Windows
Terminal accessory (or equal).
1. Complete the “RS-232 Host Port Setup Procedure” earlier in this chapter to set up the
Calibrator for RS-232 Host port operation. Note the RS-232 Host port parameters
that you selected in this procedure.
2. Connect the selected COM port on the PC to the Calibrator SERIAL 1 FROM HOST
port using a standard null-modem RS-232 cable. (See Appendix C for information on
RS-232 cables and connectors.)
3. Open Windows to the Program Manager screen on your PC.
4. Open Terminal from the Accessory group of Program Manager (below). If a terminal
configuration file already exists, e.g., host.trm, select the desired file using the
Open command from the File menu and go to Step 7. Otherwise, go to Step 5.
nn308f.bmp
5. Select the Communications command from the Setting menu. Enter the RS-232
parameters that match those selected at the Calibrator for the Host port. If using the
Calibrator factory defaults, the Communications dialog box for COM1 will appear as
5-12
Remote Operations
How to Set up the RS-232 Host Port for Remote Control
5
shown below. Select COM as required. Click OK.
nn309f.bmp
6. Verify the Calibrator is powered and in the reset condition. (If in doubt, press R
on the Calibrator front panel.)
7. On the Terminal screen, type the command REMOTE and press <Enter>. Observe
the Calibrator Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL (below).
nn325f.eps
The characters REMOTE should have appeared on the terminal screen as they were
entered. If they did not appear on the screen, but the Control Display changed to
REMOTE CONTROL, then refer to step 4 of the “RS-232 Host Port Setup
Procedure” and change the REMOTE I/F setting from comp to term.
If nonsense characters appeared on the screen, then you have a mismatch is RS-232
parameters. Refer to step 4 of the “RS-232 Host Port Setup Procedure” procedure for
the correct RS-232 settings and then repeat this procedure starting at Step 5.
If no characters appeared on the screen, then refer to step 3 of the “RS-232 Host Port
Setup Procedure” procedure to verify serial was selected for the Host port. Check
that you used the correct RS-232 cable. It must be in a null-modem configuration
where the RX and TX lines are reversed (see Appendix C) Also verify you have
connected to the correct COM port on the PC.
8. Type the command LOCAL and press <Enter>. Observe the Calibrator Control
Display changes back to the reset condition (below).
5-13
5522A
Operators Manual
nn323f.eps
If you want to experiment with other commands in the command set, see Chapter 6,
“Remote Commands.” When finished, select the Exit command from the File menu
to close the Terminal accessory.
Hint: To save the communication parameters in Terminal for future operations, first
select Save from the File menu and then assign a name, for example, host.trm.
How to Test RS-232 Host Port Operation with Visual Basic
Complete the following procedure to test RS-232 (Host) operation using the Windowsbased programming language Visual Basic. This procedure assumes you have completed
Appendix D, “Creating a Visual Basic Test Program” to create the group RS-232 Test.
Complete the following procedure to test RS-232 operation using Visual Basic.
1. Complete the “RS-232 Host Port Setup Procedure” earlier in this chapter to set up the
Calibrator for RS-232 Host port operation. Note the RS-232 Host port parameters
that you selected in this procedure.
2. Connect the selected COM port on the PC to the Calibrator SERIAL 1 FROM HOST
port using a standard null-modem RS-232 cable. (See Appendix C for information on
RS-232 cables and connectors.)
3. To start the program, open the Test Ports icon from the RS-232 Test group (below).
nn310f.bmp
4. Verify the Calibrator is powered and in the reset condition (if in doubt, press R),
then click the Command1 button (below).
nn311f.bmp
5. Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes to REMOTE CONTROL (below).
5-14
Remote Operations
How to Set up the RS-232 UUT Port for Remote Control
5
nn325f.eps
6. Click the Command2 button. Observe the Calibrator Control Display changes back to
the reset condition (below).
(The Command3 button is used for RS-232 UUT port testing later in this chapter.)
nn323f.eps
7. Close the program by clicking the top-left corner and Close.
How to Set up the RS-232 UUT Port for Remote Control
The SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial data port connects a UUT to a PC or terminal via the
Calibrator (Figures 5-1 and 5-2). This “pass-through” configuration eliminates the
requirement for two COM ports at the PC or Terminal. The UUT_* commands (see
Chapter 6) handle the UUT port data flow.
The RS-232 cable length for each port should not exceed 15 meters, although longer
cable lengths are permitted if the load capacitance measured at a connection point
(including signal terminator) does not exceed 2500 pF.
RS-232 UUT Port Setup Procedure
Complete the following procedure to set up the SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port. The
RS-232 parameters you select here must match the parameters set for the PC COM port.
The factory defaults (shown on the display below) are 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
and no parity. Other parameters include flow control, EOL (end-of-line) character, and
EOF (end-of-file) characters.
1. Turn the Calibrator power on. You may operate the Calibrator during warmup, but
specifications are not guaranteed until warmup is complete.
2. Press R on the Calibrator front panel.
3. Negotiate the softkey selections shown below to select the serial port for remote
operation, then continue to Step 4.
5-15
5522A
Operators Manual
nn125f.eps
How to Test the RS-232 UUT Port via RS-232 Host Port
Choose or adapt one of the following test procedures to test the Calibrator RS-232 UUT
port via the RS-232 Host port. Connect the UUT and PC as shown in Figure 5-5. Note the
use of a modem cable (NOT null modem) for UUT connection. (See Appendix C for
information about RS-232 cables and connectors.)
5-16
Remote Operations
How to Set up the RS-232 UUT Port for Remote Control
5
Modem Cable
Null Modem Cable
RS-232
Port
COM Port
UUT
SERIAL 2
TO UUT
Port
5522A Calibrator
Controller
Figure 5-5. Testing the RS-232 UUT Port via RS-232 Host Port
gjh045.eps
Terminal This procedure uses the Terminal accessory supplied with Windows (or equal)
to test RS-232 UUT port operation.
Visual Basic This procedure uses Visual Basic (see Appendix D) to test RS-232 Host
port and RS-232 UUT port operation.
How to Test RS-232 UUT Port Operation via a Terminal
Complete the following procedure to test RS-232 UUT port operation via the RS-232
Host port using the Windows Terminal accessory (or equal).
1. Complete “RS-232 UUT Port Setup Procedure” to the Calibrator RS-232 UUT port
to match the parameters of the UUT RS-232 port.
2. Complete “Testing RS-232 Host Port Operation using a Terminal” to set up the
Calibrator RS-232 Host port to match the parameters of the PC COM port. After Step
9, return to this procedure and continue to Step 3 below.
3. On the Terminal screen, type UUT_SEND “<uut command>“ where <uut command>
is the command you selected for the UUT response, then press <Enter>. Observe the
UUT responds. For example, to send the command REMS to a UUT, use
UUT_SEND “REMS\n” and press <Enter>.
Note the use of \n, which indicates a Carriage Return (CR) as the end-of-line
character. Other characters include \r (Line Feed), \t (Tab), \b (Backspace) and
\f (Form Feed). If your UUT commands require an end-of-line character, select one
or more of the above.
The characters UUT_SEND “<uut command>“ should have appeared as they
were entered. If they did not appear on the screen, the RS-232 interface between the
PC and Calibrator Host port is not operating. Review the “RS-232 Host Port Setup
Procedure” and correct the problem.
4. If the UUT command does not execute, refer to step 3 of the “RS-232 UUT Port
Setup Procedure” procedure to verify the RS-232 UUT port parameters. Also check
the cable for UUT connection was a modem (not null modem) cable. Be sure your
command was entered correctly had the proper end-of-line character(s), if required.
5-17
5522A
Operators Manual
5. When finished testing UUT commands, select the Exit command from the File menu
to close the Terminal accessory.
How to Test RS-232 UUT Port Operation with Visual Basic
Complete the following procedure to test RS-232 UUT port operation via the RS-232
Host port using a Visual Basic test program. This procedure assumes you have already
completed Appendix D, “Creating a Visual Basic Test Program” to create the program
used for this test.
Complete the following procedure to test RS-232 operation using Visual Basic.
1. Complete the “RS-232 UUT Port Setup Procedure” earlier in this chapter to set up
the Calibrator RS-232 UUT port to match the parameters of the UUT RS-232 port.
2. Complete “Testing RS-232 Host Port Operation using Visual Basic” to prepare the
Calibrator RS-232 Host port. After Step 6, return to this procedure and continue to
Step 3 below.
3. Click the Command3 button (below is typical). Observe the UUT responds to the
command you used when you completed Appendix D, “Creating a Visual Basic Test
Program.”
nn311f.bmp
If the UUT did not respond, check the RS-232 parameters set for the Calibrator UUT
port and set for the UUT port. Verify you used a modem (not null modem) cable for
the Calibrator to UUT connection. Check the Visual Basic program to make sure the
UUT command was entered correctly, including the end-of-line character, if any.
4. Close the program by clicking the top-left corner and Close.
How to Test the RS-232 UUT Port via IEEE-488 Port
This procedure uses the Win32 Interactive Control utility supplied by National
Instruments with the recommended interface cards. Connect the UUT, Calibrator, and PC
as shown in Figure 5-6. Note the use of a modem cable (NOT null modem) for the UUT
connection. (See Appendix C for information about RS-232 cables and connectors.)
5-18
Remote Operations
How to Set up the RS-232 UUT Port for Remote Control
5
Modem Cable
IEEE-488 Cable
SERIAL 2
TO UUT
Port
RS-232
Port
UUT
5522A Calibrator
Controller
Figure 5-6. Testing the RS-232 UUT Port via IEEE-488 Port
gjh046.eps
Complete the following procedure to test RS-232 UUT port operation via the IEEE-488
port using the Win32 Interactive Control utility.
1. Complete the “IEEE-488 Port Setup Procedure” earlier in this chapter to set up the
Calibrator for GPIB operation.
2. Complete “Testing the IEEE-488 Port” to prepare the Calibrator IEEE-488 port for
testing. Before the final step, return to this procedure and continue to Step 3 below.
3. Go to Start then to the Programs menu.
4. Select "NI-488.2M software for... (your operating system)".
5. From the NI488.2M software menu, select "Win32 interactive control".
6. A DOS window opens with a prompt as shown here:
7. At the prompt, type the following line to activate the IEEE interface card:
<ibdev 0 4 0 10 1 0>
8. The second number in this line is the primary address of the calibrator. If the address
has been changed from the factory default, change this line accordingly.
5-19
5522A
Operators Manual
9. The prompt reads <ud0:>. From this prompt, type
<ibwrt "uut_sendb 82,69,77,83,11,13">
10. Press the ENTER (or RETURN) key. This command will send REMS<CR><LF> to
the UUT serial port. After the command is entered, the Win32 Interactive Control
shows the status of the command. If an error is encountered, check the typing or
consult the National Instruments manual regarding Win32 Interactive control. The
count message is the amount of characters sent over the bus.
11. Verify that the UUT is in remote.
12. From the ud0: prompt type <q> then press the ENTER (or RETURN) key.
How to Change between Remote and Local Operation
In addition to local mode (front panel operation) and remote, the Calibrator can be placed
in a local lockout condition at any time by command of the controller. Combined, the
local, remote, and lockout conditions yield four possible operating states described as
follows.
Local State
The Calibrator responds to local and remote commands. This is normal front panel
operation. All remote commands are allowed to execute.
Local with Lockout State
Local with lockout is identical to local, except the Calibrator will go into the remote with
lockout state instead of the remote state when it receives a remote command.
Remote State
When the Calibrator is placed in remote, either via RS-232 REMOTE command, or via
IEEE-488 asserting the REN line, it enters the remote state. In the remote state, the
Output Display continues to display the output setting or measurement as in local
operation. The Control Display changes to:
nn325f.eps
5-20
Remote Operations
RS-232 Interface Overview
5
The left side of the Control Display shows information regarding the present output
function. However, front panel operation is restricted to use of the power switch and the
"Go To Local" softkeys. Pressing either of these softkeys, using RS-232 to send the
command LOCAL, or IEEE-488 to send the GTL (Go To Local) message returns the
Calibrator to the local state.
Remote with Lockout State
When the Calibrator is placed in lockout, either via RS-232 LOCKOUT command, or via
the IEEE-488 message LLO, the Calibrator front panel controls are totally locked out. In
remote with lockout, the Control Display changes to:
nn325f.eps
The left side of the Control Display shows information regarding the present output
function. However, front panel operation is restricted to use of the power switch. To
return the Calibrator to the local with lockout state, send the RS-232 LOCAL command
or the IEEE-488 GTL (Go To Local) message.
Table 5-1 summarizes the possible Remote/Local state transitions. (For more information
on IEEE-488 GPIB messages, see “IEEE-488 Overview.”
Table 5-1. Operating State Transitions
From
Local
To
GPIB Message
Serial Command
Remote
MLA (REN True)
REMOTE
Local with Lockout
LLO
LOCKOUT
Local
Remote
Front Panel
Go to Local Softkey GTL or REN False
LOCAL
Remote with
Lockout
LLO
LOCKOUT
Local
REN False
LOCAL
Local with Lockout
Remote with
Lockout
MLA (REN True)
REMOTE
Remote with
Lockout
Local
REN False
REMOTE
Local with Lockout
GTL
RS-232 Interface Overview
The two Calibrator RS-232 ports are designed in accordance with EIA (Electronic
Industries Association) standard RS-232. RS-232 is a serial binary data interchange
operating from 300 to 9600 baud (selectable), and distances up to 50 feet. The Calibrator
rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST port is configured as DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment) while the SERIAL 2 TO UUT is configured as DCE (Data Communications
Equipment). See Appendix C for RS-232 cable and connector information. For detailed
information, see the EIA standard RS-232.
A summary of RS-232 terms, interface lines and mnemonics are shown in Table 5-2.
5-21
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 5-2. RS-232 Interface Wiring
Mnemonic
Description
CTS
Clear to Send
DB-9
Type DB connector, 9 pins
DB-25
Type DB connector, 25 pins
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DCE
Data Communications Equipment
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
Ground
RI
Ring Indicator
RLSD
Received Line Signal Detector
RTD
Request to Send
RX
Receive Line
TX
Transmit Line
IEEE-488 Interface Overview
The IEEE-488 parallel interface sends commands as data and receives measurements and
messages as data. The maximum data exchange rate is 1 Mbyte, with a maximum
distance of 20 meters for the sum length of the connecting cables. A single cable should
not exceed 4 meters in length. Some commands are reserved for RS-232 serial operation
because these functions must be implemented as IEEE messages per the IEEE Standards.
For example, the command REMOTE could be sent as data over the IEEE-488 interface
to place the Calibrator into remote, but it is not because the IEEE Standards call for the
remote function to be sent to the device as the uniline message REN. This is also true for
several other commands and functions, as shown below, with their equivalent RS-232
emulation. A summary of IEEE-488 messages is shown in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3. RS-232 Emulation of IEEE-488 Messages
IEEE-488 Message
RS-232 Equivalent
GTL
LOCAL command
GTR
REMOTE command
LLO
LOCKOUT command
SDC, DCL
^C (<Cntl> C) character [clear the device]
GET
^T (<Cntl> T) character [execute a group trigger]
SPE, SPD
^P (<Cntl> P) character [print the serial poll string]
UNL, UNT
(not emulated on RS-232)
The IEEE-488 interface is based on the IEEE Standards 488.1 and 488.2. For detailed
information, refer to the standards IEEE-488.1 and IEEE-488.2.
5-22
Remote Operations
IEEE-488 Interface Overview
5
IEEE-488.1 IEEE-488.1 is the hardware portion of the interface. The parallel signal
lines are divided into eight lines for the data bus, three lines for the handshake, and five
lines for bus management. The handshake lines take care of the timing for data exchange.
The bus management lines control the operation of data exchange. The ATN line
indicates the use of the DIO lines for addresses or messages (true), or for DIO data
(false). The EOI line is used with the data lines to mark the end of a message, and with
the ATN line for polling. The SRQ line is used by the devices to indicate to the controller
that they require service. The IFC line is used by the controller to quickly get all the
devices on the bus to stop talking and start listening. The REN line is used to implement
the remote/local states.
IEEE-488.2 IEEE-488.2 is the software portion of the interface, specifying data formats,
common commands, message exchange protocol and the status register implementation.
Use the following to decode the columns in Figure 5-7. Appendix C shows a typical
IEEE-488 connector and pin assignments.
Type
M - Multiline
U - Uniline
Class
AC - Addressed Command
AD - Address (Talk or listen)
UC - Universal Command
ST - Status
DD - Device Dependent
HS - Handshake
SE - Secondary
Other
B1, B2, etc. - Information Bits
Blanks - Doesn’t Care condition
Logic Zero = 0 = False
Logic One = 1 = True
5-23
5522A
Operators Manual
MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
M
N
E
M
ACG
ATN
DAB
DAC
DAV
DCL
END
EOS
GET
GTL
IDY
IFC
LAG
LLO
MLA
MTA
MSA
NUL
OSA
OTA
PCG
PPC
PPE
PPD
PPR1
PPR2
PPR3
PPR4
PPR5
PPR6
PPR7
PPR8
PPU
REN
RFD
RQS
SCG
SDC
SPD
SPE
SRQ
STB
TCT
TAG
UCG
UNL
UNT
DATA
BUS
NAME
T
Y
P
E
C
L
A
S
S
Addressed Command Group
Attention
Data Byte
Data Accepted
Data Valid
Device Clear
End
End Of String
Group Execute Trigger
Go To Local
Identify
Interface Clear
Listen Address Group
Local Lock Out
My Listen Address
My Talk Address
My Secondary Address
Null Byte
Other Secondary Address
Other Talk Address
Primary Command Group
Parallel Poll Configure
Parallel Poll Enable
Parallel Poll Disable
Parallel Poll Response 1
Parallel Poll Response 2
Parallel Poll Response 3
Parallel Poll Response 4
Parallel Poll Response 5
Parallel Poll Response 6
Parallel Poll Response 7
Parallel Poll Response 8
Parallel Poll Unconfigure
Remote Enable
Ready For Data
Request For Service
Secondary Command Group
Selected Device Clear
Serial Poll Disable
Serial Poll Enable
Service Request
Status Byte
Take Control
Talk Address Group
Universal Command Group
Unlisten
Untalk
M
U
M
U
U
M
U
M
M
M
U
U
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
M
U
U
U
M
M
M
M
U
M
M
M
M
M
M
AC
UC
DD
HS
HS
UC
ST
DD
AC
AC
UC
UC
AD
UC
AD
AD
SE
DD
SE
AD
---AC
SE
SE
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
UC
UC
HS
ST
SE
AC
UC
UC
ST
ST
AC
AD
UC
AD
AD
MESSAGE
HANDSHAKE
D D D D D D D D
I I I I I I I I
O O O O O O O O
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0
0
D
A
V
N
D
A
C
0
A E S I
T O R F
N I Q C
R
E
N
1
1
0
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1
1
1
0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 1 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
1 0 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
1 1 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(OSA = SCG and MSA-NOT)
(OTA = TAG and MTA-NOT)
(PCG = ACG or UCG or LAG or TAG)
0 0 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 0 B4 B3 B2 B1
1 1 1 B4 B3 B2 B1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
B6
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
B8
B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
0 1 0 0 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Figure 5-7. IEEE-488 Remote Message Coding
5-24
N
R
F
D
BUS
MANAGEMENT
0
1
1
1
1
1
Remote Operations
How to Use Commands
5
How to Use Commands
Communications between the controller and the Calibrator consists of commands,
queries, and interface messages. Although the commands are based on the 488.2
standard, they can be used on either the IEEE-488 or RS-232 interface, except for a few
specialized RS-232 commands described in “Commands for RS-232 Only.” (For more
information on command structures, see the IEEE 488.2 standard.)
Refer to Chapter 6, “Remote Commands” when you require additional information about
command references used this chapter.
All commands and units may be entered in UPPER or lower case.
There are four specific remote control configurations that use commands, queries and
interface messages: IEEE-488, RS-232 Terminal Mode, RS-232 Computer Mode, and
RS-232 Pass-Through Mode. (Setting up and testing each mode is discussed earlier in
this chapter.)
IEEE-488 Mode The IEEE-488 mode is used when the Calibrator is operated by
computer program. In this mode, requested information is returned by query, and
interface messages are queued and returned by command.
RS-232 Terminal Mode The RS-232 terminal mode is an interactive mode where an
operator inputs commands, with immediate returns for requested information (queries)
and interface messages.
RS-232 Computer Mode The RS-232 computer mode is used when the Calibrator is
operated by computer program. In this mode, requested information is returned by query,
and interface messages are queued and returned by command.
RS-232 Pass-Through Mode The RS-232 pass-through mode is used to pass commands
from the PC to a UUT, but via the Calibrator. This configuration is used when the UUT
has an RS-232 port. Commands are sent to the UUT by using the UUT_SEND command,
returns use the UUT_RECV? query, and UUT_FLUSH clears the UUT receive buffer in
the Calibrator.
Types of Commands
The commands for the Calibrator can be grouped into one or more categories, depending
on how they function. Each category is described below.
Device-Dependent Commands
Device-dependent commands are unique to the Calibrator. An example of a devicedependent command is,
OUT 100 V, 1 A, 60 HZ
Instructing the Calibrator to source 100 watts of ac power.
Common Commands
Common commands are defined by the IEEE 488.2 standard and are common to most
bus devices. Common commands always begin with an * character. Common commands
are available whether you are using the IEEE-488 or RS-232 interface for remote control.
An example of a common command is,
*IDN?
instructing the Calibrator to return the instrument identification string.
Query Commands
Query commands request information, which is returned as the command executes, or
placed in a buffer until requested. An example of a query, which always ends with a
question mark, is,
RANGE?
returning the Calibrator primary and secondary outputs.
5-25
5522A
Operators Manual
Interface Messages (IEEE-488)
Interface messages manage traffic on the IEEE-488 interface bus. Device addressing and
clearing, data handshaking, and commands to place status bytes on the bus are all
directed by interface messages. Some of the interface messages occur as state transitions
of dedicated control lines. The rest of the interface messages are sent over the data lines
with the ATN signal true. (All device-dependent and common commands are sent over
the data lines with the ATN signal false.)
An important thing to note about interface messages is that unlike device-dependent and
common commands, interface messages are not sent literally (in a direct way). For
example, when you send a device-dependent query to the Calibrator, the controller
automatically sends the interface message MTA (My Talk Address).
IEEE-488 standards define interface messages. Table 5-4 lists the interface messages that
the Calibrator accepts. Table 5-4 also shows the BASIC statement to generate the
interface message. Table 5-5 lists the interface messages that the Calibrator sends. The
mnemonics listed in the tables are not sent in BASIC PRINT statements as commands
are; in this way they are different from device-dependent and common commands.
Interface messages are handled automatically in most cases. For example, handshake
messages DAV, DAC, and RFD automatically occur under the direction of an
instrument's interface itself as each byte is sent over the bus.
Table 5-4. IEEE-488 Interface Messages (Received)
Mnemonic
5-26
Name
Function
ATN
Attention
A control line that, when asserted, notifies all instruments on
the bus that the next data bytes are an interface message.
When ATN is low, the next data bytes are interpreted as
device-dependent or common commands addressed to a
specific instrument.
DAC
Data Accepted
Sets the handshake signal line NDAC low.
DAV
Data Valid
Asserts the handshake signal line DAV.
DCL
Device Clear
Clears the input/output buffers
END
End
A message that occurs when the Controller asserts the EOI
signal line before sending a byte.
GET
Group Execute Trigger Trigger a TC measurement and put the reading in the output
buffer.
GTL
Go To Local
Transfer control of the Calibrator from one of the remote
states to one of the local states. (See Table 5-1)
LLO
Local Lockout
Transfers remote/local control of the Calibrator. (See
Table 5-1)
IFC
Interface Clear
A control line that sets the interface to a quiescent state.
MLA
My Listen Address
Addresses a specific device on the bus as a listener. The
controller sends MLA automatically whenever it directs a
device-dependent or common command to a specific
instrument.
Remote Operations
How to Use Commands
5
Table 5-4. IEEE-488 Interface Messages (Received) (cont.)
Mnemonic
Name
Function
MTA
My Talk Address
Addresses a specific device on the bus as a talker. The
controller sends MTA automatically whenever it directs a
device-dependent or common query to a specific
instrument.
REN
Remote Enable
Transfer remote/local control of the Calibrator. (See Table
5-1)
RFD
Ready For Data
Sets the handshake signal line NRFD low.
SDC
Selected Device Clear
Does the same thing as DCL, but only if the Calibrator is
currently addressed as a listener.
SPD
Serial Poll Disable
Cancels the effect of a Serial Poll Enable.
SPE
Serial Poll Enable
After the Calibrator receives this message, it sends the
Status Byte the next it is addressed as a listener, no matter
what the command is.
UNL
Unlisten
“Unaddresses” a specific device on the bus as a listener.
The controller sends UNL automatically after the device has
successfully received a device-dependent or common
command.
UNT
Untalk
“Unaddresses” a specific device on the bus as a listener.
The controller sends UNL automatically after the device has
successfully received a device-dependent or common
query.
Table 5-5. IEEE-488 Interface Messages (Sent)
Mnemonic
Name
Function
END
End
A message that occurs when the Calibrator asserts the EOI
control line. The Calibrator asserts EOI while it transmits the
ASCII character LF for its termination sequence or
terminator.
DAC
Data Accepted
Set the handshake signal line NDAC low.
DAV
Data Valid
Asserts the handshake signal line DAV.
RFD
Ready for Data
Sets the handshake line NRFD low.
SRQ
Service Request
A control line that any device on the bus can assert to
indicate that it requires attention. Refer to “Checking
Calibrator Status” for details.
STB
Status Byte
The status byte is what the Calibrator sends when it
responds to a serial poll (interface message SPE).
Compound Commands
A compound command is two or more commands in a single command line. For
example, the following two commands could be entered individually,
OUT 1 V, 60 HZ
OPER
5-27
5522A
Operators Manual
where the Calibrator sources 1 V ac at 60 Hz, and then goes into operate, or they could be
combined into a compound command,
OUT 1 V, 60 HZ ; OPER
using a semi-colon as a separator. Care must be taken when a compound command
includes any of the coupled commands. (See “Coupled Commands.”)
Coupled Commands
A coupled command refers to two or more commands that appear in a compound
command (see “Compound Commands”) that perform actions that could interfere with
each other causing a fault. Commands in a compound command are separated by using
the ; character. Compound commands using only coupled commands are not orderdependent.
In Chapter 6, the command shows a checkbox for coupled commands.
The coupled commands, excluding scope commands, are:
CUR_POST
DBMZ
DC_OFFSET
HARMONIC
OUT
WAVE
An example of the coupled command interference is the command
*RST; OUT 100V, 1kHZ; WAVE SINE
Followed by the commands
WAVE TRI
OUT 10V, 1kHZ
The WAVE TRI causes an error. At 100 V, only sine waves are allowed. Both WAVE and
OUT are coupled commands. So, the compound command
WAVE TRI; OUT 10V, 1kHZ
executes successfully. The WAVE and OUT are programmed together and at 10 V, triangle
waves are allowed.
Overlapped Commands
Commands that begin execution but require slightly more time to complete are called
overlapped commands, because they can be overlapped by the next command before they
have completed execution.
In Chapter 6, the command shows a checkbox for overlapped commands.
The overlapped commands, excluding scope commands, are:
CUR_POST
MULT
STBY
DBM
OLDREF
SYNCOUT
DC_OFFSET
OPER
TC_OFFSET
DPF
OUT
TC_OTCD
DUTY
PHASE
TC_REF
EARTH
PRES_UNIT
TC_TYPE
EXTGUARD
RANGELCK
TSENS_TYPE
HARMONIC
REFCLOCK
WAVE
INCR
REFPHASE
ZCOMP
LCOMP
*RST
LOWS
RTD_TYPE
You can use the command *WAI to wait until the overlapped command has completed
execution before executing the next command. For example,
OUT 1 V, 1 A, 60 HZ ; *WAI
5-28
Remote Operations
How to Use Commands
5
You can also use the status commands *OPC and *OPC? to detect completion of
overlapped commands. (See “Checking 5522A Status.”)
Sequential Commands
Commands that execute immediately are called sequential commands.
In Chapter 6, the command shows a checkbox for sequential commands.
The majority of the commands are sequential.
Commands that Require the Calibration Switch
The following commands do not work unless the rear panel CALIBRATION switch is in
the ENABLE position:
CLOCK
(when setting date but not time)
FORMAT ALL
FORMAT CAL
*PUD
Attempting to use any of these commands with the CALIBRATION switch in the
NORMAL position logs an error into the error queue. (Or it returns the error message if
in the RS-232 Terminal Mode.)
Commands for RS-232 Only
The RS-232 checkbox indicates RS-232 interface commands.
The IEEE-488 and RS-232 interfaces both send commands to the Calibrator as data,
except for those IEEE-488 functions that must be implemented as a message as specified
in the IEEE-488 standards. For example, the RS-232 interface uses the command
REMOTE to place the Calibrator in the remote mode. Although the IEEE-488 interface
could also send a command REMOTE as data, it does not because this is one of the
functions that must be implemented per IEEE-488 Standards. The relationship between
these IEEE-488 messages and the equivalent RS-232 emulation is shown in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6. Commands for RS-232 Only
IEEE-488 Message
[1]
RS-232 Equivalent
GTL
LOCAL command
GTR
REMOTE command
LLO
LOCKOUT command
SRQ
SRQSTR command
SDC, DCL
^C (<Cntl> C) character [clear the device]
GET
^T (<Cntl> T) character [execute a group trigger]
SPE, SPD
^P (<Cntl> P) character [print the serial poll string]
[1]
See “How IEEE-488 Operates” later in this chapter.
In addition to the commands and special characters that emulate the IEEE-488 functions
shown above, there are several more commands that are related to operation and control
of the actual RS-232 Host port and are therefore completely unrelated to IEEE-488
operations. These include the following six commands.
SP_SET
SP_SET?
SPLSTR
SPLSTR?
SRQSTR
SRQSTR?
5-29
5522A
Operators Manual
Commands for IEEE-488 Only
The IEEE-488 checkbox indicates commands that are used for the IEEE-488 interface.
This is all the commands, except for those used for RS-232 operations. (See “Commands
for RS-232 Only.”) All commands are transferred over the IEEE-488 as data, except for
the commands LOCAL, REMOTE, and LOCKOUT, which are implemented per IEEE
Standards as messages (see Table 5-7).
Table 5-7. Commands for IEEE-488 Only
IEEE-488 Message
[1]
Command Representation
GTL
LOCAL command
GTR
REMOTE command
LLO
LOCKOUT command
SRQ
SRQSTR command
SDC, DCL
Clear the device
GET
Execute a group trigger
SPE, SPD
Print the serial poll string
[1]
See “How IEEE-488 Operates” later in this chapter.
Command Syntax
The following syntax rules apply to all the remote commands. Information about syntax
of response messages is also given.
Parameter Syntax Rules
Table 5-8 lists the units accepted in command parameters and used in responses. All
commands and units may be entered in UPPER or lower case.
Table 5-8. Units Accepted in Parameters and Used in Responses
Units
HZ
Frequency in units of hertz
KHZ
Frequency in units of kilohertz
MHZ
Frequency in units of megahertz
UV
Volts in units of microvolts
MV
Volts in units of millivolts
V
Volts in units of volts
KV
Volts in units of kilovolts
UA
Current in units of microamperes
MA
Current in units of milliamps
A
5-30
Meaning
Current in units of amps
PCT
Percent
PPM
Parts-per-million
DBM
Volts in units of decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt into 600 Ω load
Remote Operations
How to Use Commands
5
Table 5-8. Units Accepted in Parameters and Used in Responses (cont.)
Units
OHM
Meaning
Resistance in units of ohms
KOHM
Resistance in units of kilohms
MOHM
Resistance in units of megohms
NF
Capacitance in units of nanofarads
PF
Capacitance in units of picofarads
UF
Capacitance in units of microfarads
MF
Capacitance in units of millifarads
F
Capacitance in units of farads
CEL
Temperature in degrees Celsius
FAR
Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
NS
Period in units of nanoseconds
US
Period in units of microseconds
MS
Period in units of milliseconds
S
PSI
Period in units of seconds
Pressure in pound-force pre square inch
MHG
Pressure in meters of mercury
INHG
Pressure in inches of mercury
INH2O
Pressure in inches of water
FTH2O
Pressure in feet of water
MH2O
Pressure in meters of water
BAR
Pressure in bar
PAL
Pressure in Pascal
G/CM2
INH2O60F
Pressure in grams per centimeter squared
Pressure in inches of water at 60 degrees Fahrenheit
General Rules The general rules for parameter usage is as follows:
1. When a command has more than one parameter, the parameters must be separated by
commas. For example: OUT 1V, 2A.
2. Numeric parameters may have up to 15 significant digits and their exponents can be
in the range ±1.0E±20.
3. Including too many or too few parameters causes a command error.
4. Null parameters cause an error, e.g., the adjacent commas in OUT 1V, ,2A.
5. Expressions, for example 4+2*13, are not allowed as parameters.
6. Binary Block Data can be in one of two forms: Indefinite Length and Definite Length
format (both IEEE-488.2 standards).
5-31
5522A
Operators Manual
Indefinite Length The Indefinite Length format accepts data bytes after the #0 until the
ASCII Line Feed character is received with an EOI signal (for RS-232 just a line feed or
carriage return will terminate the block).
Definite Length The Definite Length format specifies the number of data bytes. The
data bytes are preceded by #n and an n-digit number. The n-digit number identifies how
many data bytes follow. For examples, see the UUT_SEND and *PUD command
descriptions in Chapter 6.
Extra Space or Tab Characters
In the command descriptions in Chapter 6, parameters are shown separated by spaces.
One space after a command is required (unless no parameters are required). All other
spaces are optional. Spaces are inserted for clarity in the manual and may be left in or
omitted as desired. You can insert extra spaces or tabs between parameters as desired.
Extra spaces within a parameter are generally not allowed, except for between a number
and its associated multiplier or unit. Chapter 6 contains examples for commands whose
parameters or responses are not self-explanatory.
Terminators
Table 5-9 summarizes the terminator characters for both the IEEE-488 and RS-232
remote interfaces.
Table 5-9. Terminator Characters
ASCII Characters
Terminator
Function
Number
Program
Control Command
Terminator
Language Command
Terminator
Carriage Return
(CR)
13
Chr(13)
<Cntrl> M
\n
Line Feed (LF)
10
Chr(10)
<Cntrl> J
\r
Backspace (BS)
8
Chr(8)
<Cntrl> H
\b
Form Feed (FF)
12
Chr(12)
<Cntrl> L
\f
Examples:
RS-232 Terninal Mode
OUT 1 V, 60 Hz <Enter>
UUT SEND “REMS/n”
UUT_SEND #205REMS^M
<Enter>
<Enter> (^M means <cntrl>M)
RS-232 Computer Mode
Comm1.Output = “OUT 1 V, 60 Hz” + Chr(10)
(typical to Visual Basic)
Comm1.Output = “UUT_SEND “”REMS/n”” “ Chr(10)
IEEE-488 Mode
OUT 1 V, 60 Hz
(command only)
UUT_SEND “REMS\N”
IEEE-488 Interface The Calibrator sends the ASCII character Line Feed with the EOI
control line held high as the terminator for response messages. The calibrator recognizes
the following as terminators when encountered in incoming data.
•
ASCII LF character
•
Any ASCII character sent with the EOI control line asserted
RS-232 Interface The Calibrator returns an EOL (End of Line) character with each
response to the PC. This is selectable as Carriage Return (CR), Line Feed (LF) or both
CRLF. (See “RS-232 Host Port Setup Procedure” earlier in this chapter.) Commands sent
to the Calibrator must end in either a CR or LF, or both. (See Table 5-9 above.)
5-32
Remote Operations
How to Use Commands
5
Incoming Character Processing
The Calibrator processes all incoming data as follows (except Binary Block Data as
described under Parameter Syntax Rules):
1. The most significant data bit (DIO8) is ignored.
2. All data is taken as 7-bit ASCII.
3. Lower-case or upper-case characters are accepted.
4. ASCII characters whose decimal equivalent is less than 32 (Space) are discarded,
except for characters 10 (LF) and 13 (CR) and in the *PUD command argument.
Binary Block Data allows all characters in its argument and terminates in a special
way.
Response Message Syntax
In the command descriptions in Chapter 6, responses from the Calibrator are described
wherever appropriate. In order to know what type of data to read in, refer to the first part
of the entry under "Response" in the tables. The response is identified as one of the data
types in Table 5-10.
Table 5-10. Response Data Types
Data Type
Integer
Description
Integers for some controllers or computers are decimal numbers in the
range -32768 to 32768.
Responses in this range are labeled Integer.
Floating
String
Character Response Data
(CRD)
Indefinite ASCII (IAD)
Example:
*ESE 123; *ESE?
returns:
123
Numbers that may have up to 15 significant figures plus an exponent
that may range from ±E20.
Example:
DC_OFFSET?
returns:
1.4293E+00
Any ASCII characters including quotation mark delimiters.
Example:
SRQSTR “SRQ from 5522A”; SRQSTR?
returns:
“SRQ from 5522A”
This type of response is always a keyword.
Example:
OUT 10V, 100HZ; FUNC?
returns:
ACV
Any ASCII characters followed by EOM. Queries with this type of
response MUST be the last Query in a program message.
Example:
*OPT?
returns:
SC600
CAL reports and lists which contains Line Feeds are typically of this
type.
5-33
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 5-10. Response Data Types (cont.)
Data Type
Description
A special data type defined by the IEEE-488.2 standard. This type is
used in *PUD? query. It is defined as follows:
Binary Block Data
#(non-zero digit) (digits) (user data)
The non-zero digit specifies the number of characters that will follow in
the <digits> field. Characters allowed in the digits field are 0 through 9
(ASCII 48 through 57 decimal). The value of the number in the <digits>
field in decimal defines the number of user data bytes that follow in the
<user data> field. The maximum response is 64 characters.
Example:
*PUD “test1”; *PUD?
returns:
#205test1
Checking 5522A Status
The programmer has access to status registers, enable registers, and queues in the
Calibrator to indicate various conditions in the instrument as shown in Figure 5-8. Some
registers and queues are defined by the IEEE-488.2 standard. The rest are specific to the
Calibrator. In addition to the status registers, the Service Request (SRQ) control line, and
a 16-element buffer called the Error Queue provide status information. Table 5-11 lists
the status registers and gives the read/write commands and associated mask registers.
Table 5-11. Status Register Summary
Read
Command
Write
Command
Serial Poll Status Byte (STB)
*STB?
⎯
Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
*SRE?
*SRE
Event Status Register (ESR)
*ESR?
⎯
Event Status Enable Register (ESE)
*ESE?
*ESE
ISR?
⎯
Instrument Status Change Register (ISCR)
ISCR?
⎯
ISCR 1 to 0 transition
ISCR0?
⎯
ISCR 0 to 1 transition
ISCR1?
⎯
Instrument Status Change Enable Register (ISCE)
ISCE?
ISCE
ISCE 1 to 0 transition
ISCE0?
ISCE0
ISCE 0 to 1 transition
ISCE1?
ISCE1
Status Register
Instrument Status Register (ISR)
Each status register and queue has a summary bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte. Enable
registers are used to mask various bits in the status registers and generate summary bits in
the Serial Poll Status Byte. For IEEE-488 interface operation, the Service Request Enable
Register is used to assert the SRQ control line on detection of any status condition or
conditions the programmer chooses. For RS-232 interface operation, the SRQSTR string
is sent over the serial interface when the SRQ line is set. (See the SRQSTR command
description in Chapter 6 for more information.)
5-34
Remote Operations
Checking 5522A Status
5
Serial Poll Status Byte (STB)
The Calibrator sends the serial poll status byte (STB) when it responds to a serial poll.
This byte is cleared (set to 0) when the power is turned on. The STB byte is defined as
shown in Figure 5-9. If you are using the RS-232 as the remote control interface,
transmitting the ^P character (in the Terminal mode, hold down the <Cntl> key and press
P) returns the SPLSTR (Serial Poll String) and the status byte. Refer to the *STB
command, and for RS-232 interface operation, the SPLSTR and SPLSTR? commands, in
Chapter 6 for more information.
5-35
5522A
Instrument Status
Change Enable
Registers
R
PE
0
O
0
R
P
S E TB S
T Y
R TL
EM E
0 O D
TE
U
U
U TB F
U U
T
H DA L
IV T
M OL A
A T
TM G C
H
0 P CA G
L
0
0
0
Operators Manual
Write using
ISCE0 (1 to 0 transition)
ISCE1 (0 to 1 transition)
ISCE (1 to 0 AND 0 to 1)
&
&
&
&
&
&
Read using
ISCE0? (1 to 0 transition)
ISCE1? (0 to 1 transition)
ISCE? (1 to 0 OR 0 to 1)
Instrument Status
Change Registers
&
&
&
&
Logical OR
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
&
&
&
&
&
&
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Write using
ISCE0? (1 to 0 transition)
ISCE1? (0 to 1 transition)
ISCE? (1 to 0 OR 0 to 1)
Instrument Status
Register
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC
O
PO
N
0
C
M
EX E
D E
D
Q E
Y
0 E
Read using ISR?
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Logical OR
&
Event Status
Register
Data
Available?
Read using *ESR?
&
&
Output Buffer
&
&
&
&
&
Event Status
Enable Register
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Error
Available?
Read using *ESE?
Write using *ESE
Error Queue
Read using ERR?
Read by Serial Poll
RQS
Service Request
Generation
0 6
ESB
MAV EAV ISCB
0 0
SRQSTR
on
RS-232 bus
SRQ
on
IEEE bus
Logical OR
MSS
&
7
Status Byte Register
Read using *STB?
&
&
&
&
&
&
5 4 3 2 1 0
Service Request
Enable Register
Read using *SRE?
Write using *SRE
Figure 5-8. Status Register Overview
5-36
nn317f.eps
Remote Operations
Checking 5522A Status
7
6
RQS
0
MSS
5
4
3
2
1
0
ESB
MAV
EAV
ISCB
0
0
RQS
Requesting service. The RQS bit is set to 1 whenever bits ESB, MAV, EAV, or ISCB
change from 0 to 1 and are enabled (1) in the SRE. When RQS is 1, the 5522A
asserts the SRQ control line on the IEEE-488 interface. You can do a serial poll to read
this bit to see if the 5522A is the source of an SRQ.
MSS
Master summary status. Set to 1 whenever bits ESB, MAV, EAV, or ISCB are 1 and
enabled (1) in the SRE. This bit can be read using the *STB? command in serial
remote control in place of doing a serial poll.
ESB
Set to 1 when one or more enabled ESR bits are 1.
MAV
Message available. The MAV bit is set to 1 whenever data is available in the 5522A’s
IEEE-488 interface output buffer.
EAV
Error available. An error has occurred and an error is available to be read from the
error queue by using the ERR? query.
OPER
ISCB One or more enabled ISCR bits are 1.
Figure 5-9. Serial Poll Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable (SRE)
5
gjh035.eps
Service Request (SRQ) Line
IEEE-488 Service Request (SRQ) is an IEEE-488.1 bus control line that the Calibrator
asserts to notify the controller that it requires some type of service. Many instruments can
be on the bus, but they all share a single SRQ line. To determine which instrument set
SRQ, the Controller normally does a serial poll of each instrument. The calibrator asserts
SRQ whenever the RQS bit in its Serial Poll Status Byte is 1. This bit informs the
controller that the Calibrator was the source of the SRQ.
RS-232 Remote operations using the RS-232 interface emulate the IEEE-488 SRQ line
by sending the SRQSTR string over the serial interface when the SRQ line is set. (See the
SRQSTR command description in Chapter 6 for more information.)
The Calibrator clears SRQ and RQS whenever the controller/host performs a serial poll,
sends *CLS, or whenever the MSS bit is cleared. The MSS bit is cleared only when ESB,
MAV, EAV, and ISCB are 0, or they are disabled by their associated enable bits in the
SRE register being set to 0.
Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The Service Request Enable Register (SRE) enables or masks the bits of the Serial Poll
Status Byte. The SRE is cleared at power up. Refer to Figure 5-9 for the bit functions.
Programming the STB and SRE
By resetting (to 0) the bits in the SRE, you can mask (disable) associated bits in the serial
poll status byte. Bits set to 1 enable the associated bit in the serial poll status byte. The
following sample BASIC program enables the Error Available (EAV) bit.
10
20
30
! THIS PROGRAM SETS EAV IN THE SRE
PRINT @6,”*SRE 8”
! LOAD THE REGISTER
PRINT @6, “*SRE?”
! ASK FOR THE SRE CONTENTS
5-37
5522A
Operators Manual
40
50
60
INPUT @6, A%
PRINT “SRE = “;A%
RETURN
! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS
The following BASIC program generates an error and checks the Serial Poll Status Byte.
Enable the EAV bit with the example above.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
! THIS PROGRAM GENERATES AN ERROR AND CHECKS IT
PRINT @6, “OUT 1300V”
! 1300V IS OUT OF 5522A RANGE
A% = SPL(6)
! DO A SERIAL POLL
IF ((A% AND 72%)=0%)THEN PRINT “EAV and RQS should have been set”
PRINT @6, “*STB?”
! RETRIEVE BYTE
INPUT @6, A%
IF ((A% AND 8%)=0%) THEN PRINT “EAV should have been set”
Event Status Register (ESR)
The Event Status Register is a two-byte register in which the higher eight bits are always
0, and the lower eight bits represent various conditions of the Calibrator. The ESR is
cleared (set to 0) when the power is turned on, and every time it is read.
Many of the remote commands require parameters. Improper use of parameters causes
command errors to occur. When a command error occurs, bit CME (5) in the Event
Status Register (ESR) goes to 1 (if enabled in ESE register), and the error is logged in the
error queue.
Event Status Enable (ESE) Register
A mask register called the Event Status Enable register (ESE) allows the controller to
enable or mask (disable) each bit in the ESR. When a bit in the ESE is 1, the
corresponding bit in the ESR is enabled. When any enabled bit in the ESR is 1, the ESB
bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte also goes to 1. The ESR bit stays 1 until the controller
reads the ESR or does a device clear, a selected device clear, or sends the reset or *CLS
command to the Calibrator. The ESE is cleared (set to 0) when the power is turned on.
Bit Assignments for the ESR and ESE
The bits in the Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable register (ESE) are
assigned as shown in Figure 5-10.
5-38
Remote Operations
Checking 5522A Status
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON
0
CME
EXE
DDE
QYE
0
OPC
PON
Power on. This bit is set to 1 if line power has been turned off and on since the last
time the ESR was read.
CME
Command error. The 5522A’s IEEE-488 interface encountered an incorrectly formed
command. (The command ERR? fetches the earliest error code in the error queue,
which contains error codes for the first 15 errors that have occurred.)
EXE
Execution error. An error occurred while the 5522A tried to execute the last command.
This could be caused, for example, by a parameter being out of range. (The command
ERR? fetches the earliest error in the error queue, which contains error codes for the
first 15 errors that have occurred.)
DDE
Device-dependent error. An error related to a device-dependent command has
occurred.
QYE
Query error. The 5522A was addressed to talk when no response data was available
or appropriate, or when the controller failed to retrieve data on the output queue.
OPC
Operation complete. All commands previous to reception of a *OPC c ommand have
been executed, and the interface is ready to accept another message.
Figure 5-10. Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable (ESE)
5
gjh048.eps
Programming the ESR and ESE
To read the contents of the ESR, send the remote command, *ESR?. The ESR is cleared
(set to 0) every time it is read. To read the contents of the ESE, send the remote
command, *ESE?. The ESE is not cleared when it is read. When you read either register,
the Calibrator responds by sending a decimal number that when converted to binary
represents bits 0 through 15. The following sample BASIC program retrieves the contents
of both registers:
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
! THIS PROGRAM READS THE ESR AND THE ESE REGISTERS
PRINT @6, “*ESR?”
! ASK FOR THE ESR CONTENTS
INPUT @6, A%
! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS
PRINT @6, “*ESE?”
! ASK FOR THE ESE CONTENTS
INPUT @6, B%
! RETRIEVE THE REGISTER CONTENTS
PRINT “ESR = “;A%
! DISPLAY THE ESR REGISTER CONTENTS VALUE
PRINT “ESE = “;B%
! DISPLAY THE ESE REGISTER CONTENTS VALUE
END
Convert the contents of variables A and B into binary, and you can read the status of the
registers. For example if A is 32, its binary equivalent is: 00000000 00100000. Therefore,
bit 5 (CME) in the ESR is set (1) and the rest of the bits are reset (0). This means that the
Calibrator tried to execute an incorrectly formed command.
5-39
5522A
Operators Manual
By setting the bits in the ESE, you can mask (disable) the associated bits in the ESR. For
example, to prevent the occurrence of a command error from causing bit 5 (ESB) in the
serial poll status byte to go to 1, you can reset (to 0) bit 5 in the ESE register. The
following sample program accomplishes this by checking the status of the CME bit, then
toggling it if it is 1.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
100
110
120
130
! THIS PROGRAM RESETS BIT 5 (CME) IN
PRINT @6,”*ESE 33”
!
GOSUB 100
!
IF (A% AND 32%) THEN A% = A% - 32% !
PRINT @6, “*ESE “;A%
!
GOSUB 100
!
END
PRINT @6, “*ESE?”
!
INPUT @6, A%
!
PRINT “ESE = “;A%
RETURN
THE ESE
INITIAL ESE IS CME + OPC
GET AND PRINT INITIAL ESE
CLEAR CME (BIT 5)
LOAD ESE WITH NEW VALUE
GET AND PRINT NEW ESE
ASK FOR ESE CONTENTS
RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS
Instrument Status Register (ISR)
The Instrument Status Register (ISR) gives the controller access to the state of the
Calibrator, including some of the information presented to the operator on the Control
Display and the display annunciators during local operation.
Instrument Status Change Registers
There are two registers dedicated to monitoring changes in the ISR. These are the ISCR0
(Instrument Status 1-0 Change Register) and the ISCR1 (Instrument Status 0-1 Change
Register). Each status change register has an associated mask register. Each ISCR is
cleared (set to 0) when the Calibrator is turned on, every time it is read, and at each *CLS
(Clear Status) command.
Instrument Status Change Enable Registers
The Instrument Status Change Enable registers (ISCE0 and ISCE1) are mask registers for
the ISCR0 and ISCR1 registers. If a bit in the ISCE is enabled (set to 1) and the
corresponding bit in the ISCR makes the appropriate transition, the ISCB bit in the Status
Byte is set to 1. If all bits in the ISCE are disabled (set to 0), the ISCB bit in the Status
Byte never goes to 1. The contents of the ISCE registers are set to 0 at power-up.
Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE
The bits in the Instrument Status, Instrument Status Change, and Instrument Status
Change Enable registers are assigned as shown in Figure 5-11.
5-40
Remote Operations
Checking 5522A Status
15
14
0
0
7
6
HIVOLT
13
12
11
RPTBUSY SETTLED REMOTE
5
MAGCHG TMPCAL
10
0
9
5
8
UUTBFUL UUTDATA
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
OPER
RPTBUSY
Set to 1 when a calibration report is being printed to the serial port.
SETTLED
Set to 1 when the output has stabilized to within speclfication or the TC measurement
has settled and is available.
REMOTE
Set to 1 when the 5522A is under remote control.
UUTBFUL
Set to 1 when data from the UUT port has filled up the UUT buffer.
UUTDATA
Set to 1 when there ia data available from the UUT port.
HIVOLT
Set to 1 when the 5522A is programmed to a voltage above 33 Volts.
MAGCHG
Set to 1 when the output magnitude has changed as a result of another change
(e.g. RTD_TYPE). This bit is always 0 in the ISR. It changes to 1 only in the
ISCR0 and ISCR1 registers.
TMPCAL
Set to 1 when the 5522A is using temporary (non-stored) calibration data.
OPER
Set to 1 when the 5522A is in operate, 0 when it is in standby.
Figure 5-11. Bit Assignments for the ISR, ISCEs and ISCR
gjh049.eps
Programming the ISR, ISCR, and ISCE
To read the contents of the ISR, send the remote command, ISR?. To read the contents of
the ISCR0 or 1, send the remote command, ISCR0?, or ISCR1?. To read the contents of the
ISCE0 or 1, send the remote command, ISCE0?, or ISCE1?. The Calibrator responds by
sending a decimal number that represents bits 0 through 15. Every time you read the
ISCR0 or 1, its contents are zeroed. The following sample program reads all five
registers:
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
50
60
70
80
90
! THIS PROGRAM READS THE ISR, ISCR, AND ISCE REGISTERS
! NOTE THAT THE ICSR? COMMANDS CLEAR THE ISCR CONTENTS
PRINT @6, “ISR?”
! ASK ISR CONTENTS
INPUT @6,A%
! RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5522A
PRINT @6, “ISCR0?”
! ASK FOR AND CLEAR ISCR0 CONTENTS
INPUT @6, B%
! RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5522A
PRINT @6, “ISCE0?”
! ASK FOR ISCE0 CONTENTS
INPUT @6, C%
! RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5522A
PRINT @6, “ISCR1?”
! ASK FOR AND CLEAR ISCR1 CONTENTS
INPUT @6, D%
! RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5522A
PRINT @6, “ISCE1?”
! ASK FOR ISCE1 CONTENTS
INPUT @6, E%
! RETRIEVE REGISTER CONTENTS FROM 5522A
PRINT “ISR = “;A%
! DISPLAY ISR
5-41
5522A
Operators Manual
100
110
100
110
120
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT
END
“ISCR0
“ISCE0
“ISCR1
“ISCE1
=
=
=
=
“;B%
“;C%
“;D%
“;E%
!
!
!
!
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
ISCR0
ISCE0
ISCR1
ISCE1
Convert the returned variables into binary, and you can read the status of the instrument.
For example if a register contains 128, its binary equivalent is: 00000000 10000000.
Therefore, bit 7 (HIVOLT) is set (1) and the rest of the bits are reset (0).
By setting the bits in an ISCE register, you can mask (disable) the associated bits in the
ISCR. For example, to cause an SRQ interrupt when the output has settled, bit 12
(SETTLED) in the ISCE1 register must be 1. (The ISCB bit must also be enabled in the
SRE.) The following sample program loads a decimal 1024 into the ISCE, which sets
bit 12 and resets the other bits:
10
20
30
40
50
60
! THIS PROGRAM LOADS 00010000 00000000 BINARY INTO THE ISCE
PRINT @6, “ISCE 4096” ! LOAD DECIMAL 4096 INTO ISCE
PRINT @6, “ISCE?”
! READ BACK ISCE VALUE
INPUT @6, A%
! “
PRINT “ISCE = “;A%
! PRINT IT, IT SHOULD BE 4096
END
Output Queue
The output queue is loaded whenever a query is processed, and holds up to
800 characters. The controller reads it with a statement such as a BASIC INPUT
statement, removing what it reads form the queue. If the queue is empty, the Calibrator
does not respond to the INPUT statement from the controller. The Message Available
(MAV) bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte is 1 if there is something in the output queue and
0 if the output queue is empty.
Error Queue
When a command error, execution error, or device-dependent error occurs, its error code
is placed in the error queue where it can be read by the ERR? command. (See
Appendix E for a list of error messages.) A way to decode an error code is to send the
command, EXPLAIN?, which returns a description of a error code. Reading the first
error with the ERR? command removes that error from the queue. A response of 0 means
the error queue is empty. The Error Available (EAV) bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte
indicates whether the queue is empty. The error queue is cleared when you turn off the
power, and when you use the *CLS (Clear Status) common command.
The error queue contains up to 16 entries. If many errors occur, only the first 15 errors
are kept in the queue. A 16th entry in the queue is always an "error queue overflow"
error, and all later errors are discarded until the queue is at least partially read. The first
errors are kept, because if many errors occur before the user can acknowledge and read
them, the earliest errors are the most likely to point to the problem. The later errors are
usually repetitions or consequences of the original problem.
Remote Program Examples
The following programming examples illustrate ways to handle errors, to take
measurements, take a number of successive readings, lock the range, and calibrate the
Calibrator. These excerpts from programs are written in DOS BASIC.
Guidelines for Programming the Calibrator
Commands are processed one at a time as they are received. Some commands require a
previous condition be set before the command will be accepted by the Calibrator. For
example, the waveform must be SQUARE before the DUTY command will be accepted.
Using the following programming guidelines will insure that the output is programmed to
the desired state.
•
5-42
All external connections commands should be programmed first. The calibrator will
Remote Operations
Remote Program Examples
5
be placed in standby and the output may be changed to accommodate the new
external connection. The setting may be set even if the present output does not use
the setting (for example, setting the current post while sourcing voltage).
•
The output and output mode should be programmed next with the OUT command.
•
All other output parameters such as impedance compensation, offset, and waveforms
should be programmed next. The DUTY command must follow the WAVE
command.
•
The error status should be checked with the ERR? command. The calibrator will not
process the OPER command if an unacknowledged error exists.
•
Finally, the Calibrator should be placed in operate with the OPER command.
A controller program first needs to initialize the interface and the Calibrator. Refer to
following sample program:
10 INIT PORT 0 \ REMOTE @6
! PUT THE 5522A INTO THE REMOTE STATE
20 PRINT @6, “*RST;OUT 10V;OPER” ! RESET THE 5522A, PROGRAM IT TO
If you wish to use SRQs, first use the *SRE, *ESE, and ISCE commands to enable the
desired event. Refer to “Checking 5522A Status.”
You retrieve instrument parameters with a query (a programming command that ends
with a question mark):
200
210
220
230
240
250
PRINT
INPUT
PRINT
PRINT
INPUT
PRINT
@6, “FUNC?”
! RETRIEVE OUTPUT FUNCTION
LINE @6, A$
“Function is: “; A$
@6, “ONTIME?”
! RETRIEVE ON TIME
LINE @6, A$
“The instrument has been on for “; A$;” minutes”
This program generates the following sample output:
Function is: DCV
The instrument has been on for 134 minutes
Check for programming errors as in the following sample programs. Check the Error
Available (EAV) bit in the serial poll register using a serial poll.
300 A = SPL(6)
! CHECK FOR ERRORS
310 IF (A AND 8) THEN PRINT “There was an error”
320 PRINT @6, “*CLS”
! CLEAR ERRORS
Retrieve errors and explanations as follows. Since errors are accumulated in a queue, you
must read the entire queue to retrieve and clear all the errors.
400
410
420
430
440
500
PRINT @6, “ERR?”
INPUT @6, A, A$
IF (A = 0) THEN GOTO 500
PRINT “Error# :”;A, A$
GOTO 400
END
!
!
!
!
CHECK FOR ERRORS
READ IN THE ERROR
NO MORE ERRORS
PRINT ERROR# AND EXPLANATION
Writing an SRQ and Error Handler
It is good practice to include fault (error) handling routines in your applications. The
following sample program lines show a method for halting program execution on
occurrence of an SRQ (Service Request) on the bus, checking to see if the Calibrator is
the source of the SRQ, retrieving its fault messages, and acting on the faults. You should
modify and extend this code as necessary for your application.
If you want to use SRQs, first use the *SRE, *ESE, and ISCE commands to enable the
desired event. Refer to "Checking 5522A Status" for more information.
10
20
30
40
50
60
INIT PORT0
! IFC the bus
CLEAR PORT0
! DCL the bus
! INITIALIZE THE 5522A SRQ HANDLER
PRINT @6, “*SRE 8”
! Enable STB.EAV (error available)
ON SRQ GOTO 1100
! Install SRQ handler
! Body of the application goes here
5-43
5522A
Operators Manual
1100
1110
1120
1130
1140
1200
1210
1220
1299
1300
1320
1330
1340
1350
1360
1370
! Bus SRQ handler
CLEAR PORT0
! Make sure devices are not confused
IF (SPL(6) AND 64) THEN GOSUB 1200
! If (STB.RQS) call SRQ
! TEST OTHER DEVICES RQS BITS IF DESIRED
RESUME
! 5522A SRQ handler
IF (SPL(6) AND 8) THEN GOSUB 1300 ! If (STB.EAV) call handler
! Test other STB bits if desired here
RETURN
! 5522A STB.EAV (error) handler
PRINT @6, “ERR?”
! Read and clear error
INPUT @6, E%, E$
! Read in error # and explanation
PRINT “Error# :”;E, E$
! Print error # and explanation
IF (E% <> 0) THEN GOTO 1320 ! Until no more errors
STOP
! Other commands for your app
END
Verifying a Meter in the IEEE-488 Bus
This program selects 10 V dc output, verifies that the Calibrator is set to 10 V, then
triggers a Fluke 45 to take a reading. It displays calibrator output, Fluke 45 reading, and
the meter error in ppm. The program assumes that the Calibrator bus address is 4 and the
Fluke 45 bus address is 1.
10 REM THIS PROGRAM VERIFIES THE ACCURACY OF A FLUKE 45 AT 10V DC
20 INIT PORT 0
! INITIALIZE THE INTERFACE
30 CLEAR PORT 0
! “
40 PRINT @1, “VDC;RATE 5;AUTO;TRIGGER 2” ! SETS FLUKE 45 TO 10V DC
50 PRINT @1, “OUT 10 V ; OPER;
! SET THE 5522A TO 10V DC
60 PRINT @4, “*WAI; OUT?” ! WAIT FOR SETTLE, REQUEST THE OUTPUT VALUE
70 PRINT @4, V,U$,F,V2,U2$
! GET THE DATA FROM THE 5522A
80 PRINT @1, “*TRG;VAL?”
! TRIGGER 45 TO TAKE READING
90 INPUT @1, VM
! GET THE DATA FROM THE 45
100 ER = ABS(V - VM)/V * 1E6
! COMPUTE ERROR
110 PRINT “5522 OUTPUT: “;V;U$
! PRINT THE RESULTS
120 PRINT “45 MEASURED: “;VM;”V”
130 PRINT “ERROR:
“;ER;”PPM”
140 END
Verifying a Meter on the RS-232 UUT Serial Port
This program selects 10 V dc output, verifies that the Calibrator is set to 10 V, then
triggers a Fluke 45 to take a reading. It displays Calibrator output, the Fluke 45 reading,
and the meter error in ppm. The program assumes that the Calibrator uses the IEEE-488
interface with bus address is 4 and the Fluke 45 is on the Calibrator SERIAL 2 TO UUT
port.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
REM THIS PROGRAM VERIFIES THE ACCURACY OF A FLUKE 45 AT 10V DC
INIT PORT 0
! INITIALIZE THE INTERFACE
CLEAR PORT 0
! “
PRINT @4, “UUT_SEND `VDC;RATE S;AUTO;TRIGGER 2\n’” ! SET FLUKE 45
PRINT @4, “UUT_RECV”
! SEND THE FLUKE 45 PROMPT
PRINT @4, P$
! GET THE FLUKE 45 PROMPT
PRINT @4, “OUT 10 V ; OPER”
! SET THE 5522A TO 10 V DC
PRINT @4, “*WAI; OUT?”
! WAIT FOR SETTLE; GET VALUE
PRINT @4, “V,U$,F,V2,U2$”
! GET THE DATA FROM 5522A
PRINT @4, “UUT_SEND `*TRG; VAL?\n’”
! TRIGGER FLUKE 45 READING
PRINT @4, “UUT_RECV?”
! SEND 45 READING TO 5522A
INPUT @4, VM, P$
! GET 45 READING AND PROMPT
ER = ABS (V - VM)/V * 1E6
! COMPUTE ERROR
PRINT “5522 OUTPUT: “;V;U$
! PRINT THE RESULTS
PRINT “FLUKE 45 MEASURED: “;ER;”PPM” ! PRINT THE RESULTS
END
Using *OPC?, *OPC, and *WAI
The *OPC?, *OPC, and *WAI commands let you maintain control of the order of execution of
commands that could otherwise be passed up by subsequent commands.
If you had sent an OUT command, you can check if the output has settled be sending the
query *OPC?. As soon as the OUT command has completed (output settled), a “1” appears
5-44
Remote Operations
Remote Program Examples
5
in the output buffer. You should always follow an *OPC? command with a read command.
The read command causes program execution to pause until the addressed instrument
responds. The following sample program shows how you can use *OPC?.
10
20
30
40
PRINT @4, “OUT 100V,1KHZ;OPER; *OPC?” ! 5522A ADDRESS IS 4
INPUT @4, A
! READ THE “1” FROM THE 5522A
!PROGRAM HALTS HERE UNTIL A “1” IS PUT INTO THE OUTPUT BUFFER
PRINT “OUTPUT SETTLED”
The *OPC command is similar in operation to the *OPC? query, except that it sets bit 0
(OPC for “Operation Complete”) in the Event Status Register to 1 rather than sending a 1
to the output buffer. One simple use for *OPC is to include it in the program in order for
it to generate an SRQ (Service Request). Then an SRQ handler written into the program
can detect the operation complete condition and respond appropriately. You can use
*OPC similarly to *OPC?, except your program must read the ESR to detect the
completion of all operations. The following sample program shows how you can use
*OPC.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
REMOTE
PRINT @4, “OUT 100V,1KHZ;OPER;*OPC”
PRINT @4, “*ESR?”
INPUT @4, A%
IF (A% AND 1%) = 0% GOTO 30
PRINT “OUTPUT SETTLED”
END
!
!
!
!
5522A ADDRESS IS 4
PUT THE ESR BYTE IN BUFFER
READ THE ESR BYTE
TRY AGAIN IF NO OPC
The *WAI command causes the Calibrator to wait until any prior commands have been
completed before continuing on to the next command, and takes no other action. Using
*WAI is a convenient way to halt operation until the command or commands preceding it
have completed. The following sample program shows how you can use *WAI.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
REMOTE
PRINT @4, “OUT 100V,1KHZ;OPER;*WAI”
PRINT @4, “OUT?”
PRINT @4, A$,B$,C$
PRINT “OUTPUT SETTLED”
PRINT “OUTPUT IS: “;A$;B$;” at “;C$
END
! 5522A ADDRESS IS 4
! READ THE OUTPUT VALUE
! A$ CONTAINS THE OUTPUT VALUE
Taking a Thermocouple Measurement
The following program takes one temperature measurement at a time.
10 REM Set Bus Timeout to 20 seconds, Init IEEE Bus
20 TIMEOUT 20 * 1000
30 INIT PORT 0
40 CLEAR @6
100 REM Reset 5522A, TC measurement mode
110 PRINT @6,”*RST; TC_TYPE J; TC_MEAS FAR”
200 PRINT “Hit Carriage Return to take a Reading”
210 INPUTLINE A$
220 REM Request the measurement value
230 PRINT @6, “VAL?”
240 REM Read measurement, unit
250 INPUT @6, M,U$
260 GOTO 200
Taking a Pressure Measurement
The following program takes one pressure measurement at a time.
10 REM Set Bus Timeout to 20 seconds, Init IEEE Bus
20 TIMEOUT 20 * 1000
30 INIT PORT 0
40 CLEAR @6
100 REM Reset 5522A, pressure measurement mode
110 PRINT @6,”*RST; PRES_MEAS “
200 PRINT “Hit Carriage Return to take a Reading”
210 INPUTLINE A$
220 REM Request the measurement value
230 PRINT @6, “VAL?”
240 REM Read measurement, unit
5-45
5522A
Operators Manual
250 INPUT @6, M,U$
260 GOTO 200
Using the RS-232 UUT Port to Control an Instrument
The SERIAL 2 TO UUT RS-232 port is used to pass commands on to another instrument.
For example, a meter that is being calibrated can have its RS-232 port connected the
Calibrator SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port. Commands sent from a controller can be
routed through the Calibrator’s UUT port and received by the meter or UUT. There are
seven special UUT_* commands incorporated into the Calibrator for passing commands
on to an instrument connected to the UUT port. Refer to Chapter 6.
Input Buffer Operation
As the Calibrator receives each data byte from the controller, it places the bytes in a
portion of memory called the input buffer. The input buffer holds up to 350 data bytes
and operates in a first in, first out fashion.
IEEE-488 The Calibrator treats the EOI IEEE-488 control line as a separate data byte
and inserts it into the input buffer if it is encountered as part of a message terminator.
Input buffer operation is transparent to the program running on the controller. If the
controller sends commands faster than the Calibrator can process them, the input buffer
fills to capacity. When the input buffer is full, the Calibrator holds off the IEEE-488 bus
with the NRFD (Not Ready For Data) handshake line. When the Calibrator has processed
a data byte from the full input buffer, it then completes the handshake, allowing the
controller to send another data byte. The calibrator clears the input buffer on power-up
and on receiving the DCL (Device Clear) or SDC (Selected Device Clear) messages from
the controller.
RS-232 Under RS-232-C serial port remote control using ^S (<Cntl> S) XOFF protocol,
the Calibrator issues a ^S XOFF when the input buffer becomes 80 % full. The calibrator
issues a ^Q (<Cntl> Q) when it has read enough of the input buffer so that it is less than
40 % full. When using RTS (Request to Send) protocol (selected as part of the “RS-232
Host Port Setup Procedure”), the serial interface asserts and unasserts RTS in response to
same conditions as for XON/XOFF protocol.
5-46
Chapter 6
Remote Commands
Title
Page
Introduction.......................................................................................................... 6-3
Command Summary by Function ........................................................................ 6-3
Commands ........................................................................................................... 6-10
6-1
5522A
Operators Manual
6-2
Introduction
This chapter documents the IEEE-488/RS-232 remote commands for the Calibrator
(hereafter referred to as “the Calibrator”). Remote commands duplicate activities that can
be initiated from the front panel in local operation. Following the summary table is a
complete alphabetical listing of all commands complete with protocol details. Separate
headings in the alphabetical listing provide the parameters and responses, plus an
example for each command. For information on using commands, see Chapter 5,
“Remote Operation.”
Command Summary by Function
Tables 6-1 through 6-11 list and describes the command set for the Calibrator.
Table 6-1. Common Commands
Command
Description
*CLS
(Clear status.) Clears the ESR, ISCR0, ISCR1, the error queue, and the RQS bit in the
status byte. This command terminates pending operation complete commands (*OPC or
*OPC?).
*ESE
Loads a byte into the Event Status Enable register.
*ESE?
Returns the contents of the Event Status Enable register.
*ESR?
Returns the contents of the Event Status Register and clears the register.
*IDN?
Identification query. Returns instrument model number, serial number, and firmware
revision levels for the main and front panel CPUs, and inguard PGA.
*OPC
Enables setting of bit 0 (OPC for "Operation Complete") in the Event Status Register to 1
when all pending device operations are complete.
*OPC?
Returns a 1 after all pending operations are complete. This commands causes program
execution to pause until all operations are complete. (See also *WAI.)
*OPT?
Returns a list of the installed hardware and software options.
*PUD
Protected user data command. This command allows you to store a string of bytes in
nonvolatile memory. This command works only when the CALIBRATION switch is in the
ENABLE position.
*PUD?
Returns the contents of the *PUD (Protected User Data) memory.
*RST
Resets the state of the instrument to the power-up state. This command holds off
execution of subsequent commands until it is complete. (Overlapped command.)
*SRE
Loads a byte into the Service Request Enable register (SRE).
*SRE?
Returns the byte from the Service Request Enable register.
*STB?
Returns the status byte.
*TRG
Changes the operating mode to thermocouple MEASURE, triggers a measurement, and
returns the value of the measurement. This command is equivalent to sending
"TC_MEAS;*OPC;VAL?".
*TST?
Initiates a series of self-tests, then returns a "0" for pass or a "1" for fail. If any faults are
detected, they are logged into the fault queue where they can be read by the ERR?
query.
*WAI
Prevents further remote commands from being executed until all previous remote
commands have been executed.
6-3
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 6-2. Error Mode Commands
Command
Description
EDIT
Sets the edit field. PRI is specified for the output value in single output functions and the
primary output value in dual output functions.
EDIT?
Returns the edit field setting.
ERR_REF
Selects the error reference source.
ERR_REF?
Returns the presently selected error reference source.
ERR_UNIT
Chooses how UUT error is shown.
ERR_UNIT?
Returns presently selected value of ERR_UNIT.
INCR
Increments or decrements the output (as selected by the edit field) and enters error
mode, the same as using the output adjustment knob in local operation.
MULT
Multiplies the reference magnitude (as selected by the edit field).
NEWREF
Sets the reference value to be the present Calibrator output value, the same as pressing
the NEW REF key in local operation.
OLDREF
Sets the Calibrator output to the previously programmed reference value, the same as
pressing the ENTER key in local operation.
OUT_ERR?
Returns the UUT error computed after shifting the output with the INCR command.
REFOUT?
Returns the value of the reference, which is the output values of the Calibrator the last
time a new reference was established with an OUT, NEWREF, or MULT.
EDIT
Sets the edit field. PRI is specified for the output value in single output functions and the
primary output value in dual output functions.
Table 6-3. External Connection Commands
Command
6-4
Description
CUR_POST
Selects the active binding posts for current output. This applies to current and power
outputs.
CUR_POST?
Returns the active binding posts for current output.
EARTH
Connects or disconnects the internal guard shield from earth (chassis) ground.
EARTH?
Returns whether the internal guard shield is connected or disconnected from earth
(chassis) ground.
EXTGUARD
Connects or disconnects the internal guard shield from the LO binding post.
EXTGUARD?
Returns whether the internal guard shields are connected or disconnected from earth
(chassis) ground.
LOWS?
Returns whether or not the low terminals are internally open or tied together.
LOWS
Selects whether or not the low terminals are internally open or tied together for dual
outputs.
PRES_UNIT
Sets the pressure display units.
PRES_UNIT?
Returns the pressure display units.
RTD_TYPE
Sets the Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) type.
Remote Commands
Command Summary by Function
6
Table 6-3. External Connection Command (cont.)
Command
Description
RTD_TYPE?
Returns the Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) type.
TC_REF
Sets whether the internal temperature sensor or an external reference value is used for
Thermocouple (TC) outputs and measurements.
TC_REF?
Returns the source and value of the temperature being used as a reference for
thermocouple simulation and measurement.
TC_TYPE
Sets the thermocouple (TC) temperature type.
TC_TYPE?
Returns the thermocouple (TC) type.
TSENS_TYPE
Sets temperature sensor type when output is set to a temperature with OUT command.
TSENS_TYPE? Returns the temperature sensor type.
Table 6-4. Oscilloscope Commands
Commands
Description
OL_TRIP?
Returns the detected state of scope overload protection.
OUT_IMP
Sets the output impedance of the SCOPE BNC.
OUT_IMP?
Returns the output impedance of the SCOPE BNC.
RANGE
Sets the Calibrator range when in OVERLD, PULSE, or MEASZ scope modes.
SCOPE
Sets the calibrator output to an oscilloscope mode.
SCOPE?
Returns the present oscilloscope mode.
TDPULSE
Activates or deacvitates the tunnel diode pulser drive for the –SC600 EDGE mode.
TDPULSE?
Returns whether the tunnel diode pulser drive for the –SC600 EDGE mode is active.
TLIMIT
Sets the time limit for –SC600 OVERLD mode to stay in operate.
TLIMIT?
Returns the time limit for –SC600 OVERLD mode to stay in operate.
TLIMIT_D
Sets the power-up and reset default for the time limit for –SC600 OVERLD mode to stay
in operate.
TLIMIT_D?
Returns the power-up and reset default for the time limit for –SC600 OVERLD mode to
stay in operate.
TMWAVE
Selects the waveform for MARKER mode.
TMWAVE?
Returns the timemark waveform setting for MARKER mode.
TRIG
Sets the frequency of the signal at the TRIG OUT BNC.
TRIG?
Returns the frequency of the signal at the TRIG OUT BNC.
VAL?
Returns the last thermocouple, pressure, or, for the –SC600, impedance measurement
value.
VIDEOFMT
Selects the format for VIDEO mode.
VIDEOFMT?
Returns the VIDEO mode format.
VIDEOMARK
Sets the VIDEO mode line marker location.
6-5
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 6-4. Oscilloscope Commands (cont.)
Commands
Description
VIDEOMARK?
Returns the VIDEO mode line marker location.
ZERO_MEAS
Zeros the pressure module or sets the zero offset for capacitance measurement using
the -SC600.
ZERO_MEAS?
Returns the zero offset for the pressure module or capacitance measurement using the SC600.
Table 6-5. Output Commands
Command
6-6
Description
CFREQ?
Returns the optimum frequency value for stimulus for capacitance modes.
DBMZ
Sets the impedance used for dBm outputs (ac volts).
DBMZ?
Returns the impedance used for dBm outputs (ac volts).
DC_OFFSET
Applies a dc offset to an ac output voltage.
DPF
Sets the displacement power factor (phase angle) between the NORMAL and AUX
terminals for ac power output only.
DPF?
Returns the displacement power factor (phase angle) between the NORMAL and AUX
terminals.
DUTY
Sets the duty cycle of square wave outputs.
DUTY?
Returns the duty cycle of square wave outputs.
FUNC?
Returns the present output, measurement, or calibration function.
HARMONIC
Makes the frequency of one output be a harmonic (multiple) of the other output (called
the fundamental).
HARMONIC?
Returns the present instrument harmonic and fundamental locations.
LCOMP
Activates or deactivates inductive load compensation for ac current output.
LCOMP?
Returns whether inductive load compensation for ac current output is active.
OPER
Activates the Calibrator output if it is in standby.
OPER?
Returns the operate/standby setting.
OUT
Sets the output of the Calibrator and establishes a new reference point for the error
mode.
OUT?
Returns the output amplitudes and frequency of the Calibrator.
PHASE
Sets the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX terminals for dual outputs.
The NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference.
PHASE?
Returns the phase difference between the NORMAL and AUX terminals.
POWER?
Returns the equivalent power for dc and ac power output.
RANGE?
Returns the present output ranges.
RANGELCK
Locks in the present range, or selects auto ranging.
RANGELCK?
Returns whether or not the preset output range is locked.
Remote Commands
Command Summary by Function
6
Table 6-5. Output Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
REFCLOCK
Sets the reference clock source (internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector).
REFCLOCK?
Returns the reference clock source (internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector).
REFPHASE
If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN/OUT, sets the phase difference
between the NORMAL terminals on the slave Calibrator and the NORMAL terminals of
the master Calibrator.
REFPHASE?
If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN/OUT, returns the phase difference
between the NORMAL terminals on the slave Calibrator and the NORMAL terminals of
the master Calibrator.
STBY
Puts the Calibrator in standby.
SYNCOUT
Sends a synchronization pulse out to a slave Calibrator through the 10 MHZ OUT BNC
connector.
WAVE
Sets the waveforms for ac outputs.
WAVE?
Returns the waveforms of the output.
ZCOMP
Activates (2-wire or 4-wire) or deactivates impedance compensation.
ZCOMP?
Returns whether or not impedance compensation is active and if active, which type.
Table 6-6. Pressure Measurement Commands
Command
Description
DAMPEN
Activates or deactivates dampening (averaging) of pressure readings.
DAMPEN?
Returns whether dampening (averaging) of pressure readings is active.
PRES?
Queries the attached pressure module for its model and serial number.
PRES_MEAS
Changes the operating mode to pressure measurement.
VAL?
Returns the last thermocouple, pressure, or, for the -SC600, impedance measurement
value.
ZERO_MEAS
Zeros the pressure module or sets the zero offset for capacitance measurement using
the -SC600.
ZERO_MEAS?
Returns the zero offset for the pressure module or capacitance measurement using the SC600.
Table 6-7. RS-232 Host Port Commands
Command
Description
LOCAL
Puts the Calibrator into the local state.
LOCKOUT
Puts the Calibrator into the lockout state. This command duplicates the IEEE-488 LLO
(Local Lockout) message.
REMOTE
Puts the Calibrator into the remote state. This command duplicates the IEEE-488 REN
(Remote Enable) message.
SPLSTR
Sets the serial remote mode Serial Poll response string.
6-7
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 6-7. RS-232 Host Port Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
SPLSTR?
Returns the string programmed for serial remote mode Serial Poll responses.
SRQSTR
Sets the serial remote mode SRQ (Service Request) response (up to 40 characters).
SRQSTR?
Returns the string programmed for Serial Mode SRQ response.
UUT_RECVB?
Returns binary data from the UUT serial port as integers.
UUT_SENDB
Sends binary data to the UUT serial port as integers.
^P (<cntl>p)
Control-P character prints the serial poll string. (See SPLSTR for string format.)
^C (<cntl>c)
Control-C character clears the device.
^T (<cntl>t)
Control-T character executes a group trigger.
Table 6-8. RS-232 UUT Port Commands
Command
Description
UUT_FLUSH
Flush the UUT receive buffer.
UUT_RECV?
Returns data from the UUT serial port.
UUT_RECVB?
Returns binary data as integers from the UUT serial port.
UUT_SEND
Sends a string to the UUT serial port.
UUT_SET
Sets the UUT serial port communication parameters and saves them in nonvolatile
memory.
UUT_SET?
Returns the UUT serial port communication parameters contained in nonvolatile memory.
Table 6-9. Setup and Utility Commands
Command
Description
CLOCK
Sets the real-time clock.
CLOCK?
Queries the real-time clock.
DBMZ_D
Sets the power-up and reset default impedance used for dBm outputs (ac volts).
DBMZ_D?
Returns the power-up and reset default impedance used for dBm outputs (ac volts).
FORMAT
Use with extreme care. Restores the contents of the nonvolatile memory device to
factory defaults.
LIMIT
Sets the maximum permissible output magnitudes, negative and positive.
LIMIT?
Returns the programmed output magnitude limits for voltage and current.
PR_RPT
Prints the Stored, Active or CAL-Constant CAL_Report through either the HOST or UUT
Serial Port.
PRES_UNIT_D
Sets the power-up and reset default pressure display units.
PRES_UNIT_D? Returns the power-up and reset default pressure display units.
REFCLOCK_D
6-8
Sets the power-up and reset default for the reference clock source (internal or through
the 10 MHz IN BNC connector).
Remote Commands
Command Summary by Function
6
Table 6-9. Setup and Utility Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
REFCLOCK_D?
Returns the power-up and reset default for the reference clock source (internal or
through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector).
REFPHASE_D
If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN/OUT, sets the power-up and reset
default phase difference between the NORMAL terminals on the slave Calibrator and the
NORMAL terminals of the master Calibrator.
If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN/OUT, returns the power-up and
REFPHASE_D? reset default phase difference between the NORMAL terminals on the slave Calibrator
and the NORMAL terminals of the master Calibrator.
RTD_TYPE_D
Set the default Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) sensor type.
RTD_TYPE_D?
Returns the default Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) sensor type.
SP_SET
Sets the HOST serial port communication parameters and saves them in nonvolatile
memory.
SP_SET?
Returns the HOST serial port communication parameters contained in nonvolatile
memory.
TC_TYPE_D
Sets the power-up and reset default thermocouple type.
TC_TYPE_D?
Returns the power-up and reset default thermocouple type.
TEMP_STD
Sets the temperature degree standard, ipts-68 or its-90.
TEMP_STD?
Returns the temperature degree standard, ipts-68 or its-90.
TLIMIT_D
Sets the power-up and reset default for the time limit for –SC600 OVERLD mode to stay
in operate.
TLIMIT_D?
Returns the power-up and reset default for the time limit for –SC600 OVERLD mode to
stay in operate.
UNCERT?
Retums specified uncertainties for the present output. If there are no specifications for an
output, returns zero.
Table 6-10. Status Commands
Command
Description
ERR?
Returns the first error code with an explanation contained in the Calibrator error queue,
then removes that error code from the queue.
EXPLAIN?
Explains an error code. This command returns a string that explains the error code
furnished as the parameter.
FAULT?
Returns the first error code contained in the Calibrator error queue, then removes that
error from the queue.
FUNC?
Returns the present output, measurement, or calibration function.
ISCE
Loads two bytes into both the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register and the
Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register.
ISCE?
Returns the OR of the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register
and the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register.
ISCE0
Loads two bytes into the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register.
6-9
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 6-10. Status Commands (cont.)
Command
Description
ISCE0?
Returns the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable register.
ISCE1
Loads two bytes into the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register.
ISCE1?
Returns the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable register.
ISCR?
Returns the OR of the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register and the
Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register and clears both registers.
ISCR0?
Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register.
ISCR1?
Returns and clears the contents of the Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register.
ISR?
Returns the contents of the Instrument Status Register.
ONTIME?
Returns the time since the Calibrator was powered up last.
Table 6-11. Thermocouple (TC) Measurement Commands
Command
Description
TC_MEAS
Changes the operating mode to thermocouple measurement.
TC_OFFSET
Sets a temperature offset for the thermocouple measurement mode.
TC_OFFSET?
Returns the temperature offset when in the thermocouple measurement mode.
TC_OTCD?
Returns whether or not the open thermocouple detection circuit is set.
TC_OTCD
Activates or deactivates the open thermocouple detection circuit in thermocouple
measurement mode.
VAL?
Returns the last thermocouple, pressure, or, for the -SC600, impedance measurement
value.
VVAL?
Returns the last value of the thermocouple measurement in volts.
Commands
The following is an alphabetical list of all Calibrator commands and queries, including
common commands and device-dependent commands. Each command title includes a
graphic that indicates remote interface applicability, IEEE-488 and RS-232, and
command group: Sequential, Overlapped, and Coupled.
x IEEE-488 x RS-232
IEEE-488 (GPIB) and RS-232 Applicability
Each
command and query has a check box indicating applicability to IEEE-488 (general
purpose interface bus, or GPIB) and RS-232 remote operations. For sorting purposes, this
list ignores the * character that precedes the common commands.
x Sequential
Sequential Commands
Commands executed immediately as they
are encountered in the data stream are called sequential commands. For more
information, see “Sequential Commands” in Chapter 5.
x Overlapped
Overlapped Commands
Commands that require additional time
to execute are called overlapped commands because they can overlap the next command
before completing execution. To be sure an overlapped command is not interrupted
during execution, use the *OPC, *OPC?, and *WAI commands to detect command
completion. For more information, see “Overlapped Commands” in Chapter 5.
6-10
Remote Commands
Commands
6
x Coupled
Coupled Commands
These are called coupled commands
(examples: CUR_POST and OUT) because they “couple” in a compound command
sequence. Care must be taken to be sure the action of one command does not disable the
action of a second command and thereby cause a fault. For more information, see
“Coupled Commands” in Chapter 5.
x
CFREQ?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Capacitance Frequency query) Returns the optimal frequency for stimulus when
measuring or calibrating capacitance output.
Response:
<value> of the optimal frequency
Example:
CFREQ? returns 1.0E+2
Returns 100 Hz as the optimal frequency for the selected capacitance output (1.0 μF for
this example). The return is 0 if not sourcing capacitance.
x
CLOCK
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Real-Time Clock command) Sets the real time clock, time only, or date and time. To set
the date, the CALIBRATION switch must be in the ENABLE position.
Parameters:
1. (optional) year in the format YYYY
2. (optional) month in the format MM
3. (optional) day in the format DD
4. hour in the format HH
5. minute in the format MM
6. second in the format SS
Examples:
CLOCK 1998,6,1,9,52,10
sets clock to June 1, 1998, 9:52:10 AM
CLOCK 13,10,10 sets clock time only to 1:10:10 PM
CLOCK?
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Real_Time Clock query) Returns the date and time the real time clock.
Response:
Example:
(character)
(character)
1. date in the format YYYY-MM-DD
2. time in the format HH:MM:SS
CLOCK? returns 1998-12-04,13:03:50
The clock is set to December 4, 1998, 13:03:50.
*CLS
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Clear Status command) Clears the ESR, ISCR0, ISCR1, the error queue, and the RQS
bit in the status byte. This command terminates pending operation complete commands
(*OPC or *OPC?).
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
*CLS
Clear the ESR, ISCR0, ISCR1, the error queue, and the RQS bit in the status byte.
6-11
5522A
Operators Manual
x
CUR_POST
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Current Post command) Selects the binding posts for current output. This also applies to
power outputs. The current post setting is retained until the power is turned off or the
R button is pressed.
Parameters:
AUX
A20
(selects the AUX terminals)
(selects the 20A terminals)
Example:
CUR_POST AUX
Selects the Calibrator front panel AUX terminals for the output current.
x
CUR_POST?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Current Post query) Returns the active front panel binding post terminals used for
current output: AUX or 20A.
Responses:
AUX
A20
(AUX terminals are selected)
(20A terminals are selected)
Example:
CUR_POST? returns AUX
Returns AUX when the AUX terminals are selected for output current.
DAMPEN
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Dampen Mode for Pressure Measurement command) Activates or deactivates
dampening (averaging) of pressure readings.
Parameter:
Example:
ON
(dampen on)
OFF
(dampen off)
DAMPEN ON
DAMPEN?
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Dampen Mode for Pressure Measurement query) Returns whether dampening
(averaging) of pressure readings is active.
Response:
(character) ON
(dampen on)
(character) OFF (dampen off)
Example:
DBMZ
DAMPEN returns ON
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(dBm Impedance command) Sets the impedance used for dBm outputs (ac volts).
Parameters:
6-12
Z50
Z75
Z90
Z100
Z135
Z150
Z300
Z600
(50 ohms)
(75 ohms)
(90 ohms)
(100 ohms)
(135 ohms)
(150 ohms)
(300 ohms)
(600 ohms)
Remote Commands
Commands
Z900
Z1000
Z1200
Example:
DBMZ?
6
(900 ohms)
(1000 ohms = dBv)
(1200 ohms)
DBMZ Z600
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(dBm Impedance query) Returns the impedance used for dBm outputs (ac volts).
Response:
(character) Impedance keyword
Example:
DBMZ? returns Z600
DBMZ_D
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(dBm Impedance Default command) Sets the power-up and reset default impedance used
for dBm outputs (ac volts).
Parameters:
Z50
Z75
Z90
Z100
Z135
Z150
Z300
Z600
Z900
Z1000
Z1200
(50 ohms)
(75 ohms)
(90 ohms)
(100 ohms)
(135 ohms)
(150 ohms)
(300 ohms)
(600 ohms)
(900 ohms)
(1000 ohms = dBv)
(1200 ohms)
Example:
DBMZ_D Z600
This setting only applies when single output AC voltages are being sourced. The dBm
impedance is set to the default at power on, reset, and when going into single output AC
mode.
x
DBMZ_D?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(dBm Impedance Default query) Returns the power-up and reset default impedance used
for dBm outputs (ac volts).
Response:
(character) Impedance keyword
Example:
DBMZ_D? returns Z600
DC_OFFSET
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(DC Voltage Offset command) Applies a dc offset to an ac output voltage (maximum six
digits). This command applies only to single ac voltage outputs. If the selected offset is
too large for the active ac voltage range, an error message is returned.
Parameter:
<value> signed offset amplitude
Example:
DC_OFFSET +123.45 MV
Load a dc offset of +123.45 mV to the ac output signal.
DC_OFFSET?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(DC Voltage Offset query) Returns the value of the dc offset voltage.
6-13
5522A
Operators Manual
Response:
<value> signed offset amplitude
Example:
DC_OFFSET?
returns +1.44E-03
Returns 1.44 mV as the value of the applied dc offset. If +0.00000E+00 is returned, the
dc offset is zero.
DPF
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Displacement Power Factor command) Sets the displacement power factor (phase
angle) between the Calibrator front panel terminals NORMAL and AUX (for sine waves
output only). The NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference. The phase offset is
expressed as the cosine of the phase offset (0.000 to 1.000) and a LEAD (default) or LAG
term, which determines whether the AUX output leads or lags the NORMAL output.
Parameters:
<value>,LEAD
<value>,LAG
Example:
DPF .123,LEAD
Set the current output on the Calibrator AUX terminals to lead the voltage output on the
NORMAL terminals by 82.93 degrees. (Cosine of 82.93 degrees is 0.123, nominal.)
DPF?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Displacement Power Factor query) Returns the displacement power factor (cosine of the
phase angle) between the Calibrator front panel NORMAL and AUX terminals for sine
wave outputs.
Responses:
<value>,LEAD
<value>,LAG
Example:
DPF? returns 5.00E-01,LEAD
Returns a leading power factor of .5 when the current output on the Calibrator AUX
terminals leads the voltage output on the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees. (Cosine of
60 degrees is 0.5.) The return is 0 if power factor does not apply to the output.
DUTY
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Duty Cycle command) Sets the duty cycle of the square wave output. The duty cycle is
the percentage of time the waveform is in the positive part of its cycle (1.00 to 99.00
percent). Duty cycle applies only to single-output square waves.
Parameter:
<value> of duty cycle with optional PCT (percent) unit
Example:
DUTY 12.34 PCT
Set the square wave duty cycle to 12.34 %.
DUTY?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Duty Cycle query) Returns the value of the square wave output duty cycle (1.00 to
99.00).
Response:
<value> of duty cycle in percent
Example:
DUTY? returns 1.234E+01
Returns 12.34 % for the value of the square wave duty cycle.
6-14
Remote Commands
Commands
x
EARTH
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
6
Coupled
(Earth Ground command) Selects whether or not the Calibrator front panel NORMAL
LO terminal is tied to chassis (earth) ground. Once set, the Calibrator retains the earth
setting until power off or reset.
Parameters:
OPEN (disconnect front panel LO terminal from chassis ground)
TIED (connect front panel LO terminal to chassis ground)
Example:
EARTH TIED
Load TIED to tie the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO terminal to earth (the front
panel Z key annunciator is on).
x
EARTH?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Earth Ground query) Returns whether or not the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO
terminal is tied to chassis (earth) ground.
Responses:
(character) OPEN (front panel LO terminal disconnected from chassis
ground)
(character) TIED (front panel LO terminal connected to chassis ground)
Example:
EARTH? returns OPEN
Returns OPEN when EARTH is not tied to the NORMAL LO terminal (the front panel
Z key annunciator is off).
EDIT
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Edit command) Sets the edit field to the primary, secondary or frequency field.
Parameters:
Example:
PRI
(edit the value in single output functions and the primary output
value in dual output functions)
SEC
(edit the secondary value in dual output functions)
FREQ
(edit the frequency value in single ac output functions)
OFF
(edit is off, which is the same as using the NEWREF command)
EDIT FREQ
Load FREQ into the edit field to edit frequency.
EDIT?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Edit query) Returns the edit field setting.
Responses:
(character) PRI
(value in single output functions, and the primary output
value in dual output functions is in edit)
(character) SEC (secondary value in dual output functions is in edit)
(character) FREQ (frequency value in single ac output functions is in edit)
(character) OFF (no value is in edit.)
Example:
EDIT? returns OFF
Returns OFF when no value is in edit.
6-15
5522A
Operators Manual
x
ERR?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Error query) Returns the first error code contained in the Calibrator error queue, then
removes that error code from the queue. Following the error code is an explanation of the
error code, similar to but sometimes containing more specific information than the
EXPLAIN? command. The explanation sent in response to this query can contain
variables specific to a particular error event. See Appendix E for a list of error codes and
error messages.
A zero value is returned when the error queue is empty. To read the entire contents of the
error queue, repeat ERR? until the response 0,”No Error” is returned. For terminal
users, the error queue Returns for ERR? is always 0,”No Error” because error
messages are returned instead of queued.
Response:
<value>, (error code value)
<string>
(text string explaining the error)
Example:
ERR? returns 0,”No Error”
Returns 0,”No Error” when the error queue is empty.
x
ERR_REF
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
Chooses the error reference for error calculations.
Parameter:
Sets the reference to the nominal value
Sets the reference to the output value
NOMINAL
TRUVAL
ERR_REF?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
x
Sequential
Overlapped
x
Coupled
Returns the error reference for error calculations.
Response:
The nominal value is used as the error reference
The output value is used as the error reference
NOMINAL
TRUVAL
ERR_UNIT
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(UUT Error Unit Thresh Hold command) Chooses how UUT error is shown (this iS
nonvolatile).
Parameter:
GT1000
GT100
GT10
PPM
PCT
ERR_UNIT?
x
UUT error is displayed in % above 1000 ppm, ppm below
UUT error is displayed in % above 100 ppm, ppm below
UUT error is displayed in % above 10 ppm, ppm below
UUT error is displayed in ppm always
UUT error is displayed in % always
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(UUT Error Unit Thresh Hold query) Returns presently selected values of ERR_UNIT.
Responses:
*ESE
x
GT1000
GT100
GT10
PPM
PCT
IEEE-488
UUT error is displayed in % above 1000 ppm, ppm below
UUT error is displayed in % above 100 ppm, ppm below
UUT error is displayed in % above 10 ppm, ppm below
UUT error is displayed in ppm always
UUT error is displayed in % always
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Event Status Enable command) Loads a byte into the Event Status Enable (ESE)
register. (See “Event Status Enable Register (ESE)” in Chapter 5)
6-16
Remote Commands
Commands
Parameter:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the ESE byte, 0 to 255)
Example:
*ESE 140
6
Load decimal 140 (binary 10001100) to enable bits 7 (PON), 3 (DDE) and 2 (QYE).
*ESE?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Event Status Enable query) Returns the contents of the Event Status Enable (ESE)
register. (See “Event Status Enable Register (ESE)” in Chapter 5)
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the ESE byte, 0 to 255)
Example:
*ESE? returns 133
Returns decimal 133 (binary 10000101) when bits 7 (PON), 2 (QYE), 1 (OPC) are
enabled.
*ESR?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Event Status Register query) Returns the contents of the Event Status Register (ESR)
and clears the register. (See Event Status Register (ESR)” in Chapter 5)
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the ESR byte, 0 to 255)
Example:
*ESR? returns 189
Returns decimal 189 (binary 10111101) when bits 7 (PON), 5 (CME), 4 (EXE), 3
(DDE), 2 (QYE) and 0 (OPC) are enabled.
EXPLAIN?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Explain Error query) Explains an error code. This command returns a string that
explains the error code furnished as the parameter. The error code (same as the
parameter) is originally obtained by sending the FAULT? query. (See the ERR?
command, which returns both the error code and the explanation string.) See Appendix E
for a list of error codes and error messages.
Parameter:
<value> if the error code (an integer)
Response:
<string> that explains the error code, with the parameter (if there is one)
shown as a percent sign followed by d (integer parameter),
f (floating point parameter), or s (string parameter)
Example:
EXPLAIN? 539 returns “Can’t change compensation now.”
Returns the explanation of error 539: “Can’t change compensation now.”
EXTGUARD
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(External guardcommand) Connects or disconnects the internal guard shield from the LO
binding post.
Parameter:
ON
OFF
(external guard is on, i.e. external)
(external guard is off, i.e. internal)
Once set, the Calibrator retains the external guard setting until power off or reset.
Example:
EXTGUARD ON
6-17
5522A
Operators Manual
EXTGUARD? x IEEE-488 x RS-232 x Sequential x Overlapped x Coupled
(External guard query) Returns whether the internal guard shields are connected or
disconnected from earth (chasis) ground.
Response:
(character) ON
(external guard is on, i.e., external)
(character) OFF (external guard is off, i.e., internal)
Example:
EXTGUARD? returns ON
FAULT?
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Fault query) Returns the first error code contained in the Calibrator error queue, then
remove that error from the queue. After obtaining the error code, use the EXPLAIN?
command to view an explanation. A zero value is returned when the error queue is
empty. To read the entire contents of the error queue, repeat FAULT? until the response
is 0. (Only system errors appear in the error queue.)
Response:
<value> of the error code
Example:
FAULT? returns 539
Returns the first error code in the error queue, number 539. To view an explanation of the
error, enter the command EXPLAIN? 539.
FORMAT
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Format command) Use with extreme care. Restores the contents of the nonvolatile
memory device to factory defaults. The memory holds calibration constants and setup
parameters. You lose all calibration data permanently. The CALIBRATION switch on
the rear panel of the Calibrator must be set in the ENABLE position or an execution error
occurs, except for FORMAT SETUP.
Parameter:
ALL
CAL
SETUP
(replaces the whole contents with factory defaults)
(replaces all cal constants with factory defaults)
(replaces setup parameters with factory defaults)
Example:
FORMAT SETUP
Replace the setup parameters with the default setup values (below). (The FORMAT ALL
command is the same as FORMAT CAL and then FORMAT SETUP.) The FORMAT
SETUP command also clears the *PUD string (see the *PUD command) and SRQSTR is
set to “SRQ: %02x %02x %04x %04x” (see the SRQSTR command) and SPLSTR is set
to “SPL: %02x %02x %04x %04x” (see the SPLSTR command).
6-18
Remote Commands
Commands
6
Features
Temperature
Standard
its-90
Display Contrast*
level 7,7
Host Connection
gpib (IEEE-488)
Display Brightness*
level 1,0
GPIB Port Address
4
RTD Power Up
Default Type
pt385
Serial Ports
8 bits, 1 stop bit, xon/xoff,
parity none, 9600 baud
Thermocouple
Power Up Default
Type
K
EOL (end of line)
CRLF
Current Limits
±20.5 A
EOF (end of file)
012,000
Voltage Limits
±1020 V
Remote I/F
term
Remote commands (see Chapter 6)
SRQSTR
cleared
*PUD string
SRQ: %02x %02x %04x
%04x
* Output Display and Control Display, respectively. There are 8 levels: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7.
Defaults
Reference Clock
Internal
Reference Phase
0°
dBm Impedance
600 Ω
Pressure Unit
PSI
FUNC?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Function query) Returns the present output, measurement, or calibration function. See
the response below for output & measurement modes.
Responses:
DCV
ACV
DCI
ACI
RES
CAP
RTD
TC_OUT
DC_POWER
AC_POWER
DCV_DCV
ACV_ACV
TC_MEAS
SACV
SDCV
MARKER
LEVSINE
EDGE
(dc volts function)
(ac volts function)
(dc current function)
(ac current function)
(ohms function)
(capacitance function)
(temperature with an rtd function)
(temperature with a thermocouple function)
(dc power function)
(ac power function)
(dual dc volts function)
(dual ac volts function)
(measure temperature with a thermocouple)
(oscilloscope ac volts function)
(oscilloscope dc volts function)
(oscilloscope marker function)
(oscilloscope leveled sine function)
(oscilloscope edge function)
Example:
FUNC? returns DCV_DCV
Returns DCV_DCV when the Calibrator output function dual dc volts.
6-19
5522A
Operators Manual
x
HARMONIC
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Harmonic command) Makes the frequency of one output a multiple of another output
for the ac voltage or ac power functions (sine waves only). For example, in dual ac
voltage, have the frequency of the voltage output on the Calibrator front panel NORMAL
terminals at 60 Hz and the frequency of the voltage output on the AUX terminals at the
7th harmonic (420 Hz). The range for the harmonics is 1 to 50.
Parameters:
<value>, PRI
<value>, SEC
(fundamental at 5522A NORMAL terminals)
(fundamental at 5522A AUX terminals)
Example:
HARMONIC 5, PRI
Load the fundamental frequency at the primary (PRI) output (NORMAL terminals), and
the 5th harmonic frequency is at the secondary output (AUX terminals). For example, if
the fundamental frequency output is 60 Hz, the harmonic frequency output is 300 Hz.
HARMONIC?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Harmonic query) Returns the present instrument harmonic characteristic and location of
the fundamental output PRI (primary, the NORMAL terminals) or SEC (secondary, the
AUX terminals).
Response:
<value>, PRI
<value>, SEC
(harmonic value, fundamental at primary output)
(harmonic value, fundamental at secondary output)
Example:
HARMONIC? returns 5, SEC
Returns that the 5th harmonic frequency is selected, and the fundamental is at the
secondary output (AUX terminals). Therefore, the harmonic frequency appears at the
primary, or NORMAL terminals.
x
*IDN?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Identification query) Returns instrument model number, serial number, and firmware
revision levels for the main, encoder, and inguard CPUs.
Responses:
as follows:
(Indefinite ASCII) A message containing four fields separated by commas
1. Manufacturer
2. Model number
3. Serial number
4. Firmware revision levels for the Main CPU+Front Panel CPU+Inguard
PGA
Example:
*IDN? returns FLUKE,5522A,5248000,1.0+1.3+1.8
Returns Fluke manufacturer, model 5522A, serial number 5248000, main firmware
version 1.0, encoder firmware 1.3, and inguard PGA 1.8.
INCR
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Increment command) Increments or decrements the output (as selected using the EDIT
command, or defaults to the primary output) and enters error mode; the same as using the
Calibrator output adjustment knob in local operation.
6-20
Parameters:
<+ value>
<–value>
(increment value) (optional unit matching edit field)
(decrement value)
Example:
INCR +.00001 mV
Remote Commands
Commands
6
Load the error mode and increment the selected edit field by .00001 mV.
ISCE
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Instrument Status Change Enable command) Loads two bytes into the two 16-bit ISCE
mask registers (ISCE1 and ISCE0). (See “Instrument Status Change Enable Registers” in
Chapter 5 for more information.)
Parameter:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISCE 6272
Load decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) to enable bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE) and 6 (HIVOLT). This is equivalent to sending the commands
ISCE0 6272 and ISCE1 6272 (see below).
x
ISCE?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Instrument Status Change Enable query) Returns the two bytes from the two 16-bit
ISCE mask registers (ISCE1 and ISCE0). (See “Instrument Status Change Enable
Registers” in Chapter 5 for more information.)
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISCE? returns 6272
Returns decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) if bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE), and 6 (HIVOLT) are set to 1.
ISCE0
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable command) Loads the two bytes into the 16-bit
ISCE0 register. (See “Instrument Status Change Enable Registers” in Chapter 5 for more
information.)
Parameter:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISCE0 6272
Load decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) to enable bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE) and 6 (HIVOLT).
x
ISCE0?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Enable query) Returns the two bytes from the 16-bit
ISCE0 register. (See “Instrument Status Change Enable Registers” in Chapter 5 for more
information.)
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISCE0? returns 6272
Returns decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) if bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE), and 6 (HIVOLT) are set to 1.
ISCE1
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable command) Loads the two bytes into the 16-bit
ISCE1 register. (See “Instrument Status Change Enable Registers” in Chapter 5 for more
information.)
Parameter:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
6-21
5522A
Operators Manual
Example:
ISCE1 6272
Load decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) to enable bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE) and 6 (HIVOLT).
ISCE1?
x
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Enable query) Returns the two bytes from the 16-bit
ISCE1 register. (See “Instrument Status Change Enable Registers” in Chapter 5 for more
information.)
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISCE1? returns 6272
Returns decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) if bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE), and 6 (HIVOLT) are set to 1.
x
ISCR?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Instrument Status Change Register query) Returns and clears the contents of the
Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register (ISCR0) and Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change
Register (ISCR1). (See “Instrument Status Change Register” in Chapter 5 for more
information.)
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISCR? returns 6272
Returns decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) if bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE), and 6 (HIVOLT) are set to 1.
ISCR0?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register query) Returns and clears the contents of the
Instrument Status 1 to 0 Change Register.
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISCRO? returns 6272
Returns decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) if bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE), and 6 (HIVOLT) are set to 1.
ISCR1?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register query) Returns and clears the contents of the
Instrument Status 0 to 1 Change Register.
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISCR1? returns 6272
Returns decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) if bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE), and 6 (HIVOLT) are set to 1.
ISR?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Instrument Status Register query) Returns contents of the Instrument Status Register.
6-22
Response:
<value> (decimal equivalent of the 16 bits, 0 to 32767)
Example:
ISR? returns 6272
Remote Commands
Commands
6
Returns decimal 6272 (binary 0001010001000000) if bits 12 (SETTLED), 10
(REMOTE), and 6 (HIVOLT) are set to 1.
x
LCOMP
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Inductive compensation command) Activates or deactivates inductive load
compensation for ac current output. For current output, compensation is allowed when
the frequency is less than 440 Hz and the amplitude is less than 0.33 A. Compensation is
also allowed when the frequency is less than 1 kHz and the amplitude is greater than or
equal to 0.33 A.
Parameters:
OFF
ON
Example:
LCOMP ON
x
LCOMP?
(turns off the inductive load compensation circuitry)
(turns on the inductive load compensation circuitry
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Inductive compensation query) Returns whether inductive load compensation for ac
current output is active.
Responses:
(character) OFF (Inductive load compensation circuitry is off)
(character) ON
(Inductive load compensation circuitry is on)
Example:
LCOMP? returns ON
LIMIT
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Limit command) Sets the maximum permissible output magnitude, negative and
positive, for voltage and current, which is saved in the Calibrator non-volatile memory.
(While saving configuration data in the non-volatile memory, a period of about
2 seconds, the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands.) Both negative and
positive values must be entered. Once set, the Calibrator retains the limit settings until
either another limit is entered, or the FORMAT SETUP command resets the limits (and all
other defaults) to the factory settings (±1020 V, ±20.5 A). See the FORMAT command.
The magnitude of the limit has the following effect on different waveforms:
dc
ac (sine wave)
ac (non-sine wave)
ac (with dc offset)
magnitude of limit
magnitude of limit (rms)
magnitude of limit x 3 (peak-to-peak)
magnitude of limit x 2.4 (absolute peak) (volts only)
Parameters:
<positive value>,<negative value>
Example:
LIMIT 100V, -100V
Limit the voltage output to ±100 V dc, 100 V ac rms, 300 V peak-to-peak, 240 V peak.
Example:
LIMIT 1A, -1A
Limit the current output to ±1 A dc, 1 A ac rms, 3 A peak-to-peak.
LIMIT?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Limit query) Returns the programmed output magnitude limits for voltage and current.
Response:
<positive value voltage>,<negative value voltage>,
<positive value current>,<negative value current>
Example:
LIMIT?
returns 1020.0000,-1020.0000, 20.5000, −20.5000
6-23
5522A
Operators Manual
Returns the present value of the voltage and current limits (reset values shown).
x
LOCAL
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Local command) Puts the Calibrator into the local state, clearing the remote state (see
the REMOTE command) and front panel lockout (see the LOCKOUT command). This
command duplicates the IEEE-488 GTL (Go To Local) message.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
LOCAL
Set the instrument into the local state, clearing the remote state and front panel lockout (if
enable).
x
LOCKOUT
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Lockout command) Puts the Calibrator into the lockout state when in remote control
(see the REMOTE command). This means no local operation at the front panel is allowed
during remote control. To clear the lockout condition, use the LOCAL command. This
command duplicates the IEEE-488 LLO (Local Lockout) message.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
LOCKOUT
Set the instrument into the front panel lockout state. The front panels controls cannot be
used.
LOWS
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Low Potential Output Terminals command) Selects whether or not the Calibrator front
panel NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal are internally tied together (default)
or are open. This feature is used for ac power, dc power, dual dc volts and dual ac volts
outputs. Once set, the Calibrator retains the LO setting until power off or reset.
Parameter:
Example:
OPEN
(disconnect NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals)
TIED
(connect NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals)
LOWS TIED
Tie the front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals together.
LOWS?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Low Potential Output Terminals query) Returns whether or not the Calibrator front
panel NORMAL LO terminal and AUX LO terminal are internally tied together (default)
or are open.
Response:
Example:
OPEN
(disconnected NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals)
TIED
(connected NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals)
LOWS? returns OPEN
Returns OPEN when the Calibrator front panel NORMAL LO and AUX LO terminals are
not tied together.
6-24
Remote Commands
Commands
x
MULT
IEEE-488
x
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
6
Coupled
(Multiply command) Multiplies the reference magnitude (as selected with the EDIT
command or default to the primary output). The reference magnitude is the present
reference in either direct mode or in error mode.
Parameter:
<value>
(multiplier expressed as a floating point number)
Example:
MULT 2.5
Multiply the existing reference by 2.5, creating a new reference. For example, an existing
reference of 1 V is multiplied to 2.5 V.
NEWREF
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(New Reference command) Sets the new reference to the present Calibrator output value
and exit the error mode (if selected). For example, you might edit the Calibrator output
using the EDIT and INCR commands, and then use the NEWREF command to establish a
new reference point and exit the error mode. This is the same as pressing the Calibrator
front panel N key.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
NEWREF
Set the reference value to the current Calibrator output value.
OLDREF
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Old Reference command) Sets the Calibrator output to the reference value and exit the
error mode (if selected). If editing the output using the EDIT and INCR commands and
you want to return to the reference value, use the OLDREF command. If editing the
output and you want to make the edited value the new reference, use the NEWREF
command.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
OLDREF
Set the output to the existing reference value, clearing editing changes.
ONTIME?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Calibrator On Time query) Returns the time in minutes since the Calibrator was most
recently powered up.
Response:
<minutes>
(24-hour clock)
Example:
ONTIME? returns 47
Returns the time since the Calibrator was last powered up: 47 minutes.
*OPC
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Operations Complete command) Sets bit 0 (OPC) of the Event Status Register to 1
when all pending device operations are complete. Also see the *ESR? command.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
*OPC
Set bit 0 of the Event Status Register to 1 when all pending device operations are done.
6-25
5522A
Operators Manual
x
*OPC?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Operations Complete query) Returns a 1 after all pending operations are complete. This
command causes program execution to pause until operations are complete. (See *WAI.)
Response:
1
(all operations are complete)
Example:
*OPC? returns 1
Returns 1 when all pending operations are complete.
x
OPER
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Operate command) Activates the Calibrator output if it is in standby. This is the same as
pressing the Calibrator front panel O key. If there are errors in the error queue, the
OPER command is inhibited for outputs 33 V and over. (Also see the ERR? command
and STBY command.)
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
OPER
Connect the selected output to the Calibrator front panel terminals. Also lights the
annunciator in the O key.
x
OPER?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Operate query) Returns the operate/standby setting.
Response:
1 (Operate)
0 (Standby)
Example:
OPER? returns 1
Returns 1 when the Calibrator is in operate.
x
*OPT?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Options command) Returns a list of the installed hardware and software options.
Responses:
<option string>,<option string>,... (options list, separated by commas)
0 (no options are installed)
Example:
*OPT? returns SC600
Returns SC600 when the Oscilloscope Calibration Option is installed.
OUT
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Output command) Sets the output of the Calibrator and establishes a new reference
point for the error mode. If only one amplitude is supplied, the Calibrator sources a single
output. If two amplitudes are supplied, the Calibrator sources two outputs. The second
amplitude will be sourced at the AUX terminals for dual voltage outputs. If the frequency
is not supplied, the Calibrator will use the frequency that is presently in use.
To source or measure a temperature, select the desired sensor and sensor parameters first.
(See the TSENS_TYPE, RTD_*, and TC_* commands.)
To source a signal using the Calibrator scope options, refer to the SCOPE command in
Chapter 8.
6-26
Remote Commands
Commands
6
If you change the frequency of an ac function and the harmonic output is not explicitly
set at the same time with the HARMONIC command, the harmonic will be set to 1.
Use multipliers e.g., k, M, μ with the OUT command, as desired.
Parameters: <value> V
<value> DBM
<value> V, <value> Hz
<value> DBM, <value> Hz
<value> A
<value> A, <value> Hz
<value> OHM
<value> F
<value> CEL
<value> FAR
<value> HZ
<value> V, <value> A
<value> V, <value> A, <value> HZ
<value> V, <value> V
<value> V, <value> V, <value> HZ
<value>
Volts dc or update volts ac
Volts ac dBm update
Volts ac or volts dc with 0 Hz
Volts ac in dBm
Current dc or update current ac
Current ac
Resistance
Capacitance
Temperature (Celsius)
Temperature (Fahrenheit)
Update frequency
Power dc or update power ac
Power ac
Dual volts dc or update dual ac
Dual volts ac in volts
For single output, changes
amplitude keeping unit and
frequency the same.
Examples:
OUT 15.2 V
(volts; 15.2 V @ same frequency)
OUT 20 DBM
(volts; 20 dBm @ same frequency)
OUT 10 V, 60 Hz
(volts ac; 10 V @ 60 Hz)
OUT 10 DBM, 50 HZ
(volts ac; 10 dBm @ 50 Hz)
OUT 1.2 MA
(current; 1.2 mA @ same frequency)
OUT 1 A, 400 HZ
(current ac; 1 A @ 400 Hz)
OUT 1 KOHM
(ohms; 1 kΩ)
OUT 1 UF
(capacitance; 1 μF)
OUT 100 CEL
(temperature; 100 °C)
OUT 32 FAR
(temperature; 32 °F)
OUT 60 HZ
(frequency update; 60 Hz)
OUT 10 V, 1 A
(power; 10 watts @ same frequency)
OUT 1 V, 1 A, 60 HZ
(power ac; 1 watts @ 60 Hz)
OUT 1 V, 2 V
(dual volts; 1 V, 2 V @ same freq.)
OUT 10 MV, 20 MV, 60 HZ (dual volts; .01 V, .02 V @ 60 Hz)
Each example shows a value and unit, e.g., –15.2 V. If a value is entered without a unit,
the value of the existing output is changed, when logically allowed.
OUT?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Output query) Returns the output amplitudes and frequency of the Calibrator.
Multipliers (e.g., K or M) are not used in the response.
Parameters:
V
DBM
CEL
FAR
OHM
(optional for ac voltage and TC modes)
(optional for ac voltage modes)
(optional for RTD and TC modes, Celsius)
(optional for RTD and TC modes, Fahrenheit)
(optional for RTD modes, ohms)
Response:
<primary amplitude value>,<primary units>,
<secondary amplitude value>,<secondary units>,
6-27
5522A
Operators Manual
<fundamental frequency value>
Examples:
OUT? returns -1.520000E+01,V,0E+00,0,0.00E+00
OUT? returns 1.88300E-01,A,0E+00,0,4.420E+02
OUT? returns 1.23000E+00,V,2.34000E+00,V,6.000E+01
OUT? returns 1.92400E+06,OHM,0E+00,0,0.00E+00
OUT? returns 1.52000E+01,V,1.88300E-01,A,4.420E+02
OUT? DBM returns 2.586E+01,DBM,0E+00,A,4.420E+02
OUT? returns 1.0430E+02,CEL,0E+00,0,0.00E+00
OUT? FAR returns 2.19740000E+02,FAR,0E+00,0,0.00E+00
OUT? V returns 4.2740E-03,V,0E+00,0,0.00E+00
OUT? OHM returns 1.40135E+02,OHM,0E+00,0,0.00E+00
The respective values for the above examples are:
–15.2 V
188.3 mA, 442 Hz
1.23 V, 2.34 V, 60 Hz
1.924 MΩ
15.2 V, 188.3 mA, 442 Hz
25.86 dBm, 442 Hz (25.86 dBm = 15.2 V at 600 Ω)
104.3 °C
219.74 °F (same value as 104.3 °C, in Fahrenheit)
4.274 mV (same value as 104.3 °C for a K-type thermocouple, in volts)
140.135 Ω (same value as 104.3 °C for a pt385 RTD, in ohms)
The primary and secondary units are: V, DBM, A, OHM, F, CEL, FAR. The units for the
<frequency value> is always assumed to be Hz.
OUT_ERR?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
x
Sequential
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Output Error query) Returns the UUT error and units computed by the Calibrator after
shifting the output with the INCR command. The return units are PPM (parts per million),
PCT (percent), DB (decibels) or 0 if there is no error. The UUT error is not computed
when editing frequency.
Response:
<value of error>,<units>
Example:
OUT_ERR? returns 1.00000E+01,PCT
Returns –10% when the UUT is reading low by 10 %.
PHASE
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Phase Difference command) Sets a phase difference between the Calibrator front panel
NORMAL and AUX or 20A terminals for ac power and ac dual voltage outputs. The
NORMAL terminal output is the phase reference. The set range is 0.00 to
±180.00 degrees, with + for a leading phase difference and – for a lagging phase
difference.
Parameter:
<phase value> DEG
Example:
PHASE –60 DEG
(DEG, for degree, is optional)
Set the phase difference so the frequency output at the AUX terminals lags the frequency
output at the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees.
6-28
Remote Commands
Commands
x
PHASE?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
6
Coupled
(Phase Difference query) Returns the phase difference between the Calibrator front panel
NORMAL and AUX terminals for ac power and ac dual voltage outputs.
Response:
<phase value>
Example:
PHASE? returns -6.000E+01
Returns –60 when the frequency output at the AUX terminals is lagging the frequency
output at the NORMAL terminals by 60 degrees.
x
POWER?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Calculate Power Output query) Returns the equivalent real power for ac and dc power
outputs, based on the voltage and current settings, and power factor (ac only). If the
output is not ac or dc power, the return is 0E+00 (zero) watts.
Response:
<value>
(in watts)
Example:
POWER? returns 1.00000E+01
Returns 10 when the output voltage is 10 V dc and output current 1 A dc, for 10 watts
real power.
Example:
POWER? returns 1.00000E+01
Returns 10 when the output voltage is 10 V ac and output current 2 A ac and power factor
is .5, for 10 watts real power.
PR_PRT X IEEE X RS=232
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
Description:
Prints a self calibration report out the selected serial port.
Parameters:
1. Type of report to print:
STORED, ACTIVE, or CONSTS
2. Format of report:
PRINT (designed to be read), SPREAD
(designed to be loaded into a
spreadsheet )
3. Calibration interval to be used for instrument specifications in the
report: I90D (90 day spec), I1Y (I year spec)
4. Serial port through which to print:
Example:
PRES?
HOST, UUT
PR-PRT STORED, PRINT, i90D, HOST
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Pressure Module query) Queries the attached pressure module for its model and serial
number.
Responses:
(Indefinite ASCII) A message containing four fields separated by commas
as follows:
1. Manufacturer
2. Model number
3. Serial number
4. Firmware revision (0)
Example:
FLUKE,700P05,9467502,0
6-29
5522A
Operators Manual
x
PRES_MEAS
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Pressure Measurement mode command) Changes the operating mode to pressure
measurement.
Parameter:
(Optional) Pressure units
Example:
PRES_MEAS PSI
Displays the previously selected units if no parameter is supplied.
x
PRES_UNIT
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Pressure Units command) Sets the pressure display units.
Parameters:
(pound-force per square inch)
(meters of mercury)
(inches of mercury)
(inches of water)
(feet of water)
(meters of water)
(bar)
(Pascal)
(grams per centimeter squared)
(Inches of water @ 60 degrees Farhenheit)
PSI
MHG
INHG
INH2O
FTH2O
MH2O
BAR
PAL
G/CM2
INH2O60F
Once set, the Calibrator retains the pressure units until power off or reset.
Example:
PRES_UNIT BAR
x
PRES_UNIT?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Pressure Units query) Returns the pressure display units.
Responses:
(character) PSI
(character) MHG
(character) INHG
(character) INH2O
(character) FTH2O
(character) MH2O
(character) BAR
(character) PAL
(character) G/CM2
(character) INH2O60F
(pound-force per square inch)
(meters of mercury)
(inches of mercury)
(inches of water)
(feet of water)
(meters of water)
(bar)
(Pascal)
(grams per centimeter squared)
(Inches of water @ 60 degrees Farhenheit)
Example:
PRES_UNIT? returns BAR
Once set, the Calibrator retains the pressure units until power off or reset.
PRES_UNIT_D
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Pressure Units Default command) Sets the power-up and reset default pressure display
units.
Parameters:
6-30
PSI
MHG
INHG
INH2O
FTH2O
(pound-force per square inch)
(meters of mercury)
(inches of mercury)
(inches of water)
(feet of water)
Remote Commands
Commands
(meters of water)
(bar)
(Pascal)
(grams per centimeter squared)
(Inches of water @ 60 degrees Farhenheit)
MH2O
BAR
PAL
G/CM2
INH2O60F
Example:
6
PRES_UNIT_D PSI
The pressure unit is set to the default at power on and reset.
PRES_UNIT_D?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Pressure Units Default query) Returns the power-up and reset default pressure display
units.
Responses:
(character) PSI
(character) MHG
(character) INHG
(character) INH2O
(character) FTH2O
(character) MH2O
(character) BAR
(character) PAL
(character) G/CM2
(character) INH2O60F
Example:
PRES_UNIT_D? returns PSI
*PUD
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
(pound-force per square inch)
(meters of mercury)
(inches of mercury)
(inches of water)
(feet of water)
(meters of water)
(bar)
(Pascal)
(grams per centimeter squared)
(Inches of water @ 60 degrees Farhenheit)
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Protected User Data command) Stores a string of 64 characters (maximum), which is
saved in the Calibrator non-volatile memory. (While saving configuration data in the
non-volatile memory, a period of about 2 seconds, the Calibrator does not respond to
remote commands.) This command works only when the CALIBRATION switch on the
rear panel of the Calibrator is in the ENABLE position. Include a line feed (RS-232)
character to terminate the block data or End or Identify (EOI) command (IEEE-488).
Parameter:
#2<nn><nn characters string>
#0<character string>
“<character string>“
‘<character string>‘
Example:
*PUD #0CAL LAB NUMBER 1
(definite length)
(indefinite length)
(character string)
(character string)
Store the string CAL LAB NUMBER 1 in the protected user data area using the
indefinite length format.
Example:
*PUD #216CAL LAB NUMBER 1
Store the string CAL LAB NUMBER 1 in the protected user data area using the definite
length format, where #2 means two digits follow which represent the number of text
characters nn in CAL LAB NUMBER 1 (including spaces=16).
Example:
*PUD “CAL LAB NUMBER 1”
Store the string CAL LAB NUMBER 1 in the protected user data area using the character
string format.
6-31
5522A
Operators Manual
*PUD?
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Protected User Data query) Returns the contents of the *PUD (Protected User Data)
memory in definite length format.
Response:
#2nn<nn characters>
Example:
*PUD? returns #216CAL LAB NUMBER 1
Returns #2 then 16 then 16 characters of text (including spaces) stored in the nonvolatile
memory.
RANGE?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Range query) Returns the present output ranges. Both the primary output and secondary
outputs are returned. If there is no secondary output, 0 is returned. Dual outputs are noted
with P for primary output (front panel NORMAL terminals) and S for secondary output
(front panel AUX terminals).
Response:
<primary output>,<secondary output>
Examples:
DC330MV,0
(dc volts 330 mV range)
DC33MA_A,0
(dc current 33 mA range)
AC3_3V,0
(ac volts 3.3 V range)
AC330MA_A,0
(ac current 330 mA range)
R110OHM,0
(ohms 110 Ω range)
C1_1UF,0
(capacitance 1.1 μF range)
TCSRC,0
(temperature thermocouple source)
RTD_110,0
(temperature RTD 110 Ω range)
DC3_3V_P,DC3A_AS (dc power 3.3 V, 3 A ranges)
AC330V_P,AC20A_2S (ac power 330 V, 20 A ranges)
DC330MV_P,DC3_3V_S (dual dc volts 330 mV, 3.3 V ranges)
AC330V_P,AC3_3V_S (dual ac volts 330 V, 3.3 V ranges)
Returns the symbolic name of the single or first output, and return the symbolic name of
the second output (0 if there is no second output).
x
RANGELCK
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Range Lock command) Locks in the present range, or selects auto ranging for dc
voltage and dc current single outputs. The range automatically unlocks if the output
function changes, for example from dc volts to dc current. When RANGELCK is on, this
is equivalent to the softkey range lock showing locked. When RANGELCK is off, this is
equivalent to the softkey range lock showing auto.
Parameter:
Example:
ON
(Locks the dc volts or dc current range)
OFF
(Unlocks the dc volts or dc current range for autoranging)
RANGELCK OFF
Set the range lock off to allow autoranging for dc volts or dc current.
RANGELCK?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Range Lock query) Returns whether or not the preset dc volts or dc current single
output range is locked.
Response:
6-32
ON
(range is locked and autoranging is not allowed)
OFF
(range is not locked and autoranging is allowed)
Remote Commands
Commands
Example:
6
RANGELCK? returns OFF
Returns OFF when the range for dc volts or dc current is not locked (autoranging
enabled).
x
REFCLOCK
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Clock command) Sets the reference clock source (internal or through the 10
MHz IN BNC connector).
Parameter
INT
EXT
(Sets internal reference clock)
(Sets external reference clock)
Example:
REFCLOCK INT
Once set, the Calibrator retains the external guard setting until power off or reset.
REFCLOCK?
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Clock query) Returns the reference clock source (internal or through the 10
MHz IN BNC connector).
Response:
(character) INT (Reference clock is internal)
(character) EXT (Reference clock is external)
Example:
REFCLOCK? returns INT
REFCLOCK_D
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Clock Default command) Sets the power-up and reset default for the
reference clock source (internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector).
Parameters
INT
EXT
(Sets internal reference clock)
(Sets external reference clock)
The reference clock is set to the default at power on, reset, and when going into an ac
function.
Example:
REFCLOCK_D INT
REFCLOCK_D?
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Clock Default query) Returns the power-up and reset default for the
reference clock source (internal or through the 10 MHz IN BNC connector).
Responses:
(character) INT (Reference clock is internal)
(character) EXT (Reference clock is external)
Example:
REFCLOCK_D? returns INT
REFOUT?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Output query) Returns the present value of the reference when editing the
output (error mode). If not editing the output using the INCR command, the return is 0
(0E+00). The reference value is set with the OUT, NEWREF or MULT commands. To
determine which quantity is being edited, use the EDIT? and OUT? commands.
Response:
<reference value>
Example:
REFOUT? returns 0E+00
6-33
5522A
Operators Manual
Returns 0 when the output is not being edited.
Example:
REFOUT? returns 2.500000E-01
Returns .250 when the output is being edited and the reference is, for example, 250 mV.
x
REFPHASE
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Phase command) If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz
IN/OUT, sets the phase difference between the primary channel on the Calibrator relative
to the sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal. The primary channel is the
NORMAL, AUX, or 20A terminal for single outputs and the NORMAL terminal for ac
power and ac dual voltage outputs. The sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal is
the phase reference. The set range is 0.00 to ±180.00 degress, with + for a leading phase
difference and − for a lagging phase difference.
Parameter:
Phase with optional multiplier and DEG unit
Example:
REFPHASE 1.5 DEG (1.5 degrees)
On either Calibrator, set the phase of the primary channel to lead the sync pulse by 1.5
degrees.
x
REFPHASE?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Phase query) If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz IN/OUT,
returns the phase difference between the primary channel on the Calibrator and the sync
pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal.
Response:
(float) Phase in degrees
Example:
REFPHASE? returns 1.50E+00 (1.5 degrees)
x
REFPHASE_D
IEEE-488
x
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Phase Default command) If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz
IN/OUT, sets the power-up and reset default phase difference between the primary
channel on the Calibrator relative to the sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal.
The primary channel is the NORMAL, AUX, or 20A terminal for single outputs and the
NORMAL terminal for ac power and ac dual voltage outputs. The sync pulse on the
10 MHz IN or OUT terminal is the phase reference. The set range is 0.00 to
±180.00 degrees, with + for a leading phase difference and − for a lagging phase
difference.
Parameter:
Phase with optional multiplier and DEG unit
Example
REFPHASE_D 1.5 DEG (1.5 degrees)
On either Calibrator, set the power-up and reset default phase of the primary channel to
lead the sync pulse by 1.5 degrees.
REFPHASE_D?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Reference Phase Default query) If two Calibrators are synchronized using 10 MHz
IN/OUT, returns the power-up and reset default phase difference between the primary
channel on the Calibrator and the sync pulse on the 10 MHz IN or OUT terminal.
6-34
Response:
(Float) Phase in degrees
Example:
REFPHASE_D? returns 1.50E+00 (1.5 degrees)
Remote Commands
Commands
x
REMOTE
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
6
Coupled
(Remote command) Places the Calibrator into the remote state. This command duplicates
the IEEE-488 REN (Remote Enable) message. When in the remote state, the Control
Display shows the softkey “REMOTE CONTROL Go to Local.” Pressing this softkey
returns the Calibrator to local operation If the front panel is locked out, the Control
Display shows the softkey “REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL LOCK OUT.” (See the
LOCKOUT command.) To unlock the front panel, use the LOCAL command, or cycle the
Calibrator power switch.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
REMOTE
Place the Calibrator in the remote state and display this state on the front panel Control
Display with a softkey REMOTE CONTROL.
x
RPT_STR
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Report String command) Loads the user report string. The user report string can be read
on the Control Display in local operation, and appears on calibration reports. The
CALIBRATION switch must be set to ENABLE. (Sequential command.)
Parameter:
String of up to 40 characters
RPT_STR?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Report String query) Returns the user report string. The user report string can be read on
the Control Display in local operation, and appears on calibration reports. (Sequential
command.)
Parameter:
None
Response:
(String) Up to 40 characters
*RST
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Reset Instrument command) Resets the Calibrator to the power-up state. *RST holds off
execution of subsequent commands until the reset operation is complete. This command
is the same as pressing the front panel R key.
A reset action evokes the following commands and values:
Command
Value
Command
Value
CUR_POST
AUX
REFCLOCK
<REFCLOCK_D value>
DBMZ
<DBMZ_D value>
REFPHASE
<REFPHASE_D value>
DC_OFFSET
0V
RTD_TYPE
<RTD_TYPE_D value>
DUTY
50PCT
SCOPE
OFF
EARTH
OPEN
STBY
(No output)
EXTGUARD
OFF
TC_OFFSET
0 CEL
HARMONIC
1, PRI
TC_OTCD
ON
LCOMP
OFF
TC_REF
INT
LOWS
TIED
TC_TYPE
<TC_TYPE_D value>
OUT
0V,0HZ
TRIG
OFF
6-35
5522A
Operators Manual
Command
Value
Command
Value
OUT_IMP
Z1M
TSENS_TYPE
TC
PHASE
0DEG
WAVE
NONE,NONE
PRES_UNIT
<PRES_UNIT_D value>
ZCOMP
OFF
RANGELCK
OFF
ZERO_MEAS
OFF
Changes made to the setup menus that are not saved in memory are discarded on reset.
Response:
(None)
Example:
*RST
Place the Calibrator in a reset condition, evoking the commands and values shown above.
x
RTD_TYPE
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Resistance Temperature Detector Type command) Sets the Resistance Temperature
Detector (RTD) sensor type.
Before using RTD_TYPE, select RTD using the TSENS_TYPE command. After using
RTD_TYPE, select the output temperature using the OUT command. Changes in
temperature sensors changes the output to 0 °C. Once set, the Calibrator retains the RTD
type until power off or reset.
Parameters:
PT385
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_200
(200-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_500
(500-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_1000 (1000-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT3926
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT3916
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.003916 ohms/ohm/°C)
CU10
(10-ohm RTD, empirical curve)
NI120
(120-ohm RTD, empirical curve)
Example:
RTD_TYPE PT3926
Set the RTD type to a 100-ohm type, using the pt3926 curve
(α=0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C). The resistance of 100 ohms refers to the ice point
characteristic, (the resistance of the RTD at 0 °C (32 °F)).
RTD_TYPE?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Resistance Temperature Detector Type query) Returns the Resistance Temperature
Detector (RTD) type used for RTD temperature simulations.
6-36
Responses:
PT385 (100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_200
(200-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_500
(500-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_1000 (1000-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT3926 (100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT3916 (100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.003916 ohms/ohm/°C)
CU10
(10-ohm RTD, empirical curve)
NI120 (120-ohm RTD, empirical curve)
Example:
RTD_TYPE? returns PT3926
Remote Commands
Commands
6
Returns PT3926 when a 100-ohm RTD with curve α=0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C is set as
the RTD type.
x
RTD_TYPE_D
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Resistance Temperature Detector Type Default command) Sets the default Resistance
Temperature Detector (RTD) at power on and reset, which is saved in the Calibrator nonvolatile memory. (While saving configuration data in the non-volatile memory, a period
of about 2 seconds, the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands.)
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
(200-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
(500-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
(1000-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C)
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.003916 ohms/ohm/°C)
(10-ohm RTD, empirical curve)
(120-ohm RTD, empirical curve)
Parameters:
PT385
PT385_200
PT385_500
PT385_1000
PT3926
PT3916
CU10
NI120
Example:
RTD_TYPE_D PT3926
Set the RTD default type to a 100-ohm RTD with curve α=0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C.
RTD_TYPE_D?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Resistance Temperature Detector Type Default query) Returns the default Resistance
Temperature Detector (RTD) used at power on and reset.
Responses:
PT385
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_200
(200-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_500
(500-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT385_1000 (1000-ohm RTD, curve α=0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT3926
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C)
PT3916
(100-ohm RTD, curve α=0.003916 ohms/ohm/°C)
CU10
(10-ohm RTD, empirical curve)
NI120
(120-ohm RTD, empirical curve)
Example:
RTD_TYPE_D? returns PT3926
Returns PT3926 when the RTD default type is a 100-ohm RTD with curve
α=0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C.
SP_SET
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Host Serial Port Set command) Sets the RS-232-C settings for the Calibrator rear panel
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port, which is saved in the Calibrator non-volatile
memory. (While saving configuration data in the non-volatile memory, a period of about
2 seconds, the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands.) (To set the parameters
for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port, see the UUT_SET command.) The
factory default values are shown below in bold type. (To return to the factory defaults,
see the FORMAT SETUP command.)
The interface selection sets the command response, with command echo back for
commands and error messages with TERM (terminal) or no echo back with COMP
(computer).
Parameters:
<baud rate value>,
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
6-37
5522A
Operators Manual
<interface>,
TERM (terminal), COMP (computer)
<flow control>,
XON (xon/xoff), NOSTALL (none), RTS (rts/cts)
<number data bits>,
DBIT7 (7 bits) or DBIT8 (8 bits)
<number stop bits>, SBIT1 (1 bit) or SBIT2 (2 bits)
<parity>,
PNONE (none), PODD (odd),PEVEN
(even)
<end of line char.>
Example:
CR (carriage return), LF (line feed),
CRLF (carriage return/line feed)
SP_SET 9600,TERM,XON,DBIT8,SBIT1,PNONE,CRLF
Set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port to the factory
default values.
x
SP_SET?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Host Serial Port Set query) Returns the RS-232-C settings for the Calibrator rear panel
SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port. (To return the parameters for the rear panel
SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port, see the UUT_SET? command.) The factory default
values are shown below in bold type. (To return to the factory defaults, see the FORMAT
SETUP command.)
Responses:
<baud rate value>,
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
<interface>,
TERM (terminal), COMP (computer)
<flow control>,
XON (xon/xoff), NOSTALL (none), RTS (rts/cts)
<number data bits>,
DBIT7 (7 bits) or DBIT8 (8 bits)
<number stop bits>, SBIT1 (1 bit) or SBIT2 (2 bits)
<parity>,
PNONE (none), PODD (odd),PEVEN
(even)
<end of line char.>
Example:
CR (carriage return), LF (line feed),
CRLF (carriage return/line feed)
SP_SET? returns 9600,TERM,XON,DBIT8,SBIT1,PNONE,CRLF
Returns the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port, as shown,
when set to the factory default values.
SPLSTR
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Serial Poll String command) Sets the Serial Poll String (string up to 40 characters)
which is saved in the Calibrator non-volatile memory. (While saving configuration data
in the non-volatile memory, a period of about 2 seconds, the Calibrator does not respond
to remote commands.) The SPLSTR is sent to the host over the serial interface when a ^P
(<cntl> P) character is sent. The default format is:
SPL: %02x %02x %04x %04x
where the term %02x (8 bits) means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 2 hex
digits, and %04x (16 bits) means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 4 hex digits.
The string representations are:
SPL: (STB) (ESR) (ISCR0) (ISCR1)
See the commands, respectively, *STB?, *ESR?, ISCR0?, and ISCR1?. A typical
string in the default format sent to the host is: SPL: 44 00 0000 1000. This
command is for format. For values instead of format, enter a ^P (<cntl> p) character.
Also see the SRQSTR command.
Parameter:
6-38
“<string>\n”
(\n represents the NEWLINE character, hex 0A)
Remote Commands
Commands
Example:
6
SPLSTR “SPL: %02x %02x %04x %04x\n”
Set the SPLSTR to the default values SPL: %02x %02x %04x %04x\n.
x
SPLSTR?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Serial Poll Response String query) Returns the string programmed for Serial Poll
response. For values, enter a ^P (<cntl> p) character. Also see the SRQSTR command.
Response:
<string>
Example:
SRQSTR returns SRQ: %02x %02x %04x %04x\n
Returns the SPLSTR string format (default settings in this example).
*SRE
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Service Request Enable command) Loadsa byte into the Service Request Enable (SRE)
register. (See “Service Request Enable Register (SRE)” in Chapter 5. Since bit 6 is not
used (decimal value 64), the maximum entry is 255 – 64 = 191.
Parameter:
<value>
Example:
*SRE 56
(the decimal equivalent of the SRE byte, 0 to 191)
Enable bits 3 (EAV), 4 (MAV), and 5 (ESR).
*SRE?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Service Request Enable query) Returns the byte in the Service Request Enable (SRE).
Response:
<value>
(the decimal equivalent of the SRE byte, 0 to 191)
Example:
*SRE? returns 56
Returns 56 when bits 3 (EAV), 4 (MAV), and 5 (ESR) are enabled.
SRQSTR
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Service Request String command) Sets the Serial Mode SRQ (Service Request)
response (up to 40 characters) in the Calibrator non-volatile memory. (While saving
configuration data in the non-volatile memory, a period of about 2 seconds, the Calibrator
does not respond to remote commands.) The SRQSTR is sent to the host over the serial
interface when the SRQ line is asserted (terminal mode only). Default format is:
SRQ: %02x %02x %04x %04x
where the term %02x (8 bits) means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 2 hex
digits, and %04x (16 bits) means print the value in hexadecimal with exactly 4 hex digits.
The string representations are:
SRQ: (STB) (ESR) (ISCR0) (ISCR1)
See the commands, respectively, *STB?, *ESR?, ISCR0?, and ISCR1? A typical
string in the default format sent to the host is: SRQ: 44 00 0000 1000. This
command is for format. See the SPLSTR command for the serial poll response.
Parameter:
“<string>\n”
(\n represents the Line Feed character, hex 0A)
Example:
SRQSTR “SRQ: %02x %02x %04x %04x\n”
Set the SRQSTR to the default values SRQ: %02x %02x %04x %04x\n.
6-39
5522A
Operators Manual
x
SRQSTR?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Service Request String query) Returns the string programmed for Serial Mode SRQ
response. This is the format of the Service Request String; actual values come from the
registers. Also see the SPLSTR command.
Response:
<string>
Example:
SRQSTR returns SRQ: %02x %02x %04x %04x\n
Returns the SRQSTR string format (default settings in this example).
x
*STB?
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Status Byte Register query) Returns the byte for the Status Byte Register. (See “Status
Byte Register (STB)” in Chapter 5.)
Response:
<value> (the decimal equivalent of the STB byte, 0 to 255)
Example:
*STB? returns 72
Returns 72 if bits 3 (EAV) and 6 (MSS) are set.
STBY
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Standby command) Deactivates the Calibrator output if it is in operate. This is the same
as pressing the Calibrator front panel Y key.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
STBY
Disconnect the selected output from the Calibrator front panel terminals.
x
SYNCOUT
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Synchronization Pulse command) Sends a synchronization pulse out to a slave
Calibrator through the 10 MHZ OUT BNC connector.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
SYNCOUT
TC_MEAS
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Thermocouple Measure command) Selects the measure thermocouple mode.
Parameters:
CEL
FAR
(Celsius) (optional)
(Fahrenheit) (optional)
Example:
TC_MEAS CEL
Measure the thermocouple temperature that is attached to the Calibrator TC terminals, in
Celsius.
TC_OFFSET
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Thermocouple Temperature Measurement Offset command) Adds a temperature offset
to thermocouple measurements (±500 °C). This command does not apply to
thermocouple sourcing.
6-40
Parameters:
<value> CEL
<value> FAR
(offset in Celsius) (optional)
(offset in Fahrenheit) (optional)
Example:
TC_OFFSET +10 CEL
Remote Commands
Commands
6
Add a temperature offset of +10 °C to the thermocouple measurements.
x
TC_OFFSET?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Thermocouple Temperature Measurement Offset query) Returns the temperature offset
used for thermocouple measurements (±500 °C).
Responses:
Example:
<value> CEL
(offset in Celsius) (optional)
<value> FAR
(offset in Fahrenheit) (optional)
TC_OFFSET? returns 1.000E+01,CEL
Returns 10 Celsius when a temperature offset of +10 °C has been added to the
thermocouple measurements.
x
TC_OTCD
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Thermocouple Open Detection command) Activates or deactivates the open
thermocouple detection circuit in thermocouple measurement mode. Once set, the
Calibrator retains open thermocouple detection circuit setting until power off or reset.
Parameters:
ON
OFF
(turn on thermocouple detection circuit) (default)
(turn off thermocouple detection circuit)
Example:
TC_OTCD ON
Activate the open thermocouple detection circuit. If an open thermocouple is detected,
this condition is displayed on the front panel.
x
TC_OTCD?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Thermocouple Open Detection query) Returns the status of the open thermocouple
detection circuit in thermocouple measurement mode.
Responses:
ON
OFF
(thermocouple detection circuit is on)
(thermocouple detection circuit is off)
Example:
TC_OTCD? returns ON
Returns ON when the open thermocouple detection circuit is activated.
TC_REF
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Thermocouple Reference command) Sets whether the internal temperature sensor (INT)
or an external reference value (EXT) is used for Thermocouple (TC) outputs and
measurements. If the first parameter is EXT, the second parameter must be the
temperature value to use as the reference for the thermocouple reference junction
temperature. Once set, the Calibrator retains reference setting until power off or reset.
Parameters:
INT
EXT, <value of external reference> CEL (or FAR)
Example:
TC_REF EXT, 25.6 CEL
Set the thermocouple reference to external, with a value of 25.6 °C.
TC_REF?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Thermocouple Reference query) Returns the source and value of the temperature being
used as a reference for thermocouple simulation and measurement (in Celsius, CEL, or
Fahrenheit, FAR, depending on active units). The choices are Internal reference (INT) or
External reference (EXT).
6-41
5522A
Operators Manual
If INT is returned, the reference temperature return is 0 unless you are in a thermocouple
mode of operation and the Calibrator is in Operate.
Responses:
INT, <value of reference temperature>,CEL (or FAR)
EXT, <value of reference temperature>,CEL (or FAR)
Example:
TC_REF? returns INT,2.988E+01,CEL
Returns Internal, 29.88, Celsius, when the thermocouple reference is internal and at
29.88 °C. (If the temperature return for the internal reference is 0 (0.00E+00), the
Calibrator is not in Operate, and/or the Calibrator is not in a thermocouple mode.)
TC_TYPE
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Thermocouple Type command) Sets the Thermocouple (TC) temperature sensor type.
The TC type is used when the output is set to a temperature value with the OUT command
and the temperature sensor type is set to TC with the TSENS_TYPE command. When the
thermocouple type is changed while simulating a temperature output, the temperature is
changed to 0 °C. Once set, the Calibrator retains the TC type until power off or reset.
Parameters:
B
C
E
J
K
N
R
S
T
X
Y
Z
(B-type thermocouple)
(C-type thermocouple)
(E-type thermocouple)
(J-type thermocouple)
(K-type thermocouple) (default)
(N-type thermocouple)
(R-type thermocouple)
(S-type thermocouple)
(T-type thermocouple)
(10 μV/°C linear output)
(% relative humidity)
(1 mV/°C linear output)
Example:
TC_TYPE J
Set the thermocouple type for simulating a temperature output to a J-type thermocouple.
TC_TYPE?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Thermocouple Type query) Returns the Thermocouple (TC) temperature sensor type.
When the thermocouple type is changed while simulating a temperature output, the
temperature is changed to 0 °C.
6-42
Responses:
B
C
E
J
K
N
R
S
T
X
Y
Z
(B-type thermocouple)
(C-type thermocouple)
(E-type thermocouple)
(J-type thermocouple)
(K-type thermocouple) (default)
(N-type thermocouple)
(R-type thermocouple)
(S-type thermocouple)
(T-type thermocouple)
(10 μV/°C linear output)
(% relative humidity)
(1 mV/°C linear output)
Example:
TC_TYPE? returns K
Remote Commands
Commands
6
Returns K when the thermocouple type for simulating a temperature output is a K-type
thermocouple.
TC_TYPE_D
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
x
Sequential
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Thermocouple Type Default command) Sets the default thermocouple (TC) sensor type,
which is saved in the Calibrator non-volatile memory. (While saving configuration data
in the non-volatile memory, a period of about 2 seconds, the Calibrator does not respond
to remote commands.) The TC type is set to the default at power on and reset.
Responses:
B
C
E
J
K
N
R
S
T
X
Y
Z
(B-type thermocouple)
(C-type thermocouple)
(E-type thermocouple)
(J-type thermocouple)
(K-type thermocouple) (default)
(N-type thermocouple)
(R-type thermocouple)
(S-type thermocouple)
(T-type thermocouple)
(10 μV/°C linear output)
(% relative humidity)
(1 mV/°C linear output)
Example:
TC_TYPE_D J
Set the thermocouple type default to a type-J thermocouple.
x
TC_TYPE_D?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Thermocouple Type Default query) Returns the default thermocouple (TC) sensor type.
Responses:
B
C
E
J
K
N
R
S
T
X
Y
Z
(B-type thermocouple)
(C-type thermocouple)
(E-type thermocouple)
(J-type thermocouple)
(K-type thermocouple) (default)
(N-type thermocouple)
(R-type thermocouple)
(S-type thermocouple)
(T-type thermocouple)
(10 μV/°C linear output)
(% relative humidity)
(1 mV/°C linear output)
Example:
TC_TYPE_D? returns K
Returns K when the thermocouple type default is a type-K thermocouple.
TEMP_STD
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Temperature Degree Standard command) Selects the temperature standard ipts-68 (1968
International Provisional Temperature Standard) or its-90 (1990 International
Temperature Standard), which is saved in the Calibrator non-volatile memory. (While
saving configuration data in the non-volatile memory, a period of about 2 seconds, the
Calibrator does not respond to remote commands.) The default is its-90.
Parameters:
IPTS_68
ITS_90
6-43
5522A
Operators Manual
Example:
TEMP_STD ITS_90
See the temperature standard to ITS-90.
x
TEMP_STD?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Temperature Degree Standard command) Returns the temperature standard ipts-68
(1968 International Provisional Temperature Standard) or its-90 (1990 International
Temperature Standard).
Parameters:
IPTS_68
ITS_90
Example:
TEMP_STD? returns ITS_90
Returns ITS_90 when the temperature degree standard is the 1990 International
Temperature Standard.
*TRG
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Trigger Thermocouple Measurement command) Triggers a thermocouple temperature
measurement and return the value of the measurement. Also changes the operating mode
to thermocouple measurement if this is not already the operating mode. (This command is
equivalent to sending TC_MEAS;*WAI;VAL?)
Responses:
<measurement value>,CEL
<measurement value>,FAR
0.00E+00,OVER
0.00E+00,OPENTC
0.00E+00,NONE
(value is in Celsius)
(value is in Fahrenheit)
(value is over or under capability)
(open thermocouple)
(wrong mode or no measurement)
Example:
*TRG returns +2.500E+01,CEL
Trigger a thermocouple measurement and return 25.00 Celsius when the thermocouple
temperature measurement is 25 °C.
TSENS_TYPE
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Temperature Sensor Type command) Sets the temperature sensor type to thermocouple
(TC) or Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) for temperature measurements. The
Calibrator simulates the RTD temperature as a resistance output on the NORMAL
terminals, and simulates the thermocouple temperature as a dc voltage output on the TC
terminals. If the temperature sensor type is changed, the temperature output is reset to 0
degrees C. Once set, the Calibrator retains the temperature sensor type until power off or
reset.
Parameters:
TC
RTD
(Thermocouple)
(Resistance Temperature Detector)
Example:
TSENS_TYPE RTD
Set the temperature sensor type to an RTD.
TSENS_TYPE?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Temperature Sensor Type query) Returns the temperature sensor type thermocouple
(TC) or Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) for temperature measurements.
Responses:
6-44
TC
(Thermocouple)
Remote Commands
Commands
(Resistance Temperature Detector)
RTD
Example:
6
TSENS_TYPE? returns TC
Returns TC when the temperature sensor type is a thermocouple.
*TST?
x
IEEE-488
x
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Self Test command) Initiates self-test and returns a 0 for pass or a 1 for fail. If any
faults are detected, they are displayed on screen (terminal mode) or are logged into the
fault queue where they can be read by the ERR? query (computer mode).
Response:
0 (pass self test)
1 (fail self test)
Example:
*TST? returns 1
Returns 0 when self test is successful.
x
UNCERT?
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Uncertainties command) Retums specified uncertainties for the present output. If there
are no specifications for an output, returns zero.
Parameter:
1. (optional) Preferred unit of primary output uncertainty or PCT (default)
2. (optional) Preferred unit of secondary output uncertainty or
PCT (default)
Response:
1. (float) 90-day specified uncertainty of primary unit
2. (float) 1-year specified uncertainty of primary output
3. (character) Unit of primary output uncertainty
4. (float) 90-day specified uncertainty of secondary unit
5. (float) 1-year specified uncertainty of secondary output
6. (character) Unit of secondary output uncertainty.
Example:
UNCERT? returns 6.120E-01,6.150E-01,PCT,9.50E-02,
1.150E-01,PCT
UUT_FLUSH
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Flush UUT Receive Buffer command) Flushes the UUT receive buffer for data received
from the UUT over the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port. The
command may be sent over gpib or RS-232 ports, but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT
serial port operation.
Parameter:
(None)
Example:
UUT_FLUSH
Flush the Calibrator receive data buffer for the UUT.
UUT_RECV?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(UUT Receive Data query) Returns data from the UUT in IEEE-488.2 Standard format
over the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port. The command may be sent
over gpib or RS-232 ports, but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation.
Response:
<data>
(binary block data in definite length format from UUT)
6-45
5522A
Operators Manual
Example:
UUT_RECV? returns #211+1.99975E+0
Returns (for example) a measurement from the UUT. The format is #2 (two numbers
follow) 11 (characters follow) +1.99975E+0 (11 characters).
UUT_RECVB?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(UUT Receive Binary Data query) Returns binary data as integers from the UUT serial
port. Use the UUT_RECV? command instead if receiving ASCII data.
Parameter:
(Optional) Maximum number of integers per line
Response:
(Indefinite ASCII) Comma separated integers as follows:
1. (integer) Number of data bytes returned excluding the count
2. (integer) Data from the UUT serial port as series of comma
separated integers
Example:
UUT_SEND
"=>" followed by a carriage return and a line feed returns 4,61,62,13,10
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Send UUT Data command) Sends data to the UUT serial port in binary block or string
data format over the Calibrator rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port. The command
may be sent over gpib or RS-232 ports, but applies to SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port
operation. Include a line feed (RS-232) character to terminate the block data or End or
Identify (EOI) command (IEEE-488).
Parameter:
#2<nn><nn characters string>
(definite length)
#0<character string>
(indefinite length)
“<character string>“
(character string)
Examples:
UUT_SEND #206F1S2R0
(definite length format)
Sends the data F1S2R0 to the UUT in definite length format. The format is #2 (two
numbers follow) 06 (characters follow) F1S2R0 (6 characters).
UUT_SEND #0F1S2R0 (indefinite length format)
Sends the data F1S2R0 to the UUT in indefinite length format. The format is #0 then the
characters.
UUT_SEND “F1S2R0” (character string)
Sends the data F1S2R0 to the UUT as a character string.
Special Case When the character string sent to a UUT must end in a carriage return (CR)
command or line feed (LF) command or both, you must use the following:
Definite Length Format Follow the instructions above and after the character string add
a command ^J for CR or ^M for LF or both, where ^J means hold down the <Cntl> key
and type the letter J. For example, sending the string REMS in this format with both CR
and LF, you would count 4 characters for REMS and 1 character each for ^J and ^M for a
total of 6 characters. The command would be UUT_SEND #206REMS^J^M then
<enter>. (The ^J and ^M “characters” actually perform the CR and LF functions.)
Indefinite Length Format This format may not be used when a character string requires
CR and LF commands.
6-46
Remote Commands
Commands
6
Character String Follow the instructions above and after the character string, add a \n
for CR or \r for LF or both, where the alpha character is entered in lower case. For
example, in the terminal mode to send the string REMS in this format with both CR and
LF, the command would be UUT_SEND “REMS\n\r”. In the computer mode where
commands are entered as part of a command string, use double quotes to show embedded
quotes. For example, “uut_send “REMS\n\r”” “.
The following characters and commands may be implemented as described above:
Carriage Return
Line Feed
Tab
Backspace
Form Feed
x
UUT_SENDB
^J
^M
Tab
^H
^L
x
IEEE-488
\n
\r
\t
\b
\f
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Send UUT Binary Data command) Send binary data to the UUT serial port (Calibrator
rear panel SERIAL 2 to UUT serial port). Use the UUT_SEND command instead of
sending ASCII data. The command may be sent over gpib or RS-232 ports, but applies to
SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port operation.
Parameter:
Comma separated integers to send (maximum of 10)
Example:
UUT_SENDB 42,73,68,78,63,10
Send the ASCII characters "*IDN?" followed by a new line (ASCII 10) to the UUT serial
port.
UUT_SET
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(UUT Serial Port Set command) Sets the RS-232-C settings for the Calibrator rear panel
SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port, which is saved in the Calibrator non-volatile memory.
(While saving configuration data in the non-volatile memory, a period of about 2
seconds, the Calibrator does not respond to remote commands.) (To set the parameters
for the rear panel SERIAL 1 FROM HOST serial port, see the SP_SET command.) The
factory default values are shown below in bold type. (To return to the factory defaults,
see the FORMAT SETUP command.)
The interface selection sets the command response, with command echo back with
TERM (terminal) and no echo back with COMP (computer).
Parameters:
(even)
Example:
<baud rate value>,
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
<flow control>,
XON (xon/xoff), NOSTALL (none), RTS (rts/cts)
<number data bits>,
DBIT7 (7 bits) or DBIT8 (8 bits)
<number stop bits>, SBIT1 (1 bit) or SBIT2 (2 bits)
<parity>
PNONE (none), PODD (odd),PEVEN
UUT_SET 9600,XON,DBIT8,SBIT1,PNONE
Set the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port to the factory default
values.
UUT_SET?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(UUT Serial Port Set query) Returns the RS-232-C settings for the Calibrator rear panel
SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port. (To return the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 1
FROM HOST serial port, see the SP_SET? command.) The factory default values are
6-47
5522A
Operators Manual
shown below in bold type. (To return to the factory defaults, see the FORMAT SETUP
command.)
Responses:
<baud rate value>,
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
<flow control>,
XON (xon/xoff), NOSTALL (none), RTS (rts/cts)
<number data bits>,
DBIT7 (7 bits) or DBIT8 (8 bits)
<number stop bits>, SBIT1 (1 bit) or SBIT2 (2 bits)
<parity>
PNONE (none), PODD (odd),PEVEN
(even)
Example:
UUT_SET?
returns
9600,XON,DBIT8,SBIT1,PNONE
Returns the parameters for the rear panel SERIAL 2 TO UUT serial port, as shown, when
set to the factory default values.
VAL?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Measurement Value command) Returns the last value of the thermocouple temperature,
pressure, or scope impedance measurement. The unit returns indicates the status of the
reading.
Parameter:
(Optional) Units to return
Responses:
1. (Float) Measured temperature or pressure
2. (Character) CEL, FAR, OHM, F, PSI, MHG, INHG, INH2O,
FTH2O, MH2O, BAR, PAL, G/CM2, INH2O60F,
OVER (value is over or under capability),
OPENTC (open thermocouple),
or NONE (wrong mode or no measurement)
Example:
VAL? returns 0.00E+00,NONE
Returns 0 and NONE when there is no recent measurement either because the Calibrator
is not in a measurement mode, or because no measurement has been made yet.
x
VVAL?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
Sequential
x
x
Overlapped
Coupled
(Thermocouple Measurement Voltage command) Returns the last value of the
thermocouple temperature measurement in volts. If the last measurement was an overload
or open thermocouple condition, or there is no measurement, returns 0E+00.
Responses: <measurement value in volts>
0E+00
Example:
*WAI
x
(valid measurement)
(overload, open TC, or no measurement)
VVAL? returns 1.1047E-03 (1.1047 mV, equivalent to 50 °C with type
K thermocouple and TC reference = 23.0 °C
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Wait-to-Continue command) Prevents further remote commands from being executed
until all previous remote commands have been executed. For example, if you send an
OUT command, you can cause the Calibrator to wait until the output has settled before
continuing on to the next command if you follow OUT with a *WAI command. The *WAI
command is useful with any overlapped command, preventing the Calibrator from
processing other commands until the overlapped command is processed.
Example:
*WAI
Process all existing commands before continuing.
6-48
Remote Commands
Commands
WAVE
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
6
Coupled
(Waveform command) Sets the waveforms for ac outputs. If the Calibrator is sourcing
one output, one parameter is required. If the Calibrator is sourcing two outputs, two
parameters are required or one parameter to set the waveform to both outputs. Waveform
choices are SINE (sine wave), TRI (triangle wave), SQUARE (square wave), TRUNCS
(truncated sine wave), or NONE (waveform does not apply).
Parameter:
<1st waveform> , (SINE, TRI, SQUARE, TRUNCS, NONE)
<2nd waveform> (SINE, TRI, SQUARE, TRUNCS, NONE)
Example:
WAVE SINE,SQUARE
Set the waveforms for a dual output to Sine wave on the primary output (Calibrator front
panel NORMAL terminals) and Square wave on the secondary output (front panel AUX
or 20A terminals).
WAVE?
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Waveform query) Returns the waveform types for ac outputs. Waveform choices are
SINE (sine wave), TRI (triangle wave), SQUARE (square wave), TRUNCS (truncated
sine wave), or NONE (waveform does not apply).
Responses:
<1st waveform> , (SINE, TRI, SQUARE, TRUNCS, NONE)
<2nd waveform> (SINE, TRI, SQUARE, TRUNCS, NONE)
Example:
WAVE? returns SQUARE,NONE
Returns SQUARE when the ac primary output (Calibrator front panel NORMAL
terminals) is a square wave and NONE when there is no secondary output on the front
panel AUX terminals.
ZCOMP
x
x
IEEE-488
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Impedance Compensation command) Activates or deactivates 2-wire or 4-wire
impedance compensation. For resistance output, compensation is allowed when the
resistance is less than 110 kΩ. For capacitance output, compensation is allowed when the
capacitance is equal to or greater than 110 nF. For all other resistances and capacitances,
the compensation is NONE and attempts to use other parameters results in the error
message “Can’t change compensation now.” For RTD temperature simulation,
compensation is allowed for all temperatures.
Parameter:
NONE
WIRE2
WIRE4
(Turns off impedance compensation circuitry)
(Turns on the 2-wire impedance compensation circuitry)
(Turns on the 4-wire impedance compensation circuitry)
Example:
ZCOMP WIRE2
Set 2-wire impedance compensation for the Calibrator UUT connection. (Resistance if
the ohms value is less than 110 kΩ, capacitance if the farads value is 110 nF or more, or
RTD temperature simulation, any value.)
ZCOMP?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Impedance Compensation query) Returns status of 2-wire or 4-wire impedance
compensation.
Responses:
NONE
WIRE2
WIRE4
(impedance compensation is turns off)
(2-wire impedance compensation is on)
(4-wire impedance compensation is off)
6-49
5522A
Operators Manual
Example:
ZCOMP? returns NONE
Returns NONE when no impedance compensation is applied to the resistance, capacitance
or RTD output.
ZERO_MEAS
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Zero Offset for Pressure Measurement command) Zeros the pressure module or sets the
zero offset for capacitance measurement using the -SC600. For pressure measurments, if
the pressure module is an absolute module, the reference parameter must be supplied
along with optional units as the second argument.
Parameter:
1. (boolean) ON
(boolean) OFF
2. Reference value for absolute pressure modules
Example:
ZERO_MEAS ON
Sets the zero offset to the present measurement value.
Example:
ZERO_MEAS ON,14.7
Sets the zero offset to 14.7 for an absolute pressure module.
ZERO_MEAS?
x
IEEE-488
x
RS-232
x
Sequential
x
Overlapped
x
Coupled
(Zero Offset for Pressure Measurement query) Returns the zero offset for the pressure
module or capacitance measurement using the -SC600.
Parameter:
(optional) units of returned value
Responses:
1. (character) OFF
(character) ON
2. (float) offset value
3. (character) units
Example:
6-50
(no zero in effect)
(zero in effect)
(F, PSI, MHG, INHG, INH2O, FTH2O, MH2O,
BAR, PAL, G/CM2, INH2O60F)
ZERO_MEAS? returns ON,-3.66E-02,PSI
Chapter 7
Maintenance
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
How to Replace the Line Fuse .............................................................................
How to Replace the Current Fuses.......................................................................
How to Clean the Air Filter .................................................................................
General Cleaning .................................................................................................
Performance Tests................................................................................................
Page
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-1
5522A
Operators Manual
7-2
Introduction
This chapter explains how to perform the routine maintenance and calibration task
required to keep a normally operating 5522A Calibrator in service. These tasks include:
•
Replacing the fuse
•
Cleaning the air filter
•
Cleaning the external surfaces
•
Calibration verification
Refer to the Service manual for intensive maintenance tasks such as troubleshooting,
calibration or repair, and all procedures that require opening the cover of the instrument.
The Service Manual also contains complete, detailed verification and calibration
procedures.
 Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury:
•
Disconnect the mains power cord before you remove the
Product covers.
•
Remove the input signals before you clean the Product.
•
Use only specified replacement parts.
•
Use only specified replacement fuses.
•
Have an approved technician repair the Product.
•
Do not operate the Product with covers removed or the case
open. Hazardous voltage exposure is possible.
•
Turn the Product off and remove the mains power cord.
Stop for two minutes to let the power assemblies discharge
before you open the fuse door.
How to Replace the Line Fuse
The line power fuse is accessible on the rear panel. The fuse rating label above the ac
power input module shows the correct replacement fuse for each line voltage setting.
Table 7-1 lists the fuse part numbers for each line voltage setting.
To check or replace the fuse, refer to Figure 7-1 and proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect line power.
2. The line power fuse and line voltage switch are located in a compartment on the right
end of the ac input module. To open the compartment and remove the fuse, insert the
blade of a standard screwdriver to the left of the tab located at the left side of the
compartment cover.
3. Pry the tab out of the slot and the compartment cover will pop part way out.
4. Remove the compartment cover with your fingers.
5. The fuse comes out with the compartment cover and can be easily replaced.
To reinstall the fuse, push the compartment cover back into the compartment until the tab
locks with the ac input module.
7-3
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 7-1. Replacement Line Fuses
Part Number
Fuse Description
Line Voltage Setting
 109215
5A/250 V Time Delay
100 V or 120 V
 851931
2.5A/250 V Time Delay
200 V or 240 V
MAINS
SUPPLY
FUSE
100V/12
0V
220V/24
T5.0A
250V (SB
0V
)
T2.5A
250V
CAUTIO
N FOR
WITH A
(SB)
250V FU FIRE PROT
EC
47Hz /63 SE OF INDICA TION REPLAC
TED RA
EO
600VA Hz
TING
MAX
CHASSI
GROUNS
D
WARNI
IS PROP NG: TO AV
OID
ERLY IN
STALLE PHYSICAL IN
JU
D BEFO
RE EN RY, INSURE
WARNI
ERGIZIN
TH
G INST A
CONN NG: TO AV
RU
ECTOR
OI
IN POW D ELECTRIC
SHOCK
ER CO
RD MU
GR
OU
ST BE
CONN NDING
ECTED
Line Voltage
Indicator
0V
(S
B)
Changing Line Fuse
Changing Line
Voltage
12
0
0
4
2
12
0
Figure 7-1. Accessing the Fuse
gjh004.eps
How to Replace the Current Fuses
The current fuses are accessible for the bottom of the Calibrator. These fuses protect the
3A and 20A outputs from over-current. Table 7-2 lists the fuse part numbers for the two
current fuses. To replace a current fuse:
1. Turn the Calibrator over on its top.
2. Remove the two screws with a Phillips head screwdriver as shown in Figure 7-2.
7-4
Maintenance
How to Clean the Air Filter
7
4 A/500 V
Ultra Fast
(3 A Output)
25 A/250 V
Fast
(20 A Output)
gjh068.eps
Figure 7-2. Current Fuse Replacement
3. Lift off the fuse door.
4. Remove the fuse and replace it with a new fuse of the same rating.
Table 7-2. Replacement Current Fuses
Part Number
Fuse Description
 3674001
4A/500 V Ultra Fast
 3470596
25A/250 V Fast
5. Replace the fuse door over the fuse compartment.
6. Install the two screws to hold the fuse door in place.
How to Clean the Air Filter
 Warning
To avoid risk of injury, never operate or power the product
without the fan filter in place.
 Caution
To prevent damage to the Calibrator, keep the fan filter clean
and do not restrict the area around the fan.
The air filter must be removed and cleaned every 30 days or more frequently if the
calibrator is operated in a dusty environment. The air filter is accessible from the rear
panel of the calibrator.
To clean the air filter, refer to Figure 7-3 and proceed as follows:
1. Turn off the power, let the fan come to rest, and unplug the ac line cord.
2. Remove the filter element.
a. Grasp the top and bottom of the air filter frame.
b. Squeeze the edges of the frame towards each other to disengage the filter tabs
from the slots in the calibrator.
c. Pull the filter frame straight out from the calibrator.
3. Clean the filter element.
a. Wash the filter element in soapy water.
b. Rinse the filter element thoroughly.
7-5
5522A
Operators Manual
c. Shake out the excess water, then allow the filter element to dry thoroughly before
reinstalling it.
4. Reinstall the filter element by performing the filter removal steps in reverse order.
W
C
H
G AS
R S
O IS
U
N
D
N IN
EC G
A
O RN
N
C
TE G
D RO
TO U
TO
ENND
AN CL
SUING
D EA
R C
FL N
E O
U FIL
PR NN
SH
T
O EC
W ER
TE T
IT R
C O
H E
TIO R
SO M
N IN P
APOV
FR O
Y EF
O WE
W R
M R
AT OM
EL C
ER IN
EC O
ST
TRRD
R
IC MU
U
M
SH ST
EN
O B
T
C E
K
Figure 7-3. Accessing the Air Filter
oq062f.eps
General Cleaning
For general cleaning, wipe the case, front panel keys, and lens using a soft cloth slightly
dampened with water or a non-abrasive mild cleaning solution that does not harm
plastics.
 Caution
Do not use aromatic hydrocarbons or chlorinated solvents for
cleaning. They can damage the plastic materials used in the
calibrator.
7-6
Maintenance
Performance Tests
7
Performance Tests
To verify that the 5522A meets its specifications, you can use Tables 7-3 through 7-15.
The tables are for qualified metrology personnel who have access to a standards
laboratory that is properly equipped to test calibration equipment of this level of
accuracy. The tables show the recommended test points and the acceptable upper and
lower limits for each point. The limits were computed simply by adding or subtracting
the 90-day specification from the output value. There is no built-in factor for
measurement uncertainty.
Table 7-3. Verification Tests for DC Voltage (Normal)
Range
Output
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
329.9999 mV
0.0000 mV
-0.0010 mV
0.0010 mV
329.9999 mV
329.0000 mV
328.9941 mV
329.0059 mV
329.9999 mV
-329.0000 mV
-329.0059 mV
-328.9941 mV
3.299999 V
0.000000 V
-0.000002 V
0.000002 V
3.299999 V
1.000000 V
0.999989 V
1.000011 V
3.299999 V
-1.000000 V
-1.000011 V
-0.999989 V
3.299999 V
3.290000 V
3.289968 V
3.290032 V
3.299999 V
-3.290000 V
-3.290032 V
-3.289968 V
32.99999 V
0.00000 V
-0.00002 V
0.00002 V
32.99999 V
10.00000 V
9.99988 V
10.00012 V
32.99999 V
-10.00000 V
-10.00012 V
-9.99989 V
32.99999 V
32.90000 V
32.89965 V
-32.90035 V
32.99999 V
-32.90000 V
32.90035 V
-32.89965 V
329.9999 V
50.0000 V
49.9991 V
50.0009 V
329.9999 V
329.0000 V
328.9949 V
329.0051 V
329.9999 V
-50.0000 V
-50.0009 V
-49.9991 V
329.9999 V
-329.0000 V
-329.0051 V
-328.9949 V
1000.000 V
334.000 V
333.993 V
334.007 V
1000.000 V
900.000 V
899.985 V
900.015 V
1000.000 V
1020.000 V
1019.983 V
1020.017 V
1000.000 V
-334.000 V
-334.007 V
-333.993 V
1000.000 V
-900.000 V
-900.015 V
-899.985 V
1000.000 V
-1020.000 V
-1020.017 V
-1019.983 V
7-7
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 7-4. Verification Tests for DC Voltage (AUX)
Range
Output
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
329.999 mV
0.000 mV
-0.350 mV
0.350 mV
329.999 mV
329.000 mV
328.551 mV
329.449 mV
329.999 mV
-329.000 mV
-329.449 mV
-328.551 mV
3.29999 V
0.33000 V
0.32955 V
0.33045 V
3.29999 V
3.29000 V
3.28866 V
3.29134 V
3.29999 V
-3.29000 V
-3.29134 V
-3.28866 V
7.0000 V
7.0000 V
6.9976 V
7.0025 V
7.0000 V
-7.0000 V
-7.0025 V
-6.9976 V
329.999 mV
0.000 mV
-0.350 mV
0.350 mV
Table 7-5. Verification Tests for DC Current (AUX)
Range
7-8
Output
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
329.999 μA
0.000 μA
-0.020 μA
0.020 μA
329.999 μA
190.000 μA
189.957 μA
190.043 μA
329.999 μA
-190.000 μA
-190.043 μA
-189.957 μA
329.999 μA
329.000 μA
328.941 μA
329.059 μA
329.999 μA
-329.000 μA
-329.059 μA
-328.941 μA
3.29999 mA
0.00000 mA
-0.00005 mA
0.00005 mA
3.29999 mA
1.90000 mA
1.89980 mA
1.90020 mA
3.29999 mA
-1.90000 mA
-1.90020 mA
-1.89980 mA
3.29999 mA
3.29000 mA
3.28969 mA
3.29031 mA
3.29999 mA
-3.29000 mA
-3.29031 mA
-3.28969 mA
32.9999 mA
0.0000 mA
-0.00025 mA
0.00025 mA
32.9999 mA
19.0000 mA
18.9982 mA
19.0018 mA
32.9999 mA
-19.0000 mA
-19.0018 mA
-18.9982 mA
32.9999 mA
32.9000 mA
32.8971 mA
32.9029 mA
32.9999 mA
-32.9000 mA
-32.9029 mA
-32.8971 mA
329.999 mA
0.000 mA
-0.0025 mA
0.0025 mA
329.999 mA
190.000 mA
189.982 mA
190.018 mA
329.999 mA
-190.000 mA
-190.018 mA
-189.982 mA
329.999 mA
329.000 mA
328.971 mA
329.029 mA
329.999 mA
-329.000 mA
-329.029 mA
-328.971 mA
2.99999 A
0.00000 A
-0.00004 A
0.00004 A
Maintenance
Performance Tests
7
Table 7-5. Verification Tests for DC Current (AUX) (cont.)
Range
Output
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
2.99999 A
1.09000 A
1.08979 A
1.09021 A
2.99999 A
-1.09000 A
-1.09021 A
-1.08979 A
2.99999 A
2.99000 A
2.98906 A
2.99094 A
2.99999 A
-2.99000 A
-2.99094 A
-2.98906 A
20.5000 A
0.0000 A
-0.0005 A
0.0005 A
20.5000 A
10.9000 A
10.8954 A
10.9046 A
20.5000 A
-10.9000 A
-10.9046 A
-10.8954 A
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
19.9833 A
20.0168 A
20.5000 A
-20.0000 A
-20.0168 A
-19.9833 A
Table 7-6. Verification Tests for Resistance
Range
Output
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
10.9999 Ω
0.0000 Ω
-0.0010 Ω
0.0010 Ω
10.9999 Ω
2.0000 Ω
1.9989 Ω
2.0011 Ω
10.9999 Ω
10.9000 Ω
10.8986 Ω
10.9014 Ω
32.9999 Ω
11.9000 Ω
11.8982 Ω
11.9018 Ω
32.9999 Ω
19.0000 Ω
18.9980 Ω
19.0020 Ω
32.9999 Ω
30.0000 Ω
29.9978 Ω
30.0023 Ω
109.9999 Ω
33.0000 Ω
32.9979 Ω
33.0021 Ω
109.9999 Ω
109.0000 Ω
108.9962 Ω
109.0038 Ω
329.9999 Ω
119.0000 Ω
118.9954 Ω
119.0046 Ω
329.9999 Ω
190.0000 Ω
189.9938 Ω
190.0062 Ω
329.9999 Ω
300.0000 Ω
299.9914 Ω
300.0086 Ω
1.099999 kΩ
0.330000 kΩ
0.329991 kΩ
0.330009 kΩ
1.099999 kΩ
1.090000 kΩ
1.089974 kΩ
1.090026 kΩ
3.299999 kΩ
1.190000 kΩ
1.189954 kΩ
1.190046 kΩ
3.299999 kΩ
1.900000 kΩ
1.899938 kΩ
1.900062 kΩ
3.299999 kΩ
3.000000 kΩ
2.999914 kΩ
3.000086 kΩ
10.99999 kΩ
3.30000 kΩ
3.29991 kΩ
3.30009 kΩ
10.99999 kΩ
10.90000 kΩ
10.89974 kΩ
10.90026 kΩ
32.99999 kΩ
11.90000 kΩ
11.89954 kΩ
11.90046 kΩ
32.99999 kΩ
19.00000 kΩ
18.99938 kΩ
19.00062 kΩ
32.99999 kΩ
30.00000 kΩ
29.99914 kΩ
30.00086 kΩ
7-9
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 7-6. Verification Tests for Resistance (cont.)
Range
Output
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
109.9999 kΩ
33.0000 kΩ
32.9991 kΩ
33.0009 kΩ
109.9999 kΩ
109.0000 kΩ
108.9974 kΩ
109.0026 kΩ
329.9999 kΩ
119.0000 kΩ
118.9950 kΩ
119.0050 kΩ
329.9999 kΩ
190.0000 kΩ
189.9933 kΩ
190.0068 kΩ
329.9999 kΩ
300.0000 kΩ
299.9905 kΩ
300.0095 kΩ
1.099999 MΩ
0.330000 MΩ
0.329990 MΩ
0.330010 MΩ
1.099999 MΩ
1.090000 MΩ
1.089971 MΩ
1.090029 MΩ
3.299999 MΩ
1.190000 MΩ
1.189922 MΩ
1.190078 MΩ
3.299999 MΩ
1.900000 MΩ
1.899894 MΩ
1.900106 MΩ
3.299999 MΩ
3.000000 MΩ
2.999850 MΩ
3.000150 MΩ
10.99999 MΩ
3.30000 MΩ
3.29959 MΩ
3.30041 MΩ
10.99999 MΩ
10.90000 MΩ
10.89875 MΩ
10.90125 MΩ
32.99999 MΩ
11.90000 MΩ
11.89512 MΩ
11.90488 MΩ
32.99999 MΩ
19.00000 MΩ
18.99370 MΩ
19.00630 MΩ
32.99999 MΩ
30.00000 MΩ
29.99150 MΩ
30.00850 MΩ
109.9999 MΩ
33.0000 MΩ
32.9838 MΩ
33.0162 MΩ
109.9999 MΩ
109.0000 MΩ
108.9534 MΩ
109.0466 MΩ
329.9999 MΩ
119.0000 MΩ
118.6025 MΩ
119.3975 MΩ
329.9999 MΩ
290.0000 MΩ
289.1750 MΩ
290.8250 MΩ
1100.000 MΩ
400.000 MΩ
394.700 MΩ
405.300 MΩ
1100.000 MΩ
640.000 MΩ
631.820 MΩ
648.180 MΩ
1100.000 MΩ
1090.000 MΩ
1076.420 MΩ
1103.580 MΩ
Table 7-7. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (Normal)
Range
7-10
Output
Frequency
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
32.999 mV
3.000 mV
45 Hz
2.994 mV
3.006 mV
32.999 mV
3.000 mV
10 kHz
2.994 mV
3.006 mV
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
9.5 Hz
28.335 mV
31.665 mV
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
10 Hz
29.976 mV
30.024 mV
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
45 Hz
29.990 mV
30.010 mV
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
1 kHz
29.990 mV
30.010 mV
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
10 kHz
29.990 mV
30.010 mV
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
20 kHz
29.989 mV
30.011 mV
Maintenance
Performance Tests
7
Table 7-7. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (Normal) (cont.)
Range
Output
Frequency
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
50 kHz
29.970 mV
30.030 mV
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
100 kHz
29.898 mV
30.102 mV
32.999 mV
30.000 mV
450 kHz
29.770 mV
30.230 mV
329.999 mV
33.000 mV
45 Hz
32.987 mV
33.013 mV
329.999 mV
33.000 mV
10 kHz
32.987 mV
33.013 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
9.5 Hz
283.350 mV
316.650 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
10 Hz
299.917 mV
300.083 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
45 Hz
299.950 mV
300.050 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
1 kHz
299.950 mV
300.050 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
10 kHz
299.950 mV
300.050 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
20 kHz
299.947 mV
300.053 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
50 kHz
299.902 mV
300.098 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
100 kHz
299.788 mV
300.212 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
500 kHz
299.450 mV
300.550 mV
3.29999 V
0.33000 V
45 Hz
0.32989 V
0.33011 V
3.29999 V
0.33000 V
10 kHz
0.32989 V
0.33011 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
9.5 Hz
2.83350 V
3.16650 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
10 Hz
2.99920 V
3.00080 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
45 Hz
2.99952 V
3.00048 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
1 kHz
2.99952 V
3.00048 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
10 kHz
2.99952 V
3.00048 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
20 kHz
2.99946 V
3.00054 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
50 kHz
2.99920 V
3.00080 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
100 kHz
2.99823 V
3.00178 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
450 kHz
2.99340 V
0.07500 V
3.00660 V
[1]
3.29999 V
3.29000 V
2 MHz
32.9999 V
3.3000 V
45 Hz
3.2990 V
3.3010 V
32.9999 V
3.3000 V
10 kHz
3.2990 V
3.3010 V
32.9999 V
30.0000 V
9.5 Hz
28.3350 V
31.6650 V
32.9999 V
30.0000 V
10 Hz
29.9919 V
30.0082 V
32.9999 V
30.0000 V
45 Hz
29.9957 V
30.0044 V
32.9999 V
30.0000 V
1 kHz
29.9957 V
30.0044 V
32.9999 V
30.0000 V
10 kHz
29.9957 V
30.0044 V
7-11
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 7-7. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (Normal) (cont.)
Range
[1]
Output
Frequency
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
32.9999 V
30.0000 V
20 kHz
29.9928 V
30.0072 V
32.9999 V
30.0000 V
50 kHz
29.9904 V
30.0096 V
32.9999 V
30.0000 V
90 kHz
29.9759 V
30.0241 V
329.999 V
33.000 V
45 Hz
32.993 V
33.007 V
329.999 V
33.000 V
10 kHz
32.989 V
33.011 V
329.999 V
300.000 V
45 Hz
299.953 V
300.047 V
329.999 V
300.000 V
1 kHz
299.953 V
300.047 V
329.999 V
300.000 V
10 kHz
299.946 V
300.054 V
329.999 V
300.000 V
18 kHz
299.928 V
300.072 V
329.999 V
300.000 V
50 kHz
299.922 V
300.078 V
329.999 V
200.000 V
100 kHz
199.630 V
200.370 V
1020.00 V
330.00 V
45 Hz
329.91 V
330.09 V
1020.00 V
330.00 V
10 kHz
329.91 V
330.09 V
1020.00 V
1000.00 V
45 Hz
999.74 V
1000.26 V
1020.00 V
1000.00 V
1 kHz
999.79 V
1000.21 V
1020.00 V
1000.00 V
5 kHz
999.79 V
1000.21 V
1020.00 V
1000.00 V
8 kHz
999.74 V
1000.26 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
1 kHz
1019.79 V
1020.21 V
1020.00 V
1020.00 V
8 kHz
1019.74 V
1020.27 V
Typical specification is -24 dB at 2 MHz
Table 7-8. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (AUX)
Range
7-12
Output, AUX
[1]
Frequency
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
329.999 mV
10.000 mV
45 Hz
9.622 mV
10.378 mV
329.999 mV
10.000 mV
1 kHz
9.622 mV
10.378 mV
329.999 mV
10.000 mV
5 kHz
9.535 mV
10.465 mV
329.999 mV
10.000 mV
10 kHz
9.520 mV
10.480 mV
329.999 mV
10.000 mV
30 kHz
8.700 mV
11.300 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
9.5 Hz
283.350 mV
316.650 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
10 Hz
299.180 mV
300.820 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
45 Hz
299.390 mV
300.610 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
1 kHz
299.390 mV
300.610 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
5 kHz
299.100 mV
300.900 mV
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
10 kHz
298.650 mV
301.350 mV
Maintenance
Performance Tests
7
Table 7-8. Verification Tests for AC Voltage (AUX) (cont.)
Range
[1]
Output, AUX [1]
Frequency
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
329.999 mV
300.000 mV
30 kHz
287.100 mV
312.900 mV
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
9.5 Hz
2.825 V
3.175 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
10 Hz
2.99505 V
3.00495 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
45 Hz
2.99745 V
3.00255 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
1 kHz
2.99745 V
3.00255 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
5 kHz
2.99410 V
3.00590 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
10 kHz
2.98960 V
3.01040 V
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
30 kHz
2.87720 V
3.12280 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
9.5 Hz
4.72500 V
5.27500 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
10 Hz
4.99205 V
5.00795 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
45 Hz
4.99605 V
5.00395 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
1 kHz
4.99605 V
5.00395 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
5 kHz
4.99110 V
5.00890 V
5.00000 V
5.00000 V
10 kHz
4.98360 V
5.01640 V
Set the NORMAL output to 300 mV.
Table 7-9. Verification Tests for AC Current
Range
Output
Frequency
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
329.99 μA
33.00 μA
1 kHz
32.87 μA
33.13 μA
329.99 μA
33.00 μA
10 kHz
32.60 μA
33.40 μA
329.99 μA
33.00 μA
30 kHz
32.20 μA
33.80 μA
329.99 μA
190.00 μA
45 Hz
189.71 μA
190.29 μA
329.99 μA
190.00 μA
1 kHz
189.71 μA
190.29 μA
329.99 μA
190.00 μA
10 kHz
188.66 μA
191.34 μA
329.99 μA
190.00 μA
30 kHz
187.32 μA
192.68 μA
329.99 μA
329.00 μA
10 Hz
328.37 μA
329.63 μA
329.99 μA
329.00 μA
45 Hz
328.57 μA
329.43 μA
329.99 μA
329.00 μA
1 kHz
328.57 μA
329.43 μA
329.99 μA
329.00 μA
5 kHz
328.03 μA
329.97 μA
329.99 μA
329.00 μA
10 kHz
326.83 μA
331.17 μA
329.99 μA
329.00 μA
30 kHz
324.65 μA
333.35 μA
3.2999 mA
0.3300 mA
1 kHz
0.3296 mA
0.3304 mA
3.2999 mA
0.3300 mA
5 kHz
0.3293 mA
0.3307 mA
3.2999 mA
0.3300 mA
30 kHz
0.3268 mA
0.3332 mA
7-13
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 7-9. Verification Tests for AC Current (cont.)
Range
7-14
Output
Frequency
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
3.2999 mA
1.9000 mA
1 kHz
1.8983 mA
1.9017 mA
3.2999 mA
1.9000 mA
10 kHz
1.8921 mA
1.9079 mA
3.2999 mA
1.9000 mA
30 kHz
1.8842 mA
1.9158 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2900 mA
10 Hz
3.2846 mA
3.2954 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2900 mA
45 Hz
3.2872 mA
3.2928 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2900 mA
1 kHz
3.2872 mA
3.2928 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2900 mA
5 kHz
3.2845 mA
3.2955 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2900 mA
10 kHz
3.2765 mA
3.3035 mA
3.2999 mA
3.2900 mA
30 kHz
3.2631 mA
3.3169 mA
32.999 mA
3.3000 mA
1 kHz
3.297 mA
3.303 mA
32.999 mA
3.3000 mA
5 kHz
3.296 mA
3.304 mA
32.999 mA
3.3000 mA
30 kHz
3.285 mA
3.315 mA
32.999 mA
19.0000 mA
1 kHz
18.991 mA
19.009 mA
32.999 mA
19.0000 mA
10 kHz
18.967 mA
19.033 mA
32.999 mA
19.0000 mA
30 kHz
18.935 mA
19.065 mA
32.999 mA
32.9000 mA
10 Hz
32.849 mA
32.951 mA
32.999 mA
32.9000 mA
1 kHz
32.886 mA
32.914 mA
32.999 mA
32.9000 mA
5 kHz
32.877 mA
32.923 mA
32.999 mA
32.9000 mA
10 kHz
32.844 mA
32.956 mA
32.999 mA
32.9000 mA
30 kHz
32.791 mA
33.009 mA
329.99 mA
33.0000 mA
1 kHz
32.97 mA
33.03 mA
329.99 mA
33.0000 mA
5 kHz
32.92 mA
33.08 mA
329.99 mA
33.0000 mA
30 kHz
32.69 mA
33.31 mA
329.99 mA
190.0000 mA
1 kHz
189.91 mA
190.09 mA
329.99 mA
190.0000 mA
10 kHz
189.60 mA
190.40 mA
329.99 mA
190.0000 mA
30 kHz
189.19 mA
190.81 mA
329.99 mA
329.0000 mA
10 Hz
328.49 mA
329.51 mA
329.99 mA
329.0000 mA
45 Hz
328.86 mA
329.14 mA
329.99 mA
329.0000 mA
1 kHz
328.86 mA
329.14 mA
329.99 mA
329.0000 mA
5 kHz
328.69 mA
329.31 mA
329.99 mA
329.0000 mA
10 kHz
328.37 mA
329.63 mA
329.99 mA
329.0000 mA
30 kHz
327.75 mA
330.25 mA
2.99999 A
0.33000 A
1 kHz
0.32978 A
0.33022 A
Maintenance
Performance Tests
7
Table 7-9. Verification Tests for AC Current (cont.)
Range
Output
Frequency
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
2.99999 A
0.33000 A
5 kHz
0.32735 A
0.33265 A
2.99999 A
0.33000 A
10 kHz
0.31840 A
0.34160 A
2.99999 A
1.09000 A
10 Hz
1.08827 A
1.09174 A
2.99999 A
1.09000 A
45 Hz
1.08951 A
1.09049 A
2.99999 A
1.09000 A
1 kHz
1.08951 A
1.09049 A
2.99999 A
1.09000 A
5 kHz
1.08355 A
1.09645 A
2.99999 A
1.09000 A
10 kHz
1.06320 A
1.11680 A
2.99999 A
2.99000 A
10 Hz
2.98542 A
2.99459 A
2.99999 A
2.99000 A
45 Hz
2.98840 A
2.99160 A
2.99999 A
2.99000 A
1 kHz
2.98840 A
2.99160 A
2.99999 A
2.99000 A
5 kHz
2.97405 A
3.00595 A
2.99999 A
2.99000 A
10 kHz
2.92520 A
3.05480 A
20.5000 A
3.3000 A
500 Hz
3.2954 A
3.3046 A
20.5000 A
3.3000 A
1 kHz
3.2954 A
3.3046 A
20.5000 A
3.3000 A
5 kHz
3.2155 A
3.3845 A
20.5000 A
10.9000 A
45 Hz
10.8926 A
10.9075 A
20.5000 A
10.9000 A
65 Hz
10.8926 A
10.9075 A
20.5000 A
10.9000 A
500 Hz
10.8893 A
10.9107 A
20.5000 A
10.9000 A
1 kHz
10.8893 A
10.9107 A
20.5000 A
10.9000 A
5 kHz
10.6255 A
11.1745 A
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
45 Hz
19.9750 A
20.0250 A
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
65 Hz
19.9750 A
20.0250 A
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
500 Hz
19.9690 A
20.0310 A
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
1 kHz
19.9690 A
20.0310 A
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
5 kHz
19.4950 A
20.5050 A
Table 7-10. Verification Tests for Capacitance
Range
Output
Test Frequency
or Current
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
0.3999 nF
0.2200 nF
5 kHz
0.2192 nF
0.2308 nF
0.3999 nF
0.3500 nF
1 kHz
0.3387 nF
0.3613 nF
1.0999 nF
0.4800 nF
1 kHz
0.4682 nF
0.4918 nF
1.0999 nF
0.6000 nF
1 kHz
0.5877 nF
0.6123 nF
1.0999 nF
1.0000 nF
1 kHz
0.9862 nF
1.0138 nF
7-15
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 7-10. Verification Tests for Capacitance (cont.)
Range
7-16
Output
Test Frequency
or Current
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
3.2999 nF
2.0000 nF
1 kHz
1.9824 nF
2.0176 nF
10.9999 nF
7.0000 nF
1 kHz
6.9767 nF
7.0233 nF
10.9999 nF
10.9000 nF
1 kHz
10.8693 nF
10.9307 nF
32.9999 nF
20.0000 nF
1 kHz
19.8620 nF
20.1380 nF
109.999 nF
70.000 nF
1 kHz
69.767 nF
70.233 nF
109.999 nF
109.000 nF
1 kHz
108.693 nF
109.307 nF
329.999 nF
200.000 nF
1 kHz
199.320 nF
200.680 nF
329.999 nF
300.000 nF
1 kHz
299.130 nF
300.870 nF
1.09999 μF
0.70000 μF
100 Hz
0.69767 μF
0.70233 μF
1.09999 μF
1.09000 μF
100 Hz
1.08693 μF
1.09307 μF
3.29999 μF
2.00000 μF
100 Hz
1.99320 μF
2.00680 μF
3.29999 μF
3.00000 μF
100 Hz
2.99130 μF
3.00870 μF
10.9999 μF
7.0000 μF
100 Hz
6.9767 μF
7.0233 μF
10.9999 μF
10.9000 μF
100 Hz
10.8693 μF
10.9307 μF
32.9999 μF
20.0000 μF
100 Hz
19.9100 μF
20.0900 μF
32.9999 μF
30.0000 μF
100 Hz
29.8800 μF
30.1200 μF
109.999 μF
70.000 μF
50 Hz
69.662 μF
70.338 μF
109.999 μF
109.000 μF
50 Hz
108.529 μF
109.471 μF
329.999 μF
200.000 μF
54 μA dc
199.020 μF
200.980 μF
329.999 μF
300.000 μF
80 μA dc
298.680 μF
301.320 μF
1.09999 mF
0.33000 mF
90 μA dc
0.32788 mF
0.33212 mF
1.09999 mF
0.70000 mF
180 μA dc
0.69662 mF
0.70338 mF
1.09999 mF
1.09000 mF
270 μA dc
1.08529 mF
1.09471 mF
3.2999 mF
1.1000 mF
270 μA dc
1.0933 mF
1.1067 mF
3.2999 mF
2.0000 mF
540 μA dc
1.9902 mF
2.0098 mF
3.2999 mF
3.0000 mF
800 μA dc
2.9868 mF
3.0132 mF
10.9999 mF
3.3000 mF
900 μA dc
3.2788 mF
3.3212 mF
10.9999 mF
10.9000 mF
2.7 mA dc
10.8529 mF
10.9471 mF
32.9999 mF
20.0000 mF
5.4 mA dc
19.8300 mF
20.1700 mF
32.9999 mF
30.0000 mF
8.0 mA dc
29.7600 mF
30.2400 mF
110.000 mF
33.000 mF
9.0 mA dc
32.570 mF
33.430 mF
110.000 mF
110.000 mF
27.0 mA dc
108.800 mF
111.200 mF
Maintenance
Performance Tests
7
Table 7-11. Verification Tests for Thermocouple Simulation
TC Type
10 μV/°C
Output, °C
Lower Limit, mV
Upper Limit, mV
0.00 °C (0.0000 mV)
-0.0030
0.0030
100.00 °C (1.0000 mV)
0.99696
1.00304
-100.00 °C (-1.0000 mV)
-1.00304
-0.99696
1000.00 °C (10.0000 mV)
9.99660
10.00340
-1000.00 °C (10.0000 mV)
-10.0034
-9.9966
10000.00 °C (100.0000 mV)
99.9930
100.0070
-10000.00 °C (-100.0000 mV)
-100.0070
-99.9930
Table 7-12. Verification Tests for Thermocouple Measurement
TC Type
10 μV/°C
Input, mV
Lower Limit, °C
Upper Limit, °C
0.00 °C (0.0000 mV)
-0.30
-0.30
10000.00 °C (100.0000 mV)
9999.30
10000.70
-10000.00 °C (-100.0000 mV)
-10000.70
-9999.30
30000.00 °C (300.0000 mV)
29998.50
30001.50
-30000.00 °C (-300.0000 mV)
-30001.50
-29998.50
7-17
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 7-13. Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy, V and V
Range,
Normal
Output, V
Output,
Normal V
Range,
AUX
Output
Lower
Limit°
Upper
Limit °
65 Hz
-0.10
0.10
400 Hz
-0.25
0.25
-0.50
0.50
5 kHz
-2.50
2.50
10 kHz
-5.00
5.00
30 kHz
-10.00
10.00
65 Hz
59.90
60.10
400 Hz
59.75
60.25
59.50
60.50
57.50
62.50
10 kHz
55.00
65.00
30 kHz
50.00
70.00
65 Hz
89.90
90.10
400 Hz
89.75
90.25
1 kHz
89.50
90.50
87.50
92.50
85.00
95.00
30 kHz
80.00
100.00
Frequency
Output,
AUX
1 kHz
3.29999
3.00000
5 kHz
10 kHz
7-18
0
1 kHz
5 kHz
Phase °
60
3.29999 V
3.00000 V
90
32.9999
30.0000
65 Hz
89.90
90.10
329.999
50.000
65 Hz
89.80
90.10
Maintenance
Performance Tests
7
Table 7-14. Verification Tests for Phase Accuracy, V and I
Range,
Normal
Output, V
Output,
Normal V
30.000 mV
200.000 mV
329.999 mV
50.000 mV
30.000 mV
200.000 mV
32.999 mV
329.999 V
3.3000 V
33.000 V
Frequency
Range,
AUX
Output
Output,
AUX
Phase
°
Lower
Limit °
Upper
Limit °
65 Hz
329.99 mA
300.00 mA
-0.10
0.10
1 kHz
329.99 mA
300.00 mA
-0.50
0.50
30 kHz
329.99 mA
300.00 mA
-10.00
10.00
65 Hz
2099999 A
2.00000 A
-0.10
0.10
65 Hz
20.5000 A
5.0000 A
-0.10
0.10
400 Hz
20.5000 A
5.0000 A
-0.25
0.25
65 Hz
329.99 mA
300.00 mA
59.90
60.10
65 Hz
2.99999 A
2.00000 A
59.90
60.10
65 Hz
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
59.90
60.10
400 Hz
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
59.75
60.25
65 Hz
329.99 mA
300.00 mA
-0.10
0.10
65 Hz
2.99999 A
2.00000 A
-0.10
0.10
65 Hz
20.5000 A
5.0000 A
-0.10
0.10
400 Hz
20.5000 A
5.0000 A
-0.25
0.25
65 Hz
329.99 mA
300.00 mA
89.90
90.10
65 Hz
2.99999 A
2.00000 A
89.90
90.10
65 Hz
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
89.90
90.10
400 Hz
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
89.75
90.25
65 Hz
329.99 mA
300.00 mA
-0.10
0.10
65 Hz
2.99999 A
2.00000 A
-0.10
0.100
65 Hz
20.5000 A
5.0000 A
-0.10
0.10
400 Hz
20.5000 A
5.0000 A
-0.25
0.25
65 Hz
329.99 mA
300.00 mA
89.90
90.10
65 Hz
2.99999 A
2.00000 A
89.90
90.10
65 Hz
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
89.90
90.10
400 Hz
20.5000 A
20.0000 A
89.75
90.25
0
60
0
90
0
90
7-19
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 7-15. Verification Tests for Frequency
Range, Normal
Output, V
3.29999
[1]
7-20
Output, Normal,
V
3.00000
Frequency accuracy is specified for 1 year.
Frequency
Lower Limit [1]
Upper Limit [1]
119.00 Hz
118.99970 Hz
119.00030 Hz
120.0 Hz
119.99970 Hz
120.00031 Hz
1000.0 Hz
999.9975 Hz
1000.0025 Hz
100.00 kHz
99,999.75 Hz
100,000.25 Hz
Chapter 8
Accessories
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
Rack Mount Kit ...................................................................................................
IEEE-488 Interface Cable ....................................................................................
RS-232 Null-Modem Cables................................................................................
5520A-525A/LEADS ..........................................................................................
Page
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-1
5522A
Operators Manual
8-2
Introduction
Table 8-1 summarizes the available models, options, and accessories, including cables
and components.
Table 8-1. Options and Accessories
Model
Description
5520A-SC1100
Oscilloscope Calibration Option
5500A-SC600
Oscilloscope Calibration Option
55XX/CASE
Transit Case
5522A/CARRYCASE
Carry Case with removable front/back panels
5500A/HNDL
Side Handle
5520A-525A/LEADS
Comprehensive Lead Set
700-Pxx
Fluke 700 series of pressure modules. Requires Fluke 700-PCK for operation
with the 5522A Calibrator
700-PCK
Pressure module calibration kit
109215
Replacement fuse; 5 A/250 V Time Delay (100 V or 120 V line voltage)
851931
Replacement fuse; 2.5 A/250 V Time Delay (200 V or 240 V line voltage)
3674001
Replacement fuse; 4 A/500 V, Ultra fast, 0.25 x 1.25, ceramic body
3470596
Replacement fuse; 25 A/250 V, Fast, 6.3 X 32 mm
664828
MET/CAL-IEEE NT, Option, IEEE Interface
666339
MET/CAL-IEEE PCI, Option, IEEE Interface (PCI)
943738
RS-232 Modem Cable, 2.44 m (8 ft) (SERIAL 2 TO UUT) to UUT (DB-9)
MET/CAL-L
Version 7 Automated Calibration Software. Single user floating license. Requires
MET/BASE-7 for operation.
5500/CAL-L
Version 7 Automated Calibration Software. Single user floating license. RS-232
control only. Requires MET/BASE-7 for operation.
MET/TRACK-L
Version 7 T&M Asset management Software. Single user floating license.
Requires MET/BASE-7 for operation.
MET/BASE-7
Fluke Metrology Software. Requires licenses for one or more client applications
(MET/CAL-I, 5500/CAL-I and/or MET/TRACK-I).
MET/CAL-IEEE NT
IEEE Interface Option.
MET/CAL-IEEE PCI
IEEE Interface Option.
MET/CAL-IEEE PCMIA
IEEE Interface Option.
MET/CAL-IEEE USB
IEEE Interface Option.
PM8914/001
RS-232 Null Modem Cable, 1.5 m (5 ft) (SERIAL 1 FROM HOST) to PC COM
(DB-9)
RS40
RS-232 Null Modem Cable, 1.83 m (6 ft) (SERIAL 1 FROM HOST) to
PC COM (DB-25)
8-3
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 8-1. Options and Accessories
Model
Description
Y5537
24 in. (61 cm) Rack Mount Kit for 5522A
Y8021
Shielded IEEE-488 Cable 0.5 m (1.64 ft)
Y8022
Shielded IEEE-488 Cable 2 m (6.56 ft)
Y8023
Shielded IEEE-488 Cable 4 m (13 ft)
Rack Mount Kit
The Y5537 rack mount kit provides all the hardware necessary to mount the 5522A on
slides in a 24-inch (61 cm) equipment rack. Instructions are provided in the kit. (To rack
mount the 5725A Amplifier, order kit Y5735.)
IEEE-488 Interface Cable
Shielded IEEE-488 cables are available in three lengths (See Table 8-1). The cables
attach to the 5522A to any other IEEE-488 device. Each cable has double 24-pin
connectors at both ends to allow stacking. Metric threaded mounting screws are provided
with each connector. Appendix D shows the pinout for the IEEE-488 connector.
RS-232 Null-Modem Cables
The PM8914/001 and RS40 null modem cables connect the 5522A SERIAL 1 FROM
HOST port to a printer, video display terminal, computer, or other serial device
configured as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). Appendix D shows the pinouts for the
serial connectors.
5520A-525A/LEADS
The optional test lead kit, 5520A-525A/LEADS, is a kit of test leads for voltage and
current, thermocouple extension wires, thermocouple miniconnectors, and thermocouple
measuring “beads.”
8-4
Chapter 9
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications ......................................
Oscilloscope Connections....................................................................................
How to Start the SC600 Option ...........................................................................
The Output Signal............................................................................................
How to Adjust the Output Signal ....................................................................
How to Key in a Value................................................................................
How to Adjust Values with the Rotary Knob .............................................
How to Use X and D .........................................................................
How to Reset the Oscilloscope Option............................................................
How to Calibrat the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope...............................
The Volt Function............................................................................................
The V/DIV Menu ............................................................................................
Shortcuts to Set the Voltage Amplitude ..........................................................
Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscillosope......................................
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope ..........
The Edge Function ..........................................................................................
Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope ............................
Pulse Response Calibration with a Tunnel Diode Pulser ................................
The Leveled Sine Wave Function ...................................................................
Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage ............................................
The MORE OPTIONS Menu ..........................................................................
How to Sweep Through a Frequency Range ...................................................
Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope....................
How to Calibrate the Time Base of an Oscilloscope ...........................................
The Time Marker Function .............................................................................
Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope .......................
How to Test the Trigger SC600 Option ...............................................................
How to Test Video Triggers ................................................................................
How to Verify Pulse Capture...............................................................................
How to Measure Input Resistance and Capacitance ............................................
Input Impedance Measurement .......................................................................
Input Capacitance Measurement .....................................................................
How to Test Overload Protection ........................................................................
Remote Commands and Queries..........................................................................
General Commands .........................................................................................
Edge Function Commands ..............................................................................
Marker Function Commands ...........................................................................
Page
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-11
9-11
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-24
9-24
9-25
9-26
9-26
9-30
9-30
9-1
5522A
Operators Manual
Video Function Commands .............................................................................
Overload Function Commands........................................................................
Impedance/Capacitance Function Commands.................................................
Verification Tables ..............................................................................................
DC Voltage Verification..................................................................................
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification................................................................
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................................
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 1 MΩ Output Impedance ..............
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 50 Ω Output Impedance................
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Amplitude ..................................................
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Frequency...................................................
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Harmonics ..................................................
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness ......................................................
Edge Verification: Amplitude .........................................................................
Edge Verification: Frequency..........................................................................
Edge Verification: Duty Cycle ........................................................................
Edge Verification: Rise Time ..........................................................................
Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification....................................................................
Marker Generator Verification ........................................................................
Pulse Generator Verification: Period...............................................................
Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width .....................................................
Input Impedance Verification: Resistance.......................................................
Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance ....................................................
9-2
9-31
9-31
9-32
9-33
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-35
9-37
9-38
9-39
9-39
9-40
9-48
9-48
9-49
9-49
9-49
9-50
9-50
9-50
9-51
9-51
Introduction
The 5500A-SC600 Option (the SC600 Option) provides functions that help you maintain
your oscilloscope’s accuracy by verifying and calibrating the following oscilloscope
characteristics:
•
Vertical deflection characteristics are calibrated and verified. The VOLT function
lets you compare the voltage gain to the graticule lines on the oscilloscope.
•
Pulse transient response is checked and calibrated, verifying the accuracy of the
oscilloscope’s measurement of pulse transitions using the EDGE function. Also, the
calibrator supports even faster pulse response checks using an external tunnel diode
pulser.
•
Frequency response is checked by verifying the bandwidth using the Leveled Sine
Wave (LEVSINE) function. Vertical deflection is monitored until the -3 dB point is
observed on the oscilloscope.
•
Horizontal (time base) deflection characteristics are calibrated and verified using the
Time MARKER function. This calibration procedure is similar to the one for
verifying the vertical deflection characteristics, except that it checks the horizontal
axis.
•
The oscilloscope’s ability to display, capture, and measure pulse width is checked
using the PULSE function. This function allows you to vary both the pulse width and
the period.
•
The oscilloscope’s ability to trigger on different waveforms is checked using the
Wave Generator (WAVEGEN) function.
•
The oscilloscope’s ability to trigger on and capture complex TV Trigger signals is
checked using the VIDEO function.
•
The oscilloscope’s input characteristics can be measured using the Input Resistance
and Capacitance (MEAS Z) function.
•
The oscilloscope’s input protection circuit can be tested using the Overload
(OVERLD) function.
The menus that implement these functions also include parameters for altering the way
the output signal responds to voltage, frequency, and time settings, giving you control of
the signal during calibration, and providing more methods for observing the signal’s
characteristics.
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option Specifications
These specifications apply only to the SC600 Option. General specifications that apply to
the 5522A (the Calibrator) can be found in Chapter 1. The specifications are valid under
the following conditions:
•
The Calibrator is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1.
•
The Calibrator has completed a warm-up period of at least twice the length of time
the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes.
•
The SC600 Option has been active longer than 5 minutes.
9-3
5522A
Operators Manual
General Specifications
Voltage Function Specifications
DC Signal
Voltage Function
Square Wave Signal
50 Ω Load
1 MΩ Load
0 to ±6.599 V
0 to ±130 V
50 Ω Load
[1]
1 MΩ Load
Amplitude Characteristics
Range
Range
1 to 24.999 mV
25 to 109.99 mV
110 mV to 2.1999 V
2.2 to 10.999 V
11 to 130 V
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C
Sequence
±1 mV to
±6.599 V p-p
Resolution
1 μV
10 μV
100 μV
1 mV
10 mV
±1 mV to
±130 V p-p
Continuously adjustable
±(0.25 % of output ± 0.05 % of output ±(0.25 % of output ±(0.1 % of
[2]
+ 40 μV)
+ 40 μV)
+ 40 μV)
output + 40 μV)
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
Square Wave Frequency Characteristics
Range
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ±5 °C
Typical aberration within 4 μs from
50 % of leading/trailing edge
10 Hz to 10 kHz
±(2.5 ppm of setting)
<(0.5 % of output + 100 μV)
[1]
Selectable positive or negative, zero referenced square wave.
[2]
For square wave frequencies above 1 kHz, ± (0.25 % of output + 40 μV).
Edge Specifications
Edge Characteristics into 50 Ω Load
Rise Time
≤300 ps
Amplitude Range (p-p)
4.5 mV to 2.75 V
Resolution
4 digits
Adjustment Range
±10 % around each sequence value
(indicated below)
Sequence Values
5 mV, 10 mV, 25 mV, 50 mV, 60 mV, 80
mV, 100 mV, 200 mV, 250 mV, 300 mV,
500 mV, 600 mV, 1 V, 2.5 V
Frequency Range
[1]
900 Hz to 11 MHz
Typical Jitter, edge to trigger
Leading Edge Aberrations
Typical Duty Cycle
Tunnel Diode Pulse Drive
[1]
[2]
9-4
[2]
<5 ps (p-p)
within 2 ns from 50 % of rising edge
2 to 5 ns
5 to 15 ns
after 15 ns
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ± 5 °C
(+0 ps / -100 ps)
±(2 % of output + 200 μV)
±(2.5 ppm of setting)
<(3 % of output + 2 mV)
<(2 % of output + 2 mV)
<(1 % of output + 2 mV)
<(0.5 % of output + 2 mV)
45 % to 55 %
Square wave at 100 Hz to 100 kHz, with variable amplitude of 60 to 100 V p-p.
Above 2 MHz rise time specification <350 ps
All edge aberration measurements made with Tektronix 11801 mainframe with SD26 input module.
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
General Specifications
9
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave
Characteristics into 50 Ω
50 kHz (reference)
Frequency Range
50 kHz to 100 MHz
100 to 300 MHz
300 to 600 MHz
Amplitude Characteristics (for measuring oscilloscope bandwidth)
Range (p-p)
5 mV to 5.5 V
<100 mV: 3 digits
≥100 mV: 4 digits
continuously adjustable
Resolution
Adjustment Range
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C
±(2 % of output
+ 300 μV)
not applicable
Flatness (relative to
50 kHz)
±(3.5 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(4 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(6 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(1.5 % of output
+ 100 μV)
±(2 % of output
+ 100 μV)
±(4 % of output
+ 100 μV)
Short-Term Amplitude
Stability
≤1%
Frequency Characteristics
Resolution
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C
Distortion Characteristics
[1]
1 kHz
10 kHz
±2.5 ppm
[2]
2nd Harmonic
≤ -33 dBc
3rd and Higher Harmonics
≤ -38 dBc
Within 1 hour after reference amplitude setting, provided temperature varies no more than ±5 °C.
With REF CLK set to ext, the frequency uncertainty of the Leveled Sine Wave is the uncertainty of the external 10 MHz clock
±0.3 Hz/gate time.
[1]
[2]
Time Marker Specifications
20 ms to
100 ns
Time Maker into 50 Ω
5 s to 50 ms
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty at Cardinal
Points, tcal ±5 °C
±(25 + t *1000)
[1]
ppm
±2.5 ppm
±2.5 ppm
±2.5 ppm
±2.5 ppm
Wave Shape
spike or square
spike, square,
or 20 %-pulse
spike or square
square or sine
sine
Typical Output Level
Typical Jitter (rms)
Sequence
[3]
Adjustment Range
Amplitude Resolution
[2]
50 to 20 ns
[2]
10 ns
[2]
>1 V p-p
>1 V p-p
>1 V p-p
<10 ppm
<1 ppm
<1 ppm
5-2-1 from 5 s to 2 ns (e.g., 500 ms, 200 ms, 100 ms)
>1 V p-p
<1 ppm
[2]
5 to 2 ns
>1 V p-p
<1 ppm
At least ±10 % around each sequence value indicated above.
4 digits
[1]
[2]
t is the time in seconds.
Typical rise time of square wave and 20 %-pulse (20 % duty cycle pulse) is < 1.5 ns.
[3]
Time marker uncertainty is ±50 ppm away from the cardinal points.
Wave Generator Specifications
Wave Generator Characteristics
Square Wave, Sine Wave, and Triangle Wave
into 50 Ω or 1 MΩ
Amplitude
Range
into 1 MΩ:
into 50 Ω:
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C,
10 Hz to 10 kHz
±(3 % of p-p output + 100 µV)
Sequence
Typical DC Offset Range
1.8 mV to 55 V p-p
1.8 mV to 2.5 V p-p
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
0 to ± (≥40 % of p-p amplitude)
[1]
Frequency
Range
10 Hz to 100 kHz
Resolution
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±5 °C
±(25 ppm + 15 mHz)
[1]
The DC offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms.
9-5
5522A
Operators Manual
Pulse Generator Specifications
Positive pulse into 50 Ω
Pulse Generator Characteristics
Typical rise/fall times
Available Amplitudes
<2 ns
2.5 V, 1 V, 250 mV, 100 mV, 25 mV, 10 mV
Pulse Width
Range
4 ns to 500 ns
Uncertainty
[2]
[1]
5 % of pulse width ±2 ns
Pulse Period
Range
Resolution
22 ms to 200 ns (45.5 Hz to 5 MHz)
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency and width
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty at Cardinal Points, tcal ±5 °C
±2.5 ppm
[1]
Pulse width not to exceed 40 % of period.
[2]
Pulse width uncertainties for periods below 2 μs are not specified.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)
Pulse Period
22 ms to 200 ns
Division Ratio
Amplitude into 50 Ω (p-p)
Typical Rise Time
off/1/10/100
≥1 V
≤2 ns
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function)
Time Marker Period
Division Ratio
Amplitude into 50 Ω (p-p)
Typical Rise Time
off/100
≥1 V
≤2 ns
off/10/100
≥1 V
≤2 ns
off/1/10/100
≥1 V
≤2 ns
off/1
≥1 V
≤2 ns
2 to 9 ns
10 to 749 ns
750 ns to 34.9 ms
35 ms to 5 s
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function)
Edge Signal
Frequency
Division Ratio
Typical Amplitude into
50 Ω (p-p)
Typical Rise Time
Typical Lead Time
off/1
≥1 V
≤2 ns
40 ns
900 Hz to 11 MHz
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)
Voltage Function
Frequency
Division Ratio
Typical Amplitude into
50 Ω (p-p)
Typical Rise Time
Typical Lead Time
off/1
≥1 V
≤2 ns
1 μs
10 Hz to 10 kHz
Trigger Signal Specifications
Trigger Signal Type
Parameters
Field Formats
Selectable NTSC, SECAM, PAL, PAL-M
Polarity
Selectable inverted or uninverted video
Amplitude into 50 Ω load
Line Marker
Adjustable 0 to 1.5 V p-p Ω, (±7 % accuracy)
Selectable Line Video Marker
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications
Scope Input Selected
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
50 Ω
1 MΩ
40 to 60 Ω
500 kΩ to 1.5 MΩ
0.1 %
0.1 %
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications
Scope Input selected
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
[1]
9-6
1 MΩ
5 to 50 pF
±(5 % of input + 0.5 pF)
[1]
Measurement made within 30 minutes of capacitance zero reference. SC600 option must be selected for at least five minutes
prior to any capacitance measurement, including the zero process.
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Oscilloscope Connections
9
Overload Measurement Specifications
Source Voltage
Typical ‘On’ Current
Indication
Typical ‘Off’ Current Indication
Maximum Time Limit DC or AC
(1 kHz)
5 to 9 V
100 to 180 mA
10 mA
Setable 1 s to 60 s
Oscilloscope Connections
Using the cable supplied with the SC600 Option, connect the SCOPE output on the
Calibrator to one of the channel connectors on your oscilloscope (see Figure 9-1).
To use the external trigger, connect the TRIG OUT output on the Calibrator to the
external trigger connection on your oscilloscope. To use the external trigger and view its
signal with the calibration signal, connect the TRIG OUT output to another channel. See
your oscilloscope manual for details on connecting and viewing an external trigger.
5522A CALIBRATOR
Figure 9-1. Oscilloscope Connection: Channel and External Trigger
gjh036.eps
How to Start the SC600 Option
Press a (LED lit) to select the SC600 Option. The SCOPE menu, shown below,
appears in the Control Display. You can press any of the first four softkeys to go directly
to the VOLT, EDGE, LEVSINE, and MARKER calibration menus. Press the last softkey
to go to the OTHER menu (also shown below), allowing access to WAVEGEN, VIDEO,
PULSE, Impedance/Capacitance measurement (MEAS Z), and Overload (OVERLD)
menus. Press P to return to the SCOPE menu from the OTHER menu. This chapter
describes each of these menus in detail.
9-7
5522A
Operators Manual
gjh050.eps
The Output Signal
The following description assumes that you have selected VOLT mode from the SCOPE
menu. The Control Displays appears as follows with VOLT mode selected:
gjh051.eps
The location of the output signal is indicated on the Control Display (the display on the
right side). If your Calibrator is connected, but the output does not appear on the
oscilloscope, you may have the Calibrator in standby mode. The settings for the output
signal are indicated in the Output Display (the display on the left side).
If STBY is displayed, press the O key. The Output Display will show OPR and the
output should appear on the oscilloscope.
How to Adjust the Output Signal
The Calibrator provides several ways to change the settings for the output signal during
calibration. Since oscilloscope calibration requires many adjustments of the output signal,
the three available methods for changing these settings for oscilloscope calibration are
summarized below. These methods provide the means of jumping to a new value or
sweeping through a range of values.
How to Key in a Value
The following example is for use in the LEVSINE mode. To key a specific value directly
into the Calibrator from its front panel:
1. Key in the value you want to enter, including the units and prefixes. For example, to
enter 120 mV press 1 2 0 c V. The control display shows:
gl002i.eps
9-8
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Start the SC600 Option
9
Note
Units and prefixes printed in red in the upper-left corner of the keys are
accessed through the b key. For example, to enter 200 μs, press 2
0 0 b c b H.
If you make an error, press G to clear the Control Display and return to the menu.
2. Press E to activate the value and move it to the Output Display.
Other settings in the display will remain unaltered unless you key in an entry and
specify the units for that setting.
How to Adjust Values with the Rotary Knob
To adjust values in the Output Display using the rotary knob:
1. Turn the rotary knob. A cursor appears in the output display under the lowest digit
and begins changing that digit. If you wish to place the cursor in the field without
changing the digit, press e.
gjh038.eps
2. To move the cursor between the voltage and frequency fields, press e.
gjh039.eps
3. Use W and L to move the cursor to the digit you want to change.
4. Turn the rotary knob to change the value.
When you use the rotary knob in either Volt mode or Marker mode, the Control
Display shows the new value’s percent change from the reference value. This is
useful for determining the percentage of error on the oscilloscope. You can set the
reference value to the new value by pressing N.
gjh047.eps
5. Press E to remove the cursor from the Output Display and save the new value
as the reference value.
Note
If you attempt to use the rotary knob to adjust a value to an amount that is
invalid for the function you are using, or is outside the value’s range limits,
the value will not change and the 5522A will beep. If you need to reach a
different range of values, turn the knob quickly to jump to the new range.
9-9
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Use X and D
The X and D keys cause the current value of the signal to jump to a pre-determined
cardinal value, whose amount is determined by the current function. These keys are
described in more detail under the descriptions for each function.
How to Reset the Oscilloscope Option
You can reset all parameters in the 5522A to their default settings at any time during
front panel operations by pressing the R key on the front panel.
After resetting the 5522A, press a to return to the Oscilloscope Calibration Option
(the Volt menu appears). Press O to connect the signal output.
How to Calibrat the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope
The oscilloscope voltage (vertical) gain is calibrated by applying a dc or low frequency
square wave signal and adjusting its gain to meet the height specified for different voltage
levels, designated by the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope. The signal is applied
from the 5522A in Volt mode. The specific voltages that you should use for calibration,
and the graticule line divisions that need to be matched, vary for different oscilloscopes
and are specified in your oscilloscope’s service manual.
The Volt Function
The Voltage gain is calibrated using the Volt function. This function is accessed through
the Volt menu, which appears when you start the SCOPE option, or when you press the
softkey under MODE to scroll through the oscilloscope calibration menus.
gjh052.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the SCOPE menu.
Each menu item is described below:
9-10
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output. If the signal does
not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the signal, press Y.
•
DC <-> AC Toggles between a dc or ac signal. Pressing the softkey from the ac
signal, produces the dc equivalent output.
•
1 MΩ Toggles the calibrator’s output impedance setting between 1 MΩ and 50 Ω.
•
TRIG If you are using square wave to calibrate the external trigger, use this key to
toggle the trigger off and on. When on, the reading will show “/1”, which indicated
that the external trigger is at the same frequency as the volt output. The external
trigger can be useful for many oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on low
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrat the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope
9
amplitude signals. You can also toggle the trigger off and on by pressing ??.
•
V/DIV MENU Opens the voltage scaling menu, which lets you select the scale of the
signal in volts per division. This menu is described below in detail, under “The
V/DIV Menu.”
•
MODE Indicates you are in Volt mode. Use the softkey to change modes and open
the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes
The V/DIV Menu
The V/DIV menu, shown below, sets the number of volts denoted by each division on the
oscilloscope. This menu provides alternative methods for changing the output amplitude
that may be more convenient for certain oscilloscope applications. To access the V/DIV
menu, press V/DIV from the Volt menu.
gjh053.eps
Each item in the V/DIV menu is described below.
•
V/div Changes the scale of the output display by changing the number of volts that
are represented by each division. The available settings, shown in the figure above,
are provided in 1-2-5 step increments. Press the softkey under UP to increase the
volts per division. Press the softkey under DOWN to decrease the volts per division.
•
# DIV Specifies the number of divisions that establish the peak-to-peak value of the
waveform. The value can be adjusted from one to eight divisions. The amount
denoted by each division is displayed in the V/div field. Press the softkey under UP
to increase the signal’s height, and press the softkey under DOWN to decrease it.
Shortcuts to Set the Voltage Amplitude
The X and D keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an
oscilloscope in a 1-2-5 step sequence. For example, if the voltage is 40 mV, then pressing
X increases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point, which is 50 mV. Pressing D
decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point, which is 20 mV.
Amplitude Calibration Procedure for an Oscillosope
This example procedure describes how to use the Volt menu to calibrate the
oscilloscope’s amplitude gain. During calibration, you will need to set different voltages
and verify that the gain matches the graticule lines on the oscilloscope according to the
specifications for your particular oscilloscope. See your oscilloscope manual for the
recommended calibration settings and appropriate gain values.
Before you start this procedure, verify that you are running the oscilloscope option in
Volt mode. If you are, the Control Display shows the following menu.
9-11
5522A
Operators Manual
gjh054.eps
Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the vertical gain.
1. Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope, making sure the oscilloscope
is terminated at the proper impedance (1 MΩ for this example). Verify that the O
key on the 5522A is lit, indicating that the signal is connected.
2. Key in the voltage level that is recommended for your oscilloscope. For example to
enter 30 mV, press 3 0 c V, then press E. See “Keying in a
Value” earlier in this chapter.
3. Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary. The waveform should be similar to the one
shown below, with the gain at exactly the amount specified for the calibration
settings for your oscilloscope.
This example shows the gain at 30 mV to be 6 divisions, at 5 mV per division.
gl006i.bmp
4. Change the voltage to the next value recommended for calibrating your oscilloscope
model, and repeat this procedure at the new voltage level, verifying the gain is
correct according to the specifications in your manual.
5. Repeat the procedure for each channel.
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an
Oscilloscope
The pulse response is calibrated with a square-wave signal that has a fast leading edge
rise-time. Using this signal, you adjust the oscilloscope as necessary until it meets its
particular specifications for rise time and pulse aberrations.
Following pulse verification, the frequency response is checked by applying a leveled
sine wave and acquiring a frequency reading at the -3 dB point, when the amplitude drops
approximately 30 %.
9-12
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope
9
The Edge Function
The Edge function is used for calibrating the pulse response for your oscilloscope. To
reach the Edge menu, press the softkey under MODE until “edge” appears.
gjh055.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the SCOPE menu.
Each option in the Edge menus is described below.
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE terminal (50Ω) Indicates the location and impedance of the
signal output. If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To
disconnect the signal, press Y.
You cannot change the output impedance in Edge mode.
•
TD PULSE Press once to thrn the Tunnel Diode Pulser drive signal on, again to
turn the Pulser drive off. This signal sources up to 100 V p-p to drive a Tunnel Diode
Pulser (Fluke Part Number 606522, Tektronix 067-0681-01, or equivalent.
•
TRIG If you are using the external trigger, use this key to toggle the trigger off and
on. When on, the reading will show “/1” which indicates that the external trigger is at
the same frequency as the edge output. The external trigger can be useful for many
digital storage oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on fast rise time signals.
•
MODE Indicates you are in Edge mode. Use the softkey to change modes and open
the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes.
Pulse Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope
This sample procedure shows how to check the oscilloscope’s pulse response. Before you
check your oscilloscope, see your oscilloscope’s manual for the recommended calibration
settings.
Before you start this procedure, verify that you are running the oscilloscope option in
Edge mode. If you are, the Control Display shows the following menu.
gjh067.eps
Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the pulse response.
9-13
5522A
Operators Manual
1. Connect the 5522A to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope. Select 50Ω impedance or use a
50Ω termination directly at the oscilloscope input. Verify that the O key is lit,
indicating that the signal is connected.
2. Alter the voltage setting for the signal so it matches the amplitude value
recommended by your oscilloscope manufacturer for calibrating the edge response.
The default setting is 25 mV @ 1 MHz.
For example, on a Fluke PM3392A oscilloscope, start with a signal of 1 V @ 1 MHz.
3. Adjust the scale on your oscilloscope to achieve a good picture of the edge. For
example, on a Fluke PM3392A oscilloscope with a 1 V @ 1 MHz signal, use
200 mV/div.
4. Adjust the time base on your oscilloscope to the fastest position available (20.0 or
50.0 ns/div).
Pulse aberrations
gl007i.eps
5. Verify that your oscilloscope exhibits the proper rise time and pulse aberration
characteristics.
6. Remove the input signal by pressing Y.
Pulse Response Calibration with a Tunnel Diode Pulser
You can use the calibrator to drive a tunnel diode pulser (Fluke Part Number 606522, or
Tektronix 067-0681-01, or equivalent), allowing you to check for pulse edge rise times as
fast as 125 ps.
The calibrator sources a maximum pulser drive signal of 100 V p-p at 100 kHz. The
recommended (and default) output setting is 80 V p-p at 100 kHz.
Perform the following procedure to use a tunnel diode pulser:
1. Connect the Calibrator, tunnel diode pulser, and oscilloscope as shown in Figure 9-2.
2. With the SC600 Option in EDGE mode, press the TDPULSE softkey to “on”.
3. Press O.
4. Rotate the control on the pulser box to the minimum setting necessary to trigger a
reading.
9-14
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope
9
5522A CALIBRATOR
Figure 9-2. Tunnel Diode Pulser Connections
gjh037.eps
The Leveled Sine Wave Function
The Leveled Sine Wave (Levsine) function uses a leveled sine wave, whose amplitude
remains relatively constant over a range of frequencies, to check the oscilloscope’s
bandwidth. When you check your oscilloscope, you change the wave’s frequency until
the amplitude displayed on the oscilloscope drops 30 %, which is the amplitude that
corresponds to the -3 dB point.
To access the Levsine menu, press the softkey under MODE until “levsine” appears.
gjh056.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the SCOPE menu.
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE terminal (50Ω) Indicates the location and impedance of the
signal output. If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To
9-15
5522A
Operators Manual
disconnect the signal, press Y. You cannot change the impedance while you are in
Levsine mode.
•
MORE OPTIONS Opens additional menu items, which are described in detail
under “The MORE OPTIONS Menu.”
•
SET TO LAST F Toggles between the current frequency setting and the reference
value of 50 kHz. This option is useful for reverting to the reference to check the
output after you make adjustments at another frequency.
•
MODE Indicates you are in Levsine mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open the corresponding menus for the other four calibration modes.
Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage
Three options are available for controlling the sine wave settings.
•
SET TO LAST F toggles between the last frequency used and the reference
frequency of 50 kHz, letting you check the output at the reference after you make
adjustments at a different frequency.
•
MORE OPTIONS lets you use an automatic frequency sweep and lock the voltage
range, if necessary. The following section provides details on this menu.
•
The X and D keys step frequencies up or down in amounts that let you quickly
access a new set of frequencies. For example, if the value is 250 kHz, X changes
it to 300 kHz, and D changes it to 200 kHz. For voltage values, X and D
step through cardinal point values in a 1.2-3-6 sequence.
The MORE OPTIONS Menu
When you select MORE OPTIONS, you open options that give you more control over
the frequency and voltage. To access the MORE OPTIONS menu, press the softkey
under MORE OPTIONS in the Levsine menu.
gjh057.eps
Each option in the MORE OPTIONS menu is described below.
•
FREQ CHANGE Toggles between two settings that control the way the output
signal adjusts to a new frequency. This is the default setting.
“Jump” causes the output signal to jump immediately to a new frequency setting.
“Sweep” causes the signal to sweep through a series of frequency values, over a
range you set. Use the sweep function to watch the signal gradually change over a
given bandwidth and see the point at which its amplitude changes. Details for using
the sweep function are provided under “Sweeping Through a Frequency Range.”
9-16
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope
•
9
RATE Used when FREQ CHANGE is set to “sweep” to select a sweep speed of
100 kHz, 1 MHz, or 10 MHz.
A slower sweep rate lets you watch the frequency change very slowly. After a faster
sweep, you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slower sweep over a
subset of your previous frequency range.
•
Range The softkeys toggle between two settings. The first setting (“auto”) changes
the range limit automatically in accordance with the voltage level. The second setting
(“locked”) freezes the present range limit; subsequent changes in voltage level are
then measured with this range limit.
There are six range limits in Levsine mode: 10 mV, 40 mV, 100 mV, 400 mV, 1.3 V,
and 5.5 V. When set to “auto” the calibrator uses your voltage setting to
automatically set the range limit that provides the most accurate output. When set to
“locked” the range limit remains fixed and you can decrease the voltage down to the
bottom of the range.
For example, assume the range limit is 40 mV. If you enter 5 mV with “auto”
selected, the calibrator will automatically change the range limit to 10 mV and output
5 mV from within the 10 mV range. However, if you start with the 40 mV range
“locked” and then enter 5 mV, the calibrator will output 5 mV from within the 40 mV
range.
The default range setting is “auto,” which should always be used unless you are
troubleshooting discontinuities in your oscilloscope’s vertical gain. The range setting
will always return to “auto” after you leave Levsine mode.
•
MODE Indicates you are in Levsine mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open the corresponding menus for the other four calibration modes.
How to Sweep Through a Frequency Range
When you change frequencies using the sweep method, the output sine wave sweeps
through a specified range of frequencies. This feature lets you identify the frequency at
which the oscilloscope’s signal exhibits certain behavior; you can quickly see the
frequency response of the oscilloscope. Before you start this procedure, make sure you
are in the MORE OPTIONS menu and the sine wave is displayed on the oscilloscope.
Perform the following procedure to sweep through frequencies:
1. Make sure the output signal shows the starting frequency. If not, key in the starting
frequency; then press E.
2. Toggle FREQ CHANGE to “sweep.” Toggle the RATE to “100 kHz” if you want to
observe a very slow sweep over a small range.
3. Key in the end frequency; then press E. After you press E, the signal
sweeps through frequencies between the two values you entered, and the Sweep
menu appears on the Control Display as shown below.
4. You can let the signal sweep through the entire range, or you can halt the sweep if
you need to record the frequency at a certain point.
To interrupt the sweep, press the softkey under HALT SWEEP. The current
frequency will appear on the Output Display and the MORE OPTIONS menu will
reappear on the Control Display.
Note
When you interrupt the frequency sweep by pressing HALT SWEEP, the
FREQ CHANGE method switches back to “jump.”
5. Repeat the procedure if necessary. For example, if you did a fast sweep, you may
9-17
5522A
Operators Manual
want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slow sweep over a subset of your
previous frequency range.
Frequency Response Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope
This sample procedure, which verifies the frequency response on your oscilloscope, is
usually performed after the pulse response is verified.
This procedure checks the bandwidth by finding the frequency at the -3 dB point for your
oscilloscope. The reference sine wave in this procedure has an amplitude of 6 divisions,
so that the -3 dB point can be found when the amplitude drops to 4.2 divisions.
Before you start this example procedure, verify that you are running the oscilloscope
option in Levsine mode. If you are, the Control Display shows the following menu.
gjh058.eps
Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the frequency response.
1. Reconnect the signal by pressing the O key on the 5522A. Select 50 Ω impedance
or use a 50 Ω external termination directly at the oscilloscope input
2. Adjust the sine wave settings in the Output Display according to the calibration
recommendations in your oscilloscope manual. For example, for the HP 54522C
oscilloscope, start at 600 mV @ 1 MHz. To enter 600 mV, press 6 0 0
c V; then press E.
3. Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary. The sine wave should appear at exactly six
divisions, peak-to-peak, as shown below.
If necessary, make small adjustments to the voltage amplitude until the wave reaches
exactly six divisions. To fine-tune the voltage, press e to bring a cursor into the
Output Display, move the cursor with the L key, and turn the rotary knob to
adjust the value. (See “Fine-Tuning Values” earlier in this chapter.)
gl009i.bmp
4. Increase the frequency to 400 MHz (for 500-MHz instruments), or 500 MHz (for
600-MHz instruments). To enter 400 MHz, press 4 0 0 M H then
press E.
5. Continue to increase the frequency slowly until the waveform decreases to
9-18
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Time Base of an Oscilloscope
9
4.2 divisions, as shown below.
To increase the frequency slowly, fine-tune it using the rotary knob. To do this, press
e to place a cursor in the Output Display, press e again to place it in the
frequency field, and use the L and W keys to move it to the digit you want to
change. Then change the value by turning the rotary knob. Continue making small
increments in the frequency until the signal drops to 4.2 divisions. At 4.2 divisions,
the signal is at the frequency that corresponds to the -3 dB point.
gl010i.bmp
6. Remove the input signal by pressing Y.
7. Repeat this procedure for the remaining channels on your oscilloscope.
How to Calibrate the Time Base of an Oscilloscope
The horizontal deflection (time base) of an oscilloscope is calibrated using a method
similar to the vertical gain calibration. A time marker signal is generated from the
Calibrator and the signal’s peaks are matched to the graticule line divisions on the
oscilloscope.
The Time Marker Function
The Time MARKER function, which is available through the MARKER menu, lets you
calibrate the timing response of your oscilloscope. To access the MARKER menu, press
the softkey under MODE until “marker” appears.
gjh058.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the SCOPE menu.
Each option in the Marker menu is described below.
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE terminal (50Ω) Indicates the location of the signal output.
If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the
signal, press Y.
•
SHAPE Indicates the type of waveform. Depending on frequency setting, possible
selections are sine, spike, square (50 % duty cycle square wave), and sq20% (20 %
9-19
5522A
Operators Manual
duty cycle square wave.) Note that selections available under SHAPE depend on the
selected marker period (frequency) as follows:
Selection
Period (Frequency)
Sine
10 ns – 2 ns (100 MHz – 500 MHz)
Spike
5 s – 20 ns (0.2 Hz – 50 MHz)
Square
5 s – 10 ns (0.2 Hz – 100 MHz)
Sq20%
20 ms – 100 ns (50 kHz – 10 MHz)
•
TRIG If you are using the external trigger, use this key to cycle through the trigger
settings. The available trigger settings are: off, /1 (trigger signal appears on each
marker), /10 (trigger signal appears on every tenth marker), and /100 (trigger signal
appears on each 100 markers).
•
MODE Indicates you are in Marker mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default marker values are 1.000 ms, SHAPE = spike.
The X and D keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an
oscilloscope in a 1-2-5 step sequence. For example, if the period is 1.000 ms, pressing
X increases the period to the nearest cardinal point, which is 2.000 ms. Pressing D
decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point, which is 500 μs.
Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope
This sample procedure uses the Time Marker function to check the horizontal deflection
(time base) of your oscilloscope. See your oscilloscope’s manual for the exact time base
values recommended for calibration.
Before you begin this procedure, verify that you are in Marker mode. If you are, the
Control Display shows the following menu.
gjh060.eps
Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the time base.
1. Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope. Select 50 Ω impedance or
use an external 50 Ω termination. Make sure the oscilloscope is dc-coupled.
2. Apply a time marker value according to the recommended calibration settings in your
oscilloscope manual. For example, to enter 200 ns, press 2 0 0 b K
b H , then press E.
NOTE
You may enter the equivalent frequency instead of the time marker value.
For example, instead of entering 200 ns, you may enter 5 MHz.
3. Set your oscilloscope’s time base to show 10 time markers. The time markers should
align with the oscilloscope divisions, as shown in the example below.
For an accurate reading, align the signal’s peaks with the horizontal center axis.
9-20
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Test the Trigger SC600 Option
9
Peaks are aligned
with center axis
gl011i.eps
4. Repeat this procedure for all time marker values recommended for your oscilloscope.
Repeat for digital and analog mode as required. Some oscilloscopes may need the
magnification changed while calibrating in analog mode.
5. Remove the input signal by pressing Y.
How to Test the Trigger SC600 Option
The oscilloscope’s ability to trigger on different waveforms can be tested using the wave
generator. When the wave generator is used, a square, sine, or triangle wave is
transmitted and the wave’s output impedance, offset, and voltage can be varied in order
to test the triggering capability at different levels.
NOTE
The wave generator should not be used for checking the accuracy of your
oscilloscope.
The wave generator is available through the Wavegen menu, shown below. To access this
menu, press the softkey under MODE until “wavegen” appears.
gjh061.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the Wavegen menu is described below.
9-21
5522A
Operators Manual
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output. If the signal does
not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the signal, press Y.
•
WAVE Scrolls through the three types of waveforms that are available. You can
select a square, sine, or triangle wave as the output.
•
SCOPE Z Toggles the calibrator’s output impedance setting between 50 Ω and
1 MΩ.
•
OFFSET Displays the offset of the generated wave. To change the offset, key in the
new value, and press E. Using the rotary knob does not change the offset; it
changes the actual voltage output.
When you change the offset, you must remain within certain limits to avoid clipping
the peaks. The limit depends on the wave’s peak-to-peak value. Specifically, the
maximum peak excursion equals the offset plus half of the wave’s peak-to-peak
value. See “Wave Generator Specifications” at the beginning of this chapter.
•
MODE Indicates you are in Wavegen mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes.
How to Test Video Triggers
gjh062.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the Video menu is described below.
9-22
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE terminal (50Ω) Indicates the location of the signal output.
If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the
signal, press Y.
•
LINE MK Allows you to select the marker line number. For ntsc and pal-m formats,
you can also select field (“odd” or “even”). For pal and secam formats, the field
(“ODD” or “EVEN”) is selected automatically based on marker line number.
•
FORMAT Scrolls through the available formats. You can select ntsc, pal, pal-m,
and secam.
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Verify Pulse Capture
•
9
MODE Indicates you are in VIDEO mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open the corresponding menus for the other four oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default video settings are +100 %, format = NTSC, and videomark = 10.
How to Verify Pulse Capture
gjh063.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the PULSE menu is described below.
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output. If the signal does
not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the signal, press Y.
•
AMPL Indicates the output level. You can select 2.5 V, 1.0 V, 250 mV, 100 mV,
25 mV, or 10 mV.
•
TRIG If you are using the external trigger, use this key to cycle through the trigger
settings. The available trigger settings are: off, /1 (trigger signal appears on each
marker), /10 (trigger signal appears on every tenth marker), and /100 (trigger signal
appears on each 100 markers).
•
MODE Indicates you are in PULSE mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open the menus for the other oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default Pulse settings are 100.0 ns width and 1.000 ms period. To change these values,
you have several options. Usually, you will enter values for both pulse width and period.
Do this by entering the pulse width value with units first, followed immediately by the
period value and units, followed by E. For example, you could enter a pulse width
of 50 ns and a period of 200 ns with the following sequence:
5 0 b K b H 2 0 0 b K b H E.
To change only the pulse width, enter a value in seconds. You can enter this value with
units (e.g., 200 ns) or without units (e.g., 0.0000002). To change only the period, enter a
frequency with units (e.g., 20 MHz, changing the period to 50 ns).
9-23
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Measure Input Resistance and Capacitance
gjh064.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the Impedance/Capacitance (MEAS Z) menu is described below.
•
Measured @ SCOPE terminal Indicates the location of the measured input.
•
MEASURE Indicates the type of test. You can select res 50 Ω or res 1 MΩ
termination (for impedance) or cap (capacitance).
•
MODE Indicates the Calibrator is in MEAS Z mode. Use the softkey to change
modes and open the menus for the other oscilloscope calibration modes.
If you have selected Capacitance measurement, the menu appears as follow:
gjh065.eps
•
SET OFFSET With the cable disconnected at the oscilloscope but still connected at
the Calibrator, press SET OFFSET to cancel the capacitance of the Calibrator and
cable. Press again (CLEAR OFFSET) to cancel the offset.
Input Impedance Measurement
With MEAS Z mode selected, perform the following procedure to measure the input
impedance of an oscilloscope:
1. Use the MEASURE softkey to select “res 50Ω“ or “res 1 MΩ“ termination.
2. Connect the SCOPE terminal on the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope.
3. Press O to initiate the measurement.
Input Capacitance Measurement
With MEAS Z mode selected, perform the following procedure to measure the input
capacitance of an oscilloscope:
9-24
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Test Overload Protection
9
1. Set the oscilloscope for 1 MΩ input impedance. Note that input capacitance testing
cannot be done with 50Ω input impedance.
2. Use the MEASURE softkey to select “cap”.
3. With the output cable connected to the Calibrator but not connected to the
oscilloscope, press the SET OFFSET softkey to cancel stray capacitances.
4. Connect the output cable to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope.
5. Press O to initiate the measurement.
How to Test Overload Protection
 Caution
This test checks the power handling capability of the 50 Ω input
of your oscilloscope. Before proceeding, ensure that the power
rating of your oscilloscope can handle the voltages and
currents that this test can output. Failing to do so could
damage your oscilloscope.
gjh066.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the OVERLD menu is described below.
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output.
•
UUTTRIP Indicates test results. “NO” appears if the overload protection did not trip
within the selected time limit. A value in seconds appears (e.g. “4.1s”) if the
overload protection has tripped within the time limit.
•
T LIMIT Indicates the selected time limit for application of the output value. Press
this softkey to key in or edit a different time limit (1s to 60s allowed.)
•
OUT VAL Indicates the output voltage type. You can select DC or AC and a value
ranging from 5 V to 9 V (shown in Output Display). Key in or edit this value.
•
MODE Indicates you are in OVERLD (Overload) mode. Use the softkey to change
modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default overload settings are +5.000 V and DC.
At any time, you can also set the overload time limit with S, INSTMT SETUP
softkey, OTHER SETUP softkey, TLIMDEF softkey, then choose 1s to 60s.
9-25
5522A
Operators Manual
Perform the following procedure to test the overload protection of an oscilloscope:
1. Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope.
2. Select the voltage type (DC or AC) using the OUT VAL softkey.
3. Key in the voltage level. (The default value is 5 V.)
4. If necessary, change the duration. (Refer to the procedure described above.) The
default duration is 10s.
5. Check for test results displayed with the UUTTRIP softkey.
Remote Commands and Queries
This section describes commands and queries that are used specifically for the SC600
Option. Each command description indicates whether it can be used with IEEE-488 and
RS-232 remote interfaces and identifies it as a Sequential, Overlapped, or Coupled
command.
IEEE-488 (GPIB) and RS-232 Applicability Each command and query has a check
box indicating applicability to IEEE-488 (general purpose interface bus, or GPIB) and
RS-232 remote operations.
Sequential Commands Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the
data stream are called sequential commands. For more information, see “Sequential
Commands” in Chapter 5.
Overlapped Commands Commands SCOPE, TRIG, and OUT_IMP are designated as
overlapped commands because they may be overlapped (interrupted) by the next
command before they have completed execution. When an overlapped command is
interrupted, it may take longer to execute while it waits for other commands to be
completed. To prevent an overlapped command from being interrupted during execution,
use *OPC, *OPC?, or *WAI, which prevent interruptions until they detect the
command’s completion. For more information, see “Overlapped Commands” in Chapter
5.
Coupled Commands SCOPE and OUT_IMP are coupled commands because they can
be coupled (combined) with other commands to form a compound command sequence.
Care must be taken to ensure that commands are not coupled in a way that may cause
them to disable each other, since this may result in a fault. For more information, see
“Coupled Commands” in Chapter 5.
General Commands
Table 9-1 is a list of Scope command parameters.
Table 9-1. SCOPE Command Parameters
Parameter
Description/Example
OFF
Turns the oscilloscope hardware off. Programs 0 V, 0 Hz, output at the NORMAL
terminals, standby.
VOLT
Oscilloscope ac and dc VOLT mode. Programs 20 mV peak-to-peak, 1 kHz, output at
the SCOPE BNC, output impedance 1 MΩ, standby if from OFF or previously in
standby. FUNC? Returns SACV (for ac) or SDCV (for dc).
Example:
SCOPE VOLT; OUT 4 V, 1 kHz
(ac voltage, 4 V peak-to-peak, 1 kHz.)
9-26
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Remote Commands and Queries
9
Table 9-1. SCOPE Command Parameters (cont.)
Parameter
EDGE
Description/Example
Oscilloscope EDGE mode. Programs 25 mV peak-to-peak, 1 MHz, output at the
SCOPE BNC, standby if from OFF or previously in standby. FUNC? returns EDGE.
Example:
SCOPE EDGE; OUT 0.5 V, 5 kHz
(Edge, 0.5 V peak-to-peak, 5 kHz.)
LEVSINE
Oscilloscope LEVSINE mode. Programs 30 mV peak-to-peak, 50 kHz, output at the
SCOPE BNC, standby if from OFF or previously in standby. FUNC? returns LEVSINE.
Example:
SCOPE LEVSINE; OUT 1 V, 50 kHz
(Leveled sine wave, 1 V peak-to-peak, 50 kHz.)
MARKER
Oscilloscope MARKER mode. Programs the period to 1 ms, output at the SCOPE
BNC, standby if from OFF or previously in standby. FUNC? returns MARKER.
Example:
SCOPE MARKER; OUT 2 MS
(Marker, period of 2 ms.)
WAVEGEN
Oscilloscope WAVEGEN mode. Programs 20 mV peak-to-peak, square wave, 1 kHz,
no offset, output impedance 1 MΩ, standby if from OFF or previously in standby.
FUNC? returns WAVEGEN.
Example:
SCOPE WAVEGEN; OUT 1 V, 1 kHz
(Wave Generator, 1 V peak-to-peak, 1 kHz.)
VIDEO
Oscilloscope VIDEO mode. Programs 100% output (1 V p-p), line marker 10, format
NTSC. FUNC? returns VIDEO.
Examples:
SCOPE VIDEO; OUT 90
(Video, 90% output)
SCOPE VIDEO; OUT -70
(Video, -70% output, inverse video)
PULSE
Oscilloscope PULSE mode. Programs 100 ns pulse width, 1.000 μs period, 2.5 V
range. FUNC? returns PULSE.
Example:
SCOPE PULSE; OUT 50 ns, 500 ns; RANGE TP8DB
(Pulse, 50 ns pulse width, 500 ns period, 1.5 V range)
MEASZ
Oscilloscope Impedance/Capacitance measurement (MEAS Z) mode. Programs 50Ω
range. FUNC? returns MEASZ.
Example:
SCOPE MEASZ; RANGE TZCAP
(MEAS Z mode, capacitance range)
OVERLD
Oscilloscope Overload mode. Programs 5 V dc range. FUNC? returns OVERLD.
Example:
SCOPE OVERLD; OUT 7 V; RANGE TOLAC
(Overload, 7 V output, ac range)
SCOPE
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Programs the 5500A-SC600 oscilloscope calibration option hardware, if installed. The
instrument settings are determined by this command’s parameter. Once in SCOPE mode,
use the OUT command to program new output.
9-27
5522A
Operators Manual
OPER, STBY, *OPC, *OPC?, and *WAI all operate as described in Chapter 6. The state
of the oscilloscope’s output while in SCOPE mode is reflected by the bit in the ISR that
is assigned to SETTLED.
The FUNC? query returns SDCV, SACV, LEVSINE, MARKER, EDGE, and
WAVEGEN for the corresponding oscilloscope modes.
Parameters:
OFF
Turns the oscilloscope hardware off. Programs 0V,0 Hz,
output at the NORMAL terminals, standby.
VOLT
Oscilloscope’s ac and dc voltage mode. Programs 20 mV
peak-to-peak, 1 kHz, output at the
SCOPE BNC, output
impedance 1 MΩ, standby if from OFF or previously in
standby.
EDGE
Oscilloscope Edge mode. Programs 25 mV peak-to-peak, 1
MHz, output at the SCOPE BNC, standby if from OFF or
previously in standby.
LEVSINE Oscilloscope-leveled sine mode. Programs 30 mV peak-topeak, 50 kHz, output at the SCOPE BNC, standby if from OFF
or previously in standby.
MARKER
Oscilloscope Marker mode. Programs the period to 1 ms,
output at the SCOPE BNC, standby if from OFF or previously
in standby.
WAVEGEN Oscilloscope Wavegen mode. Programs 20 mV peak-to-peak,
square wave, 1 kHz, no offset, output impedance 1 MΩ,
standby if from OFF or previously in standby.
Example:
SCOPE VOLT;
OUT -2V, 0 Hz
(dc voltage, -2 V)
SCOPE VOLT;
OUT 4V, 1 kHz
(ac voltage, 4 V peak-topeak, 1 kHz.)
SCOPE EDGE;
OUT 0.5V, 5 kHz (Edge, 0.5 V peak to peak,
5 kHz.)
SCOPE LEVSINE; OUT 1V, 20 kHz
SCOPE MARKER;
OUT 2 MS
SCOPE WAVEGEN; OUT 1V, 1 kHz
9-28
(Leveled sine wave, 2 V
peak-to-peak, 20 kHz.)
(Marker, period of 2 ms.)
(Wave Generator, 1 V peakto-peak, 1 kHz.)
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Remote Commands and Queries
9
SCOPE?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the oscilloscope’s current mode of operation. Returns OFF if the oscilloscope is
off.
Parameters:
None
Response:
<character>
(Returns OFF, VOLT, EDGE, LEVSINE, MARKER, or
WAVEGEN.)
TRIG
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Programs the oscilloscope’s trigger output BNC.
Parameters:
OFF
(Turns the trigger output off.)
DIV1
(Turns the trigger output on. Frequency is the same as the
signal at SCOPE output.)
DIV10
(Turns the trigger output on. Frequency is 1/10 of the signal at
SCOPE output.)
DIV100
(Turns the trigger output on. Frequency is 1/100 of the signal
at SCOPE output.)
TRIG?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the output setting of the oscilloscope’s trigger.
Parameters:
(None)
Response:
<character>
(Returns OFF, DIV1, DIV10, or DIV100.)
OUT_IMP
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Programs the oscilloscope’s output impedance.
Parameters:
Z50
(Programs the oscilloscope’s output impedance to 50 Ω.)
Z1M
(Programs the oscilloscope’s output impedance to 1 MΩ.)
OUT_IMP?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the impedance setting of the oscilloscope’s output.
Parameters:
(None)
TRIG
Programs the instrument range in PULSE, MEAS Z, and OVERLD modes.
Parameters:
TP0DB
Sets the range to 2.5 V in pulse mode.
TP8DB
Sets the range to 1.0 V in pulse mode.
TP20DB
Sets the range to 250 mV in pulse mode.
TP28DB
Sets the range to 100 mV in pulse mode.
TZ50OHM
Sets the impedance to 50
in Meas Z mode.
9-29
5522A
Operators Manual
Example:
TZ1MOHM
Sets the impedance to 1 M
in Meas Z mode.
TZCAP
Sets the impedance to cap in Meas Z mode.
TOLDC
Sets the instrument to DC in Overload mode.
TOLAC
Sets the impedance to AC in Overload mode.
RANGE TP20DB
Edge Function Commands
TDPULSE
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Turns tunnel diode pulse drive on/off in EDGE mode.
Parameters:
ON (or non-zero) or OFF (or zero)
Example:
TDPULSE ON
Returns the tunnel diode pulse drive setting in EDGE mode.
Parameters:
None
Response:
1 if ON, 0 if OFF.
Marker Function Commands
TMWAVE
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Selects the waveform for MARKER mode.
Parameters:
SINE
Sine wave (2 ns to 15 ns)
SPIKE
Triangular/sawtooth pulse (15 ns to 5s)
SQUARE
Square wave (50% duty cycle) (4 ns to 5s)
SQ20PCT Square wave (20% duty cycle) (85 ns to 5s)
Example:
TMWAVE SPIKE
TMWAVE?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the MARKER mode waveform setting.
9-30
Parameters:
None
Response:
<character>
(Returns SINE, SPIKE, SQUARE, or SQ20PCT.)
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Remote Commands and Queries
9
Video Function Commands
VIDEOFMT
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Selects the format for VIDEO mode.
Parameters:
NTSC, PAL, PALM (for PAL-M), or SECAM
Example:
VIDEOFMT SECAM
VIDEOFMT?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the VIDEO mode format.
Parameters:
None
Response:
NTSC, PAL, PALM (for PAL-M), or SECAM
VIDEOMARK
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Programs the VIDEO mode line marker location.
Parameters:
Line marker number.
Example:
VIDEOMARK 10
VIDEOMARK?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the VIDEO mode line marker setting.
Parameters:
None.
Response:
<character> SINE, SPIKE, SQUARE or SQ20PCT
Overload Function Commands
OL_TRIP?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the detected state of scope overload protection.
Parameters:
None
Response:
Returns the number of seconds before protection was tripped. Returns 0 if
protection has not been tripped or if OVERLD mode not active.
TLIMIT
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Sets the OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal. The Calibrator
automatically returns to STANDBY if the UUT protection trips within this interval or at
the end of this interval if the protection has not tripped.
Parameters:
1 to 60 (seconds)
Example:
TLIMIT 30
9-31
5522A
Operators Manual
TLIMIT?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the programmed OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal.
Response:
<Integer> Time limit in seconds.
TLIMIT_D
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Sets the default OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal.
Parameters:
1 to 60 (seconds)
Example:
TLIMIT_D 15
TLIMIT_D?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the default overload time limit.
Response:
<Integer> Default time limit in seconds.
Impedance/Capacitance Function Commands
ZERO_MEAS
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Sets the measurement offset to the capacitance value.
Parameters:
(boolean) ON or OFF.
*TRG
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Triggers and returns a new impedance measurement value when used with the SC600
option in MEAS Z mode. (See Chapter 6 for *TRG use in all cases except MEAS Z mode
with the SC600 option.)
Responses:
Example:
<measurement value>, OHM
<measurement value>, F
<measurement value>, NONE
(input impedance value in ohms)
(input capacitance value in farads)
(no measurement is available)
*TRG returns 1.00E+03,OHM
(1 kΩ input impedance).
Note
You can also use the VAL? query to return an impedance measurement
value with the SC600 option. VAL? returns the last measurement, whereas
*TRG gets a new measurement. Responses are the same as shown above for
the *TRG command. (See Chapter 6 for VAL? use with thermocouple
measurements.)
9-32
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Verification Tables
The verification test points are provided here as a guide when verification to one-year
specifications is desired.
DC Voltage Verification
Table 9-2. SC600 Option DC Voltage Verification
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal Value (V dc)
Measured Value (V dc)
Deviation (V dc)
1-Year Spec. (V dc)
0
0.00004
0.00125
0.000040625
-0.00125
0.000040625
0.00249
0.000041245
-0.00249
0.000041245
0.0025
0.00004125
-0.0025
0.00004125
0.00625
0.000043125
-0.00625
0.000043125
0.0099
0.00004495
-0.0099
0.00004495
0.01
0.000045
-0.01
0.000045
0.0175
0.00004875
-0.0175
0.00004875
0.0249
0.00005245
-0.0249
0.00005245
0.025
0.0000525
-0.025
0.0000525
0.0675
0.00007375
-0.0675
0.00007375
0.1099
0.00009495
-0.1099
0.00009495
0.11
0.000095
-0.11
0.000095
0.305
0.0001925
-0.305
0.0001925
0.499
0.0002895
9-33
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 9-2. SC600 Option DC Voltage Verification (cont.)
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal Value (V dc)
Measured Value (V dc)
Deviation (V dc)
1-Year Spec. (V dc)
-0.499
0.0002895
0.5
0.00029
-0.5
0.00029
1.35
0.000715
-1.35
0.000715
2.19
0.001135
-2.19
0.001135
2.2
0.00114
-2.2
0.00114
6.6
0.00334
-6.6
0.00334
10.99
0.005535
-10.99
0.005535
11
0.00554
-11
0.00554
70.5
0.03529
-70.5
0.03529
130
0.06504
-130
0.06504
6.599 (50 Ω)
0.0165375
AC Voltage Amplitude Verification
Table 9-3. SC600 Option AC Voltage Amplitude Verification
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
9-34
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.001
1000
0.000041
-0.001
1000
0.000041
0.01
1000
0.00005
-0.01
1000
0.00005
0.025
1000
0.000065
-0.025
1000
0.000065
0.11
1000
0.00015
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Table 9-3. SC600 Option AC Voltage Amplitude Verification (cont.)
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-year Spec.
(V p-p)
-0.11
1000
0.00015
0.5
1000
0.00054
-0.5
1000
0.00054
2.2
1000
0.00224
-2.2
1000
0.00224
11
1000
0.01104
-11
1000
0.01104
130
1000
0.13004
-130
1000
0.13004
6.599 (50 Ω)
1000
0.0165375
AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Table 9-4. AC Voltage Frequency Verification
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(Hz)
Deviation
(Hz)
1-year Spec. (Hz)
2.1
10
0.000025
2.1
100
0.00025
2.1
1000
0.0025
2.1
10000
0.025
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 1 MΩ Output Impedance
Table 9-5. SC600 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification (1 M output impedance)
Wave Shape
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
(Hz)
Measured
Value (V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
square
0.0018
1000
0.000154
square
0.0119
1000
0.000457
square
0.0219
1000
0.000757
square
0.022
1000
0.00076
square
0.056
1000
0.00178
square
0.0899
1000
0.002797
square
0.09
1000
0.0028
square
0.155
1000
0.00475
9-35
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 9-5. SC600 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification (1 M output impedance) (cont.)
Wave Shape
9-36
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
(Hz)
Measured
Value (V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
square
0.219
1000
0.00667
square
0.22
1000
0.0067
square
0.56
1000
0.0169
square
0.899
1000
0.02707
square
0.9
1000
0.0271
square
3.75
1000
0.1126
square
6.59
1000
0.1978
square
6.6
1000
0.1981
square
30.8
1000
0.9241
square
55
10
1.6501
square
55
100
1.6501
square
55
1000
1.6501
square
55
10000
1.6501
sine
0.0018
1000
0.000154
sine
0.0219
1000
0.000757
sine
0.0899
1000
0.002797
sine
0.219
1000
0.00667
sine
0.899
1000
0.02707
sine
6.59
1000
0.1978
sine
55
1000
1.6501
triangle
0.0018
1000
0.000154
triangle
0.0219
1000
0.000757
triangle
0.0899
1000
0.002797
triangle
0.219
1000
0.00667
triangle
0.899
1000
0.02707
triangle
6.59
1000
0.1978
triangle
55
1000
1.6501
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 50 Ω Output Impedance
Table 9-6. SC600 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification (50  output impedance)
Wave Shape
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
(Hz)
Measured
Value (V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
square
0.0018
1000
0.000154
square
0.0064
1000
0.000292
square
0.0109
1000
0.000427
square
0.011
1000
0.00043
square
0.028
1000
0.00094
square
0.0449
1000
0.001447
square
0.045
1000
0.00145
square
0.078
1000
0.00244
square
0.109
1000
0.00337
square
0.11
1000
0.0034
square
0.28
1000
0.0085
square
0.449
1000
0.01357
square
0.45
1000
0.0136
square
0.78
1000
0.0235
square
1.09
1000
0.0328
square
1.1
1000
0.0331
square
1.8
1000
0.0541
square
2.5
10
0.0751
square
2.5
100
0.0751
square
2.5
1000
0.0751
square
2.5
10000
0.0751
sine
0.0018
1000
0.000154
sine
0.0109
1000
0.000427
sine
0.0449
1000
0.001447
sine
0.109
1000
0.00337
sine
0.449
1000
0.01357
sine
1.09
1000
0.0328
sine
2.5
1000
0.0751
triangle
0.0018
1000
0.000154
triangle
0.0109
1000
0.000427
triangle
0.0449
1000
0.001447
9-37
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 9-6. SC600 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification (50  output impedance) (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Wave Shape
Frequency
(Hz)
Measured
Value (V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
triangle
0.109
1000
0.00337
triangle
0.449
1000
0.01357
triangle
1.09
1000
0.0328
triangle
2.5
1000
0.0751
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Amplitude
Table 9-7. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Amplitude
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
9-38
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.005
50 kHz
0.0004
0.0075
50 kHz
0.00045
0.0099
50 kHz
0.000498
0.01
50 kHz
0.0005
0.025
50 kHz
0.0008
0.039
50 kHz
0.00108
0.04
50 kHz
0.0011
0.07
50 kHz
0.0017
0.099
50 kHz
0.00228
0.1
50 kHz
0.0023
0.25
50 kHz
0.0053
0.399
50 kHz
0.00828
0.4
50 kHz
0.0083
0.8
50 kHz
0.0163
1.2
50 kHz
0.0243
1.3
50 kHz
0.0263
3.4
50 kHz
0.0683
5.5
50 kHz
0.1103
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Frequency
Table 9-8. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Frequency
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(Hz)
Deviation (Hz)
1-Year Spec. (Hz)
5.5
50 kHz
0.125
5.5
500 kHz
1.25
5.5
5 MHz
12.5
5.5
50 MHz
125
5.5
500 MHz
1250
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Harmonics
Table 9-9. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Harmonics
Harmonic
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured
Value (dB)
Deviation
(dB)
1-Year Spec.
(dB)
2nd harmonic
0.0399
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
0.0399
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
0.099
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
0.099
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
0.399
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
0.399
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
1.2
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
1.2
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
100 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
100 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
200 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
200 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
400 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
400 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
800 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
800 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
1 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
1 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
2 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
2 MHz
-38
9-39
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 9-9. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Harmonics (cont.)
Harmonic
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured
Value (dB)
Deviation
(dB)
1-Year Spec.
(dB)
2nd harmonic
5.5
4 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
4 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
8 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
8 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
10 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
10 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
20 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
20 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
40 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
40 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
80 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
80 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
100 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
100 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
200 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
200 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
400 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
400 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
600 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
600 MHz
-38
Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
9-40
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
0.005
50 kHz
na
na
0.005
30 MHz
0.000175
0.005
70 MHz
0.000175
0.005
120 MHz
0.0002
0.005
290 MHz
0.0002
0.005
360 MHz
0.0003
0.005
390 MHz
0.0003
0.005
400 MHz
0.0003
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
0.005
480 MHz
0.0003
0.005
570 MHz
0.0003
0.005
580 MHz
0.0003
0.005
590 MHz
0.0003
0.005
600 MHz
0.0003
0.0075
50 kHz
0.0075
30 MHz
0.0002125
0.0075
70 MHz
0.0002125
0.0075
120 MHz
0.00025
0.0075
290 MHz
0.00025
0.0075
360 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
390 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
400 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
480 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
570 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
580 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
590 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
600 MHz
0.0004
0.0099
50 kHz
0.0099
30 MHz
0.0002485
0.0099
70 MHz
0.0002485
0.0099
120 MHz
0.000298
0.0099
290 MHz
0.000298
0.0099
360 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
390 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
400 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
480 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
570 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
580 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
590 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
600 MHz
0.000496
na
na
na
na
9-41
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
9-42
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
0.01
50 kHz
na
0.01
30 MHz
0.00025
0.01
70 MHz
0.00025
0.01
120 MHz
0.0003
0.01
290 MHz
0.0003
0.01
360 MHz
0.0005
0.01
390 MHz
0.0005
0.01
400 MHz
0.0005
0.01
480 MHz
0.0005
0.01
570 MHz
0.0005
0.01
580 MHz
0.0005
0.01
590 MHz
0.0005
0.01
600 MHz
0.0005
0.025
50 kHz
0.025
30 MHz
0.000475
0.025
70 MHz
0.000475
0.025
120 MHz
0.0006
0.025
290 MHz
0.0006
0.025
360 MHz
0.0011
0.025
390 MHz
0.0011
0.025
400 MHz
0.0011
0.025
480 MHz
0.0011
0.025
570 MHz
0.0011
0.025
580 MHz
0.0011
0.025
590 MHz
0.0011
0.025
600 MHz
0.0011
0.039
50 kHz
0.039
30 MHz
0.000685
0.039
70 MHz
0.000685
0.039
120 MHz
0.00088
0.039
290 MHz
0.00088
0.039
360 MHz
0.00166
na
na
na
na
na
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
0.039
390 MHz
0.00166
0.039
400 MHz
0.00166
0.039
480 MHz
0.00166
0.039
570 MHz
0.00166
0.039
580 MHz
0.00166
0.039
590 MHz
0.00166
0.039
600 MHz
0.00166
0.04
50 kHz
0.04
30 MHz
0.0007
0.04
70 MHz
0.0007
0.04
120 MHz
0.0009
0.04
290 MHz
0.0009
0.04
360 MHz
0.0017
0.04
390 MHz
0.0017
0.04
400 MHz
0.0017
0.04
480 MHz
0.0017
0.04
570 MHz
0.0017
0.04
580 MHz
0.0017
0.04
590 MHz
0.0017
0.04
600 MHz
0.0017
0.07
50 kHz
0.07
30 MHz
0.00115
0.07
70 MHz
0.00115
0.07
120 MHz
0.0015
0.07
290 MHz
0.0015
0.07
360 MHz
0.0029
0.07
390 MHz
0.0029
0.07
400 MHz
0.0029
0.07
480 MHz
0.0029
0.07
570 MHz
0.0029
0.07
580 MHz
0.0029
0.07
590 MHz
0.0029
na
na
na
na
9-43
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
9-44
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
0.07
600 MHz
0.0029
0.099
50 kHz
0.099
30 MHz
0.001585
0.099
70 MHz
0.001585
0.099
120 MHz
0.00208
0.099
290 MHz
0.00208
0.099
360 MHz
0.00406
0.099
390 MHz
0.00406
0.099
400 MHz
0.00406
0.099
480 MHz
0.00406
0.099
570 MHz
0.00406
0.099
580 MHz
0.00406
0.099
590 MHz
0.00406
0.099
600 MHz
0.00406
0.1
50 kHz
0.1
30 MHz
0.0016
0.1
70 MHz
0.0016
0.1
120 MHz
0.0021
0.1
290 MHz
0.0021
0.1
360 MHz
0.0041
0.1
390 MHz
0.0041
0.1
400 MHz
0.0041
0.1
480 MHz
0.0041
0.1
570 MHz
0.0041
0.1
580 MHz
0.0041
0.1
590 MHz
0.0041
0.1
600 MHz
0.0041
0.25
50 kHz
0.25
30 MHz
0.00385
0.25
70 MHz
0.00385
0.25
120 MHz
0.0051
0.25
290 MHz
0.0051
na
na
na
na
na
na
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
0.25
360 MHz
0.0101
0.25
390 MHz
0.0101
0.25
400 MHz
0.0101
0.25
480 MHz
0.0101
0.25
570 MHz
0.0101
0.25
580 MHz
0.0101
0.25
590 MHz
0.0101
0.25
600 MHz
0.0101
0.399
50 kHz
0.399
30 MHz
0.006085
0.399
70 MHz
0.006085
0.399
120 MHz
0.00808
0.399
290 MHz
0.00808
0.399
360 MHz
0.01606
0.399
390 MHz
0.01606
0.399
400 MHz
0.01606
0.399
480 MHz
0.01606
0.399
570 MHz
0.01606
0.399
580 MHz
0.01606
0.399
590 MHz
0.01606
0.399
600 MHz
0.01606
0.4
50 kHz
0.4
30 MHz
0.0061
0.4
70 MHz
0.0061
0.4
120 MHz
0.0081
0.4
290 MHz
0.0081
0.4
360 MHz
0.0161
0.4
390 MHz
0.0161
0.4
400 MHz
0.0161
0.4
480 MHz
0.0161
0.4
570 MHz
0.0161
0.4
580 MHz
0.0161
na
na
na
na
9-45
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
9-46
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
0.4
590 MHz
0.0161
0.4
600 MHz
0.0161
0.8
50 kHz
0.8
30 MHz
0.0121
0.8
70 MHz
0.0121
0.8
120 MHz
0.0161
0.8
290 MHz
0.0161
0.8
360 MHz
0.0321
0.8
390 MHz
0.0321
0.8
400 MHz
0.0321
0.8
480 MHz
0.0321
0.8
570 MHz
0.0321
0.8
580 MHz
0.0321
0.8
590 MHz
0.0321
0.8
600 MHz
0.0321
1.2
50 kHz
1.2
30 MHz
0.0181
1.2
70 MHz
0.0181
1.2
120 MHz
0.0241
1.2
290 MHz
0.0241
1.2
360 MHz
0.0481
1.2
390 MHz
0.0481
1.2
400 MHz
0.0481
1.2
480 MHz
0.0481
1.2
570 MHz
0.0481
1.2
580 MHz
0.0481
1.2
590 MHz
0.0481
1.2
600 MHz
0.0481
1.3
50 kHz
1.3
30 MHz
0.0196
1.3
70 MHz
0.0196
1.3
120 MHz
0.0261
na
na
na
na
na
na
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1.3
290 MHz
0.0261
1.3
360 MHz
0.0521
1.3
390 MHz
0.0521
1.3
400 MHz
0.0521
1.3
480 MHz
0.0521
1.3
570 MHz
0.0521
1.3
580 MHz
0.0521
1.3
590 MHz
0.0521
1.3
600 MHz
0.0521
3.4
50 kHz
3.4
30 MHz
0.0511
3.4
70 MHz
0.0511
3.4
120 MHz
0.0681
3.4
290 MHz
0.0681
3.4
360 MHz
0.1361
3.4
390 MHz
0.1361
3.4
400 MHz
0.1361
3.4
480 MHz
0.1361
3.4
570 MHz
0.1361
3.4
580 MHz
0.1361
3.4
590 MHz
0.1361
3.4
600 MHz
0.1361
5.5
50 kHz
5.5
30 MHz
0.0826
5.5
70 MHz
0.0826
5.5
120 MHz
0.1101
5.5
290 MHz
0.1101
5.5
360 MHz
0.2201
5.5
390 MHz
0.2201
5.5
400 MHz
0.2201
5.5
480 MHz
0.2201
5.5
570 MHz
0.2201
na
na
na
na
9-47
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 9-10. SC600 Option Leveled Sine Wave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
5.5
580 MHz
0.2201
5.5
590 MHz
0.2201
5.5
600 MHz
0.2201
Edge Verification: Amplitude
Table 9-11. SC600 Option Edge Verification: Amplitude
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
0.005
1 kHz
0.0003
0.005
10 kHz
0.0003
0.005
100 kHz
0.0003
0.01
100 kHz
0.0004
0.025
100 kHz
0.0007
0.05
100 kHz
0.0012
0.1
100 kHz
0.0022
0.25
100 kHz
0.0052
0.5
100 kHz
0.0102
1
100 kHz
0.0202
2.5
100 kHz
0.0502
2.5
10 kHz
0.0502
2.5
1 kHz
0.0502
Edge Verification: Frequency
Table 9-12. SC600 Option Edge Verification: Frequency
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
9-48
Frequency
Measured Value
(Hz)
Deviation (Hz)
1-Year Spec. (Hz)
2.5
1 kHz
0.0025
2.5
10 kHz
0.025
2.5
100 kHz
0.25
2.5
1 MHz
2.5
2.5
10 MHz
25
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Edge Verification: Duty Cycle
Table 9-13. SC600 Option Edge Verification: Duty Cycle
Nominal Value
Frequency
(V p-p)
2.5
Measured Value
(%)
Deviation
(from 50%)
1 MHz
1-Year Spec. (%)
5
Edge Verification: Rise Time
Table 9-14. SC600 Option Edge Verification: Rise Time
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(s)
Deviation (ns)
1-Year Spec.
(ns)
0.25
1 kHz
0.3 ns
0.25
100 kHz
0.3 ns
0.25
10 MHz
0.3 ns
0.5
1 kHz
0.3 ns
0.5
100 kHz
0.3 ns
0.5
10 MHz
0.3 ns
1
1 kHz
0.3 ns
1
100 kHz
0.3 ns
1
10 MHz
0.3 ns
2.5
1 kHz
0.3 ns
2.5
100 kHz
0.3 ns
2.5
10 MHz
0.3 ns
Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification
Table 9-15. SC600 Option Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-Year Spec. (V pp)
11
100
0.2202
11
10000
0.2202
55
100
1.1002
55
10000
1.1002
100
100
2.0002
100
10000
2.0002
9-49
5522A
Operators Manual
Marker Generator Verification
Table 9-16. SC600 Option Marker Generator Verification
Period (s)
Measured Value (s)
Deviation (s)
1-Year Spec. (s)
5
0.0251 s
2
0.00405 s
0.05
3.75E-06 s
0.02
5E-8
0.01
2.5E-8
1e-7
2.5E-13
5e-8
1.25E-13
2e-8
5E-14
1e-8
2.5E-14
5e-9
1.25E-14
2e-9
5E-15
Pulse Generator Verification: Period
Table 9-17. SC600 Option Pulse Generator Verification: Period
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Pulse Width
(s)
Period (s)
Measured
Value (s)
1-Year Spec.
(s)
Deviation (s)
2.5
8E-08
2E-06
5E-12
2.5
0.0000005
0.01
2.5E-08
2.5
0.0000005
0.02
5E-08
Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width
Table 9-18. SC600 Option Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
9-50
Pulse Width
(s)
Period (s)
Measured
Value (s)
Deviation (s)
1-Year Spec.
typical (s)
2.5
4.0E-09
2.0E-06
6.2E-9
2.5
4.0E-09
2.0E-05
6.2E-9
2.5
4.0E-09
2.0E-04
6.2E-9
2.5
4.0E-08
2.0E-03
4.4E-8
SC600 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
9
Input Impedance Verification: Resistance
Table 9-19. SC600 Option Input Impedance Verification: Resistance
Nominal Value (Ω)
Measured Value (Ω)
Deviation (Ω)
1-Year Spec. (Ω)
40
0.04
50
0.05
60
0.06
600000
600
1000000
1000
1500000
1500
Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance
Table 9-20. SC600 Option Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance
Nominal Value (pF)
Measured Value (pF)
Deviation (pF)
1-Year Spec. (pF)
5 pF
0.75 pF
29 pF
1.95 pF
49 pF
2.95 pF
9-51
5522A
Operators Manual
9-52
Chapter 10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
SC1100 Option Specifications.............................................................................
Oscilloscope Connections....................................................................................
How to Start the SC1100 Option .........................................................................
The Output Signal............................................................................................
How to Adjust the Output Signal ....................................................................
How to Key in a Value................................................................................
How to Adjust Values with the Rotary Knob .............................................
How to Use X and D .........................................................................
How to Reset the SC1100 Option....................................................................
How to Calibrate the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope .............................
The VOLT Function ........................................................................................
The V/DIV Menu ............................................................................................
Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration Procedure ..............................................
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope ..........
The Edge Function ..........................................................................................
Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure ......................................
Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser ..............................
The Leveled Sine Wave Function ...................................................................
Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage ............................................
The MORE OPTIONS Menu ..........................................................................
How to Sweep Through a Frequency Range ...................................................
Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure ..............................
How to Calibrate the Time Base of an Oscilloscope ...........................................
The Time Marker Function .............................................................................
Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope .......................
How to Test the Trigger functions of an oscilloscope .........................................
How to Test Video Triggers ................................................................................
How to Verify Pulse Capture...............................................................................
How to Measure Input Resistance and Capacitance ............................................
Input Impedance Measurement .......................................................................
Input Capacitance Measurement .....................................................................
How to Test Overload Protection ........................................................................
Remote Commands and Queries..........................................................................
General Commands .........................................................................................
Edge Function Commands ..............................................................................
Marker Function Commands ...........................................................................
Video Function Commands .............................................................................
Page
10-3
10-3
10-8
10-8
10-9
10-9
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-11
10-11
10-11
10-12
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-26
10-27
10-27
10-28
10-28
10-32
10-32
10-33
10-1
5522A
Operators Manual
Overload Function Commands........................................................................
Impedance/Capacitance Function Commands.................................................
Verification Tables ..............................................................................................
DC Voltage Verification..................................................................................
AC Voltage Verification..................................................................................
AC Voltage Frequency Verification................................................................
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 1 MΩ Output Impedance ..............
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 50 Ω Output Impedance................
Edge Verification: Amplitude .........................................................................
Edge Verification: Frequency..........................................................................
Edge Verification: Duty Cycle ........................................................................
Edge Verification: Rise Time ..........................................................................
Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification....................................................................
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Amplitude ....................................................
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Frequency ....................................................
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Harmonics....................................................
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness ........................................................
Marker Generator Verification ........................................................................
Pulse Generator Verification: Period...............................................................
Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width .....................................................
Input Impedance Verification: Resistance.......................................................
Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance ....................................................
10-2
10-33
10-34
10-35
10-35
10-37
10-38
10-39
10-40
10-41
10-42
10-42
10-42
10-43
10-43
10-44
10-44
10-46
10-53
10-54
10-54
10-55
10-55
Introduction
The 5520A-SC1100 Option (hereafter referred to as the SC1100) provides functions that
help you maintain your oscilloscope’s accuracy by verifying and calibrating the
following oscilloscope characteristics:
•
Vertical deflection characteristics are calibrated and verified. The VOLT function
lets you compare the voltage gain to the graticule lines on the oscilloscope.
•
Pulse transient response is checked and calibrated, verifying the accuracy of the
oscilloscope’s measurement of pulse transitions using the EDGE function. Also, the
calibrator supports even faster pulse response checks using an external tunnel diode
pulser.
•
Frequency response is checked by verifying the bandwidth using the Leveled Sine
Wave (LEVSINE) function. Vertical deflection is monitored until the -3 dB point is
observed on the oscilloscope.
•
Horizontal (time base) deflection characteristics are calibrated and verified using the
Time MARKER function. This calibration procedure is similar to the one for
verifying the vertical deflection characteristics, except that it checks the horizontal
axis.
•
The oscilloscope’s ability to display, capture, and measure pulse width is checked
using the PULSE function. This function allows you to vary both the pulse width and
the period.
•
The oscilloscope’s ability to trigger on different waveforms is checked using the
Wave Generator (WAVEGEN) function.
•
The oscilloscope’s ability to trigger on and capture complex TV Trigger signals is
checked using the VIDEO function.
•
The oscilloscope’s input characteristics can be measured using the Input Resistance
and Capacitance (MEAS Z) function.
•
The oscilloscope’s input protection circuit can be tested using the Overload
(OVERLD) function.
The menus that implement these functions also include parameters for altering the way
the output signal responds to voltage, frequency, and time settings, giving you control of
the signal during calibration, and providing more methods for observing the signal’s
characteristics.
SC1100 Option Specifications
These specifications apply only to the SC1100 Option. General specifications that apply
to the 5522A (the Calibrator) can be found in Chapter 1. The specifications are valid
under the following conditions:
•
The Calibrator is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1.
•
The Calibrator has completed a warm-up period of at least twice the length of time
the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes.
•
The SC1100 Option has been active longer than 5 minutes.
General Specifications
Warmup Time ........................................................ Twice the time since last warmed up, to a maximum of 30 minutes
Settling Time ......................................................... 5 seconds or faster for all functions and ranges
Temperature Performance
Operating ............................................................ 0 °C to 50 °C
10-3
5522A
Operators Manual
Calibration (tcal).................................................. 15 °C to 35 °C
Storage ............................................................... -20 °C to +70 °C
Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................ Designed to operate in Standard Laboratory environments where the
Electromagnetic environment is highly controlled. If used in areas with
Electromagnetic fields >1 V/m, there could be errors in output values.
All testing for this specification used new cables and connectors.
Temperature Coefficient....................................... Temperature Coefficient for temperatures outside tcal +5 °C is
10 % per °C of 1-year specification.
Relative Humidity
Operating ............................................................ <80 % to 30 °C, <70 % to 40 °C,<40 % to 50 °C
Storage ............................................................... <95 %, noncondensing
Altitude
Operating ............................................................ 3,050 m (10,000 ft) maximum
Nonoperating ...................................................... 12,200 m (40,000 ft) maximum
Safety ..................................................................... Designed to comply with IEC 1010-1 (1992-1); ANSI/ISA-S82.01-1994;
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92
Analog Low Isolation............................................ 20 V
EMC ........................................................................ Complies with EN 61326-1/1997, Class A
Volt Specifications
DC Signal
Volt Function
50 Ω Load
Square Wave Signal
1 MΩ Load
50 Ω Load
[1]
1 MΩ Load
Amplitude Characteristics
0 to ±6.6 V
Range
Resolution
0 to ±130 V
Range
Resolution
1 to 24.999 mV
1 μV
25 to 109.99 mV
10 μV
110 mV to 2.1999 V
100 μV
2.2 to 10.999 V
1 mV
11 to 130 V
10 mV
Adjustment Range
Continuously adjustable
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±
5 °C
±(0.25 % of
output + 40 μV)
±(0.05 % of
output + 40 μV)
Sequence
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ±
5 °C
Typical Aberration
within 4 μs from 50 % of
leading/trailing edge
±(0.25 % of
output + 40 μV)
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
Square Wave Frequency Characteristics
Range
10-4
±1 mV to
±6.6 V p-p
10 Hz to 10 kHz
±(2.5 ppm of setting)
<(0.5 % of output + 100 μV)
[1]
Selectable positive or negative, zero referenced square wave.
[2]
For square wave frequencies above 1 kHz, ±(0.25 % of output + 40 μV).
±1 mV to
±130 V p-p
±(0.1% of output +
[2]
40 μV)
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
General Specifications
Edge Specifications
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty,
tcal ± 5 °C
Edge Characteristics into 50 Ω Load
Rise Time
≤300 ps
(+0 ps / -100 ps)
Amplitude Range (p-p)
5.0 mV to 2.5 V
±(2 % of output + 200 μV)
Resolution
4 digits
n/a
Adjustment Range
±10 % around each sequence value
(indicated below)
n/a
Sequence Values
5 mV, 10 mV, 25 mV, 50 mV, 60 mV, 80
mV, 100 mV, 200 mV, 250 mV, 300 mV,
500 mV, 600 mV, 1 V, 2.5 V
n/a
Frequency Range
1 kHz to 10 MHz
Typical Jitter, edge to trigger
<5 ps (p-p)
n/a
within 2 ns from 50 % of rising edge
<(3 % of output + 2 mV)
Leading Edge Aberrations
[2]
[1]
±(2.5 ppm of setting)
2 to 5 ns
<(2 % of output + 2 mV)
5 to 15 ns
<(1 % of output + 2 mV)
after 15 ns
<(0.5 % of output + 2 mV)
Typical Duty Cycle
45 % to 55 %
n/a
Tunnel Diode Pulse Drive
Square wave at 100 Hz to 100 kHz, with variable amplitude of 60 V to 100 V p-p.
[1]
[2]
Above 2 MHz, the rise time specification is <350 ps.
All edge aberration measurements are made with a Tektronix 11801 mainframe with an SD26 input module.
Leveled Sine Wave Specifications
Leveled Sine Wave
Frequency Range
Characteristics
50 kHz (reference) 50 kHz to 100 MHz 100 to 300 MHz
into 50 Ω
300 to 600 MHz 600 to 1100 MHz
Amplitude Characteristics (for measuring oscilloscope bandwidth)
Range (p-p)
5 mV to 5.5 V
5 mV to 3.5 V
<100 mV: 3 digits
Resolution
≥100 mV: 4 digits
Adjustment
Range
continuously adjustable
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty,
tcal ± 5 °C
±(2 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(3.5 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(4 % of output
+ 300 μV)
±(6 % of
output
+ 300 μV)
±(7 % of output
+ 300 μV)
Flatness (relative
to 50 kHz)
not applicable
±(1.5 % of output
+ 100 μV)
±(2 % of output
+ 100 μV)
±(4 % of
output
+ 100 μV)
±(5 % of output
± 100 μV)
Short-Term
Amplitude
Stability
Frequency Characteristics
Resolution
1-Year Absolute
Uncertainty,
tcal ± 5 °C
[1]
≤1 %
10 kHz
100 kHz
±2.5 ppm
[2]
Distortion Characteristics
2nd Harmonic
≤-33 dBc
3rd and Higher
Harmonics
≤-38 dBc
[1]
[2]
Within one hour after reference amplitude setting, provided temperature varies no more than ±5 °C.
With REF CLK set to ext, the frequency uncertainty of the Leveled Sine Wave is the uncertainty of the external 10 MHz clock
±0.3 Hz/gate time.
10-5
5522A
Operators Manual
Time Marker Specifications
Time Marker into 50 Ω
5s to 50 ms
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty at
Cardinal Points, tcal ± 5 °C
±(25 + t x
[1]
1000 ppm
±2.5 ppm
Wave Shape
spike or
square
spike, square, or
20 %-pulse
Typical Output Level
>1 V p-p
Typical Jitter (rms)
<10 ppm
Sequence
5-2-1 from 5 s to 1 ns (e.g., 500 ms, 200 ms, 100 ms )
Adjustment Range
[3]
Amplitude Resolution
[2]
20 ms to 100 ns
>1 V p-p
[2]
<1 ppm
50 to 20 ns
10 ns
5 to 1 ns
±2.5 ppm
±2.5 ppm
±2.5 ppm
spike or square
square or
sine
sine
>1 V p-p
[2]
<1 ppm
>1 V p-p
<1 ppm
[2]
>1 V p-p
<1 ppm
At least ±10 % around each sequence value indicated above.
4 digits
[1]
[2]
t is the time in seconds.
Typical rise time of square wave and 20 %-pulse (20 % duty cycle pulse) is <1.5 ns.
[3]
Time marker uncertainty is ±50 ppm away from the cardinal points.
Wave Generator Specifications
Wave Generator Characteristics
Square Wave, Sine Wave, and Triangle Wave into 50 Ω or 1 MΩ
Amplitude
Range
into 1 MΩ: 1.8 mV to 55 V p-p
into 50 Ω: 1.8 mV to 2.5 V p-p
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal
±5 °C, 10 Hz to 10 kHz
±(3 % of p-p output + 100 µV)
Sequence
1-2-5 (e.g., 10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV)
Typical DC Offset Range
0 to ± (≥40 % of p-p amplitude)
[1]
Frequency
Range
10 Hz to 100 kHz
Resolution
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty, tcal ± 5 °C
±(25 ppm + 15 mHz)
[1]
10-6
The dc offset plus the wave signal must not exceed 30 V rms.
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
General Specifications
Pulse Generator Specifications
Positive pulse into 50 Ω
Pulse Generator Characteristics
Typical rise/fall times
<1.5 ns
Available Amplitudes
2.5 V, 1 V, 250 mV, 100 mV, 25 mV, 10 mV
Pulse Width
Range
4 to 500 ns
Uncertainty (typical)
5 % ±2 ns
[1]
Pulse Period
Range
20 ms to 200 ns (50 Hz to 5 MHz)
Resolution
4 or 5 digits depending upon frequency and width
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty at Cardinal Points, tcal
± 5 °C
±2.5 ppm
[1]
Pulse width not to exceed 40 % of period.
[2]
Pulse width uncertainties for periods below 2 μs are not specified.
Trigger Signal Specifications (Pulse Function)
Pulse Period
Division Ratio
Amplitude into 50 Ω (p-p)
Typical Rise Time
off/1/10/100
≥1V
≤2 ns
20 ms to 150 ns
Trigger Signal Specifications (Time Marker Function)
Time Marker Period
Division Ratio
Amplitude into 50 Ω (p-p)
Typical Rise Time
off/1
≥1 V
≤2 ns
off/1/10/100
≥1 V
≤2 ns
off/10/100
≥1 V
≤2 ns
off/100
≥1 V
≤2 ns
5 s to 35 ms
34.9 ms to 750 ns
749 to 7.5 ns
7.4 to 2 ns
Trigger Signal Specifications (Edge Function)
Edge Signal
Frequency
Division Ratio
1 kHz to 10 MHz
Typical Amplitude into 50 Ω
Typical Rise Time
(p-p)
≥1 V
off/1
Typical Lead Time
≤2 ns
40 ns
Trigger Signal Specifications (Square Wave Voltage Function)
Voltage Function
Frequency
Division Ratio
Typical Amplitude into 50
Ω (p-p)
Typical Rise Time
Typical Lead
Time
off/1
≥1 V
≤2 ns
2 μs
10 Hz to 10 kHz
TV Trigger Signal Specifications
Trigger Signal Type
Field Formats
Parameters
Selectable NTSC, SECAM, PAL, PAL-M
Polarity
Selectable inverted or uninverted video
Amplitude into 50 Ω (p-p)
Adjustable 0 to 1.5 V p-p into 50 ohm load, (±7 % accuracy)
Line Marker
Selectable Line Video Marker
Oscilloscope Input Resistance Measurement Specifications
Scope input selected
Measurement Range
Uncertainty
50 Ω
1 MΩ
40 to 60 Ω
500 kΩ to 1.5 MΩ
0.1 %
0.1 %
10-7
5522A
Operators Manual
Oscilloscope Input Capacitance Measurement Specifications
Scope input selected
1 MΩ
Measurement Range
5 to 50 pF
±(5 % of input + 0.5 pF)
Uncertainty
[1]
[1]
Measurement made within 30 minutes of capacitance zero reference. Scope option must be selected for at least five minutes prior
to any capacitance measurement, including the zero process.
Overload Measurement Specifications
Source Voltage
Typical ‘On’ current
indication
Typical ‘Off’ current indication
Maximum Time Limit DC or AC
(1 kHz)
5 to 9 V
100 to 180 mA
10 mA
setable 1 to 60 s
Oscilloscope Connections
Using the cable supplied with the SC1100 Option, connect the SCOPE output on the
Calibrator to one of the channel connectors on your oscilloscope (see Figure 10-1).
To use the external trigger, connect the TRIG OUT output on the Calibrator to the
external trigger connection on your oscilloscope. To use the external trigger and view its
signal with the calibration signal, connect the TRIG OUT output to another channel. See
your oscilloscope manual for details on connecting and viewing an external trigger.
5522A CALIBRATOR
Figure 10-1. Oscilloscope Connection: Channel and External Trigger
gjh036.eps
How to Start the SC1100 Option
Press a (LED lit) to select the SC1100 Option. The SCOPE menu, shown below,
appears in the Control Display. You can press any of the first four softkeys to go directly
to the VOLT, EDGE, LEVSINE, and MARKER calibration menus. Press the last softkey
to go to the OTHER menu (also shown below), allowing access to WAVEGEN, VIDEO,
PULSE, Impedance/Capacitance measurement (MEAS Z), and Overload (OVERLD)
menus. Press P to return to the SCOPE menu from the OTHER menu. This manual
describes each of these menus in detail.
10-8
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Start the SC1100 Option
gjh050.eps
The Output Signal
The following description assumes that you have selected VOLT mode from the SCOPE
menu. The Control Displays appears as follows with VOLT mode selected:
gjh051.eps
The location of the output signal is indicated on the Control Display (the display on the
right side). If your Calibrator is connected, but the output does not appear on the
oscilloscope, you may have the Calibrator in standby mode. The settings for the output
signal are indicated in the Output Display (the display on the left side).
If STBY is displayed, press the O key. The Output Display will show OPR and the
output should appear on the oscilloscope.
How to Adjust the Output Signal
The Calibrator provides several ways to change the settings for the output signal during
calibration. Since oscilloscope calibration requires many adjustments of the output signal,
the three available methods for changing these settings for oscilloscope calibration are
summarized below. These methods provide the means of jumping to a new value or
sweeping through a range of values.
How to Key in a Value
The following example is for use in the LEVSINE mode. To key a specific value directly
into the Calibrator from its front panel:
1. Key in the value you want to enter, including the units and prefixes. For example to
enter 120 mV press 1 2 0 c V. The Control Display will
show:
gl002i.eps
10-9
5522A
Operators Manual
Note
Units and prefixes printed in red in the upper left corner of the keys are
accessed through the b key. For example, to enter 200 μs, press
2 0 0 b c b H.
If you make an error, press G to clear the Control Display and return to the menu.
2. Press E to activate the value and move it to the Output Display.
Other settings in the display will remain unaltered unless you key in an entry and
specify the units for that setting.
How to Adjust Values with the Rotary Knob
To adjust values in the Output Display using the rotary knob:
1. Turn the rotary knob. A cursor appears in the Output Display under the lowest digit
and begins changing that digit. If you wish to place the cursor in the field without
changing the digit, press e.
gl003i.eps
2. To move the cursor between the voltage and frequency fields, press e.
gl004i.eps
3. Use the L and W keys to move the cursor to the digit you want to change.
4. Turn the rotary knob to change the value.
When you use the rotary knob in either VOLT mode or MARKER mode, the Control
Display shows the new value’s percentage change from the reference value. This is
useful for determining the percentage of error on the oscilloscope. You can set the
reference value to the new value by pressing N.
gl005i.eps
3. Press E to remove the cursor from the Output Display and save the new value
as the reference value.
Note
If you attempt to use the rotary knob to adjust a value to an amount that is
invalid for the function you are using, or is outside the value’s range limit,
the value will not change and the Calibrator will beep.
10-10
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope
How to Use X and D
The X and D keys cause the current value of the signal to jump to a pre-determined
cardinal value, whose amount is determined by the current function. These keys are
described in more detail under the descriptions for each function.
How to Reset the SC1100 Option
You can reset all parameters in the Calibrator to their default settings at any time during
front panel operations by pressing the R key on the front panel.
After resetting the Calibrator, press a to return to the SC1100 Option (the SCOPE
menu appears.) Press O to reconnect the signal output.
How to Calibrate the Voltage Amplitude on an Oscilloscope
The oscilloscope voltage (vertical) gain is calibrated by applying a dc or low frequency
square wave signal and adjusting its gain to meet the height specified for different voltage
levels, as designated by the graticule line divisions on the oscilloscope. The signal is
applied from the Calibrator in VOLT mode. The specific voltages that you should use for
calibration, and the graticule line divisions that need to be matched, vary for different
oscilloscopes and are specified in your oscilloscope’s service manual.
The VOLT Function
You can calibrate the Voltage gain using the VOLT function. Access this function
through the VOLT menu, which appears when you press a, or when you press the
VOLT softkey from the SCOPE menu.
gjh052.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press to return directly to the SCOPE menu.
Each menu item is described below:
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output. If the signal does
not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the signal, press Y.
•
1 MΩ Toggles between 1 MΩ and 50 Ω to match the input impedance of the
oscilloscope.
•
DC<-AC Toggles from ac to dc, producing the dc equivalent output. DC->AC
Toggles from dc to ac.
•
TRIG If you are using square wave to calibrate the external trigger, use this key to
toggle the trigger off and on. When on, the reading will show “/1”, which indicates
that the external trigger is at the same frequency as the volt output. The external
10-11
5522A
Operators Manual
trigger can be useful for many oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on low
amplitude signals.
•
V/DIV MENU Opens the voltage scaling menu, which lets you select the scale of
the signal in volts per division. This menu is described below in detail, under “The
V/DIV Menu.”
•
MODE Indicates you are in VOLT mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
The V/DIV Menu
The V/DIV menu, shown below, sets the number of volts denoted by each division on the
oscilloscope. This menu provides alternative methods for changing the output amplitude
that may be more convenient for certain oscilloscope applications. To access the V/DIV
menu, press V/DIV from the VOLT menu.
gjh053.eps
Each item in the V/DIV menu is described below:
•
V/div Changes the number of volts per division in the Output Display so that the
values selected correspond to the oscilloscope’s input sensitivity (VOLTS/DIV.) The
available settings, shown in the figure above, are provided in 1-2-5 step increments.
Press the softkey under UP to increase the volts per division. Press the softkey under
DOWN to decrease the volts per division.
•
#DIV Specifies the number of divisions that establish the peak-to-peak value of the
waveform. The value can be adjusted from one to eight divisions. The amount
denoted by each division is displayed in the V/div field. Press the softkey under UP
to increase the signal’s height, and press the softkey under DOWN to decrease it.
Shortcuts to Set the Voltage Amplitude
The X and D keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an
oscilloscope in a 1-2-5 step sequence. For example, if the voltage is 40 mV, pressing
X increases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point, which is 50 mV. Pressing D
decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point, which is 20 mV.
Oscilloscope Amplitude Calibration Procedure
The following example describes how to use the VOLT menu to calibrate the
oscilloscope’s amplitude gain. During calibration, you will need to set different voltages
and verify that the gain matches the graticule lines on the oscilloscope according to the
specifications for your particular oscilloscope. See your oscilloscope manual for the
recommended calibration settings and appropriate gain values.
10-12
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope
Before you start this procedure, verify that you are running the SC1100 Option in VOLT
mode. If you are, the Control Display shows the following menu.
gjh054.eps
Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the vertical gain:
1. Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope, making sure the oscilloscope
is terminated at the proper impedance (1 MΩ for this example). Verify that the O
key on the Calibrator is lit, indicating that the signal is connected.
2. Key in the voltage level that is recommended for your oscilloscope. For example to
enter 30 mV, press 3 0 c V, then press E. See “Keying in a
Value” earlier in this manual.
3. Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary. The waveform should be similar to the one
shown below, with the gain at exactly the amount specified for the calibration
settings for your oscilloscope. This example shows the gain at 30 mV to be
6 divisions, at 5 mV per division.
gl006i.eps
4. Change the voltage to the next value recommended for calibrating your oscilloscope
model, and repeat this procedure at the new voltage level, verifying the gain is
correct according to the specifications in your manual.
5. Repeat the procedure for each channel.
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an
Oscilloscope
The pulse response is calibrated with a square-wave signal that has a fast leading edge
rise-time. Using this signal, you adjust the oscilloscope as necessary until it meets its
particular specifications for rise time and pulse aberrations.
Following pulse verification, the frequency response is checked by applying a leveled
sine wave and acquiring a frequency reading at the -3 dB point, when the amplitude drops
approximately 30 %.
10-13
5522A
Operators Manual
The Edge Function
The EDGE function is used for calibrating the pulse response for your oscilloscope. To
reach the EDGE menu, press the softkey under MODE until “edge” appears.
gjh055.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the SCOPE menu.
Each option in the EDGE menu is described below:
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE terminal (50Ω) Indicates the location and impedance of the
signal output. If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To
disconnect the signal, press Y.
You cannot change the output impedance in EDGE mode.
•
TD PULSE Press once to turn the Tunnel Diode Pulser drive signal on, again to turn
the Pulser drive off. This signal sources up to 100 V p-p to drive a Tunnel Diode
Pulser (Fluke Part Number 606522, Tektronix 067-0681-01, or equivalent.)
•
TRIG If you are using the external trigger, use this key to toggle the trigger off and
on. When on, the reading will show “/1” which indicates that the external trigger is at
the same frequency as the edge output. The external trigger can be useful for many
oscilloscopes that have difficulty triggering on low amplitude signals.
•
MODE Indicates you are in EDGE mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
Oscilloscope Pulse Response Calibration Procedure
This sample procedure shows how to check the oscilloscope’s pulse response. Before you
check your oscilloscope, see your oscilloscope’s manual for the recommended calibration
settings.
Before you start this procedure, verify that you are running the SC1100 Option in EDGE
mode. If you are, the Control Display shows the following menu.
gjh067.eps
Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the pulse response:
10-14
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope
1. Connect the Calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope. Select 50 Ω impedance or
use a 50 Ω termination directly at the oscilloscope input. Verify that the O key is
lit, indicating that the signal is connected.
2. Alter the voltage setting for the signal so it matches the amplitude value
recommended by your oscilloscope manufacturer for calibrating the edge response.
The default setting is 25.00 mV p-p, 1.0000 MHz.
For example, on an HP 54522C oscilloscope, start with a signal of 1 V @ 1 MHz.
3. Adjust the scale on your oscilloscope to achieve a good picture of the edge.
4. Adjust the time base on your oscilloscope to the fastest position available (20.0 or
50.0 ns/div).
Pulse aberrations
gl007i.eps
5. Verify that your oscilloscope exhibits the proper rise time and pulse aberration
characteristics.
6. Remove the input signal by pressing Y.
Pulse Response Calibration Using a Tunnel Diode Pulser
You can use the calibrator to drive a tunnel diode pulser (Fluke Part Number 606522, or
Tektronix 067-0681-01, or equivalent), allowing you to check for pulse edge rise times as
fast as 125 ps.
The calibrator sources a maximum pulser drive signal of 100 V p-p at 100 kHz. The
recommended (and default) output setting is 80 V p-p at 100 kHz.
Perform the following procedure to use a tunnel diode pulser:
1. Connect the calibrator, tunnel diode pulser, and oscilloscope as shown in Figure 10-2.
2. With the SC1100 Option in EDGE mode, press the TDPULSE softkey to “on”.
3. Press O.
4. Rotate the control on the pulser box to the minimum setting necessary to trigger a
reading.
10-15
5522A
Operators Manual
5522A CALIBRATOR
Figure 10-2. Tunnel Diode Pulser Connections
gjh037.eps
The Leveled Sine Wave Function
The Leveled Sine Wave (LEVSINE) function uses a leveled sine wave, whose amplitude
remains relatively constant over a range of frequencies, to check the oscilloscope’s
bandwidth. When you check your oscilloscope, you change the wave’s frequency until
the amplitude displayed on the oscilloscope drops 30 %, which is the amplitude that
corresponds to the -3 dB point. Default values are 30 mV p-p, 50 kHz.
To access the LEVSINE menu, press the softkey under MODE until “levsine” appears.
gjh056.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the SCOPE menu.
Each option in the LEVSINE menu is described below:
10-16
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE terminal (50Ω) Indicates the location and impedance of the
signal output. If the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To
disconnect the signal, press Y. You cannot change the impedance while you are in
LEVSINE mode.
•
MORE OPTIONS Opens additional menu items, which are described in detail
under “The MORE OPTIONS Menu.”
•
SET TO LAST F Toggles between the current frequency setting and the reference
value of 50 kHz. This option is useful for reverting to the reference to check the
output after you make adjustments at another frequency.
•
MODE Indicates you are in LEVSINE mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open menus for other calibration modes.
Shortcuts for Setting the Frequency and Voltage
The following three options are available for controlling the sine wave settings:
•
SET TO LAST F toggles between the last frequency used and the reference
frequency of 50 kHz, letting you check the output at the reference after you make
adjustments at a different frequency.
•
MORE OPTIONS lets you use an automatic frequency sweep and lock the voltage
range, if necessary. The following section provides details on this menu.
•
The X and D keys step frequencies up or down in amounts that let you quickly
access a new set of frequencies. For example, if the value is 250 kHz, X changes
it to 300 kHz, and D changes it to 200 kHz. For voltage values, X and D
step through cardinal point values in a 1.2-3-6 sequence.
The MORE OPTIONS Menu
When you select MORE OPTIONS, you open options that give you more control over
the frequency and voltage. To access the MORE OPTIONS menu, press the softkey
under MORE OPTIONS in the LEVSINE menu.
gjh057.eps
Each option in the MORE OPTIONS menu is described below:
•
FREQ CHG Toggles between two settings that control the way the output signal
adjusts to a new frequency. “Jump” is the default setting.
“Jump” causes the output signal to jump immediately to a new frequency setting.
“Sweep” causes the signal to sweep through a series of frequency values, over a
range you set. Use the sweep function to watch the signal gradually change over a
given bandwidth and see the point at which its amplitude changes. Details for using
10-17
5522A
Operators Manual
the sweep function are provided under “Sweeping Through a Frequency Range.”
•
RATE Used when FREQ CHANGE is set to “sweep” to select a sweep speed of
100 kHz, 1 MHz, or 10 MHz.
A slower sweep rate lets you watch the frequency change very slowly. After a faster
sweep, you may want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slower sweep over a
subset of your previous frequency range.
•
RANGE The softkeys toggle between two settings. The first setting (“auto”)
changes the range limit automatically in accordance with the voltage level. The
second setting (“locked”) freezes the present range limit; subsequent changes in
voltage level are then measured with this range limit.
There are six range limits in LEVSINE mode: 10 mV, 40 mV, 100 mV, 400 mV,
1.3 V, and 5.5 V (note: 3.5 V maximum above 600 MHz). When set to “auto” the
calibrator uses your voltage setting to automatically set the range limit that provides
the most accurate output.
When set to “locked” the range limit remains fixed and you can decrease the voltage
down to the bottom of the range.
For example, assume the range limit is 40 mV. If you enter 5 mV with “auto”
selected, the calibrator will automatically change the range limit to 10 mV and output
5 mV from within the 10 mV range. However, if you start with the 40 mV range
“locked” and then enter 5 mV, the calibrator will output 5 mV from within the 40 mV
range.
The default range setting is “auto,” which should always be used unless you are
troubleshooting discontinuities in your oscilloscope’s vertical gain. The range setting
will always return to “auto” after you leave LEVSINE mode.
•
MODE Indicates you are in LEVSINE mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open menus for other calibration modes.
How to Sweep Through a Frequency Range
When you change frequencies using the sweep method, the output sine wave sweeps
through a specified range of frequencies. This feature lets you identify the frequency at
which the oscilloscope’s signal exhibits certain behavior; you can quickly see the
frequency response of the oscilloscope. Before you start this procedure, make sure you
are in the MORE OPTIONS menu and the sine wave is displayed on the oscilloscope.
Perform the following procedure to sweep through frequencies:
1. Make sure the output signal shows the starting frequency. If not, key in the starting
frequency; then press E.
2. Toggle FREQ CHANGE to “sweep.” Toggle the RATE to a lower frequency if you
want to observe a very slow sweep over a small range.
3. Key in the end frequency; then press E. After you press E, the signal
sweeps through frequencies between the two values you entered, and the Sweep
menu (“Sweeping from previous to displayed frequency”) appears on the Control
Display.
4. You can let the signal sweep through the entire range, or you can halt the sweep if
you need to record the frequency at a certain point.
To interrupt the sweep, press the softkey under HALT SWEEP. The current
frequency will appear on the Output Display and the MORE OPTIONS menu will
reappear on the Control Display.
10-18
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Pulse and Frequency Response on an Oscilloscope
Note
When you interrupt the frequency sweep by pressing HALT SWEEP, the
FREQ CHANGE method switches back to “jump.”
5. Repeat the procedure if necessary. For example, if you did a fast sweep, you may
want to pinpoint a certain frequency with a slow sweep over a subset of your
previous frequency range.
Oscilloscope Frequency Response Calibration Procedure
This sample procedure, which verifies the frequency response on your oscilloscope, is
usually performed after the pulse response is verified.
This procedure checks the bandwidth by finding the frequency at the -3 dB point for your
oscilloscope. The reference sine wave in this procedure has an amplitude of 6 divisions,
so that the -3 dB point can be found when the amplitude drops to 4.2 divisions.
Before you start this example procedure, verify that you are running the SC1100 Option
in LEVSINE mode. If you are, the Control Display shows the following menu.
gjh058.eps
Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the frequency response:
1. Reconnect the signal by pressing the O key on the Calibrator. Select 50 Ω
impedance or use a 50 Ω external termination directly at the oscilloscope input.
2. Adjust the sine wave settings in the Output Display according to the calibration
recommendations in your oscilloscope manual. For example, for the HP 54522C
oscilloscope, start at 600 mV @ 1 MHz. To enter 600 mV, press
6 0 0 c V; then press E.
3. Adjust the oscilloscope as necessary. The sine wave should appear at exactly six
divisions, peak-to-peak, as shown below.
If necessary, make small adjustments to the voltage amplitude until the wave reaches
exactly six divisions. To fine-tune the voltage, press e to bring a cursor into the
Output Display, move the cursor with the L key, and turn the rotary knob to
adjust the value. (See “Adjusting Values with the Rotary Knob” earlier in this
manual.)
10-19
5522A
Operators Manual
gl009i.bmp
4. Increase the frequency to 400 MHz (for 400-MHz instruments), or 500 MHz (for
500-MHz instruments). To enter 400 MHz, press 4 0 0 M H; then
press E.
5. Continue to increase the frequency slowly until the waveform decreases to 4.2
divisions, as shown below.
To increase the frequency slowly, fine-tune it using the rotary knob. To do this, press
e to place a cursor in the Output Display. Press e again to place it in the
frequency field, and use the L and W keys to move it to the digit you want to
change. Then change the value by turning the rotary knob. Continue making small
increments in the frequency until the signal drops to 4.2 divisions. At 4.2 divisions,
the signal is at the frequency that corresponds to the -3 dB point.
gl010i.bmp
6. Remove the input signal by pressing Y.
7. Repeat this procedure for the remaining channels on your oscilloscope.
How to Calibrate the Time Base of an Oscilloscope
The horizontal deflection (time base) of an oscilloscope is calibrated using a method
similar to the vertical gain calibration. A time marker signal is generated from the
Calibrator and the signal’s peaks are matched to the graticule line divisions on the
oscilloscope.
10-20
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Calibrate the Time Base of an Oscilloscope
The Time Marker Function
The Time MARKER function, which is available through the MARKER menu, lets you
calibrate the timing response of your oscilloscope. To access the MARKER menu, press
the softkey under MODE until “marker” appears.
gjh059.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press Pto return directly to the SCOPE menu.
Each option in the MARKER menu is described below:
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE terminal (50Ω) Indicates the location of the signal output. If
the signal does not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the signal,
press Y.
•
SHAPE Indicates the type of waveform. Depending on frequency setting, possible
selections are sine, spike, square (50 % duty cycle square wave), and sq20 % (20 %
duty cycle square wave.) Note that selections available under SHAPE depend on the
selected marker period (frequency), as follows:
Selection
Period (Frequency)
sine
10 ns - 1 ns (100 MHz – 1 GHz)
spike
5s - 20 ns (0.2 Hz - 50 MHz)
square
5s - 10 ns (0.2 Hz - 100 MHz)
sq20 %
20 ms - 100 ns (50 kHz - 10 MHz)
•
TRIG If you are using the external trigger, use this key to cycle through the trigger
settings. The available trigger settings are: off, /1 (trigger signal appears on each
marker), /10 (trigger signal appears on every tenth marker), and /100 (trigger signal
appears at every 100th marker).
•
MODE Indicates you are in MARKER mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default marker values are 1.000 ms, SHAPE = spike.
The X and D keys step the voltages through cardinal point values of an
oscilloscope in a 1-2-5 step sequence. For example, if the period is 1.000 ms, pressing
X increases the period to the nearest cardinal point, which is 2.000 ms. Pressing D
decreases the voltage to the nearest cardinal point, which is 500 μs.
10-21
5522A
Operators Manual
Time Base Marker Calibration Procedure for an Oscilloscope
This sample procedure uses the Time MARKER function to check the horizontal
deflection (time base) of your oscilloscope. See your oscilloscope’s manual for the exact
time base values recommended for calibration.
Before you begin this procedure, verify that you are in MARKER mode. If you are, the
Control Display shows the following menu.
gjh060.eps
Perform the following sample procedure to calibrate the time base:
1. Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope. Select 50 Ω impedance or
use an external 50 Ω termination. Make sure the oscilloscope is dc-coupled.
2. Apply a time marker value according to the recommended calibration settings in your
oscilloscope manual. For example, to enter 200 ns, press 2 0 0 b K
b H, then press E.
Note
You may enter the equivalent frequency instead of the time marker value.
For example, instead of entering 200 ns, you may enter 5 MHz.
3. Set your oscilloscope’s time base to show 10 time markers. The time markers should
align with the oscilloscope divisions, as shown in the example below.
For an accurate reading, align the signal’s peaks with the horizontal center axis.
Peaks are aligned
with center axis
gl011i.eps
4. Repeat this procedure for all time marker values recommended for your oscilloscope.
Repeat for digital and analog mode as required. Some oscilloscopes may need the
magnification changed while calibrating in analog mode.
5. Remove the signal by pressing Y.
10-22
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Test the Trigger functions of an oscilloscope
How to Test the Trigger functions of an oscilloscope
The oscilloscope’s ability to trigger on different waveforms can be tested using the wave
generator. When the wave generator is used, a square, sine, or triangle wave is
transmitted and the wave’s output impedance, offset, and voltage can be varied in order
to test the triggering capability at different levels.
Note
The wave generator should not be used for checking the accuracy of your
oscilloscope.
The wave generator is available through the WAVEGEN menu, shown below. To access
this menu, press the softkey under MODE until “wavegen” appears.
gjh061.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press Pto return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the WAVEGEN menu is described below:
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output. If the signal does
not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the signal, press Y.
•
WAVE Scrolls through the three types of waveforms that are available. You can
select a square, sine, or triangle wave as the output.
•
SCOPE Z Toggles the calibrator’s output impedance setting between 50 Ω and
1 MΩ.
•
OFFSET Displays the offset of the generated wave. To change the offset, key in the
new value, and press E. Using the rotary knob does not change the offset; it
changes the actual voltage output.
When you change the offset, you must remain within certain limits to avoid clipping
the peaks. The limit depends on the wave’s peak-to-peak value. Specifically, the peak
excursion equals the absolute value of the offset plus half of the wave’s peak-to-peak
value. See “Wave Generator Specifications” at the beginning of this manual.
•
MODE Indicates you are in WAVEGEN mode. Use the softkey to change modes
and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default Wavegen settings are 20 mV p-p, 1000.0 Hz, WAVE = square, and
offset = 0.0 V.
10-23
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Test Video Triggers
gjh062.eps
The video mode generates video signals in various formats. The mode is used to test the
video trigger capability of an oscilloscope. You can press the MODE softkey to cycle
through the functions in the order shown, or you can press P to return directly to the
OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the VIDEO menu is described below:
•
Output @ SCOPE terminal (50Ω) Indicates the location of the signal output. If the
signal does not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the signal,
press Y.
•
LINE MK Allows you to select the marker line number. For ntsc and pal-m
formats, you can also select field (“odd” or “even”). For pal and secam formats, the
field (“ODD” or “EVEN”) is selected automatically based on marker line number.
•
FORMAT Scrolls through the available formats. You can select ntsc, pal, pal-m,
and secam.
•
MODE Indicates the calibrator is in VIDEO mode. Use the softkey to change modes
and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default video settings are + 100 %, format = NTSC, and videomark = 10.
10-24
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Verify Pulse Capture
How to Verify Pulse Capture
gjh063.eps
The pulse mode is a general-purpose pulse generator with pulse widths from 4 ns to 500
ns. It can be used to check many of the advanced trigger functions of an oscilloscope,
such as pulse capture. You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in
the order shown, or you can press P to return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the PULSE menu is described below:
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE Indicates the location of the signal output. If the signal does
not appear on the oscilloscope, press O. To disconnect the signal, press Y.
•
AMPL Indicates the output level. You can select 2.5 V, 1.0 V, 250 mV, 100 mV,
25 mV, or 10 mV.
•
TRIG If you are using the external trigger, use this key to cycle through the trigger
settings. The available trigger settings are: off, /1 (trigger signal appears on each
marker), /10 (trigger signal appears on every tenth marker), and /100 (trigger signal
appears at every 100th marker).
•
MODE Indicates you are in PULSE mode. Use the softkey to change modes and
open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default Pulse settings are 100.0 ns width and 1.000 ms period. To change these values,
you have several options. Usually, you will enter values for both pulse width and period.
Do this by entering the pulse width value with units first, followed immediately by the
period value and units, followed by E. For example, you could enter a pulse width
of 50 ns and a period of 200 ns with the following sequence:
50bKbH200bKbHE
To change only the pulse width, enter a value in seconds. You can enter this value with
units (e.g., 200 ns) or without units (e.g., 0.0000002). To change only the period, enter a
frequency with units (e.g., 20 MHz, changing the period to 50 ns).
10-25
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Measure Input Resistance and Capacitance
gjh064.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the Impedance/Capacitance (MEAS Z) menu is described below:
•
Measured @ SCOPE terminal Indicates the location of the measured input.
•
MEASURE Indicates the type of test. You can select res 50Ω or res 1 MΩ
termination (for impedance) or cap (capacitance).
•
MODE Indicates the Calibrator is in MEAS Z mode. Use the softkey to change
modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
If you have selected Capacitance measurement, the menu appears as follows:
gjh065.eps
•
SET OFFSET With the cable disconnected at the oscilloscope but still connected at
the Calibrator, press SET OFFSET to cancel the capacitance of the Calibrator and
cable. Press again (CLEAR OFFSET) to cancel the offset.
Default Impedance Measurement range = 50 Ω.
Input Impedance Measurement
With MEAS Z mode selected, perform the following procedure to measure the input
impedance of an oscilloscope:
1. Use the MEASURE softkey to select “res 50Ω” or “res 1 MΩ” termination.
2. Connect the SCOPE terminal on the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope.
3. Press O to initiate the measurement.
10-26
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
How to Test Overload Protection
Input Capacitance Measurement
With MEAS Z mode selected, perform the following procedure to measure the input
capacitance of an oscilloscope:
1. Set the oscilloscope for 1 MΩ input impedance. Note that input capacitance testing
cannot be done with 50 Ω input impedance.
2. Use the MEASURE softkey to select “cap”.
3. With the output cable connected to the Calibrator but not connected to the
oscilloscope, press the SET OFFSET softkey to cancel stray capacitances.
4. Connect the output cable to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope.
5. Press O to initiate the measurement.
How to Test Overload Protection
Caution
This test checks the power handling capability of the 50 Ω input
of your oscilloscope. Before proceeding, ensure that the power
rating of your oscilloscope can handle the voltages and
currents that this test can output. Failing to do so could
damage your oscilloscope.
gjh066.eps
You can press the MODE softkey to cycle through the functions in the order shown, or
you can press P to return directly to the OTHER modes menu.
Each option in the OVERLD menu is described below:
•
OUTPUT @ SCOPE Indicates the location of the output signal.
•
UUTTRIP Indicates test results. “NO” appears if the overload protection did not
trip within the selected time limit. A value in seconds appears (e.g. “4.1s”) if the
overload protection has tripped within the time limit.
•
T LIMIT Indicates the selected time limit for application of the output value. Press
this softkey to key in or edit a different time limit (1s to 60s allowed.)
•
OUT VAL Indicates the output voltage type. You can select DC or AC and a value
ranging from 5 V to 9 V (shown in Output Display). Key in or edit this value.
•
MODE Indicates you are in OVERLD (Overload) mode. Use the softkey to change
modes and open menus for other oscilloscope calibration modes.
Default overload settings are + 5.000 V and DC.
10-27
5522A
Operators Manual
At any time, you can also set the overload time limit with S, INSTMT SETUP
softkey, OTHER SETUP softkey, TLIMDEF softkey, and then choose 1s to 60 s.
Perform the following procedure to test the overload protection of an oscilloscope:
1. Connect the calibrator to Channel 1 on the oscilloscope.
2. Select the voltage type (DC or AC) using the OUT VAL softkey.
3. Key in the voltage level. (The default value is 5 V.)
4. If necessary, change the duration. (Refer to the procedure described above.) The
default duration is 10s.
5. Check for test results displayed with the UUTTRIP softkey.
Remote Commands and Queries
This section describes commands and queries that are used specifically for the SC1100
Option. Each command description indicates whether it can be used with IEEE-488 and
RS-232 remote interfaces and identifies it as a Sequential, Overlapped, or Coupled
command.
IEEE-488 (GPIB) and RS-232 Applicability Each command and query has a check
box indicating applicability to IEEE-488 (general purpose interface bus, or GPIB) and
RS-232 remote operations.
Sequential Commands Commands executed immediately as they are encountered in the
data stream are called sequential commands. For more information, see “Sequential
Commands” in Chapter 5.
Overlapped Commands Commands SCOPE, TRIG, and OUT_IMP are designated as
overlapped commands because they may be overlapped (interrupted) by the next
command before they have completed execution. When an overlapped command is
interrupted, it may take longer to execute while it waits for other commands to be
completed. To prevent an overlapped command from being interrupted during execution,
use *OPC, *OPC?, or *WAI. These commands prevent interruptions until they detect
the command’s completion. For more information, see “Overlapped Commands” in
Chapter 5.
Coupled Commands SCOPE and OUT_IMP are coupled commands because they can
be coupled (combined) with other commands to form a compound command sequence.
Care must be taken to ensure that commands are not coupled in a way that may cause
them to disable each other, since this may result in a fault. For more information, see
“Coupled Commands” in Chapter 5.
General Commands
Table 10-1 is a list of Scope command parameters.
Table 10-1. SCOPE Command Parameters
Parameter
OFF
VOLT
Description/Example
Turns the oscilloscope hardware off. Programs 0 V, 0 Hz, output at the NORMAL
terminals, standby.
Oscilloscope ac and dc VOLT mode. Programs 20 mV peak-to-peak, 1 kHz, output at
the SCOPE BNC, output impedance 1 MΩ, standby if from OFF or previously in
standby. FUNC? returns SACV (for ac) or SDCV (for dc).
Example:
SCOPE VOLT; OUT 4 V, 1 kHz
(ac voltage, 4 V peak-to-peak, 1 kHz.)
10-28
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Remote Commands and Queries
Table 10-1. SCOPE Command Parameters (cont.)
Parameter
EDGE
Description/Example
Oscilloscope EDGE mode. Programs 25 mV peak-to-peak, 1 MHz, output at the
SCOPE BNC, standby if from OFF or previously in standby. FUNC? returns EDGE.
Example: SCOPE EDGE; OUT 0.5 V, 5 kHz
(Edge, 0.5 V peak-to-peak, 5 kHz.)
LEVSINE
Oscilloscope LEVSINE mode. Programs 30 mV peak-to-peak, 50 kHz, output at the
SCOPE BNC, standby if from OFF or previously in standby. FUNC? returns LEVSINE.
Example: SCOPE LEVSINE; OUT 1 V, 50 kHz
(Leveled sine wave, 1 V peak-to-peak, 50 kHz.)
MARKER
Oscilloscope MARKER mode. Programs the period to 1 ms, output at the SCOPE
BNC, standby if from OFF or previously in standby. FUNC? returns MARKER.
Example: SCOPE MARKER; OUT 2 MS
(Marker, period of 2 ms.)
WAVEGEN
Oscilloscope WAVEGEN mode. Programs 20 mV peak-to-peak, square wave, 1 kHz,
no offset, output impedance 1 MΩ, standby if from OFF or previously in standby.
FUNC? returns WAVEGEN.
Example: SCOPE WAVEGEN; OUT 1 V, 1 kHz
(Wave Generator, 1 V peak-to-peak, 1 kHz.)
VIDEO
Oscilloscope VIDEO mode. Programs 100 % output (1 V p-p), line marker 10, format
NTSC. FUNC? returns VIDEO.
Examples:
SCOPE VIDEO; OUT 90
(Video, 90 % output)
SCOPE VIDEO; OUT -70
(Video, -70 % output, inverse video)
PULSE
Oscilloscope PULSE mode. Programs 100 ns pulse width, 1.000 μs period, 2.5 V
range. FUNC? returns PULSE.
Example:
SCOPE PULSE; OUT 50 ns, 500 ns; RANGE TP8DB
(Pulse, 50 ns pulse width, 500 ns period, 1.5 V range)
MEASZ
Oscilloscope Impedance/Capacitance measurement (MEAS Z) mode. Programs 50 Ω
range. FUNC? returns MEASZ.
Example:
SCOPE MEASZ; RANGE TZCAP
(MEAS Z mode, capacitance range)
Oscilloscope Overload mode. Programs 5 V dc range. FUNC? returns OVERLD.
OVERLD
Example:
SCOPE OVERLD; OUT 7 V; RANGE TOLAC
(Overload, 7 V output, ac range)
SCOPE
Programs the 5520A-SC1100 oscilloscope calibration option hardware, if installed. The
instrument settings are determined by this command’s parameter. Once in SCOPE mode,
use the OUT command to program new output.
10-29
5522A
Operators Manual
OPER, STBY, *OPC, *OPC?, and *WAI all operate as described in Chapter 6. The state
of the oscilloscope’s output while in SCOPE mode is reflected by the bit in the ISR that
is assigned to SETTLED.
The FUNC? query returns SDCV, SACV, LEVSINE, MARKER, EDGE, and WAVEGEN for
the corresponding oscilloscope modes.
Parameters:
Example:
OFF
Turns the oscilloscope hardware off. Programs
0V,0 Hz, output at the NORMAL terminals, standby.
VOLT
Oscilloscope’s ac and dc voltage mode.
Programs 20 mV peak-to-peak, 1 kHz, output at the
SCOPE BNC, output impedance 1 MΩ, standby if
from OFF or previously in standby.
EDGE
Oscilloscope Edge mode. Programs 25 mV peak-topeak, 1 MHz, output at the SCOPE BNC, standby if
from OFF or previously in standby.
LEVSINE
Oscilloscope-leveled sine mode. Programs 30 mV
peak-to-peak, 50 kHz, output at the SCOPE BNC,
standby if from OFF or previously in standby.
MARKER
Oscilloscope Marker mode. Programs the period to
1 ms, output at the SCOPE BNC, standby if from
OFF or previously in standby.
WAVEGEN
Oscilloscope Wavegen mode. Programs 20 mV
peak-to-peak, square wave, 1 kHz, no offset, output
impedance 1 MΩ, standby if from OFF or
previously in standby.
SCOPE VOLT;
OUT -2V, 0 Hz
(dc voltage, -2 V)
SCOPE VOLT;
OUT 4V, 1 kHz
(ac voltage, 4 V peak-topeak, 1 kHz.)
SCOPE EDGE;
OUT 0.5V, 5 kHz
(Edge, 0.5 V peak-to-peak,
5 kHz.)
SCOPE LEVSINE; OUT 1V, 50 kHz
(Leveled sine wave, 1 V
peak-to-peak, 50 kHz.)
SCOPE MARKER;
(Marker, period of 2 ms.)
OUT 2 MS
SCOPE WAVEGEN; OUT 1V, 1 kHz
(Wave Generator, 1 V
peak-to-peak, 1 kHz.)
SCOPE?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the oscilloscope’s current mode of operation. Returns OFF if the oscilloscope is
off.
10-30
Parameters:
None
Response:
<character> (Returns OFF, VOLT, EDGE, LEVSINE, MARKER, WAVEGEN,
VIDEO, PULSE, MEASZ, or OVERLD.)
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Remote Commands and Queries
TRIG
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Overlapped)
Programs the oscilloscope’s trigger output BNC.
Parameters:
Example:
OFF
(Turns the trigger output off.)
DIV1
(Turns the trigger output on. Frequency is the same as the
signal at SCOPE output.)
DIV10
(Turns the trigger output on. Frequency is 1/10 of the signal at
SCOPE output.)
DIV100
(Turns the trigger output on. Frequency is 1/100 of the signal
at SCOPE output.)
TRIG DIV10
TRIG?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the output setting of the oscilloscope’s trigger.
Parameters:
(None)
Response:
<character>
(Returns OFF, DIV1, DIV10, or DIV100.)
OUT_IMP
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Programs the oscilloscope’s output impedance.
Parameters:
Example:
Z50
(Programs the oscilloscope’s output impedance to 50 Ω.)
Z1M
(Programs the oscilloscope’s output impedance to 1 MΩ.)
OUT_IMP Z50
OUT_IMP?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the impedance setting of the oscilloscope’s output.
Parameters:
(None)
10-31
5522A
Operators Manual
RANGE
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Programs the instrument range in PULSE, MEAS Z, OVERLD modes.
Parameters:
Pulse
TP0DB
TP8DB
Range
2.5 V
1.0 V
Impedance
TP20DB TP28DB TP40DB TP48DB
250 mV
TZ50OHM
TZ1MOHM
res 50 Ω
res 1MΩ
TZ50OHM
TZ1MOHM
res 50 Ω
res 1MΩ
100 mV
25 mV
10 mV
TZCAP
Measure
Range
Impedance
cap
TZCAP
Measure
Range
Example:
cap
RANGE TP20DB
Edge Function Commands
TDPULSE
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Turns tunnel diode pulse drive on/off in EDGE mode.
Parameters:
ON (or non-zero) or OFF (or zero)
Example:
TDPULSE ON
Returns the tunnel diode pulse drive setting in EDGE mode.
Parameters:
None
Response:
1 if ON, 0 if OFF.
Marker Function Commands
TMWAVE
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Selects the waveform for MARKER mode.
Parameters:
Example:
10-32
SINE
Sine wave (2 ns to 15 ns)
SPIKE
Triangular/sawtooth pulse (15 ns to 5s)
SQUARE
Square wave (50 % duty cycle) (4 ns to 5s)
SQ20PCT
Square wave (20 % duty cycle) (85 ns to 5s)
TMWAVE SPIKE
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Remote Commands and Queries
TMWAVE?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the MARKER mode waveform setting.
Parameters:
None
Response:
<character>
(Returns SINE, SPIKE, SQUARE, or SQ20PCT.)
Video Function Commands
VIDEOFMT
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Selects the format for VIDEO mode.
Parameters:
Example:
NTSC, PAL, PALM (for PAL-M), or SECAM
VIDEOFMT SECAM
VIDEOFMT?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the VIDEO mode format.
Parameters:
None
Response:
NTSC, PAL, PALM (for PAL-M), or SECAM
VIDEOMARK
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Programs the VIDEO mode line marker location.
Parameters:
Line marker number.
Example:
VIDEOMARK 10
VIDEOMARK?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the VIDEO mode line marker setting.
Parameters:
None.
Response:
<character> SINE, SPIKE, SQUARE or SQ20PCT
Overload Function Commands
OL_TRIP?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the detected state of scope overload protection.
Parameters:
(None)
Response:
Returns the number of seconds before protection was tripped. Returns 0 if
protection has not been tripped or if OVERLD mode not active.
TLIMIT
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Sets the OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal. The Calibrator
automatically returns to STANDBY if the UUT protection trips within this interval or at
the end of this interval if the protection has not tripped.
10-33
5522A
Operators Manual
Parameters:
1 to 60 (seconds)
Example:
TLIMIT 30
TLIMIT?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the programmed OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal.
Response:
<Integer> Time limit in seconds.
TLIMIT_D
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Sets the default OPERATE time limit for the OVERLD mode signal.
Parameters:
1 to 60 (seconds)
Example:
TLIMIT_D 15
TLIMIT_D?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the default overload time limit.
Response:
<Integer> Default time limit in seconds.
Impedance/Capacitance Function Commands
ZERO_MEAS
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Sets the measurement offset to the capacitance value.
Parameters:
(boolean) ON or OFF.
*TRG
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Triggers and returns a new impedance measurement value when used with the SC1100
option in MEAS Z mode. (See Chapter 6 for *TRG use in all cases except MEAS Z mode
with the SC1100 option.)
Responses:
Example:
<measurement value>, OHM
<measurement value>, F
<measurement value>, NONE
(input impedance value in ohms)
(input capacitance value in farads)
(no measurement is available)
*TRG returns 1.00E+03,OHM
(1 kΩ input impedance).
Note
You can also use the VAL? query to return an impedance measurement
value with the SC1100 option. VAL? returns the last measurement, whereas
*TRG gets a new measurement. Responses are the same as shown above for
the *TRG command. (See Chapter 6 for VAL? use with thermocouple
measurements.)
10-34
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Verification Tables
The verification test points are provided here as a guide when verification to one-year
specifications is desired.
DC Voltage Verification
Table 10-2. SC1100 Option DC Voltage Verification
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal
Value (V dc)
Measured Value
Deviation
(V dc)
(V dc)
1-Year Spec. (V dc)
0
0.00004
0.00125
0.000040625
-0.00125
0.000040625
0.00249
0.000041245
-0.00249
0.000041245
0.0025
0.00004125
-0.0025
0.00004125
0.00625
0.000043125
-0.00625
0.000043125
0.0099
0.00004495
-0.0099
0.00004495
0.01
0.000045
-0.01
0.000045
0.0175
0.00004875
-0.0175
0.00004875
0.0249
0.00005245
-0.0249
0.00005245
0.025
0.0000525
-0.025
0.0000525
0.0675
0.00007375
-0.0675
0.00007375
0.1099
0.00009495
-0.1099
0.00009495
0.11
0.000095
-0.11
0.000095
0.305
0.0001925
-0.305
0.0001925
10-35
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 10-2. SC1100 Option DC Voltage Verification (cont.)
Nominal
Value (V dc)
Measured Value
Deviation
(V dc)
(V dc)
1-Year Spec. (V dc)
0.499
0.0002895
-0.499
0.0002895
0.5
0.00029
-0.5
0.00029
1.35
0.000715
-1.35
0.000715
2.19
0.001135
-2.19
0.001135
2.2
0.00114
-2.2
0.00114
6.6
0.00334
-6.6
0.00334
10.99
0.005535
-10.99
0.005535
11
0.00554
-11
0.00554
70.5
0.03529
-70.5
0.03529
130
0.06504
-130
0.06504
Table 10-3. SC1100 Option DC Voltage Verification at 50 Ω
Calibrator
Mainframe
Output
10-36
Measured Value
(V DC)
Reading x correction
Tolerance (V DC)
0 mV
0.00004 V
2.49 mV
4.623E-05 V
-2.49 mV
4.623E-05 V
9.90 mV
6.475E-05 V
-9.90 mV
6.475E-05 V
24.9 mV
0.0001023 V
-24.9 mV
0.0001023 V
109.9 mV
0.0003148 V
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Table 10-3. SC1100 Option DC Voltage Verification at 50 Ω (cont.)
Calibrator
Mainframe
Output
Measured Value
(V DC)
Reading x correction
Tolerance (V DC)
-109.9 mV
0.0003148 V
499 mV
0.0012875 V
-499 mV
0.0012875 V
2.19 V
0.005515 V
-2.19 V
0.005515 V
6.599 V
0.0165375 V
-6.599 V
0.0165375 V
AC Voltage Verification
Table 10-4. SC1100 Option AC Voltage Verification
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.001
1000
0.000041
-0.001
1000
0.000041
0.01
1000
0.00005
-0.01
1000
0.00005
0.025
1000
0.000065
-0.025
1000
0.000065
0.11
1000
0.00015
-0.11
1000
0.00015
0.5
1000
0.00054
-0.5
1000
0.00054
2.2
1000
0.00224
-2.2
1000
0.00224
11
1000
0.01104
-11
1000
0.01104
130
1000
0.13004
-130
1000
0.13004
200 mV
100
0.00024
200 mV
1000
0.00024
200 mV
5000
0.00054
10-37
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 10-4. SC1100 Option AC Voltage Verification (cont.)
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
1-year Spec.
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
200 mV
10000
0.00054
2.2 V
100
0.00224
2.2 V
5000
0.00554
2.2 V
10000
0.00554
Table 10-5. SC1100 Option AC Voltage Verification at 50 
Calibrator
Mainframe
Output
(1 kHz)
HP 3458
Range
Topline
Reading
Baseline
Reading
Peak-to-Peak
Peak-toPeak x
Correction
Tolerance
(±V)
1 mV
100 mV dc
0.000043
-1 mV
100 mV dc
0.000043
10 mV
100 mV dc
0.000065
-10 mV
100 mV dc
0.000065
25 mV
100 mV dc
0.000103
-25 mV
100 mV dc
0.000103
110 mV
100 mV dc
0.000315
-110 mV
100 mV dc
0.000315
500 mV
1 V dc
0.00129
-500 mV
1 V dc
0.00129
2.2 V
10 V dc
0.00554
-2.2 V
10 V dc
0.00554
6.6 V
10 V dc
0.01654
-6.6 V
10 V dc
0.01654
AC Voltage Frequency Verification
Table 10-6. SC1100 Option AC Voltage Frequency Verification
(1 MΩ output impedance unless noted)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
10-38
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(Hz)
Deviation (Hz)
1-year Spec.
(Hz)
2.1
10
0.000025
2.1
100
0.00025
2.1
1000
0.0025
2.1
10000
0.025
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 1 MΩ Output Impedance
Table 10-7. SC1100 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification (1 M output impedance)
Wave Shape
Nominal
Value (V p-p)
Frequency
(Hz)
Measured
Value (V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
square
0.0018
1000
0.000154
square
0.0119
1000
0.000457
square
0.0219
1000
0.000757
square
0.022
1000
0.00076
square
0.056
1000
0.00178
square
0.0899
1000
0.002797
square
0.09
1000
0.0028
square
0.155
1000
0.00475
square
0.219
1000
0.00667
square
0.22
1000
0.0067
square
0.56
1000
0.0169
square
0.899
1000
0.02707
square
0.9
1000
0.0271
square
3.75
1000
0.1126
square
6.59
1000
0.1978
square
6.6
1000
0.1981
square
30.8
1000
0.9241
square
55
10
1.6501
square
55
100
1.6501
square
55
1000
1.6501
square
55
10000
1.6501
sine
0.0018
1000
0.000154
sine
0.0219
1000
0.000757
sine
0.0899
1000
0.002797
sine
0.219
1000
0.00667
sine
0.899
1000
0.02707
sine
6.59
1000
0.1978
sine
55
1000
1.6501
triangle
0.0018
1000
0.000154
triangle
0.0219
1000
0.000757
triangle
0.0899
1000
0.002797
10-39
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 10-7. SC1100 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification (1 M output impedance) (cont.)
Wave Shape
Nominal
Value (V p-p)
Frequency
(Hz)
Measured
Value (V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
triangle
0.219
1000
0.00667
triangle
0.899
1000
0.02707
triangle
6.59
1000
0.1978
triangle
55
1000
1.6501
Wave Generator Amplitude Verification: 50 Ω Output Impedance
Table 10-8. SC1100 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification (50  output impedance)
10-40
Wave Shape
Nominal
Value (V p-p)
Frequency
(Hz)
Measured
Value (V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
square
0.0018
1000
0.000154
square
0.0064
1000
0.000292
square
0.0109
1000
0.000427
square
0.011
1000
0.00043
square
0.028
1000
0.00094
square
0.0449
1000
0.001447
square
0.045
1000
0.00145
square
0.078
1000
0.00244
square
0.109
1000
0.00337
square
0.11
1000
0.0034
square
0.28
1000
0.0085
square
0.449
1000
0.01357
square
0.45
1000
0.0136
square
0.78
1000
0.0235
square
1.09
1000
0.0328
square
1.1
1000
0.0331
square
1.8
1000
0.0541
square
2.5
10
0.0751
square
2.5
100
0.0751
square
2.5
1000
0.0751
square
2.5
10000
0.0751
sine
0.0018
1000
0.000154
sine
0.0109
1000
0.000427
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Table 10-8. SC1100 Option Wave Generator Amplitude Verification (50  output impedance) (cont.)
Wave Shape
Nominal
Value (V p-p)
Frequency
(Hz)
Measured
Value (V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
sine
0.0449
1000
0.001447
sine
0.109
1000
0.00337
sine
0.449
1000
0.01357
sine
1.09
1000
0.0328
sine
2.5
1000
0.0751
triangle
0.0018
1000
0.000154
triangle
0.0109
1000
0.000427
triangle
0.0449
1000
0.001447
triangle
0.109
1000
0.00337
triangle
0.449
1000
0.01357
triangle
1.09
1000
0.0328
triangle
2.5
1000
0.0751
Edge Verification: Amplitude
Table 10-9. SC1100 Option Edge Verification: Amplitude
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.005
1 kHz
0.0003
0.005
10 kHz
0.0003
0.005
100 kHz
0.0003
0.01
100 kHz
0.0004
0.025
100 kHz
0.0007
0.05
100 kHz
0.0012
0.1
100 kHz
0.0022
0.25
100 kHz
0.0052
0.5
100 kHz
0.0102
1
100 kHz
0.0202
2.5
100 kHz
0.0502
2.5
10 kHz
0.0502
2.5
1 kHz
0.0502
10-41
5522A
Operators Manual
Edge Verification: Frequency
Table 10-10. SC1100 Option Edge Verification: Frequency
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(Hz)
Deviation (Hz)
1-Year Spec.
(Hz)
2.5
1 kHz
0.0025
2.5
10 kHz
0.025
2.5
100 kHz
0.25
2.5
1 MHz
2.5
2.5
10 MHz
25
Edge Verification: Duty Cycle
Table 10-11. SC1100 Option Edge Verification: Duty Cycle
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
2.5
Frequency
Measured
Value (%)
Deviation
(from 50 %)
1 MHz
1-Year Spec. (%)
5
Edge Verification: Rise Time
Table 10-12. SC1100 Option Edge Verification: Rise TimeE
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
10-42
Frequency
Measured
Value (s)
Deviation (ns)
1-Year Spec.
(ns)
0.25
1 kHz
0.3 ns
0.25
100 kHz
0.3 ns
0.25
10 MHz
0.3 ns
0.5
1 kHz
0.3 ns
0.5
100 kHz
0.3 ns
0.5
10 MHz
0.3 ns
1
1 kHz
0.3 ns
1
100 kHz
0.3 ns
1
10 MHz
0.3 ns
2.5
1 kHz
0.3 ns
2.5
100 kHz
0.3 ns
2.5
10 MHz
0.3 ns
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification
Table 10-13. SC1100 Option Tunnel Diode Pulser Verification
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency (Hz)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
11
100
0.2202
11
10000
0.2202
55
100
1.1002
55
10000
1.1002
100
100
2.0002
100
10000
2.0002
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Amplitude
Table 10-14. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Amplitude
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.005
50 kHz
0.0004
0.0075
50 kHz
0.00045
0.0099
50 kHz
0.000498
0.01
50 kHz
0.0005
0.025
50 kHz
0.0008
0.039
50 kHz
0.00108
0.04
50 kHz
0.0011
0.07
50 kHz
0.0017
0.099
50 kHz
0.00228
0.1
50 kHz
0.0023
0.25
50 kHz
0.0053
0.399
50 kHz
0.00828
0.4
50 kHz
0.0083
0.8
50 kHz
0.0163
1.2
50 kHz
0.0243
1.3
50 kHz
0.0263
3.4
50 kHz
0.0683
5.5
50 kHz
0.1103
10-43
5522A
Operators Manual
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Frequency
Table 10-15. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Frequency
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(Hz)
Deviation (Hz)
1-Year Spec.
(Hz)
5.5
50 kHz
0.125
5.5
500 kHz
1.25
5.5
5 MHz
12.5
5.5
50 MHz
125
5.5
500 MHz
1250
3.5
1000 MHz
2500
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Harmonics
Table 10-16. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Harmonics
Harmonic
Frequency
Measured
Value (dB)
Deviation
(dB)
1-Year Spec.
(dB)
2nd harmonic
0.0399
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
0.0399
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
0.099
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
0.099
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
0.399
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
0.399
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
1.2
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
1.2
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
50 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
50 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
100 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
100 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
200 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
200 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
400 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
400 kHz
-38
5.5
800 kHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
800 kHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
1 MHz
-33
3 + harmonic
5.5
1 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
2 MHz
-33
nd
2
harmonic
rd
10-44
Nominal
Value (V p-p)
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Table 10-16. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Harmonics (cont.)
Harmonic
Nominal
Value (V p-p)
Frequency
Measured
Value (dB)
Deviation
(dB)
1-Year Spec.
(dB)
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
2 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
4 MHz
-33
5.5
4 MHz
-38
5.5
8 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
8 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
10 MHz
-33
3 + harmonic
5.5
10 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
20 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
20 MHz
-38
5.5
40 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
40 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
80 MHz
-33
3 + harmonic
5.5
80 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
100 MHz
-33
3rd+ harmonic
5.5
100 MHz
-38
5.5
200 MHz
-33
3 + harmonic
5.5
200 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
5.5
400 MHz
-33
5.5
400 MHz
-38
5.5
600 MHz
-33
3 + harmonic
5.5
600 MHz
-38
2nd harmonic
3.5
1000 MHz
-33
3.5
1000 MHz
-38
rd
3 + harmonic
nd
2
harmonic
rd
nd
2
harmonic
rd
nd
2
harmonic
rd
rd
3 + harmonic
nd
2
harmonic
rd
rd
3 + harmonic
10-45
5522A
Operators Manual
Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness
Table 10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
10-46
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
na
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.005
10 MHz
0.005
30 MHz
0.000175
0.005
70 MHz
0.000175
0.005
120 MHz
0.0002
0.005
290 MHz
0.0002
0.005
360 MHz
0.0003
0.005
390 MHz
0.0003
0.005
400 MHz
0.0003
0.005
480 MHz
0.0003
0.005
570 MHz
0.0003
0.005
580 MHz
0.0003
0.005
590 MHz
0.0003
0.005
600 MHz
0.0003
0.0075
10 MHz
0.0075
30 MHz
0.0002125
0.0075
70 MHz
0.0002125
0.0075
120 MHz
0.00025
0.0075
290 MHz
0.00025
0.0075
360 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
390 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
400 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
480 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
570 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
580 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
590 MHz
0.0004
0.0075
600 MHz
0.0004
0.0099
10 MHz
0.0099
30 MHz
0.0002485
0.0099
70 MHz
0.0002485
0.0099
120 MHz
0.000298
0.0099
290 MHz
0.000298
na
na
na
na
na
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Table 10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.0099
360 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
390 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
400 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
480 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
570 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
580 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
590 MHz
0.000496
0.0099
600 MHz
0.000496
0.01
10 MHz
0.01
30 MHz
0.00025
0.01
70 MHz
0.00025
0.01
120 MHz
0.0003
0.01
290 MHz
0.0003
0.01
360 MHz
0.0005
0.01
390 MHz
0.0005
0.01
400 MHz
0.0005
0.01
480 MHz
0.0005
0.01
570 MHz
0.0005
0.01
580 MHz
0.0005
0.01
590 MHz
0.0005
0.01
600 MHz
0.0005
0.01
1000 MHz
0.0005
0.025
10 MHz
0.025
30 MHz
0.000475
0.025
70 MHz
0.000475
0.025
120 MHz
0.0006
0.025
290 MHz
0.0006
0.025
360 MHz
0.0011
0.025
390 MHz
0.0011
0.025
400 MHz
0.0011
0.025
480 MHz
0.0011
0.025
570 MHz
0.0011
na
na
na
na
10-47
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
10-48
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.025
580 MHz
0.0011
0.025
590 MHz
0.0011
0.025
600 MHz
0.0011
0.025
1000 MHz
0.0011
0.039
10 MHz
0.039
30 MHz
0.000685
0.039
70 MHz
0.000685
0.039
120 MHz
0.00088
0.039
290 MHz
0.00088
0.039
360 MHz
0.00166
0.039
390 MHz
0.00166
0.039
400 MHz
0.00166
0.039
480 MHz
0.00166
0.039
570 MHz
0.00166
0.039
580 MHz
0.00166
0.039
590 MHz
0.00166
0.039
600 MHz
0.00166
0.039
1000 MHz
0.00166
0.04
10 MHz
0.04
30 MHz
0.0007
0.04
70 MHz
0.0007
0.04
120 MHz
0.0009
0.04
290 MHz
0.0009
0.04
360 MHz
0.0017
0.04
390 MHz
0.0017
0.04
400 MHz
0.0017
0.04
480 MHz
0.0017
0.04
570 MHz
0.0017
0.04
580 MHz
0.0017
0.04
590 MHz
0.0017
0.04
600 MHz
0.0017
0.04
1000 MHz
0.0017
na
na
na
na
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Table 10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
na
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.07
10 MHz
0.07
30 MHz
0.00115
0.07
70 MHz
0.00115
0.07
120 MHz
0.0015
0.07
290 MHz
0.0015
0.07
360 MHz
0.0029
0.07
390 MHz
0.0029
0.07
400 MHz
0.0029
0.07
480 MHz
0.0029
0.07
570 MHz
0.0029
0.07
580 MHz
0.0029
0.07
590 MHz
0.0029
0.07
600 MHz
0.0029
0.07
1000 MHz
0.0029
0.099
10 MHz
0.099
30 MHz
0.001585
0.099
70 MHz
0.001585
0.099
120 MHz
0.00208
0.099
290 MHz
0.00208
0.099
360 MHz
0.00406
0.099
390 MHz
0.00406
0.099
400 MHz
0.00406
0.099
480 MHz
0.00406
0.099
570 MHz
0.00406
0.099
580 MHz
0.00406
0.099
590 MHz
0.00406
0.099
600 MHz
0.00406
0.099
1000 MHz
0.00406
0.1
10 MHz
0.1
30 MHz
0.0016
0.1
70 MHz
0.0016
0.1
120 MHz
0.0021
na
na
na
na
na
10-49
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
10-50
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.1
290 MHz
0.0021
0.1
360 MHz
0.0041
0.1
390 MHz
0.0041
0.1
400 MHz
0.0041
0.1
480 MHz
0.0041
0.1
570 MHz
0.0041
0.1
580 MHz
0.0041
0.1
590 MHz
0.0041
0.1
600 MHz
0.0041
0.1
1000 MHz
0.0041
0.25
10 MHz
0.25
30 MHz
0.00385
0.25
70 MHz
0.00385
0.25
120 MHz
0.0051
0.25
290 MHz
0.0051
0.25
360 MHz
0.0101
0.25
390 MHz
0.0101
0.25
400 MHz
0.0101
0.25
480 MHz
0.0101
0.25
570 MHz
0.0101
0.25
580 MHz
0.0101
0.25
590 MHz
0.0101
0.25
600 MHz
0.0101
0.25
1000 MHz
0.0101
0.399
10 MHz
0.399
30 MHz
0.006085
0.399
70 MHz
0.006085
0.399
120 MHz
0.00808
0.399
290 MHz
0.00808
0.399
360 MHz
0.01606
0.399
390 MHz
0.01606
0.399
400 MHz
0.01606
na
na
na
na
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Table 10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.399
480 MHz
0.01606
0.399
570 MHz
0.01606
0.399
580 MHz
0.01606
0.399
590 MHz
0.01606
0.399
600 MHz
0.01606
0.399
1000 MHz
0.01606
0.4
10 MHz
0.4
30 MHz
0.0061
0.4
70 MHz
0.0061
0.4
120 MHz
0.0081
0.4
290 MHz
0.0081
0.4
360 MHz
0.0161
0.4
390 MHz
0.0161
0.4
400 MHz
0.0161
0.4
480 MHz
0.0161
0.4
570 MHz
0.0161
0.4
580 MHz
0.0161
0.4
590 MHz
0.0161
0.4
600 MHz
0.0161
0.4
1000 MHz
0.0161
0.8
10 MHz
0.8
30 MHz
0.0121
0.8
70 MHz
0.0121
0.8
120 MHz
0.0161
0.8
290 MHz
0.0161
0.8
360 MHz
0.0321
0.8
390 MHz
0.0321
0.8
400 MHz
0.0321
0.8
480 MHz
0.0321
0.8
570 MHz
0.0321
0.8
580 MHz
0.0321
0.8
590 MHz
0.0321
na
na
na
na
10-51
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
(V p-p)
10-52
Frequency
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation
(V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
0.8
600 MHz
0.0321
0.8
1000 MHz
0.0321
1.2
10 MHz
1.2
30 MHz
0.0181
1.2
70 MHz
0.0181
1.2
120 MHz
0.0241
1.2
290 MHz
0.0241
1.2
360 MHz
0.0481
1.2
390 MHz
0.0481
1.2
400 MHz
0.0481
1.2
480 MHz
0.0481
1.2
570 MHz
0.0481
1.2
580 MHz
0.0481
1.2
590 MHz
0.0481
1.2
600 MHz
0.0481
1.2
1000 MHz
0.0481
1.3
10 MHz
1.3
30 MHz
0.0196
1.3
70 MHz
0.0196
1.3
120 MHz
0.0261
1.3
290 MHz
0.0261
1.3
360 MHz
0.0521
1.3
390 MHz
0.0521
1.3
400 MHz
0.0521
1.3
480 MHz
0.0521
1.3
570 MHz
0.0521
1.3
580 MHz
0.0521
1.3
590 MHz
0.0521
1.3
600 MHz
0.0521
1.3
1000 MHz
0.0521
3.4
10 MHz
3.4
30 MHz
na
na
na
na
na
na
0.0511
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Table 10-17. SC1100 Option Leveled Sinewave Verification: Flatness (cont.)
Nominal Value
Frequency
(V p-p)
Measured Value
(V p-p)
Deviation (V p-p)
1-Year Spec.
(V p-p)
3.4
70 MHz
0.0511
3.4
120 MHz
0.0681
3.4
290 MHz
0.0681
3.4
360 MHz
0.1361
3.4
390 MHz
0.1361
3.4
400 MHz
0.1361
3.4
480 MHz
0.1361
3.4
570 MHz
0.1361
3.4
580 MHz
0.1361
3.4
590 MHz
0.1361
3.4
600 MHz
0.1361
3.4
1000 MHz
0.1361
5.5
10 MHz
5.5
30 MHz
0.0826
5.5
70 MHz
0.0826
5.5
120 MHz
0.1101
5.5
290 MHz
0.1101
5.5
360 MHz
0.2201
5.5
390 MHz
0.2201
5.5
400 MHz
0.2201
5.5
480 MHz
0.2201
5.5
570 MHz
0.2201
5.5
580 MHz
0.2201
5.5
590 MHz
0.2201
5.5
600 MHz
0.2201
na
na
Marker Generator Verification
Table 10-18. SC1100 Option Marker Generator Verification
Period (s)
Measured Value (s)
Deviation (s)
1-Year Spec. (s)
5
25.1E-3
2
4.1E-3
0.05
3.8E-6
0.02
50.0E-9
10-53
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 10-18. SC1100 Option Marker Generator Verification (cont.)
Period (s)
Measured Value (s)
Deviation (s)
1-Year Spec. (s)
0.01
25.0E-9
100.0E-9
250.0E-15
50.0E-9
125.0E-15
20.0E-9
50.0E-15
10.0E-9
25.0E-15
5.0E-9
12.5E-15
2.0E-9
5.0E-15
1.0E-9
2.5E-15
Pulse Generator Verification: Period
Table 10-19. SC1100 Option Pulse Generator Verification: Period
Nominal
Value (V p-p)
Pulse Width
(s)
Period
(s)
Measured
Value (s)
Deviation
(s)
1-Year Spec.
(s)
2.5
80 ns
2E-06
5 ps
2.5
500 ns
0.01
25 ns
2.5
500 ns
0.02
50 ns
Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width
Table 10-20. SC1100 Option Pulse Generator Verification: Pulse Width
Nominal
Value (V p-p)
10-54
Pulse Width
(s)
Period
(s)
Measured
Value (s)
Deviation
(s)
1-Year Spec.
Typical (s)
2.5
4.0E-09
2.0E-06
700 ps
2.5
4.0E-09
2.0E-05
700 ps
2.5
4.0E-09
2.0E-04
700 ps
2.5
4.0E-08
2.0E-03
4,000 ps
10
SC1100 Oscilloscope Calibration Option
Verification Tables
Input Impedance Verification: Resistance
Table 10-21. SC1100 Option Input Impedance Verification: Resistance
Nominal Value
(Ω)
Certified Value
(Ω)
Measured Value
(Ω)
Deviation (Ω)
(Certified –
Measured Value)
1-Year Spec.
(Ω)
40
0.04
50
0.05
60
0.06
600000
600
1000000
1000
1,500,000
1500
Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance
Table 10-22. SC1100 Option Input Impedance Verification: Capacitance
Nominal Value
(pF)
Certified Value
(pF)
Measured Value
(pF)
Deviation (pF)
(Certified –
Measured Value)
1-Year Spec.
(pF)
5 pF
0.75 pF
29 pF
1.95 pF
49 pF
2.95 pF
10-55
5522A
Operators Manual
10-56
Chapter 11
PQ Option
Title
Introduction..........................................................................................................
5522A PQ Specifications.....................................................................................
5522A PQ Option Specifications.........................................................................
Composite Harmonic Function Specifications ................................................
AC Voltage Specifications ..............................................................................
AC Voltage Auxiliary Specifications (Dual Output Mode Only) ...................
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP OFF.......................................................
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP OFF (continued) ...................................
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP ON* ......................................................
Flicker Simulation Mode.................................................................................
Sags & Swells Simulation Mode .....................................................................
Phase Specifications, Sinewave Outputs .........................................................
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts) ..............................................................
How to Enter the PQ Modes............................................................................
How to Create Composite Harmonic Waveforms ...........................................
The Wave Selection Menus.............................................................................
RECALL WAVE.............................................................................................
SAVE WAVE..................................................................................................
NEW WAVE ...................................................................................................
EDIT WAVE ...................................................................................................
How to Create New Waves .............................................................................
Harmonic Number ...........................................................................................
Harmonic Amplitude .......................................................................................
Phase................................................................................................................
How to Edit Waves..........................................................................................
How to Save Waves.........................................................................................
How to Recall Saved Waves ...........................................................................
Preinstalled Waves...............................................................................................
IEC Waves.......................................................................................................
NRC Waves .....................................................................................................
How to Recall Preinstalled IEC Waves ...........................................................
How to Recall Preinstalled NRC Waves .........................................................
Composite Harmonics Function (Amps) .............................................................
How to Set LCOMP ........................................................................................
Output AUX ....................................................................................................
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts and Amps).............................................
How to Set LCOMP ........................................................................................
Output AUX ....................................................................................................
Page
11-3
11-3
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-5
11-6
11-6
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-10
11-10
11-10
11-11
11-11
11-12
11-12
11-12
11-13
11-13
11-13
11-13
11-14
11-14
11-15
11-15
11-15
11-1
5522A
Operators Manual
Φ & REF Menus.............................................................................................
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts and Volts)..............................................
Φ & REF Menus..............................................................................................
Delta (Δ)Amplitude, Flicker Function (Volts).....................................................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Volts).................................................................
How to Select the Flicker Function .................................................................
How to Set the Repeat Frequency ...................................................................
How to Set the Modulation Pattern .................................................................
How to Set the Flicker Amplitude...................................................................
PST Values........................................................................................................
How to Set Phase and Reference in the Δ AMPL Function ............................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Flicker Function (Current) ................................................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Amps).................................................................
More Information ............................................................................................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Volts) ..........................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Volts)..................................................................
How to Set the Ramp-up Period ......................................................................
How to Set the Sag & Swell Width .................................................................
How to Set the Sag/Swell Amplitude ..............................................................
How to Set Triggers.........................................................................................
Example...........................................................................................................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Current).......................
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (AMPS) ...............................................................
How to Set Triggers.........................................................................................
How to Set the Ramp-up Period ......................................................................
How to Set the Sag/Swell Width .....................................................................
How to Set the Sag/Swell Amplitude ..............................................................
Delta (Δ)Amplitude Mode (Volts and Amps) .................................................
Example...........................................................................................................
Remote Commands .........................................................................................
Commands.......................................................................................................
Example Strings...............................................................................................
Performance Tests................................................................................................
Verification Table ................................................................................................
11-2
11-16
11-16
11-17
11-17
11-17
11-17
11-17
11-17
11-18
11-18
11-18
11-18
11-18
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-21
11-22
11-22
11-27
11-28
11-28
Introduction
The 5522A-PQ Option (hereafter the PQ Option) provides calibration functions to
maintain power quality monitoring equipment. The following functions are provided:
•
Harmonic Distortion simulation (Composite Harmonics Function)
Allows the user to specify up to 15 tones (harmonics) including all even and odd
values to the 63rd. For each harmonic value, the user may enter the amplitude and
phase relative to the fundamental. There are also 7 preinstalled waveforms with up to
49 harmonics. The harmonic waveforms are available in V, A, V-A, and V-V modes.
•
Flicker simulation (Delta (Δ) Amplitude, “flicker”)
Provided by means of rectangular or sinewave modulation of the output signal. The
repeat frequency and amplitude deviation are selectable. Flicker is available in V, A,
V-A, and V-V modes.
•
Sags & Swells simulation (Delta (Δ) Amplitude, “single”)
In this mode, the user can output a one-time (single), amplitude deviation over a
specified time interval. The user may select three parameters: the ramp time, width of
the event, and % amplitude deviation. The ramp time is the period of time over which
the output value changes from its nominal setting to the select modified value. The
width of the event is selectable from 0.032 seconds to 60.0 seconds. The amplitude
deviation is selected as a percentage of the nominal. This function is available in V,
A, V-A, and V-V modes.
5522A PQ Specifications
These specifications apply only to the PQ Option. General specifications that apply to the
5522A (the Calibrator) can be found in Chapter 1. The specifications are valid under the
following conditions:
•
The Calibrator is operated under the conditions specified in Chapter 1.
•
The Calibrator has completed a warm-up period of at least twice the length of time
the calibrator was powered off, up to a maximum of 30 minutes.
•
The PQ Option has been active longer than 5 minutes.
5522A PQ Option Specifications
Composite Harmonic Function Specifications
Maximum Number of Harmonics in a User Defined Waveform
15
Specified Fundamental Frequencies
15-65 Hz, 400 Hz
Highest Harmonic Frequency
5 kHz
Harmonic Amplitude Resolution
0.1 % of fundamental
Harmonic Phase Range (relative to fundamental)
0 to 360 °
Harmonic Phase Resolution
0.1 ° relative to fundamental
Pre-loaded Industry Waveforms
IEC A, IEC D, NRC7030, NRC 2 to 5
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
AC Voltage outputs ≥ 33 V, and Current outputs ≥ 3 A have low frequency limits of 45 Hz. Other fundamental frequencies within the
output limits of the 5520A can be used, but are not specified.
Current outputs with LCOMP ON have lower limits, as shown in the AC Current table below. Voltage outputs > 33V have a 2 kHz
limit.
11-3
5522A
Operators Manual
Note
All harmonic specifications below include the fundamental. For waveforms
with no harmonics other than the fundamental, the RMS uncertainty is the
same as the non-PQ mode of the 5520A.
AC Voltage Specifications
Composite
Waveform
Ranges
1 to
32.999 mV
33 to
329.99 mV
0.33 to
3.2999 V
3.3 to
32.999 V
33 to
329.99 V
330 to
1020 V
Harmonic
Frequency
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
11-4
Harmonic
Absolute RMS
Phase
Uncertainty of
Uncertainty
Composite Waveform
(Relative to
(% RMS + V)
[2]
Fundamental)
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 10 μV
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 10 μV
0.5 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 10 μV
1°
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 30 μV
3°
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 60 μV
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 60 μV
0.5 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 60 μV
0.8 °
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 60 μV
2°
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 400 μV
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 400 μV
0.3 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 400 μV
0.5 °
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 400 μV
2°
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 4 mV
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 4 mV
0.3 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 4 mV
0.5 °
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 4 mV
2°
45 to 440 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.2 % + 20 mV
0.75 °
440 to 660 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.25 % + 20 mV
660 to 1.2 kHz
0.1 to 10 %
0.35 % + 25 mV
1.2 to 2 kHz
0.1 to 5 %
0.5 % + 40 mV
45 to 440 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.25 % + 100 mV
0.75 °
440 to 660 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.25 % + 100 mV
1.2 °
660 to 1.2 kHz
0.1 to 10 %
0.4 % + 100 mV
[5]
3°
0.6 % + 160 mV
[6]
5°
1.2 to 2 kHz
[1]
Harmonic
Harmonic Amplitude
Amplitude
Uncertainty
Range (% of
[1] (% of Fundamental + V)
Fundamental)
0.1 to 5 %
1.2 °
[3]
[4]
3°
0.20 % + 6 μV
0.20 % + 10 μV
0.20 % + 100 μV
0.20 % + 1 mV
0.20 % + 10 mV
5°
0.20 % + 100 mV
All frequencies can have harmonics that are up to 100 % of the fundamental, but uncertainties are not specified unless otherwise
indicated.
For harmonics that are < 1 % of the Fundamental, phase uncertainty is typical.
When harmonics of this frequency band are combined with harmonics 45 to 660 Hz, all 45 to 660 Hz harmonics have an uncertainty
of 0.35 % + 25 mV.
When harmonics of this frequency band are combined with harmonics 45 Hz to 1.2 kHz, all 45 Hz to 1.2 kHz harmonics have an
uncertainty of 0.4 % + 25 mV.
When harmonics of this frequency band are combined with harmonics 45 to 660 Hz, all 45 to 660 Hz harmonics have an uncertainty
of 0.4 % + 100 mV.
When harmonics of this frequency band are combined with harmonics 45 Hz to 1.2 kHz, all 45 Hz to 1.2 kHz harmonics have an
uncertainty of 0.5 % + 100 mV.
PQ Option
5522A PQ Option Specifications
11
AC Voltage Auxiliary Specifications (Dual Output Mode Only)
10 to
329.99 mV
.33 to
3.2999 V
3.3 to 5 V
[1]
Harmonic Amplitude
Uncertainty
(% of Fundamental + V)
Absolute RMS
Harmonic Phase
Uncertainty of
Uncertainty
Composite Waveform
(Relative to
[1]
(% RMS + V)
Fundamental)
15 to 45 Hz
Harmonic
Amplitude
Range ( % of
Fundamental)
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 100 μV
0.5 °
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 100 μV
1°
1 to 2 kHz
0.1 to 50 %
0.1 % + 100 μV
3°
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 30 %
0.1 % + 500 μV
6°
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 1 mV
0.5 °
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 1 mV
0.75 °
1 to 2 kHz
0.1 to 50 %
0.1 % + 1 mV
2°
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 30 %
0.1 % + 2 mV
3°
Range,
Composite
Waveform
Harmonic
Frequency
0.2 % + 100 μV
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.2 % + 3 mV
0.5 °
45 Hz to 1 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.2 % + 3 mV
0.75 °
1 to 2 kHz
0.1 to 50 %
0.2 % + 3 mV
2°
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 30 %
0.3 % + 3 mV
3°
0.2 % + 1 mV
0.2 % + 2 mV
For harmonics that are < 1 % of the Fundamental, phase uncertainty is typical.
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP OFF
Range,
Composite
Waveform
29 to
329.9 μA
0.33 to
3.299 mA
3.3 to 32.99 mA
33 to 329.9 mA
[1]
[2]
15 to 45 Hz
Harmonic
Harmonic Amplitude Harmonic Phase
Amplitude
Uncertainty
Uncertainty
Range
(% of
(Relative to
(% of
[2]
Fundamental + A)
Fundamental)
[1]
Fundamental)
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 0.1 μA
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 0.1 μA
2°
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 50 %
0.1 % + 0.1 μA
3°
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 30 %
0.1 % + 0.13 μA
6°
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 1 μA
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 1 μA
0.6 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 50 %
0.1 % + 1 μA
0.75 °
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 30 %
0.1 % + 1.3 μA
2°
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 10 μA
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 50 %
0.1 % + 10 μA
0.6 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 30 %
0.1 % + 10 μA
0.75 °
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 13 μA
2°
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 100 μA
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 100 μA
0.75 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 50 %
0.1 % + 100 μA
1.5 °
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 30 %
0.1 % + 130 μA
3°
Harmonic
Frequency
Absolute RMS
Uncertainty of
Composite
Waveform
(% RMS + A)
0.2 % + 0.1 μA
0.2 % + 1 μA
0.2 % + 10 μA
0.2 % + 100 μA
All frequencies can have harmonics up to 100 % of the fundamental; uncertainties are not specified unless otherwise indicated.
For harmonics that are < 1 % of the Fundamental, phase uncertainty is typical.
11-5
5522A
Operators Manual
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP OFF (continued)
Range,
Composite
Waveform
Harmonic
Frequency
15 to 45 Hz
0.33 to
2.999 A
3 to 20.5 A
[1]
[2]
Harmonic
Harmonic Amplitude Harmonic Phase
Amplitude
Uncertainty
Uncertainty
Range
(% of
(Relative to
(% of
[2]
Fundamental + A)
Fundamental)
[1]
Fundamental)
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 1 mA
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 1 mA
0.6 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 20 %
0.1 % + 1 mA
1°
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 20 %
0.2 % + 1.3 mA
2°
15 to 45 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 10 mA
0.5 °
45 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 100 %
0.1 % + 10 mA
0.6 °
900 Hz to 2 kHz
0.1 to 20 %
0.1 % + 10 mA
1°
2 to 5 kHz
0.1 to 20 %
0.2 % + 10 mA
3°
Absolute RMS
Uncertainty of
Composite
Waveform
(% RMS + A)
0.2 % + 1 mA
0.2 % + 10 mA
All frequencies can have harmonics up to 100 % of the fundamental; uncertainties are not specified unless otherwise indicated.
For harmonics that are <1 % of the Fundamental, phase uncertainty is typical.
AC Current Specifications, LCOMP ON*
Range,
Composite
Waveform
Harmonic
Frequency
Harmonic Amplitude Harmonic Phase
Harmonic
Uncertainty
Amplitude
Uncertainty
(% of
Range (% of
(Relative to
[1]
[2]
Fundamental + A)
Fundamental)
Fundamental)
29 to
329.99 μA
15 to 65 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.5 % + 0.1 μA
0.5 °
65 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
1.0 % + 0.1 μA
2°
0.33 to
3.2999 mA
15 to 65 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.5 % + 1 μA
0.5 °
65 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
1.0 % + 1 μA
1°
3.3 to
32.999 mA
15 to 65 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.4 % + 10 μA
0.5 °
65 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.6 % + 10 μA
1°
33 to
329.9 mA
15 to 65 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.4 % + 100 μA
0.5 °
65 to 900 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.6 % + 100 μA
1°
0.33 to
2.999 A
15 to 65 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.5 % + 1 mA
0.75 °
65 to 440 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
1.0 % + 1 mA
1°
15 to 65 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
0.5 % + 10 mA
0.75 °
65 to 440 Hz
0.1 to 30 %
1.0 % + 10 mA
1°
3 to 20.5 A
* LCOMP ON is used to drive inductive loads like the 5500A/COIL and current clamps.
[1] All frequencies can have harmonics up to 100 % of the fundamental; uncertainties are not
specified unless otherwise indicated.
[2] For harmonics that are <1 % of the Fundamental, phase uncertainty is typical.
11-6
Absolute RMS
Uncertainty of
Composite
Waveform
(% RMS + A)
0.5 % + 1 μA
0.5 % + 1 μA
0.5 % + 10 μA
0.5 % + 100 μA
0.5 % + 1 mA
0.75 % + 10 mA
PQ Option
11
Flicker Simulation Mode
Voltage Range
1 mV to 1020 V
Current Range
29 μA to 20.5 A
Frequency of Fundamental
50 and 60 Hz
Amplitude Modulation Range
±100 %
Frequency of Modulation
0.1 to 40 Hz
Type of Modulation
Square or Sine
Short Term (10 minute) uncertainty of amplitude modulation
±0.1 % of nominal output + 0.05% of range
Flicker Modulation Timing Uncertainty
±0.1 ms
Settings for Pst = 1
Voltage Changes ΔV/V %
Changes per minute:
120V, 60 Hz
230V, 50 Hz
1 chg/min
3.166 %
2.724 %
2 chg/min
2.568 %
2.211 %
7 chg/min
1.695 %
1.459 %
39 chg/min
1.044 %
0.906 %
[1]
110 chg/min
0.841 %
0.725 %
1620 chg/min
0.547 %
0.402 %
4000 chg/min
N/A
2.40 %
4800 chg/min
3.920 %
N/A
nd
2 Push of OPER key, or Remote Command
Trigger Event
[1]
Values shown are nominal values per IEC 61000-4-15. The 5520A/PQ has a limited resolution of 0.02 % in the Flicker Simulation
Mode.
Sags & Swells Simulation Mode
Voltage Range
1 mV to 1020 V
Current Range
29 μA to 20.5 A
Frequency of Fundamental
45 to 65 Hz
Amplitude Modulation Range
±100 %
Ramp-Up Time
0.01 to 1 second
Duration of Sag or Swell
0.032 to 60 seconds
Trigger Event
2 Push of OPER key, or Remote Command
nd
Phase Specifications, Sinewave Outputs
The 5520A-PQ option has improved phase uncertainty in the normal, non-PQ, dual outputs as shown below. (See the
5520A specifications for all other output combinations.)
Output Combinations, 45 Hz to 65 Hz
AC Voltage
0.65 to 3.29999 V
6.5 to 32.9999 V
65 to 329.9999 V
AC Voltage (Auxiliary)
0.65 to 3.29999 V
AC Current (LCOMP OFF)
6.5 to 32.999 mA
65 to 329.99 mA
1-Year Absolute Uncertainty
0.07 °
0.65 to 10.9999 A
11-7
5522A
Operators Manual
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts)
This section describes the Composite Harmonics Function in the Volts Mode. Amps,
Volt-Volt, and Volt-Amp Modes, have similar menus and operation.
How to Enter the PQ Modes
To gain access to the power quality (PQ) functions, press m on the front panel. The
More Modes Menu, shown below, appears in the Control Display. Enter the PQ mode by
selecting the desired function, PQ:COMP HARMONIC or PQ: ΔAMPL. The PQ:COMP
HARMONIC mode accesses the Composite Harmonics Function and the PQ: ΔAMPL
mode accesses flicker and sags & swells simulation.
nn327f.eps
Note
When PQ:COMP HARMONIC or PQ: ΔAMPL mode is selected, the
Output Display reads "1.0000 V 60Hz" as a default.
How to Create Composite Harmonic Waveforms
Press the PQ:COMP HARMONIC blue softkey. The top-level PQ:COMP HARMONIC
Menu, shown below, appears.
nn333f.eps
From this menu, composite harmonic waveforms can be created and stored for later use.
7 pre-loaded waveforms may also be recalled from this point. To recall, edit, or create a
composite harmonic wave, press the SET WAVE blue softkey. The Wave Selection
Menu, as it appears in the Control Display, is shown below.
nn353f.eps
The Wave Selection Menus
From the Wave Selection Menu, the user has four choices:
1. RECALL WAVE
2. SAVE WAVE
3. NEW WAVE
4. EDIT WAVE
A brief explanation of each of these menus follows. More detailed explanations are later
in this section.
11-8
PQ Option
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts)
11
RECALL WAVE
Pressing the RECALL WAVE blue softkey displays the menu shown below. From this
menu, the user can:
•
recall the 2 preinstalled IEC waves
•
recall the 5 preinstalled NRC waves
•
recall up to five custom user-created waves
nn354f.eps
SAVE WAVE
Pressing the SAVE WAVE blue softkey displays the menu shown below. From this
menu, the user can save up to 5 custom-made waves, storing them in the calibrator nonvolatile memory.
nn355f.eps
NEW WAVE
Pressing the NEW WAVE blue softkey displays the menu shown below. From this menu,
the user can create new waves and adjust their individual parameters. More on this menu
can be found by referring to "Setting the Waves (Harmonics)" later in this section.
nn334f.eps
EDIT WAVE
Pressing the EDIT WAVE blue softkey also displays the menu shown above, or a similar
menu if a wave is already in use. From this menu, the user can adjust the individual
parameters of the waveform that is currently active. If no waveform has been selected
from one of the predefined sets or created using the NEW WAVE feature, the values are
initialized to their "off" states.
How to Create New Waves
Note
The procedures for creating a new wave and editing an existing wave are
essentially the same. The difference between the NEW WAVE and EDIT
WAVE menus is that under the NEW WAVE section, all harmonic
parameters default at "0" until the user changes those parameters thus,
creating a new wave.
11-9
5522A
Operators Manual
In the EDIT WAVE Menu, a wave that has either been in use, or a wave
that has been recalled can be edited. Although it is possible to define a new
waveform using the EDIT WAVE menu option, it is not recommended as the
user will have to check harmonics A through O to ensure they are all off.
After entering the PQ Mode and accessing the Wave Selection Menus (explained
previously in this section), complex waveforms can be created and /or modified. To
create a new waveform, press the NEW WAVE blue softkey. Pressing the NEW WAVE
blue softkey will ensure that any previously entered harmonic values will not be present.
The menu shown below appears in the Control Display. This menu allows the user to
specify:
•
any integer harmonic, from the second to the 63rd
•
up to 15 harmonics can be entered, labeled HARMNIC A through HARMNIC O
•
the amplitude of the harmonic, as a percentage of the fundamental
•
the phase of the harmonic relative to the fundamental
Press the HARMNIC A off blue softkey and notice that the off/on display changes to
"on".
nn334f.eps
Harmonic Number
To specify or edit the harmonic number, press the # HF/F blue softkey and enter the
desired harmonic. For example, press 3 then E to select the 3rd harmonic.
Harmonic Amplitude
Press the AMPL blue softkey to enter the amplitude of the harmonic as a percentage of
the fundamental. For example, press 10 then E for 10 %.
Phase
To specify or edit the phase of the harmonic, press the φ blue softkey to set the phase.
Continue with the example by entering a phase of 180 degrees.
Following this example, the Control Display will now show the following:
nn335f.eps
To enter another harmonic, press the NEXT HARMNIC blue softkey and repeat the
previous procedure. A maximum of 15 harmonics may be entered. When complete, the
NEXT HARMNIC blue softkey may be pressed repeatedly to examine the contents of
each wave.
Once certain that all values are properly entered, press P. The waveform will not take
effect until Pis pressed. If the calibrator is in Operate Mode, the new waveform will be
re-computed and the calibrator will pause while it builds the composite waveform. If the
calibrator is in Standby Mode, the new waveform will not be built until O is pressed.
11-10
PQ Option
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts)
11
Note
The resultant waveform has the RMS value as shown on the left-hand
display of the calibrator. Depending upon how many harmonics were
entered, this value is most likely different than the fundamental value.
Note
The build time that the calibrator requires is dependent upon the
complexity of the waveform. Waveforms with only HARMNIC A activated
take the shortest time. Waveforms with five tones (i.e. HARMNIC A – E
activated) take longer. The longest build time is for custom waveforms with
more than five tones. The preinstalled IEC and NRC waveforms, because
they have up to 49 harmonics, take over 1.5 minutes to build.
To minimize the build time of a waveform, leave the calibrator in Standby
whenever recalling, editing, or creating waveforms. The unit should be in
Operate Mode only when it is certain that the waveform is defined.
After building a waveform, pressing the "V" key will display the value of the
fundamental and also the range the calibrator is in.
How to Edit Waves
Note
The procedures for creating a new wave and editing a wave are essentially
the same. The difference between the NEW WAVE and EDIT WAVE menus
is that under the NEW WAVE section, all harmonic parameters default at
"0" until the user changes those parameters. In the EDIT WAVE Menu, a
wave that has either been in use, or a wave that was recalled can be edited.
To edit existing wave parameters, press the EDIT WAVE blue softkey. The Control
Display will change to the menu shown below. Press the HARMNIC A off blue softkey
and notice that the off/on display changes to "on". If there is already a composite
harmonic waveform in use, it may be edited from this menu.
nn334f.eps
Refer to "Creating New Waves" for a detailed description of how wave parameters can be
added and edited.
Note
Only the first 15 harmonics of a recalled IEC or NRC wave may be
changed or edited. Upon entering the EDIT WAVE menu, all harmonics
greater than 15 are removed from the waveform. Once the user exists the
EDIT WAVE menu (i.e. the HARMNIC A …. NEXT HARMNIC level), a new
waveform is built, since this wave does not have harmonics greater than 15.
How to Save Waves
Once a wave has been created or edited, the user may wish to save it for future use. To do
this, follow the steps for creating waves and editing wave harmonics. Then, from the
Wave Selection Menu, press the SAVE WAVE blue softkey. The Save Menu, shown
below, appears on the display.
11-11
5522A
Operators Manual
nn355f.eps
From the SAVE Menu, 5 waves can be saved. For example, press the SAVE TO
CUSTOM1 blue softkey. The calibrator will store the wave in non-volatile memory and
the menu will revert to the Wave Selection Menu.
How to Recall Saved Waves
From the Wave Selection Menu, press the RECALL WAVE blue softkey. The menu
shown below appears in the Control Display.
nn354f.eps
From the Recall Wave Menu select the RECALL CUSTOM blue softkey. The Custom
Wave Menu shown below appears in the Control Display.
nn356f.eps
Select the Custom Wave blue softkey designating where the created wave was stored
(RECALL CUSTOM1-5). The Control Display will change to the RECALL WAVE
Menu (shown below), and the calibrator will output the recalled wave.
nn354f.eps
Preinstalled Waves
The calibrator comes with 7 preinstalled waves. There are two IEC waves, and five NRC
waves.
IEC Waves
The IEC waves (IEC A and IEC D) are waveforms referred to by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) in IEC 61000-3-2, Limits for Harmonic Current
Emissions. The Fluke Corporation implementation is based on formulas provided by the
National Physical Laboratory (NPL) in the United Kingdom. These formulas specify
limits for harmonic current emissions. The IEC A waveform is the limit for Class A
11-12
PQ Option
Composite Harmonics Function (Amps)
11
equipment. The IEC D waveform is the limit for Class D equipment. These waveforms,
when used in the PQ current output mode, are particularly useful for checking the
performance of instruments that are designed to check these limits.
NRC Waves
NRC 2 and NRC 4 are voltage waveforms captured in actual fieldwork by the NRC.
NRC 3 and NRC 5 are current waveforms captured in actual fieldwork by the NRC.
NRC 2 and NRC 3, and NRC 4 and NRC 5 are voltage and current combinations.
Waveforms 2 to 5 have up to 49 harmonics, with many of these with amplitudes less than
1 % of the fundamental.
NRC7030 is a synthesized waveform with rich harmonic content (25 harmonics) and a
low crest factor, to give the measuring instrument the best signal to noise ratio. All 25
harmonics have an amplitude that is 10 % of the fundamental. This waveform is useful in
both the voltage and current mode to check the performance of power quality analyzers.
How to Recall Preinstalled IEC Waves
From the Wave Selection Menu, press the RECALL WAVE blue softkey. The Recall
Wave Menu appears in the Control Display. Press the RECALL IEC blue softkey. The
IEC Wave Menu, shown below, appears in the Control Display.
After choosing "IEC A" or "IEC D”, if the calibrator is in Standby mode, the RECALL
Menu appears again. The recalled wave will not be built until the calibrator is placed in
Operate Mode. Because of the complexity of these waves, the building process for these
waves is over one minute. If the calibrator is already in Operate Mode, the recomputing
message shows on the Control Display, then the RECALL Menu appears.
nn357f.eps
How to Recall Preinstalled NRC Waves
From the Wave Selection Menu, press the RECALL WAVE blue softkey. The Recall
Wave Menu appears in the Control Display. Press the RECALL NRC blue softkey. The
NRC Wave Menu, shown below, appears in the Control Display.
If the calibrator is in Standby Mode, the RECALL Menu appears. The recalled wave will
not be built until the calibrator is placed in Operate Mode. Because of the complexity of
these waves, the building process for these waves is over one minute. If the calibrator is
already in Operate Mode, the recomputing message shows on the Control Display, then
the RECALL Menu appears.
nn358f.eps
Composite Harmonics Function (Amps)
Creating and editing waves for current outputs is similar to editing waves for voltage
outputs described previously. After entering the PQ Mode and accessing Composite
Harmonic Function, create a composite harmonic current waveform by entering the
11-13
5522A
Operators Manual
desired current into the calibrator. For example, press “1 A” E. The following
menu appears:
nn336f.eps
Because the calibrator is now set up to output current, any previously created wave is
removed. A new wave can be created by pressing the SET WAVE blue softkey. The
menu shown below appears.
nn353f.eps
Press the NEW WAVE or EDIT WAVE blue softkey. The menu shown below appears in
the Control Display.
nn334f.eps
From this menu, the user may edit the wave harmonics. Refer to "Creating Wave
Harmonics" earlier in this section.
How to Set LCOMP
The LCOMP blue softkey enables/disables internal compensation for inductive loads
such as multi-turn coils. Refer to "Setting AC Current Output" in Chapter 4 of this
manual for a detailed discussion of this feature. Note that setting LCOMP to "on"
degrades the accuracy of higher frequency harmonics as indicated in the specifications.
Output AUX
This indicator is for information purposes only. The indicator displays which current
output is presently being used by the calibrator. The Control Display will show the
Output Information Menu (I OUT AUX when current is present at the AUX output and I
OUT 20A if the current is present at the 20A output).
In the PQ mode, the operation of the Output Information Menu behaves slightly different
than in the normal operating mode described in Chapter 4. In the Composite Harmonic
mode, the calibrator does not update the Output Information Menu until the waveform is
built. For example, if the calibrator is presently set at 10 A, 60 Hz, with STBY showing
in the Output Display, and the user wishes to output 1 A by pressing “1A E", the
Output Information menu will not automatically change to OUTPUT AUX until O is
pressed.
When in the SET WAVE menus, the Output Information menu is not shown. In those
menus, if O is pressed and the Control Display shows an overcompliance message, it
is because the output location has changed. Clear the message and move the unit under
11-14
PQ Option
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts and Amps)
11
test to the proper terminals.
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts and Amps)
The operation of this mode is similar to the Composite Harmonics Mode described for
voltage outputs. After entering the PQ Mode and accessing the Composite Harmonic
Function, explained previously in this section, enter the desired voltage and current into
the calibrator. For example, 1 V and 1 A. The following menu appears:
nn359f.eps
Because the calibrator is now set up to output voltage and current, any previously created
wave is removed. A new wave can be created by pressing the WAVE MENUS blue
softkey. The menu shown below appears.
nn360f.eps
Begin editing either the volt or current wave by pressing the SET V WAVE or SET I
WAVE blue softkey. The Wave Selection Menu shown below appears.
nn353f.eps
From this menu, the user may edit the wave harmonics. Refer to "Editing Wave
Harmonics" earlier in this section.
Note
Building a wave can be time consuming, especially if using one of the
preinstalled waves. To minimize the time the calibrator uses to rebuild the
waveform, leave the calibrator in Standby Mode whenever recalling or
creating waves. Only when O is pressed will the calibrator recompute
the waveform.
How to Set LCOMP
The LCOMP softkey enables/disables internal compensation for inductive loads such as
multi-turn coils. Refer to "Setting AC Current Output" in Chapter 4 of this manual for a
detailed discussion of this feature. Note that setting LCOMP to ON degrades the accuracy
of higher frequency harmonics as indicated in the specifications.
Output AUX
This indicator is for information purposes only. The indicator displays which current
output is presently being used by the calibrator. The Control Display will show
11-15
5522A
Operators Manual
I OUT AUX when current is present at the AUX output and I OUT 20A if the current is
present at the 20A output.
In the PQ mode, the operation of the Output Information behaves slightly different than
in the normal operating mode described in Chapter 4. In the Composite Harmonic mode,
the calibrator does not update the Output Information Menu until the waveform is built.
For example, if the calibrator is presently set at 10 A, 60 Hz, with STBY showing in the
Output Display, and the user wishes to output 1 A by pressing “1A E", the Output
Information menu will not automatically change to OUTPUT AUX until Ois pressed.
When in the SET WAVE menu, the Output Information Menu is not shown. In those
menus, if O is pressed and the Control Display shows an overcompliance message, it
is because the output location has changed. Clear the message and move the unit under
test to the proper terminals.
Φ & REF Menus
In the Volts and Current Dual Output mode, phase between the voltage and current
outputs can be specified by the user. These menus operate in the same fashion as the
normal dual output mode, as described in Chapter 4.
Composite Harmonics Function (Volts and Volts)
After entering the PQ Mode and accessing Composite Harmonic Function (explained
previously in this section), enter the correct voltages into the calibrator. For example, 1 V
and 2 V. The following menu appears:
nn361f.eps
The V @ NOR and V @ AUX indicators on the Control Display are for information
purposes only. This message is letting the user know that there is voltage present at the
NORMAL or AUX output terminals.
Because the calibrator is now set up to output voltage and current, any previously created
wave is removed. A new wave can be created by pressing the WAVE MENUS blue
softkey. The menu shown below appears.
nn362f.eps
Begin editing either voltage wave by pressing the SET NRM WAVE or SET AUX
WAVE blue softkeys. The Wave Selection Menu shown below appears.
nn353f.eps
11-16
PQ Option
11
Delta (()Amplitude, Flicker Function (Volts)
From this menu, the user may edit the wave harmonics. Refer to "Editing Wave
Harmonics" earlier in this section.
Note
Building a wave can be time consuming, especially if using one of the
preinstalled waves. To minimize the time the calibrator has to rebuild the
waveform, leave the calibrator in Standby Mode whenever recalling or
creating waves. Only when O is pressed will the calibrator recompute
the waveform.
Φ & REF Menus
In the Volts and Volts dual output mode, phase between the voltage and current outputs
can be varied by the user. These menus operate in the same fashion as the normal dual
output mode, as described in Chapter 4.
Delta (Δ)Amplitude, Flicker Function (Volts)
Note
Before starting this section, refer to "Entering the PQ Modes earlier in this
chapter.
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Volts)
Enter the PQ Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode. From this mode, the user can simulate a
continuous change in amplitude of the output (flicker), or a single (one time) change in
output amplitude (sag & swell condition). The Δ AMPL mode menu, shown below,
appears in the Control Display.
nn363f.eps
How to Select the Flicker Function
From the PQ: Δ AMPL Menu, select SET Δ. The Flicker Menu, shown below appears in
the Control Display.
nn344f.eps
The TYPE blue softkey specifies the function, "flicker" for the flicker function and
"single" for the Sags & Swells function. Ensure that the TYPE is set to flicker.
How to Set the Repeat Frequency
From the Flicker Menu, press the RPTFREQ blue softkey to enter the frequency of the
flicker event. This period is also referred to as the flicker modulation frequency.
How to Set the Modulation Pattern
Press the MODWAVE blue softkey to select either squarewave or sinewave modulation.
11-17
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Set the Flicker Amplitude
The ΔV/V blue softkey brings up a screen in the Control Display allowing the user to
specify the amplitude of the deviation as a percentage of the nominal output value. The
percentage value may be positive or negative.
PST Values
IEC 61000-4-15 (“Flickermeter – Functional and Design Specifications”) defines the
severity of flicker in terms of a short term (“st”) observation period of 10 minutes. For
both 50 HZ and 60 Hz, the calibrator has 7 combinations of amplitude changes and
frequency to give a Pst reading of 1 on a flickermeter. These 7 values can be accessed by
pressing the Pst = 1 VALUES blue softkey.
When the Pst = 1 VALUES blue softkey is pressed, the menu shown below appears.
nn377f.eps
Use the ↑ and ↓ blue softkeys to navigate back and forth between the 7 installed Pst
values. Select the desired Pst value then press the LOAD VALUE blue softkey. The
Control Display will now revert back to the Flicker Menu. Notice that the new Pst value
has now been loaded.
The Pst 1 softkey chooses classifiers that effectively change the flickermeter Pst readings
from 1 to the chosen values. There are 1-5 classifiers.
The Table 60 Hz softkey chooses the appropriate delta voltage and time combinations for
either 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. Note that this selection also changes the output
frequency of the calibrator.
How to Set Phase and Reference in the Δ AMPL Function
For a detailed description of this procedure, refer to "Setting the Output" in Chapter 4 of
this manual.
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Flicker Function (Current)
Simulating flicker for a current output is similar to a voltage output. There are additional
menus (e.g. LCOMP and OUTPUT) that pertain to the current output. Refer to the
previous section for more information.
Note
Before starting this section, refer to "Entering the PQ Modes " earlier in
this chapter.
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Amps)
Enter the PQ Delta (Δ) Amplitude mode (PQ: ΔAMPL). Press the ΔAMPL softkey to
access the Delta (Δ) amplitude functions. The ΔAMPL Menu, shown below, appears in
the Control Display. From this mode the flicker and sags/swells functions are accessible
by pressing the SETΔ blue softkey.
11-18
PQ Option
11
Delta (() Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Volts)
nn363f.eps
More Information
For more information regarding the Delta (Δ) Amplitude and Flicker Function in Current
mode, refer to "Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Flicker Function (Volts)".
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Volts)
This mode allows the user to output a single or one-time amplitude deviation. From this
mode, the user can specify the RAMP-UP time, the WIDTH of the event, and the %
deviation.
Note
Before starting this section, refer to "Entering the PQ Modes " earlier in
this chapter.
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (Volts)
Press the ΔAMPL softkey to access the Delta (Δ) amplitude functions. From this mode
the flicker and single (sags & swells) functions are accessible. The ΔAMPL Menu, shown
below, appears in the Control Display.
nn363f.eps
Press the TYPE flicker blue softkey. This will put the calibrator in the single (Sag &
Swells) Mode.
How to Set the Ramp-up Period
Press the RAMP-UP blue softkey. The Control Display changes to a screen, shown
below, instructing the user to enter the period over which the output ramps to the selected
value.
nn365f.eps
How to Set the Sag & Swell Width
The WIDTH blue softkey allows the user to specify the duration of the sag or swell event
in seconds.
How to Set the Sag/Swell Amplitude
The ΔI/I softkey allows the user to specify the amplitude of the deviation as a percentage
of the nominal output value. The value is positive for swell events and negative for sags.
11-19
5522A
Operators Manual
How to Set Triggers
Press the SET TRIGS blue softkey. The SET TRIGS menu, shown below, appears in the
Control Display. The Post Trigger Delay is used to provide a variable-length delay after
the calibrator receives a *TRG command over the remote interface or manually from the
front panel.
nn342f.eps
Press either of the last two blue softkeys and the Control Display changes to the screen
shown below. This screen prompts the user for the new delay value. Enter the new value
and press the PREV MENU button to load the value. The trigger is now set. To activate
the trigger, press O.
nn364f.eps
Example
Assume a specified sag event with the following characteristics:
•
The Post Trigger Delay has been set to 3 seconds, which means the event will not
begin until 3 seconds after the trigger has occurred.
•
A nominal output voltage of 120 V @ 60 Hz has been entered
•
The ramp up period is set to 1.0 second
•
The event width is set to 5 seconds with a Delta (Δ) amplitude of -25 %
Assuming the calibrator is in Operate Mode and a *TRG command is received over the remote
interface, the calibrator will delay for 3 seconds and then begin ramping the output down, over a
1.0 second interval to 90 Volts. The output will remain at 90 Volts for 5 seconds after which it
will return immediately to the nominal value, in this case 120 V. If using the PQ from the front
panel, pushing O will trigger this event.
Delta (Δ) Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function
(Current)
Creating and editing waves for current outputs is similar to editing waves for voltage
outputs described previously.
Note
Before starting this section, refer to "Entering the PQ Modes " earlier in
this chapter.
Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode (AMPS)
Press the ΔAMPL softkey to access the Delta (Δ) amplitude functions. From this mode
the Flicker and Sags/Swells functions are accessible.
11-20
PQ Option
11
Delta (() Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Current)
The ΔAMPL Menu, shown below, appears in the Control Display, assuming a current
(amps) value has been entered.
nn351f.eps
How to Set Triggers
Refer to "Setting Triggers" earlier in this chapter.
How to Set the Ramp-up Period
Press the RAMP-UP blue softkey. The Control Display changes to the screen, shown
below, instructing the user to enter the period over which the output ramps to the selected
value. The ramp period applies for both Sags and Swells.
nn365f.eps
How to Set the Sag/Swell Width
The WIDTH blue softkey allows the user to specify the duration of the SAG or Swell
event in seconds.
How to Set the Sag/Swell Amplitude
The ΔI/I softkey allows the user to specify the amplitude of the deviation as a percentage
of the nominal output value. The value is positive for swell events and negative for sags.
Delta (Δ)Amplitude Mode (Volts and Amps)
The Delta (Δ) Amplitude Mode may also be used for voltage and current dual outputs.
The following example demonstrates how to do this.
Example
Assume a specified Sag event with the following characteristics:
•
10 Volts, 1 Amp, at 60 Hz
•
A Post Trigger Delay set to 3 seconds
•
The event width is set to 5 seconds with a voltage delta () amplitude of -25 % and
a current delta () amplitude of -50 %.
•
The ramp up period is set to 1.0 second
To create this complex waveform, follow these steps:
1. Press the PQ:AMPL blue softkey
2. Enter 10 Volts, 1 A, 60 Hz
3. Press the MORE OPTIONS blue softkey
4. Press SET .
The following menu appears:
11-21
5522A
Operators Manual
nn366f.eps
This menu allows editing of the delta () amplitude of both the volts and the current in
the single (sag or swells) mode.
5. To edit the delta () volts part of this waveform, press the V/V blue softkey. At
the prompt, enter -25 percent, then press E, and finally P.
6. To edit the delta () current part of this waveform, press the I/I blue softkey. At
the prompt, enter -50 percent, then press E, and finally P.
7. Press the RAMP-UP blue softkey and select 1 second, then P.
8. Press the WIDTH blue softkey and enter 3, then P.
Assuming the calibrator is in Operate Mode and a remote *TRG command is received,
the calibrator will delay for 3 seconds and then begin ramping the output down, over a
1.0 second interval to 7.5 Volts and 0.5 Amps. The output will remain at this level for
5 seconds after which it will return immediately to the nominal value, in this case 10 V
and 1 A.
Remote Commands
This section documents the IEEE-488/RS-232 remote commands for the PQ option.
Remote commands duplicate activities that can be initiated from the front panel in local
operation. The following is an alphabetical listing of the PQ option remote commands
with examples. For more information on using remote commands, see Chapter 5,
"Remote Operation".
Note
SEC (or Secondary) refers to the output of the AUX jacks when using dual
outputs from the 5522A. When a dual output is in use, the NORMAL jacks
will be the PRI (or Primary) output and the AUX jacks will be the SEC
(secondary) output. If the AUX jacks are used for single outputs, they are
the PRI output.
Commands
CHIEC <OUTPUT CH.>, <IEC WAVEFROM NUMBER>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set composite harmonic wave to a preset IEC wave.
<OUTPUT CH.> is PRI or SEC
<IEC WAVEFROM NUMBER> is 1 or 2
Example: CHIEC PRI,2 ---- sets primary output wave to IEC waveform number 2.
______________________________________________________________________
11-22
PQ Option
11
Delta (() Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Current)
CHM? <PRESET NUMBER>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Return the contents of one of the 5 composite harmonic preset waveforms.
<PRESET NUMBER> is 1 to 5. The return format is the same as CHTONES?
Example: CHM? 2
______________________________________________________________________
CHMRECALL <OUTPUT CH.>, <USER DEFINED WAVEFROM NUMBER>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set composite harmonic wave to a previously memorized preset.
<OUTPUT CH.> is PRI or SEC
<USER DEFINED WAVEFROM NUMBER> is 1 to 5
Example: CHMRECALL PRI,2 sets primary output wave to preset 2
______________________________________________________________________
CHMSAVE <OUTPUT CH.>, <USER DEFINED WAVEFROM NUMBER>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Save the current wave as a user defined preset waveform.
<OUTPUT CH.> is PRI or SEC
<USER DEFINED WAVEFROM NUMBER> is 1 to 5
Example: CHMSAVE PRI,2 saves primary output wave as preset 2
______________________________________________________________________
CHNRC <OUTPUT CH.>, <NRC WAVEFROM NUMBER>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set composite harmonic wave to a preset NRC wave.
<OUTPUT CH.> is PRI or SEC
<NRC WAVEFROM NUMBER> is 1 to 5. NRC7030 is 1.
Example: CHNRC PRI,2 ---- sets primary output wave to NRC waveform number 2
______________________________________________________________________
CHTONES <OUTPUT CH.>, <HARMONIC>, <HARMONIC AMPLITUDE>,
<HARMONIC PHASE>, <...>,<...>, ...
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Overlapped, Coupled)
Specify up to 15 harmonic/amplitude/phase groups
<OUTPUT CH.> is PRI or SEC
<HARMONIC> is 2 - 63
<HARMONIC AMPL> is 0.1 % to 100 %
Harmonic amplitude as proportion of fundamental; the PCT unit may be used; if no unit,
a fraction is implied (i.e. 30PCT and 0.3 both indicate the harmonic amplitude should be
30 % of the fundamental.
<HARMONIC PHASE> is +/- 0.1 to 360.0 degrees Harmonic phase relative to
11-23
5522A
Operators Manual
fundamental in degrees. Numbers outside +/- 180 are automatically forced into that range
by adding or subtracting a multiple of 360.
Example: CHTONES PRI,3,33pct,0,5,20pct,0,7,16pct,0,9,11pct,0,11,9pct,0
Example: CHTONES SEC,3,0.11,-180,5,0.04,0,7,0.02,-180,0,0,0,0,0,0
_______________________________________________________________________
CHTONES? <OUTPUT CH.>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Return present settings for harmonics in the format of harmonic number, amplitude, and
phase. All harmonics that are not set return to a 0 value.
<OUTPUT CH.> is PRI or SEC
Example: CHTONES? PRI
Example of return string: 2, 0.10, 30, 3, 0.02, -150, …
_______________________________________________________________________
DELTAMAG <OUTPUT CH.>, <DELTA_AMPLITUDE>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set the amplitude deviation in Delta Amplitude modes (Sags/Swells & Flicker).
<OUTPUT CH.> is PRI or SEC
<DELTA_AMPLITUDE> is 0.01 % to 100.0 %
Example: DELTAMAG PRI, 0.1 deviate the Primary channel output by +10 %
Example: DELTAMAG SEC, -0.1 deviate the Primary channel output by +10 %
_______________________________________________________________________
DELTAMAG? <OUTPUT CH.>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Return the amplitude deviation of the selected channel in Delta Amplitude modes.
<OUTPUT CH.> is PRI or SEC
Example: DELTAMAG? PRI
_______________________________________________________________________
DURATION <EVT_DURATION>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set the event duration in Single (Sag/Swell) Delta Amplitude mode.
<DELTA_DURATION> is .032 Sec. to 60 Sec.
Example: DURATION 49.0s --- Set the event duration to 49 Seconds
Example: DURATION 10.3 --- Set the event duration to 10.3 seconds (S is optional)
_______________________________________________________________________
DURATION?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Return the event duration in Single (Sag/Swell) Delta Amplitude mode.
Example: DURATION?
11-24
PQ Option
11
Delta (() Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Current)
_______________________________________________________________________
EVTMODE <E_MODE>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set the event mode for Delta Amplitude operation
<E_MODE> is REPEAT --- Flicker operation
SINGLE --- Sag/Swell operation
Example: EVTMODE SINGLE
_______________________________________________________________________
EVTMODE?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the event mode in Delta Amplitude operation.
SINGLE --- for Sag/Swell operation
REPEAT --- for flicker operation
Example: EVTMODE?
_______________________________________________________________________
FLICKWAV <F_WAVE>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set the flicker modulation type; Sine or Square.
<F_WAVE> is SINE or SQUARE
Example: FLICKWAV SQUARE
Example: FLICKWAV SINE
_______________________________________________________________________
FLICKWAV?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Return the flicker modulation type; Sine or Square.
_______________________________________________________________________
FUND?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the amplitude of the fundamental in composite harmonic mode.
Returns all zeros if not in a composite harmonic function.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Output amplitude
(Character) Units (V or A)
(Float) Second output amplitude for dual output functions 0 if no second amplitude)
(Character) Units of second amplitude (0 if no second amplitude)
Example: 1.883000E-01,A,0.000000E+00,0
_______________________________________________________________________
11-25
5522A
Operators Manual
PQ <MODE>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Enter/Exit the Power Quality mode.
<MODE> is OFF --- for normal 5522 mode
CH --- for Composite Harmonic mode
DAMPL --- for Sag/Swell or Flicker mode
Example: PQ CH --- Enter the Composite Harmonics mode
_______________________________________________________________________
PQ?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns the Power Quality calibration mode.
OFF --- currently operating in normal 5522 mode
CH
--- currently in composite Harmonic mode
DAMPL --- currently in Sag/Swell or Flicker mode
Example: PQ?
_______________________________________________________________________
POSTTRIGDELAY <D_TIME>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set a post trigger delay in Single (Sag/Swell) mode.
<D_TIME> is 0.001 Sec to 60 Sec
Example: POSTTRIGDELAY 3
_______________________________________________________________________
POSTTRIGDELAY?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Read the post trigger delay in Single (Sag/Swell) mode.
Example: POSTTRIGDELAY?
_______________________________________________________________________
RAMPTIME <R_TIME>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set the period over which the output amplitude is "ramped" up/down to the selected Delta
V / V value in Single (Sag/Swell) mode.
<R_TIME> is 0.001 Sec to 60.0 Sec
Example: RAMPTIME 5.3
_______________________________________________________________________
11-26
PQ Option
11
Delta (() Amplitude, Single (Sags & Swells) Function (Current)
RAMPTIME?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Read the current Ramptime setting.
Example: RAMPTIME?
_______________________________________________________________________
RPTFREQ <MOD_FREQ>
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Coupled)
Set the modulation frequency in Flicker mode.
<MOD_FREQ> 0.001Hz to 30.0Hz
Example: RPTFREQ 10Hz
Example: RPTFREQ 5
_______________________________________________________________________
RPTFREQ?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Return the modulation frequently in Flicker mode.
Example: RPTFREQ?
_______________________________________________________________________
TRIGGED?
(IEEE-488, RS-232, Sequential)
Returns 0 if no trig even, 1 if triggered
_______________________________________________________________________
Example Strings
The following sets up a Flicker output on the primary channel, with a square wave
modulation frequency of 0.65 Hz and a delta V/V of 0.91 %. The output voltage is 120 V,
60 Hz:
pq dampl; evtmode repeat; flickwav square; rptfreq .65;
deltamag pri, .0091; out 120v, 60hz; oper
11-27
5522A
Operators Manual
Performance Tests
To verify the PQ option meets its specifications, refer to the performance tests in this
section. The tables are for use by qualified metrology personnel only.
These tables refer to waveforms that are described elsewhere in this manual, as well as
other special waveforms that need to be created in the Composite Harmonics mode. Note
that all tests should be performed with the 5522A EARTH key enabled.
Verification Table
Table 11-1. PQ Option Verification Table
Verification Tests for AC
Voltage
11-28
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
329.99 mV
I
0.12 V
50.0 Hz
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
3.2999 V
I
0.45 V
60 Hz
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
32.999 V
I
12 V
60 Hz
Harmonic
rms
1
3
6
9
12
15
16
23
28
33
38
43
48
53
58
63
rms
1
3
6
9
12
15
16
23
28
33
38
43
48
53
58
63
rms
1
3
6
9
Fundamental
Phase
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
0
0
0
Amplitude
(V)
0.12000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.03000
0.45000
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
0.11250
12.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
Specification
(V)
2.500E-04
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
9.00E-5
0.001000
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.000513
0.0250
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
Specification
(deg)
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.3
0.3
0.3
PQ Option
Verification Table
11
Table 11-1. PQ Option Verification Table (cont.)
Verification Tests for AC
Voltage
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
329.99 V
II
210 V
60 Hz
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
1020 V
III
600 V
50 Hz
Harmonic
12
15
16
23
28
33
38
43
48
53
58
63
rms
1
2
3
5
7
8
12
13
16
18
21
23
25
26
30
33
rms
1
2
3
5
7
8
12
13
16
18
21
23
25
26
30
33
Fundamental
Phase
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
30.00%
30.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
5.00%
5.00%
5.00%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
30.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
5.00%
5.00%
5.00%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Amplitude
(V)
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0000
210.0000
91.6730
91.6730
91.6730
91.6730
91.6730
27.5020
27.5020
9.1670
9.1670
9.1670
9.1670
9.1670
9.1670
4.5840
4.5840
4.5840
600.0000
241.796
241.796
241.796
241.796
241.796
241.796
72.539
24.180
24.180
24.180
24.180
24.180
24.180
12.090
14.1880
14.1880
Specification
(V)
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.0070
0.4300
0.3917
0.3917
0.3917
0.3917
0.3917
0.3917
0.3917
0.3917
0.3917
0.3917
0.4984
0.4984
0.4984
0.4984
0.4984
0.4984
1.300
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.310
1.610
1.610
1.610
1.610
Specification
(deg)
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.2
1.2
1.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
11-29
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 11-1. PQ Option Verification Table (cont.)
Verification Tests for AC
Voltage
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
rms
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Range
1020 V
rms
Wave
IV
1
RMS Output 450 V
2
Frequency
50 Hz
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Range
32.999 V rms
Wave
SQUARE 1
RMS Output 12 V
3
Frequency
60 Hz
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
11-30
329.99 V
IV
150 V
50 Hz
Harmonic
Fundamental
Phase
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
30.00%
30.00%
30.00%
30.00%
30.00%
30.00%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
30.00%
30.00%
30.00%
30.00%
30.00%
30.00%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00%
33.30%
20.00%
14.30%
11.10%
9.10%
7.70%
6.70%
5.90%
5.30%
4.80%
4.30%
4.00%
3.70%
3.40%
3.20%
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Amplitude
(V)
150.0000
54.627
54.627
54.627
54.627
54.627
54.627
54.627
16.388
16.388
16.388
16.388
16.388
16.388
450.0000
163.880
163.880
163.880
163.880
163.880
163.880
163.880
49.164
49.164
49.164
49.164
49.164
49.164
12.00000
10.87300
3.62100
2.17500
1.55500
1.20700
0.98948
0.83725
0.72852
0.64153
0.57629
0.52193
0.46756
0.43494
0.40232
0.36970
0.34795
Specification
(V)
0.3100
0.1299
0.1299
0.1299
0.1299
0.1299
0.1299
0.1299
0.1624
0.1624
0.1624
0.1624
0.1624
0.1624
1.0000
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.5122
0.02500
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
0.01487
Specification
(deg)
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
PQ Option
Verification Table
11
Table 11-1. PQ Option Verification Table (cont.)
Verification Tests for AC
Voltage
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
329.99 V
NRC 7030
230 V
50 Hz
Harmonic
Fundamental
rms
1
100.00%
2
10.00%
3
10.00%
4
10.00%
5
10.00%
6
10.00%
7
10.00%
8
10.00%
9
10.00%
10
10.00%
11
10.00%
12
10.00%
13
10.00%
14
10.00%
15
10.00%
16
10.00%
17
10.00%
18
10.00%
19
10.00%
20
10.00%
21
10.00%
22
10.00%
23
10.00%
24
10.00%
25
10.00%
Verification Tests for AC Voltage (AUX)
Range
5V
rms
Wave
V
1
100.00%
RMS Output 1.9 V
3
100.00%
Frequency
60 Hz
6
100.00%
9
100.00%
12
100.00%
16
100.00%
17
100.00%
23
100.00%
28
100.00%
33
100.00%
38
30.00%
43
30.00%
48
30.00%
53
30.00%
58
30.00%
63
30.00%
Phase
Amplitude
(V)
Specification
(V)
Specification
(deg)
-115.5
1.1
-179.6
13.3
9.3
73.5
152.1
-19.9
-167.8
85.9
-37.3
16.1
-28.1
94
-173.4
129.5
-113.9
37.6
-52.3
1.5
14.3
150.2
7.1
161.3
230.0000
206.5460
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
20.6550
0.4700
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
0.8512
1.0700
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1.90000
0.58524
0.58524
0.58524
0.58524
0.58524
0.58524
0.58524
0.58524
0.58524
0.58524
0.17577
0.17577
0.17577
0.17577
0.17577
0.17577
0.00580
0.00417
0.00417
0.00417
0.00417
0.00417
0.00417
0.00417
0.00417
0.00417
0.00417
0.00476
0.00476
0.00476
0.00476
0.00476
0.00476
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
11-31
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 11-1. PQ Option Verification Table (cont.)
Verification Tests for
AC Current
Harmonic
Fundamental
Verification Tests for AC Current, LCOMP OFF
Range
329.9 mA rms
Wave
VI
1
100.00%
RMS Output 0.11 A
3
100.00%
Frequency
50 Hz
6
100.00%
9
100.00%
12
100.00%
15
100.00%
18
100.00%
23
50.00%
28
50.00%
33
50.00%
38
30.00%
43
30.00%
48
30.00%
53
30.00%
58
30.00%
63
30.00%
Range
2.999 A
rms
Wave
VII
1
100.00%
RMS Output 1.1 A
3
100.00%
Frequency 50 Hz
6
100.00%
9
100.00%
12
100.00%
15
100.00%
18
20.00 %
23
20.00 %
28
20.00 %
33
20.00 %
38
20.00 %
43
20.00 %
48
20.00 %
53
20.00 %
58
20.00 %
63
20.00 %
Range
20.5 A
rms
Wave
VII
1
100.00%
Rms Output 4.5 A
3
100.00%
Frequency 50 Hz
6
100.00%
9
100.00%
12
100.00%
15
100.00%
18
100.00%
23
20.00%
28
20.00%
33
20.00%
38
20.00%
43
20.00%
48
20.00%
11-32
Phase
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Amplitude
(A)
0.11000
0.03821
0.03821
0.03821
0.03821
0.03821
0.03821
0.03821
0.01910
0.01910
0.01910
0.01146
0.01146
0.01146
0.01146
0.01146
0.01146
1.10000
0.40547
0.40547
0.40547
0.40547
0.40547
0.40547
0.40547
0.08109
0.08109
0.08109
0.08109
0.08109
0.08109
0.08109
0.08109
0.08109
4.50000
1.6590
1.6590
1.6590
1.6590
1.6590
1.6590
1.6590
0.3317
0.3317
0.3317
0.3317
0.3317
0.3317
Specification
(A)
1.22E-03
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.38E-04
1.68E-04
1.68E-04
1.68E-04
1.68E-04
1.68E-04
0.00320
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00141
0.00211
0.00211
0.00211
0.00211
0.00211
0.0190
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0117
0.0133
0.0133
Specification
(deg)
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
PQ Option
Verification Table
11
Table 11-1. PQ Option Verification Table (cont.)
Verification Tests for
AC Current
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
20.5 A
IECA
4.8 A
50Hz
Harmonic
53
58
63
rms
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Fundamental
Phase
20.00%
20.00%
20.00%
0
0
0
100.00%
47.00%
100.00%
18.70%
49.60%
13.00%
33.50%
10.00%
17.40%
8.00%
14.30%
6.70%
9.10%
5.70%
6.50%
5.00%
5.80%
4.40%
5.10%
4.00%
4.70%
3.60%
4.30%
3.30%
3.90%
3.10%
3.60%
2.90%
3.40%
2.70%
3.20%
2.50%
3.00%
2.40%
2.80%
2.20%
2.60%
2.10%
2.50%
2.00%
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
0
0
180
180
Amplitude
(A)
0.3317
0.3317
0.3317
4.80000
2.89500
1.35900
2.89500
0.54123
1.43500
0.37760
0.96918
0.28950
0.50347
0.23160
0.41536
0.19300
0.26432
0.16543
0.18880
0.14475
0.16659
0.12867
0.14905
0.11580
0.13486
0.10527
0.12313
0.09650
0.11328
0.08908
0.10489
0.08271
0.09766
0.07720
0.09136
0.07237
0.08582
0.06812
0.08092
0.06433
0.07654
0.06095
0.07262
0.05790
Specification
(A)
0.0133
0.0133
0.0133
0.0196
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
0.0129
Specification
(deg)
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
11-33
5522A
Operators Manual
Table 11-1. PQ Option Verification Table (cont.)
Verification Tests for
AC Current
11-34
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
20.5 A
IECD
5.8 A
50Hz
Range
Wave
RMS Output
Frequency
20.5 A
NRC7030
9.5 A
60Hz
Harmonic
rms
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
rms
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Fundamental
Phase
100.00%
46.90%
26.20%
13.80%
6.90%
4.80%
4.10%
3.50%
3.10%
2.80%
2.50%
2.30%
2.10%
2.00%
1.80%
1.70%
1.60%
1.50%
1.40%
1.40%
180
0
180
0
180
0
180
0
180
0
180
0
180
0
180
0
180
0
180
100.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
-115.5
1.1
-179.6
13.3
9.3
73.5
152.1
-19.9
-167.8
85.9
-37.3
16.1
-28.1
94
-173.4
129.5
-113.9
37.6
-52.3
1.5
14.3
150.2
7.1
161.3
Amplitude
(A)
5.80000
5.04200
2.36600
1.32200
0.69600
0.34800
0.24360
0.20612
0.17864
0.15763
0.14103
0.12760
0.11651
0.10719
0.09924
0.09250
0.08644
0.08120
0.07656
0.07242
0.06871
9.50000
8.53100
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
0.85313
Specification
(A)
0.0216
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0150
0.0290
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
0.0185
Specification
(deg)
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Appendix A
Glossary
adc (analog-to-digital converter)
A device or circuit that converts an analog signal to digital signals.
absolute uncertainty
Uncertainty specifications that include the error contributions made by all equipment and
standards used to calibrate the instrument. Absolute uncertainty is the numbers to
compare with the UUT for determining test uncertainty ratio.
accuracy
The degree to which the measured value of a quantity agrees with the true (correct) value
of that quantity. For example, an instrument specified to +1% uncertainty is 99%
accurate.
apparent power
The power value obtained by simply multiplying the ac current by the ac voltage on a
circuit without consideration of any phase relationship between the two waveforms. (See
“true power” for comparison.)
assert
To cause a digital signal to go into a logic true state.
af (audio frequency)
The frequency range of human hearing; normally 15 - 20,000 Hz.
artifact standard
An object that produces or embodies a physical quantity to be standardized, for example
a Fluke 732A dc Voltage Reference Standard.
base units
Units in the SI system that are dimensionally independent. All other units are derived
from base units. The only base unit in electricity is the ampere.
A-1
5522A
Operators Manual
buffer
1. An area of digital memory for temporary storage of data.
2. An amplifier stage before the final amplifier.
burden voltage
The maximum sustainable voltage across the terminals of a load.
compliance voltage
The maximum voltage a constant-current source can supply.
control chart
A chart devised to monitor one or more processes to detect the excessive deviation from a
desired value of a component or process.
crest factor
The ratio of the peak voltage to the rms voltage of a waveform (with the dc component
removed).
dac (digital-to-analog converter)
A device or circuit that converts a digital waveform to an analog voltage.
dBm
A reference power level of 1 mW expressed in decibels.
derived units
Units in the SI system that are derived from base units. Volts, ohms, and watts are
derived from amperes and other base and derived units.
displacement power factor
Refers to the displacement component of power factor; the ratio of the active power of
the fundamental wave, in watts, to the apparent power of the fundamental wave, in voltamperes.
distortion
Undesired changes in the waveform of a signal. Harmonic distortion disturbs the original
relationship between a frequency and other frequencies naturally related to it.
Intermodulation distortion (imd) introduces new frequencies by the mixing of two or
more original frequencies. Other forms of distortion are phase distortion and transient
distortion.
errors
The different types of errors described in this glossary are “offset error,” “linearity error,”
“random error,” “scale error,” “systematic errors,” and “transfer error.”
flatness
A measure of the variation of the actual output of an ac voltage source at different
frequency points when set to the same nominal output level. A flat voltage source
exhibits very little error throughout its frequency range.
A-2
Glossary
A
floor
The part of the uncertainty specification of an instrument that is typically a fixed offset
plus noise. Floor can be expressed as units, such as microvolts or counts of the least
significant digit. For the 5522A, the floor specification is combined with fixed range
errors in one term to determine total uncertainty.
full scale
The maximum reading of a range of a meter, analog-to-digital converter, or other
measurement device, or the maximum attainable output on a range of a calibrator.
gain error
Same as scale error. Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter’s response
curve is not exactly 1. A meter with only gain error (no offset or linearity error), will read
0V with 0V applied, but something other than 10V with 10V applied.
ground
The voltage reference point in a circuit. Earth ground is a connection through a ground
rod or other conductor to the earth, usually accessible through the ground conductor in an
ac power receptacle.
ground loops
Undesirable currents induced when there is more than one chassis ground potential in a
system of instruments. Ground loops can be minimized by connecting all instruments in a
system to ground to one point.
guard
See “voltage guard” and “current guard.”
harmonics
A waveform that is an integral multiple of the fundamental frequency. For example, a
waveform that is twice the frequency of a fundamental is called the second harmonic.
IPTS-68
Refers to the International Provisional Temperature Standard (1968), replaced by the
International Temperature Standard (1990). This specifies the definition of the °C
temperature standard.
ITS-90
Refers to the International Temperature Standard (1990), which replaced the International
Provisional Temperature Standard (1968). This specifies the definition of the °C
temperature standard.
International Systems of Units
Same as “SI System of Units,” the accepted system of units. See also “units,” “base
units,” and “derived units.”
legal units
The highest echelon in a system of units, for example the U.S. National Bureau of
Standards volt.
A-3
5522A
Operators Manual
life-cycle cost
The consideration of all elements contributing to the cost of an instrument throughout its
useful life. This includes initial purchase cost, service and maintenance cost, and the cost
of support equipment.
linearity
The relationship between two quantities when a change is the first quantity is directly
proportional to a change in the second quantity.
linearity error
Linearity error occurs when the response curve of a meter is not exactly a straight line.
This type of error is measured by fixing two points on the response curve, drawing a line
through the points, then measuring how far the curve deviates from the straight line at
various points in the response curve.
MAP (Measurement Assurance Program)
A program for measurement process. A MAP provides information to demonstrate that
the total uncertainty of the measurements (data), including both random error and
systematic components of error relative to national or other designated standards is
quantified, and sufficiently small to meet requirements.
MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)
The time interval in operating hours that can be expected between failure of equipment.
MTBF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived through
extrapolation.
MTTF (Mean Time To Fail)
The time interval in operating hours that can be expected until the first failure of
equipment. MTTF can be calculated from direct observation or mathematically derived
through extrapolation.
MTTR (Mean Time to Repair)
The average time in hours required to repair failed equipment.
metrology
The science of, and the field of knowledge concerned with measurement.
minimum use specifications
A compilation of specifications that satisfies the calibration requirements of a
measurement system or device. The minimum use specifications are usually determined
by maintaining a specified test uncertainty ratio between the calibration equipment and
the unit under test.
noise
A signal containing no useful information that is superimposed on a desired or expected
signal.
normal mode noise
An undesired signal that appears between the terminals of a device.
A-4
Glossary
A
offset error
Same as zero error. The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is applied
is its offset or zero error.
parameters
Independent variables in a measurement process such as temperature, humidity, test lead
resistance, etc.
power factor
The ratio of actual power used in a circuit, expressed in watts, to the power which is
apparently being drawn from the source, expressed in volt-amperes.
precision
The precision of a measurement process is the coherence, or the closeness to the one
result, of all measurement results. High precision, for example would result in a tight
pattern of arrow hits on a target, without respect to where on the target the tight pattern
falls.
predictability
A measure of how accurately the output value of a device can be assumed after a known
time following calibration. If a device is highly stable, it is also predictable. If a device is
not highly stable, but its value changes at the same rate every time after calibration, its
output has a higher degree of predictability than a device that exhibits random change.
primary standard
A standard defined and maintained by some authority and used to calibrate all other
secondary standards.
process metrology
Tracking the accuracy drift of calibration and other equipment by applying statistical
analysis to correction factors obtained during calibration.
random error
Any error which varies in an unpredictable manner in absolute value and in sign when
measurements of the same value of a quantity are made under effectively identical
conditions.
range
The stated upper end of a measurement device’s span. Usually, however, a measurement
device can measure quantities for a specified percentage overrange. (The absolute span
including overrange capability is called “scale.”) In the 5522A, however, range and scale
are identical.
reference standard
The highest-echelon standard in a laboratory; the standard that is used to maintain
working standards that are used in routine calibration and comparison procedures.
relative uncertainty
5522A uncertainty specifications that exclude the effects of external dividers and
standards, for use when range constants are adjusted. Relative uncertainty includes only
the stability, temperature coefficient, noise, and linearity specifications of the 5522A
itself.
reliability
A measure of the “uptime” of an instrument.
A-5
5522A
Operators Manual
repeatability
The degree of agreement among independent measurements of a quantity under the same
conditions.
resistance
A property of a conductor that determines the amount of current that will flow when a
given amount of voltage exists across the conductor. Resistance is measured in ohms.
One ohm is the resistance through which one volt of potential will cause one ampere of
current to flow.
resolution
The smallest change in quantity that can be detected by a measurement system or device.
For a given parameter, resolution is the smallest increment that can be measured,
generated, or displayed.
rf (radio frequency)
The frequency range of radio waves; from 150 kHz up to the infrared range.
rms (root-mean-square)
The value assigned to an ac voltage or current that results in the same power dissipation
in a resistance as a dc current or voltage of the same value.
rms sensor
A device that converts ac voltage to dc voltage with great accuracy. RMS sensors operate
by measuring the heat generated by a voltage through a known resistance (i.e., power);
therefore, they sense true rms voltage.
resistance temperature detector (RTD)
A resistance device that provides a proportional resistance output for a temperature of the
device. Most RTDs are characterized by their resistance at 0 °C, called the ice point. The
most common ice point is 100 Ω at 0 °C. The curve of resistance vs. temperature can be
one of several: pt385 (0.00385 ohms/ohm/°C) and pt3926 (0.003926 ohms/ohm/°C) are
examples.
scale
The absolute span of the reading range of a measurement device including overrange
capability.
scale error
Same as gain error. Scale or gain error results when the slope of the meter’s response
curve is not exactly 1. A meter with only scale error (no offset or linearity error), will
read 0V with 0V applied, but something other than 10V with 10V applied.
secondary standard
A standard maintained by comparison against a primary standard.
sensitivity
The degree of response of a measuring device to the change in input quantity, or a figure
of merit that expresses the ability of a measurement system or device to respond to an
input quantity.
shield
A grounded covering device designed to protect a circuit or cable from electromagnetic
interference.
SI System of Units
The accepted International System of Units. See also “units,” “base units,” and “derived
units.”
A-6
Glossary
A
specifications
A precise statement of the set of requirements satisfied by a measurement system or
device.
stability
A measure of the freedom from drift in value over time and over changes in other
variables such as temperature. Note that stability is not the same as uncertainty.
standard
A device that is used as an exact value for reference and comparison.
standard cell
A primary cell that serves as a standard of voltage. The term “standard cell” often refers
to a “Weston normal cell,” which is a wet cell with a mercury anode, a cadmium mercury
amalgam cathode, and a cadmium sulfate solution as the electrolyte.
systematic errors
Errors in repeated measurement results that remain constant or vary in a predictable way.
temperature coefficient
A factor per °C deviation from a nominal value or range that the uncertainty of an
instrument increases. This specification is necessary to account for the thermal
coefficients in a calibrator’s analog circuitry.
test uncertainty ratio
The numerical ratio of the uncertainty of the measurement system or device being
calibrated to the uncertainty of the measurement system or device used as the calibrator.
(Also called “test accuracy ratio.”)
thermal emf
The voltage generated when two dissimilar metals joined together are heated.
thermocouple
Two dissimilar metals that, when welded together, develop a small voltage dependent on
the relative temperature between the hotter and colder junction.
traceability
The ability to relate individual measurement results to national standards or nationally
accepted measurement systems through an unbroken chain of comparisons, i.e., a
calibration “audit trail.”
Measurements, measurement systems or devices have traceability to the designated
standards if and only if scientifically rigorous evidence is produced in a continuing basis
to show that the measurement process is producing measurement results for which the
total measurement uncertainty relative to national or other designated standards is
qualified.
transfer error
The sum of all new errors induced during the process of comparing one quantity against
another.
transfer standard
Any working standard used to compare a measurement process, system, or device at one
location or level with another measurement process, system, or device at another location
or level.
transport standard
A transfer standard that is rugged enough to allow shipment by common carrier to
another location.
A-7
5522A
Operators Manual
true power
The actual power (real power) used to produce heat or work. Compare to ‘apparent
power.”
true value
Also called legal value, the accepted, consensus, i.e., the correct value of the quantity
being measured.
uncertainty
The maximum difference between the accepted, consensus, or true value and the
measured value of a quantity. Uncertainty is normally expressed in units of ppm (parts
per million) or as a percentage.
units
Symbols or names that define the measured quantities. Examples of units are: V, mV, A,
kW, and dBm. See also “SI System of Units.”
UUT (Unit Under Test)
An abbreviated name for an instrument that is being tested or calibrated.
var
Symbol for voltampere reactive, the unit of reactive power, as opposed to real power in
watts.
verification
Checking the functional performance and uncertainty of an instrument or standard
without making adjustments to it or changing its calibration constants.
volt
The unit of emf (electromotive force) or electrical potential in the SI system of units. One
volt is the difference of electrical potential between two points on a conductor carrying
one ampere of current, when the power being dissipated between these two points is
equal to one watt.
voltage guard
A floating shield around voltage measurement circuitry inside an instrument. The voltage
guard provides a low-impedance path to ground for common-mode noise and ground
currents, thereby eliminating errors introduced by such interference.
watt
The unit of power in the SI system of units. One watt is the power required to do work at
the rate of one joule/second. In terms of volts and ohms, one watt is the power dissipated
by one ampere flowing through a one-ohm load.
working standard
A standard that is used in routine calibration and comparison procedures in the
laboratory, and is maintained by comparison to reference standards.
zero error
Same as offset error. The reading shown on a meter when an input value of zero is
applied is its zero or offset error.
A-8
Appendix B
ASCII and IEEE-488 Bus Codes
B-1
5522A
Operators Manual
B-2
ASCII and IEEE-488 Bus Codes
ASCII
CHAR.
DECIMAL
OCTAL
HEX
NUL
SQH
STX
ETX
0
1
2
3
000
001
002
003
00
01
02
03
0000
0000
0000
0000
0 0 00
0 0 01
0 0 10
0 0 11
EOT
ENQ
ACH
BELL
4
5
6
7
004
005
006
007
04
05
06
07
0000
0000
0000
0000
0 1 00
0 1 01
0 1 10
0 1 11
SDC
PPC
BS
HT
LF
VT
8
9
10
11
010
011
012
013
08
09
0A
0B
0000
0000
0000
0000
1 0 00
1 0 01
1 0 10
1 0 11
GET
TCT
FF
CR
SO
SI
12
13
14
15
014
015
016
017
0C
0D
0E
0F
0000
0000
0000
0000
1 1 00
1 1 01
1 1 10
1 1 11
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
16
17
18
19
020
021
022
023
10
11
12
13
0001
0001
0001
0001
0 0 00
0 0 01
0 0 10
0 0 11
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
20
21
22
23
024
025
026
027
14
15
16
17
0001
0001
0001
0001
0 1 00
0 1 01
0 1 10
0 1 11
DCL
PPU
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
24
25
26
27
030
031
032
033
18
19
1A
1B
0001
0001
0001
0001
1 0 00
1 0 01
1 0 10
1 0 11
SPE
SPD
FS
GS
RS
US
28
29
30
31
034
035
036
037
1C
1D
1E
1F
0001
0001
0001
0001
1 1 00
1 1 01
1 1 10
1 1 11
SPACE
!
32
33
34
35
040
041
042
043
20
21
22
23
001 0
001 0
001 0
001 0
0 0 00
0 0 01
0 0 10
0 0 11
0
1
2
3
MLA
MLA
MLA
MLA
36
37
38
39
044
045
046
047
24
25
26
27
001 0
001 0
001 0
001 0
0 1 00
0 1 01
0 1 10
0 1 11
4
5
6
7
MLA
MLA
MLA
MLA
40
41
42
43
050
051
052
053
28
29
2A
2B
001 0
001 0
001 0
001 0
1 0 00
1 0 01
1 0 10
1 0 11
8
9
10
11
MLA
MLA
MLA
MLA
/
44
45
46
47
054
055
056
057
2C
2D
2E
2F
001 0
001 0
001 0
001 0
1 1 00
1 1 01
1 1 10
1 1 11
12
13
14
15
MLA
MLA
MLA
MLA
0
1
2
3
48
49
50
51
060
061
062
063
30
31
32
33
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 00
0 0 01
0 0 10
0 0 11
16
17
18
19
MLA
MLA
MLA
MLA
4
5
6
7
52
53
54
55
064
065
066
067
34
35
36
37
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 1 00
0 1 01
0 1 10
0 1 11
20
21
22
23
MLA
MLA
MLA
MLA
8
9
:
;
56
57
58
59
070
071
072
073
38
39
3A
3B
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 11
1 0 00
1 0 01
1 0 10
1 0 11
24
25
26
27
<
=
>
?
60
61
62
63
074
075
076
077
3C
3D
3E
3F
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 11
0 0 11
1 1 00
1 1 01
1 1 10
1 1 11
28
29
30
$
%
&
'
(
)
*+
,_
.
DEV. MESSAGE
NO. ATN=TRUE
ASCII
CHAR.
DECIMAL
OCTAL
HEX
@
A
B
C
64
65
66
67
100
101
102
103
40
41
42
43
0 100
0 100
0 100
0 100
00 00
00 01
00 10
00 11
0
1
2
3
MTA
MTA
MTA
MTA
D
E
F
G
68
69
70
71
104
105
106
107
44
45
46
47
0 100
0 100
0 100
0 100
01 00
01 01
01 10
01 11
4
5
6
7
MTA
MTA
MTA
MTA
H
I
J
K
72
73
74
75
110
111
112
113
48
49
4A
4B
0 100
0 100
0 100
0 100
10 00
10 01
10 10
10 11
8
9
10
11
MTA
MTA
MTA
MTA
L
M
N
O
76
77
78
79
114
115
116
117
4C
4D
4E
4F
0 100
0 100
0 100
0 100
11 00
11 01
11 10
11 11
12
13
14
15
MTA
MTA
MTA
MTA
P
Q
R
S
80
81
82
83
120
121
122
123
50
51
52
53
0 101
0 101
0 101
0 101
00 00
00 01
00 10
00 11
16
17
18
19
MTA
MTA
MTA
MTA
T
U
V
W
84
85
86
87
124
125
126
127
54
55
56
57
0 101
0 101
0 101
0 101
01 00
01 01
01 10
01 11
20
21
22
23
MTA
MTA
MTA
MTA
X
Y
Z
[
88
89
90
91
130
131
132
133
58
59
5A
5B
0 101
0 101
0 101
0 101
10 00
10 01
10 10
10 11
24
25
26
27
MTA
MTA
MTA
MTA
\
]
^
_
92
93
94
95
134
135
136
137
5C
5D
5E
5F
0 101
0 101
0 101
0 101
11 00
11 01
11 10
11 11
28
29
30
MTA
MTA
MTA
UNT
,
"#
BINARY
7654 3210
a
b
c
96
97
98
99
140
141
142
143
60
61
62
63
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
00 00
00 01
00 10
00 11
0
1
2
3
MSA
MSA
MSA
MSA
d
e
f
g
100
101
102
103
144
145
146
147
64
65
66
67
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
01 00
01 01
01 10
01 11
4
5
6
7
MSA
MSA
MSA
MSA
h
i
j
k
104
105
106
107
150
151
152
153
68
69
6A
6B
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
10 00
10 01
10 10
10 11
8
9
10
11
MSA
MSA
MSA
MSA
l
m
n
o
108
109
110
111
154
155
156
157
6C
6D
6E
6F
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
11 00
11 01
11 10
11 11
12
13
14
15
MSA
MSA
MSA
MSA
p
q
r
s
112
113
114
115
160
161
162
163
70
71
72
73
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
00 00
00 01
00 10
00 11
16
17
18
19
MSA
MSA
MSA
MSA
t
u
v
w
116
117
118
119
164
165
166
167
74
75
76
77
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
01 00
01 01
01 10
01 11
20
21
22
23
MSA
MSA
MSA
MSA
MLA
MLA
MLA
MLA
x
y
z
{
120
121
122
123
170
171
172
173
78
79
7A
7B
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
10 00
10 01
10 10
10 11
24
25
26
27
MSA
MSA
MSA
MSA
MLA
MLA
MLA
UNL
|
}
124
125
126
127
174
175
176
177
7C
7D
7E
7F
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
0 11 1
11 00
11 01
11 10
11 11
28
29
30
MSA
MSA
MSA
UNS
GTL
LLO
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
E
D
C
O
M
M
A
N
D
S
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
A
L
C
O
M
M
A
N
D
S
L
I
S
T
E
N
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
E
S
~
BINARY
7654 3210
B
DEV. MESSAGE
NO. ATN=TRUE
T
A
L
K
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
E
S
S
E
C
O
N
D
A
R
Y
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
E
S
fb-01.eps
B-3
5522A
Operators Manual
B-4
Appendix C
RS-232/IEEE-488 Cables and Connectors
IEEE-488 Connector
The IEEE-488 connector on the rear panel mates with an IEEE-488 standard cable. The
pin assignments of the rear-panel IEEE-488 connector are shown in Figure C-1.
IEEE-488 connection cables are available from Fluke as shown in Table C-1. See
Chapter 9, “Accessories,” for ordering information.
Table C-1. IEEE-488 Connection Cables
IEEE-488 Connection Cable
Fluke Part Number
0.5 m (1.64 feet)
PM2295/05
1 m (3.28 feet)
PM2295/10
2 m (6.56 feet)
PM2295/20
SHIELD SRQ NDAC DAV
ATN
IFC
NFRD
DIO4 DIO2
E0I
DIO3 DIO1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
GND
11
GND
9
LOGIC GND
GND
10
GND
7
GND
8
REN
DIO7 DIO5
GND DIO8 DIO6
6
Figure C-1. IEEE-488 Connector Pinout (connection side)
fe-01.eps
Serial Connectors
The two 9-pin serial connectors on the rear panel of the 5522A Calibrator are used to
interface with a computer, or controller, and an instrument serial port. The pin
assignments of the rear-panel serial connectors are in conformance to EIA/TIA-574
standard and are shown in Figures C-2 (Host) and C-3 (UUT).
C-1
5522A
Operators Manual
Serial connection cables are available from Fluke are shown in Table C-2. See Chapter 8,
“Accessories,” for ordering information.
Table C-2. Serial Port Connection Cables
Connection Cable
Fluke Part Number
5522A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST
PC COM port (DB-9)
PM8914/001
5522A SERIAL 1 FROM HOST
PC COM port (DB-25)
RS40
5522A SERIAL 2 TO UUT
UUT serial port (DB-9)
943738
5522A SERIAL 2 TO UUT
UUT serial port (DB-25)
n/a
DTE READY (DTR)
GROUND
TRANSMIT DATA (Tx)
RECEIVED DATA (Rx)
1
5
6
9
REQUEST TO SEND (RTS)
CLEAR TO SEND (CTS)
Figure C-2. Serial 1 From Host Port Connector Pinout
TRANSMIT DATA(Tx)
RECEIVED DATA (Rx)
RECEIVED LINE SIGNAL
DETECTOR (RLSD)
GROUND
5
1
9
CLEAR TO SEND (CTS)
6
DCE READY (DSR)
REQUEST TO SEND (RTS)
Figure C-3. SERIAL 2 TO UUT Port Connector Pinout (connection side)
C-2
fe-02.eps
fe-03.eps
RS-232/IEEE-488 Cables and Connectors
Serial Connectors
5522A
C
PC
NULL MODEM CABLE
SERIAL 1
FROM HOST
COM
1
1
1
1
DCD
Rx
2
2
2
2
Rx
Tx
3
3
3
3
Tx
DTR
4
4
4
4
DTR
GND
5
5
5
5
GND
6
6
6
DSR
6
RTS
7
7
7
7
RTS
CTS
8
8
8
8
CTS
9
9
9
9
RI
UUT
SERIAL 2
TO UUT
MODEM CABLE
RS-232
RLSD
1
1
1
1
Rx
2
2
2
2
Rx
Tx
3
3
3
3
Tx
4
4
4
4
DTR
GND
5
5
5
5
GND
DSR
6
6
6
6
DSR
RTS
7
7
7
7
RTS
CTS
8
8
8
8
CTS
9
9
9
9
Figure C-4. Serial Port Connections (DB-9/DB-9)
gjh069.eps
C-3
5522A
Operators Manual
PC
5522A
NULL MODEM CABLE
SERIAL 1
FROM HOST
Rx
Tx
DTR
GND
RTS
CTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
COM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tx
Rx
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
DCD
DTR
RI
UUT
MODEM CABLE
SERIAL 2
TO UUT
RLSD
Rx
Tx
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RS-232
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Figure C-5. Serial Port Connections (DB-9/DB-25)
C-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tx
Rx
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
DCD
DTR
RI
gjh071.eps
Appendix D
Error Messages
Error Messages
The following is a list of the Calibrator error messages. The error message format is
shown in Table D-1.
Table D-1. Error Messages Format
Error Number
(Message Class :
Description)
QYE Query Error, caused by a full F Error is displayed on the
input buffer, unterminated action or front panel as it occurs
interrupted action
0 to 65535
DDE Device-Specific Error,
caused by the 5522A due to some
condition, for example, overrange
R Error is queued to the
remote interface as it occurs
EXE Execution Error, caused by
an element outside of, or
inconsistent with, the 5522A
capabilities
S Error causes instrument to
go to Standby
Text Characters
Up to 36 text
characters
CME Command Error, caused by D Error causes instrument
returns to the power up state
incorrect command syntax,
unrecognized header, or parameter
of the wrong type
(none) Error is returned to the
initiator only (i.e., local initiator
or remote initiator)
0
1
100
101
102
103
104
105
(QYE: )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
No Error
Error queue overflow
Inguard not responding (send)
Inguard not responding (recv)
Lost sync with inguard
Invalid guard xing command
Hardware relay trip occurred
Inguard got impatient
D-1
5522A
Operators Manual
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
200
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
398
399
400
401
402
403
405
406
407
408
409
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
D-2
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:DR D)
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR )
(DDE: )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE: R )
(DDE: R )
(QYE:F )
QYE:F )
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
A/D fell asleep
Inguard watchdog timeout
Inguard is obsolete
Inguard parity error
Inguard overrun error
Inguard framing error
Inguard fault error
Inguard fault input error
Inguard fault detect error
Inguard read/write error
Received unexpected data (IG)
Can’t download waveform
Invalid procedure number
No such step in procedure
Can't change that while busy
Can't begin/resume cal there
Wrong unit for reference
Entered value out of bounds
Not waiting for a reference
Continue command ignored
Cal constant outside limits
Cal try to null failed
Sequence failed during cal
A/D measurement failed
Invalid cal step parameter
Cal switch must be ENABLED
Divide by zero encountered
Must be in OPER at this step
Open thermocouple for RJ cal
Bad reference Z or entry
Cal takes DAC over top limit
Zero cal needed every 7 days
Ohms zero needed every 12 hours
Unusual cal fault %d
Fault during %s
Encoder not responding VERS
Encoder not responding COMM
Encoder not responding STAT
Encoder self-test failed
Message over display R side
Unmappable character #%d
Encoder did not reset
Encoder got invalid command
Encoder unexpectedly reset
Internal state error
Invalid keyword or choice
Harmonic must be 1 - 50
Frequency must be >= 0
AC magnitude must be > 0
Impedance must be >= 0
Function not available
Value not available
Error Messages
Error Messages
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: D)
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE:FR )
D
Cannot enter watts by itself
Output exceeds user limits
Duty cycle must be 1.0-99.0
Power factor must be 0.0-1.0
Can't select that field now
Edit digit out of range
Can't switch edit field now
Not editing output now
dBm only for single sine ACV
Freq too high for non-sine
Value outside locked range
Must specify an output unit
Can't do two freqs at once
Can't source 3 values at once
Temp must be degrees C or F
Can't do that now
Limit too small or large
No changes except RESET now
Offset out of range
Cannot edit to or from 0 Hz
Bad state image - not loaded
TC offset limited to +/-500 C
Can't go to STBY in Meas TC
Can't set an offset now
Can't lock this range
Can't set phase or PF now
Can't set wave now
Can't set harmonic now
Can't change duty cycle now
Can't change compensation now
Current OUTPUT moved to 5725A
TC ref must be valid TC temp
Can't turn EARTH on now
STA couldn't update OTD
Can't enter W with non-sine
Can't edit now
Can't set trigger to that now
Can't set output imp. now
Compensation is now OFF
Period must be >= 0
A report is already printing
ScopeCal option not installed
Not a ScopeCal function
Can't set marker shape now
Can't set video parameter now
Marker location out of range
Pulse width must be 1 - 255
Can't set range directly now
Not a range for this function
Can't set TD pulse now
ZERO_MEAS only for C or PRES meas
That requires a -SC option
D-3
5522A
Operators Manual
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
600
601
602
700
701
702
703
800
801
802
803
900
1000
1200
1201
1202
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
D-4
(DDE:FR )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: FR)
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE: )
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE: R )
(DDE: R )
DDE: R )
(DDE: R )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(DDE:FR )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(EXE: R )
(QYE: R )
(QYE: R )
(QYE: R )
(QYE: R )
(DDE: R )
(DDE: R )
(DDE: R )
(EXE: R )
(CME: R )
(EXE: R )
(CME: R )
That requires a -SC600 option
Time limit must be 1s-60s
Can't set ref. phase now
ZERO_MEAS reading not valid
Can't set dampen now
Can't turn EXGRD on now
Slave cannot send SYNCOUT
That takes a -SC1100 option
Invalid harmonic number
Invalid harmonic amplitude
Duplicate harmonic number
No trig unless OPER & settled
Max 15 harmonics in CHwave
Square or sine flicker only
-PQ option not installed
Must be in PQ mode for that
Can't set that now
Parameter setting too big
Outguard watchdog timeout
Power-up RAM test failed
Power-up GPIB test failed
Saving to NV memory failed
NV memory invalid
NV invalid so default loaded
NV obsolete so default loaded
Serial parity error %s
Serial framing error %s
Serial overrun error %s
Serial characters dropped %s
Report timeout - aborted
Sequence failed during diag
Sequence name too long
Sequence RAM table full
Sequence name table full
Bad syntax
Unknown command
Bad parameter count
Bad keyword
Bad parameter type
Bad parameter unit
Bad parameter value
488.2 I/O deadlock
488.2 interrupted query
488.2 unterminated command
488.2 query after indefinite response
Invalid from GPIB interface
Invalid from serial interface
Service only
Parameter too long
Invalid device trigger
Device trigger recursion
Serial buffer full
Error Messages
Error Messages
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1600
1601
1602
65535
(EXE: R )
(EXE: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(CME: R )
(DDE: R )
(CME:FR )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FRS )
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR D)
(DDE:FR )
D
Bad number
Service command failed
Bad binary number
Bad binary block
Bad character
Bad decimal number
Exponent magnitude too large
Bad hexadecimal block
Bad hexadecimal number
Bad octal number
Too many characters
Bad string
OPER not allowed while error pending
Can't change UUT settings now
Compliance voltage exceeded
Shunt amp over or underload
Current Amp Thermal Limit Exceeded
Output current lim exceeded
Input V or A limit exceeded
VDAC counts out of range
IDAC counts out of range
AC scale dac counts out of range
DC scale dac counts out of range
Frequency dac counts out of range
IDAC counts (DC OFFSET) out of range
ZDAC counts out of range
Can't read External Clock register
External Clock too Fast
External Clock too Slow
Can't load waveform for scope mode
Peak or avg ampl too high
OPM transition error
TC measurement fault
Z measurement fault
Unknown error %d
D-5
5522A
Operators Manual
D-6
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising